DVP-PLC Application Manual ming Table of Contents Chapter 1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram Preface-The Background and Functions of PLC... 1-1 1.1 The Working Principles of Ladder Diagram... 1-1 1.2 The Difference between Traditional Ladder Diagram and PLC Ladder Diagram... 1-2 1.3 Edition Explanation of Ladder Diagram... 1-4 1.4 The Edition of PLC Ladder Diagram... 1-8 1.5 The Conversion of PLC Command and Each Diagram Structure... 1-11 1.6 The Simplification of Ladder Diagram... 1-14 1.7 The for Designing Basic... 1-16 Chapter 2 DVP-PLC Function 2.1 Summary of DVP-PLC Device Number... 2-1 2.2 Value, constant [K] / [H]... 2-7 2.3 The Numbering and Function of External Input/Output Contact [X] / [Y]... 2-9 2.4 The Numbering and Function of Auxiliary Relay [M]... 2-11 2.5 The Numbering and Function of Step Relay [S]... 2-12 2.6 The Numbering and Function of Timer [T]... 2-13 2.7 The Numbering and Function of Counter [C]... 2-16 2.8 Register Number and Function [D], [E], [F]... 2-28 2.8.1 Data register [D]... 2-28 2.8.2 Index Register [E], [F]... 2-29 2.8.3 File Register Function and Characteristics... 2-30 2.9 Nest Level Pointer[N], Pointer[P], Interrupt Pointer [I]... 2-30 2.10 Special Auxiliary Relay and Special Register... 2-33 2.11 Special Auxiliary Relay and Special Register Functions... 2-53 2.12 Fault Code Information... 2-84 Chapter 3 Basic Commands 3.1 Summary of Basic Command and Step Ladder Command... 3-1 3.2 Basic Commands Explanations... 3-3
Chapter 4 Step Ladder Commands 4.1 Step Ladder Command [STL], [RET]... 4-1 4.2 Sequential Function Chart (SFC)... 4-1 4.3 Step Ladder Command Explanation... 4-2 4.4 Reminder of Design on the Step Ladder... 4-7 4.5 Categories of Procedures... 4-8 4.6 IST command... 4-18 Chapter 5 Application Commands 5.1 Summary of Parameters... 5-1 5.2 Application Command Structure... 5-7 5.3 Handling of Numeric Values... 5-12 5.4 Index register E, F... 5-15 5.5 Index for Commands... 5-17 Chapter 6 Application Commands API 00-49...6-1 Chapter 7 Application Commands API 50-99...7-1 Chapter 8 Application Commands API 100-149...8-1 Chapter 9 Application Commands API 150-199...9-1 Chapter 10 Application Commands API 215-246...10-1
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram Preface----The Background and Functions of PLC PLC (mable Logic Controller) is one of electronic equipments. It was called Sequence Controller before. It was named mable Logic Controller (PLC) by NEMA (National Electrical Manufacture Association) in 1978 and defined as electronic equipment. The operation of PLC is in the following: Step 1. Read the external input signal, such as the status of keypad, sensor, switch and pulse. Step 2. Using microprocessor to execute the calculations of logic, sequence, timer, counter and formula according to the status and the value of the input signal read in the step 1 and pre-write programs saved inner to get the corresponding output signal, such as open or close of relay, operation of controlled machine or procedure to control automatic machine or procedure of manufacture. PLC also can be used to maintain and adjust of production program by editing or modifying the peripheral equipments (personal computer/handheld programming panel). The common program language of PLC is ladder diagram. There are stronger functions in PLC with the development and application requirements of electronic technology, such as position control, network and etc. Output/Input signals are DI (Digital Input), AI (Analog Input), PI (Pulse Input), DO (Digital Output), AO (Analog Output) and PO (Pulse Output). Thus PLC plays an important role in the feature industry. 1.1 The Working Principles of Ladder Diagram Ladder diagram is an automatic control diagram language that developed during World War II. At first, it just has basic components, such as A contact (normally open), B contact (normally close), output coil, timer counter and etc. (The power panel is made up of these basic components) It has more functions, differential contact, latched coil and the application commands, add, minus, multiply and divide calculation, that traditional power panel can t make since PLC is developed. The working principles of the traditional Ladder Diagram and the PLC Ladder Diagram are similar to each other; the only difference is that the symbols for the traditional ladder diagram are expressed in the format that are close to its original substance, while those for the PLC ladder diagram employ the symbols that are more explicit when being used in computers or data sheets. In the Ladder Diagram Logics, it could be divided into the Combination Logics and the Sequential Logics, and is described as follows: 1. Combination Logics: The following example is the combination logics that show in traditional diagram and PLC ladder diagram separately. Traditional Ladder Diagram PLC Ladder Diagram X1 Y0 Y1 X2 X3 X4 Y2 Y0 X1 Y1 X2 X4 Y2 X3 DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-1
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram 1: Circuit 1 utilizes one (NO: Normally Open) switch, which is normally known as the A switch or contact, and its characteristic is that the contact is in the OFF condition at regular time (not pressed); the output point Y0 is thus in OFF condition. However, once the switch motion (the button is pressed) is conducted, the contact will be ON, and the output point Y0 will be in ON condition. 2: Similarly, Circuit 2 utilizes the X1 (NC: Normally Close) switch, which is normally known as the B switch or contact, and its characteristic is that the contact is in the ON condition at regular time; the output point Y0 is thus in ON condition. While the switch motion is conducted (which is in the OFF condition), the output point Y0 is in OFF condition. 3: This is an example of combination logics output, which has more than one input equipment. The output point Y2 will be in ON condition when X2 is in OFF condition or X3 and X4 are in ON condition. 2. Sequential logics: The sequential logics are a type of circuit that possesses the Draw-Back structure, which is to draw back the circuit s output result and has it serve as the input condition. Thus, under the same input condition, different output results will be generated in accordance with previous conditions and motions with different orders. The following example is the sequential logics that show in traditional diagram and PLC ladder diagram separately. Traditional Ladder Diagram X5 X6 Y3 Y3 PLC Ladder Diagram X5 X6 Y3 Y3 When the above circuit is just supplied with power, although the X6 switch is ON, the X5 switch is still OFF, thus, the output relay Y3 will be in OFF condition; output of the relay will only be ON after X5 is ON. Once the output relay Y3 is in ON condition, there will be a feedback signal containing the ON condition from Y3 to connect in parallel with the A contact of X5; this circuit is thus also known as the self-latched circuit. The circuit motion is showed in the following chart: Device status Step X5 X6 Y3 1 N N OFF 2 Y N ON 3 N N ON 4 N Y OFF 5 N N OFF N: is in OFF condition Y: is in ON condition From above chart, you can find that the same input may get different result. For example, in the step 1 and 3, the status of X5 and X6 are in OFF condition but Y3 is in OFF condition in step 1 and in ON condition in step3. That is due to the self-latched circuit feedback input. In this example, it explains with contact A, contact B and output coil. The usage of other equipments is the same with this. Please refer to the chapter 3 for the detail. 1.2 The Difference between Traditional Ladder Diagram and PLC Ladder Diagram 1-2 DVP-PLC Application Manual
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram Although the working principles are in accordance with each other for the traditional ladder diagram and the PLC ladder diagram, PLC is indeed utilizing the microcomputer chip (MCU) to simulate the motion of the traditional ladder diagram, which is to use the scan method to look over one by one the conditions of all input devices and output coils, and afterwards, with the conditions in consideration, to calculate and generate the same output result as that of the traditional ladder diagram based on the logics of the combination status of the ladder diagram. However, since that there is only one MCU, the only way to examine the circuits is to look it over one after another within the ladder diagram program, then calculate the output result in compliance with the program and the input/output status, and finally, output the results to the external interface; thereafter, start over with the readout of the input status, the calculation, output, and repeatedly go over the above-mentioned motions again; the time needed to complete the whole set of cyclic motion is called one Scan Time. The scan time will become longer in accordance with the increment of the program. With this scan time, it will incur repeated input detections, and thus, result in delay in the output responses; and the longer the delay time, the greater the error towards the control, and what s worse, is that the condition might be unqualified for the control requests. By then, PLC (with faster Scan Time) would be chosen to do the job; the scan speed is thus an essential specification to PLC. Thanks to the advanced technique of ASIC (IC with specific functions) within the microcomputer, PLC of the present has made greater progress in the scan speed, and what follows is the scanning chart of the PLC Ladder Diagram. Read input state from outside X1 Calculate the result by ladder diagram algorithm (it doesn t sent to the outer output point but the inner equipment will output immediately.) Start Y0 Y0 M100 X3 : : X10 Y1 Execute in cycles X100 M505 Y126 End Send the result to the output point In addition to the difference of scan time, PLC ladder diagram and traditional ladder diagram also has difference in reverse current. In the following chart of traditional ladder diagram, if, X1, X4 and X6 are in ON condition and the others are in OFF condition, output point Y0 will be in ON condition as shown as dotted line in the following diagram. But in the PLC ladder diagram will have error in the peripheral equipment WPLSoft due to scan method of MCU is from up to down and from left to right. DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-3
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram Reverse current of traditional ladder diagram X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 a b X6 Y0 Reverse current of PLC ladder diagram X1 X2 Y0 Y0 X3 X4 X5 a b X6 There is a fault in the 3rd row of ladder diagram. 1.3 Edition Explanation of Ladder Diagram Ladder diagram is a diagram language that applied on the automatic control and it is also a diagram that made up of the symbols of electric control circuit. PLC procedures are finished after ladder diagram editor edits the ladder diagram. It is easy to understand the control flow that indicated with diagram and also accept by technical staff of electric control circuit. Many basic symbols and motions of ladder diagram are the same as mechanical and electrical equipments of traditional automatic power panel, such as button, switch, relay, timer, counter and etc. The kinds and amounts of PLC internal equipment will be different with brands. Although internal equipment has the name of traditional electric control circuit, such as relay, coil and contact. It doesn t have the real components in it. In PLC, it just has a basic unit of internal memory. If this bit is 1, it means the coil is ON and if this bit is 0, it means the coil is OFF. You should read the corresponding value of that bit when using contact (Normally Open, NO or contact a). Otherwise, you should read the opposite sate of corresponding value of that bit when using contact (Normally Close, NC or contact b). Many relays will need many bits, 8-bits makes up a byte. 2 bytes can make up a word. 2 words makes up double word. When using many relays to do calculation, such as add/ subtraction or shift, you could use byte, word or double word. Furthermore, the two equipments, timer and counter, in PLC not only have coil but also value of counting time and times. In conclusion, each internal storage unit occupies fixed storage unit. When using these equipments, the corresponding content will be read by bit, byte or word. Basic introduction of the inner equipment of PLC: (Refer to Chapter 2 for detail) Input relay Input relay is the basic storage unit of internal memory that corresponds to external input point (it is the terminal that used to connect to external input switch and receive external input signal). Input signal from external will decide it to display 0 or 1. You couldn t change the state of input relay by program design or forced ON/OFF via HPP. The contacts (contact a, b) can be used unlimitedly. If there is no input signal, the corresponding input relay could be empty and can t be used with other functions. Equipment indication method:, X1, X7, X10, X11,. The symbol of equipment is X and the number uses octal. There are numeric indications of input point on MPU and expansion unit. 1-4 DVP-PLC Application Manual
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram Output relay Internal relay STEP Output relay is the basic storage unit of internal memory that corresponds to external output point (it is used to connect to external load). It can be driven by input relay contact, the contact of other internal equipment and itself contact. It uses a normally open contact to connect to external load and other contacts can be used unlimitedly as input contacts. It doesn t have the corresponding output relay, if need, it can be used as internal relay. Equipment indication: Y0, Y1, Y7, Y10, Y11,.. The symbol of equipment is Y and the number uses octal. There are numeric indications of output point on MPU and expansion unit. The internal relay doesn t connect directly to outside. It is an auxiliary relay in PLC. Its function is the same as the auxiliary relay in electric control circuit. Each auxiliary relay has the corresponding basic unit. It can be driven by the contact of input relay, output relay or other internal equipment. Its contacts can be used unlimitedly. Internal auxiliary relay can t output directly, it should output with output point. Equipment indication: M0, M1,, M4, M5. The symbol of equipment is M and the number uses decimal number system. DVP PLC provides input method for controlling program of step actions. It is very easy to write control program by using the conversion of control step S of command STL. If there is no step program in the program, step point S could be used as internal relay M or alarm point. Equipment indication: S0, S1, S1023. The symbol of equipment is S and the number uses decimal. Timer Timer is used to control time. There are coil, contact and timer storage. When coil is ON, its contact will act (contact a is close, contact b is open) when attaining desired time. The time value of timer is set by settings and each timer has its regular period. User sets the timer value and each timer has its timing period. Once the coil is OFF, the contact won t act (contact a is open and contact b is close) and the timer will be set to zero. Equipment indication: T0, T1,,T255. The symbol of equipment is T and the number uses decimal system. The different number range corresponds with the different timing period. Counter Counter is used to count. It needs to set counter before using counter (i.e. the pulse of counter). There are coil, contacts and storage unit of counter in counter. When coil is form OFF to ON, that means input a pulse in counter and the counter should add 1. There are 16-bit, 32-bit and high-speed counter for user to use. Equipment indication: C0, C1,,C255. The symbol of equipment is C and the number uses decimal. DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-5
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram Data register PLC needs to handle data and operation when controlling each order, timer value and counter value. The data register is used to store data or parameters. It stores 16-bit binary number, i.e. a word, in each register. It uses two continuous number of data register to store double words. Equipment indication: D0, D1,,D9,999. The symbol of equipment is D and the number uses decimal. File register The file register can be used to store data or parameter when the register that PLC needs is not enough during handling data and parameter. It can store 16-bit binary number, i.e. a word, in each file register. It uses two continuous number of file register to handle double word. There are 1600 file registers for EP series and 10000 file registers for EH series. There is not the real equipment number for file register, thus it needs to execute READ/WRITE of file register via commands API147 MEMR, API148 MEMW or the peripheral equipment HPP and WPLSoft. Equipment indication: K0~K9,999. There is no equipment symbol and uses decimal number for number. Index register Index register E and F are 16-bit data register just the same as general data register. It can be wrote and read freely and has the function of index indication to use for character device, bit device and constants. Equipment indication: E0~E7, F0~F7. The symbols of equipment are E, F and the number uses decimal. The structure and explanation of ladder diagram: Ladder Diagram Structure Explanation Command Equipment Normally open, contact a LD X, Y, M, S, T, C Normally close, contact b LDI X, Y, M, S, T, C Serial normally open AND X, Y, M, S, T, C Parallel normally open OR X, Y, M, S, T, C Parallel normally close ORI X, Y, M, S, T, C Rising-edge trigger switch LDP X, Y, M, S, T, C Falling-edge trigger switch Rising-edge trigger in serial Falling-edge trigger in serial LDF ANDP ANDF X, Y, M, S, T, C X, Y, M, S, T, C X, Y, M, S, T, C 1-6 DVP-PLC Application Manual
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram Ladder Diagram Structure Explanation Command Equipment Rising-edge trigger in parallel Falling-edge trigger in parallel ORP ORF X, Y, M, S, T, C X, Y, M, S, T, C Block in serial ANB none Block in parallel ORB none Multiple output Output command of coil drive MPS MRD MPP OUT none Y, M, S S Step ladder STL S Basic command, Application command Application command Please refer chapter 3 basic command and chapter 5 application command Inverse logic INV none Block: The block is the ladder diagram that made up of the serial or parallel calculation of two or above equipments. It will get the result of parallel block or serial block according to operation character. Serial block Parallel block Divergent line and combinative line: the vertical line is usually a separation for devices. This line is combination line for the left device (it means that there are at least two columns or above circuit at the left connect to this vertical line) this line is the divergent line for the right device (it means that there are at least two rows or above circuit connect to this line. 1 2 combinative line of block 1 divergent line of block 2 combinative line of block 2 DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-7
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram Network: this is the complete network that made up of devices and blocks. The vertical line or continuous line and the block or device that line can connect to is the same network. Independent network: Network1 Network2 Incomplete network: 1.4 The Edition of PLC Ladder Diagram The program edited method is from left power line to right power line. (the right power line will be omitted during the edited of DPLSoft and WPLSoft.) After editing a row, go to editing the next row. The maximum contacts in a row are 11 contacts. If you need more than 11 contacts, you could have the new row and start with continuous line to continue more input devices. The continuous number will be produced automatically and the same input point can be used repeatedly. The drawing is shown as follows. X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 C0 C1 00000 X11 X12 X13 00000 Y1 The operation of ladder diagram is to scan from left upper corner to right lower corner. The output handling, including the operation frame of coil and application command, at the most right side in ladder diagram. Take the following diagram for example; we analyze the process step by step. The number at the right corner is the explanation order. 1 2 4 3 X1 Y1 X4 M0 T0 M3 X3 M1 5 8 7 56 Y1 TMR T0 K10 1-8 DVP-PLC Application Manual
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram The explanation of command order: 1 LD 2 OR M0 3 AND X1 4 LD X3 AND M1 ORB 5 LD Y1 AND X4 6 LD T0 AND M3 ORB 7 ANB 8 OUT Y1 TMR T0 K10 The detail explanation of basic structure of ladder diagram 1. LD (LDI) command: give the command LD or LDI in the start of a block. LD command LD command AND Block OR Block The structures of command LDP and LDF are similar to the command LD. The difference is that command LDP and LDF will act in the rising-edge or falling-edge when contact is ON as shown in the following. Rising-edge Falling-edge OFF ON OFF Time OFF ON OFF Time 2. AND (ANI) command: single device connects to a device or a block in series. AND command AND command The structures of ANDP and ANDF are the same but the action is in rising-edge or falling-edge. 3. OR (ORI) command: single device connects to a device or a block. OR command OR command OR command DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-9
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram The structures of ORP and ORF are the same but the action is in rising-edge or falling-edge. 4. ANB command: a block connects to a device or a block in series. ANB command 5. ORB command: a block connects to a device or a block in parallel. ORB command If there are several blocks when operate ANB or ORB, they should be combined to blocks or network from up to down or from left to right. 6. MPS, MRD, MPP commands: Divergent memory of multi-output. It can produce many various outputs. The command MPS is the start of divergent point. The divergent point means the connection place between horizontal line and vertical line. We should determine to have contact memory command or not according to the contacts status in the same vertical line. Basically, each contact could have memory command but in some places of ladder diagram conversion will be omitted due to the PLC operation convenience and capacity limit. MPS command can be used for 8 continuous times and you can recognize this command by the symbol. MRD command is used to read memory of divergent point. Because the logical status is the same in the same horizontal line, it needs to read the status of original contact to keep on analyzing other ladder diagram. You can recognize the command MRD by the symbol. MPP command is used to read the start status of the top level and pop it out from stack. Because it is the last item of the horizontal line, it means the status of this horizontal line is ending. 1-10 DVP-PLC Application Manual
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram You can recognize this command by the symbol. Basically, that is all right to use the above method to analyze but sometimes compiler will omit the same outputs as shown at the right. MPS MPS MRD MPP MPP 7. STL command: this command is used in the syntax design for the Sequential Function Chart (SFC). This command helps the programmer to have clearer ideas on the program procedure, and thus the procedure will be more readable. As shown in the following diagrams, we can get clear procedure, and original step point will have the action of power loss after each step point S transfer to the next step point. In this way, we could transfer to our procedure diagram from the left diagram to the PLC structure diagram below. S0 S21 M1002 initial pulse M1002 S0 S S21 S S22 e S SET SET SET S0 S0 S21 S22 S22 RET 8. RET command: you should add RET command after finishing step ladder program and RET command should add after STL command as shown in the following. S20 e S RET S20 e S RET Refer to chapter 4 for the structure of step ladder [ STL ], [ RET ]. 1.5 The Conversion of PLC Command and Each Diagram Structure DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-11
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram Ladder Diagram X2 X1 X1 M2 S0 S S10 S S11 S S20 S C0 M0 M1 Y0 X10 X11 X12 S12 S X1 X1 M2 S13 S C0 X13 Y0 SET S0 Y10 SET S10 Y11 SET S11 SET S12 SET S13 Y12 SET S20 S0 RET CNT C0 K10 M0 M1 M2 RST C0 END LD OR LD OR ORI ANB LD AND ORB ANI OUT AND SET STL LD OUT SET STL LD OUT SET SET SET STL LD OUT SET STL STL STL LD OUT RET LD CNT LD MPS AND OUT MRD ANI OUT MPP ANI OUT END X1 X2 M0 M1 M2 Y0 X1 Y0 C0 S0 S0 X10 Y10 S10 S10 1 OR block 2 OR block Serial block 3 AND block Serial block 4 ANI Multiple outputs Step ladder Start State working item and step point transfer 5 7 Output state will keep on handling according to program scan state 9 S10 state take out X11 10 Take out X11 state Y11 11 8 S11 State working item and S12 step point transfer S13 S11 12 S11 state take out X12 13 Take out X12 state 14 Y12 State working item and S20 step point transfer S20 S12 Simultaneous 15 divergence S13 X13 State working item End of step ladder S0 and step point transfer Return S0 C0K10 17 C0 18 Read C0 X1 M0 X1 M1 M2 M2 Multiple outputs End 8 Syntax Fuzzy Structure The analytic process of correct ladder diagram should be from left to right or from up to down. But there are some exceptions as shown in the following. 1: there are two methods to use command to show the following ladder diagram but the result is the same. 1-12 DVP-PLC Application Manual
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram X2 X4 X1 X3 X5 Good method LD LD OR X1 OR X1 LD X2 LD X2 OR X3 OR X3 ANB LD X4 LD X4 OR X5 OR X5 ANB ANB ANB Bad method The results for the above two programs to convert to ladder diagram are the same. Why one is better than the other? That is due to operation of MPU. The operation of the program in the left side is one block merges to another one. Although the length of the program at the right side is the same as the left one, the operation of the program in the right side is merged at the last. (command ANB is used to merge, it can t use more than 8 continuous times). In this program, it just needs to use continuous two times of command ANB and MPU allows that. But when the program needs to use more than continuous 8 times of command ANB, MPU won t allow. So the best method is to merge once the block is established and in this way the logic of programmer will be in order. 2: there are two methods to use command to show the following ladder diagram but the result is the same. Good method Bad method X1 X2 X3 LD LD OR X1 LD X1 OR X2 LD X2 OR X3 LD X3 ORB ORB ORB The difference is very clear in these two programs. In the bad method, the more program code it needs and the operation memory of MPU also needs to increase. So that is better to decode in the order of the definition. The error figures of ladder diagram When editing ladder diagram, you can use all ladder symbols to make up all kinds of figures. When drawing ladder diagram, you should start from left power line and end with the right power line (the right power line will be omitted when using DPLSoft ladder diagram) due to the principle for PLC to handle figure program is from up to down and from left to right (it is drew from left to right and draw the next new row after finishing drawing a row). They are the common error figure in the following. It can t do OR operation upward. DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-13
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram There is reverse power flow during the circuit that is from input to output signal. reverse flow power The correct is output from right upper corner. If you want to merge or edit, the order should be from left upper corner to right lower corner. The block of dot line should move up. It can t do parallel operation with empty device. Empty device can t do operation with other device. There is no device in the middle block. The device in series should be arranged in parallel with the block that it connects in series.. The position of Label P should be in the first row of the complete network. The block that is connected in series should be arranged in parallel with the upper horizontal line. 1.6 The Simplification of Ladder Diagram To put the block in the front of ladder diagram can omit command ANB when series block and parallel block connect in series. 1-14 DVP-PLC Application Manual
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram X1 Command X2 LD LD X1 OR ANB X2 X1 X2 Command LD OR X1 X2 AND To put the block in the front of ladder diagram can omit command ORB when single equipment and block are connected in parallel. T0 Command LD T0 X1 X2 LD X1 X1 X2 AND ORB Command X2 T0 LD AND X1 X2 OR T0 In figure a of ladder diagram, it does not illegal due to the reverse power flow. In figure a, the upper block is shorter than lower block, you could make it legal by switching them. command LD X1 X3 X2 X4 OR AND LD X1 X2 X3 Fig. a AND ORB X4 X3 X4 command LD X3 X1 X2 AND LD OR X4 X1 Fig. b AND ORB X2 DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-15
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram You can omit commands MPS, MPP when the multiple outputs in the same horizontal line don t need to operate with other input device. Y1 Y0 command MPS AND OUT MPP OUT Y1 Y0 Y0 Y1 command OUT AND OUT Y0 Y1 Correct the circuit of reverse flow power In the following examples, the figure at the left is the ladder diagram that is draw by our definition but there is reverse flow power in it. Therefore, we correct it and show it at the right side. 1: X1 X2 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X3 X6 X4 X7 X5 X10 LOOP1 X10 X6 X7 X5 reverse flow power X10 LOOP1 2: X1 X2 X3 X6 X4 X7 X5 X10 LOOP1 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 reverse flow power reverse flow power X3 X7 X10 X6 X1 X2 LOOP1 X3 X4 X5 X1 X4 X7 X10 X6 X7 X10 LOOP2 1.7 The for Designing Basic 1-16 DVP-PLC Application Manual
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram Start, Stop and Latching In the same occasions, it needs transient close button and transient open button to be start and stop switch. Therefore, if you want to keep the action, you should design latching circuit. There are several latching circuits in the following: 1: the latching circuit for priority of stop When start normally open contact X1=On, stop normally contact X2=Off, and Y1=On are set at the same time, if X2=On, the coil Y1 will stop acting. Therefore, it calls priority of Y1 X1 X2 Y1 stop. 2: the latching circuit for priority of start When start normally open contact X1=On, stop normally contact X2 = Off and Y1=On (coil Y1 will be active and latching) are valid at the same time, if X2=On, coil Y1 will be X1 Y1 X2 Y1 active due to latched contact. Therefore, it calls priority of start. 3: the latching circuit of SET and RST commands The figure at the right side is latching circuit that made up of RST and SET command. It is top priority of stop when RST command is set behind SET command. When executing PLC from up to down, The Top priority of stop X1 X2 SET RST Y1 Y1 coil Y1 is ON and coil Y1 will be OFF when X1 and X2 act at the same time, therefore it calls priority of stop. It is top priority of start when SET command is set after RST command. When X1 and X2 act at the same time, Y1 is ON so it calls top priority of start. Top priority of start X2 X1 RST SET Y1 Y1 4: latched Auxiliary relay M512 is latched at the right side. (refer to PLC user manual) the circuit at the right side will be latched when power is on and it will be also latched once the power loss and power on again. Therefore the latched is continuous. X1 X2 M512 SET RST Y1 M512 M512 The common control circuit DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-17
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram 5: condition control X1 Y1 X3 Y1 X1 X3 X2 X2 Y2 X4 Y1 Y2 X4 Y1 Y2 X1 and X3 can start/stop Y1 separately, X2 and X4 can start/stop Y2 separately and they are all self latched circuit. Y1 is an element for Y2 to do AND function due to the normally open contact connects to Y2 in series. Therefore, Y1 is the input of Y2 and Y2 is also the input of Y1. 6: Interlock control X1 Y1 X3 Y2 Y1 X1 X3 X2 X4 X2 Y2 X4 Y1 Y2 Y1 Y2 The figure above is the circuit of interlock control. Y1 and Y2 will act according to the start contact X1 and X2. Y1 and Y2 will act not at the same time, once one of them acts and the other won t act. (This is called interlock.) Even if X1 and X2 are valid at the same time, Y1 and Y2 won t act at the same time due to up-to-down scan of ladder diagram. For this ladder diagram, Y1 has higher priority than Y2. 7: Sequential Control X1 Y1 X3 Y2 Y1 If add normally close contact Y2 into Y1 circuit to be an input for Y1 to do AND function. (as shown in the left side) Y1 is an input of Y2 and Y2 can stop Y1 after X2 X4 Y1 Y2 acting. In this way, Y1 and Y2 can execute in sequential. Y2 8: Oscillating Circuit The period of oscillating circuit is ΔT+ΔT 1-18 DVP-PLC Application Manual
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram Y1 Y1 Y1 T T The figure above is a very simple ladder step diagram. When starting to scan Y1 normally close contact, Y1 normally close contact is close due to the coil Y1 is OFF. Then it will scan Y1 and the coil Y1 will be ON and output 1. In the next scan period to scan normally close contact Y1, Y1 normally close contact will be open due to Y1 is ON. Finally, coil Y1 will be OFF and output 0. Scan repeatedly, the period of oscillating circuit is nt+δt. Y1 TMR T0 Kn T0 Y1 Y1 nt T The figure above uses timer T0 to control coil Y1 to be ON. After Y1 is ON, timer T0 will be closed at the next scan period and output Y1. The oscillating circuit will be shown as above. (n is the setting of timer and it is decimal number. T is the base of timer. (clock period)) 9: Blinking Circuit T1 T2 T1 TMR TMR Y1 T1 T2 Kn1 Kn2 Y1 n1 T n2 T The figure above is common used oscillating circuit for indication light blinks or buzzer alarms. It uses two timers to control On/OFF time of Y1 coil. If figure, n1 and n2 are timer setting of T1 and T2. T is the base of timer (clock period) 10: Triggered Circuit M0 M0 M0 Y1 Y1 Y1 M0 Y1 T DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-19
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram In figure above, the rising-edge differential command of will make coil M0 to have a single pulse of ΔT (a scan time). Y1 will be ON during this scan time. In the next scan time, coil M0 will be OFF and normally close M0 and normally close Y1 are all closed. However, coil Y1 will keep on being ON and it will make coil Y1 to be OFF once a rising-edge comes after input and coil M0 is ON for a scan time. The timing chart is as shown above. This circuit usually executes alternate two actions with an input. From above timing: when input is a square wave of a period T, output coil Y1 is square wave of a period 2T. 11: Delay Circuit TMR T10 K1000 T10 Y1 Y1 TB = 0.1 sec 100 seconds When input is ON, output coil Y1 will be ON at the same time due to the corresponding normally close contact OFF makes timer T10 to be OFF. Output coil Y1 will be OFF after delay 100 seconds once input is OFF and T10 is ON. Please refer to timing chart above. 12: Output delay circuit, in the following example, the circuit is made up of two timers. No matter input is ON or OFF, output Y4 will be delay. T5 T6 TMR Y4 T5 K50 T5 5 seconds Y4 Y4 TMR T6 K30 Y0 T6 3 seconds 13: Extend Timer Circuit T11 TMR TMR T11 T12 Kn1 Kn2 In this circuit, the total delay time from input is close and output Y1 is ON= (n1+n2)* T. where T is clock period. T12 Y1 14: The method of enlarge counter range 1-20 DVP-PLC Application Manual
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram X13 C5 CNT CNT C5 C6 Kn1 Kn2 The range of 16-bit counter is 0~32,767. If using two counters as figure in left side, the counter range can be enlarge to n1*n2. When counter C5 attains n1, X14 C6 RST RST Y1 C5 C6 counter C6 will counts one time and reset itself. Then counter C6 will count the pulse of X13. When counter C6 attains n2, the pulse of X13 will be n1*n2. 15: Traffic light control (by using step ladder command) Horizontal Light Vertical Light Traffic light control Red light Vertical light Horizontal light Yellow light Green light Green blink light Y0 Y1 Y2 Y2 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y12 Light Time 35 Sec 5 Sec 25 Sec 5 Sec Timing chart: Vertical Light Red Y0 Yellow Y1 Green Y2 Horizontal Light Red Y10 25 Sec 5 Sec 5 Sec Yellow Y11 Green Y12 25 Sec 5 Sec 5 Sec DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-21
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram SFC Figure: M1002 S0 Ladder Diagram: M1002 ZRST S0 S127 S20 T0 S21 T1 Y0 TMR T0 K350 Y2 TMR T1 K250 S30 T10 S31 T11 Y12 TMR T10 K250 TMR T11 K50 M1013 Y12 S0 S S20 S SET SET SET Y0 S0 S20 S30 S22 T2 S23 TMR T2 K50 M1013 Y2 Y1 S32 T12 S33 Y11 TMR T12 K50 Y10 TMR T13 K350 S21 S T0 TMR SET Y2 T0 S21 K350 T13 S0 TMR T1 T1 SET S22 S22 S TMR T2 M1013 Y2 T2 SET S23 S23 S S30 S Y1 Y12 K250 K50 TMR T10 T10 SET S31 S31 S TMR T11 S32 S M1013 T11 Y12 SET Y11 S32 K250 K50 S33 S T12 TMR SET Y10 T12 S33 K50 S23 S S33 S T13 TMR T13 K350 S0 RET END 1-22 DVP-PLC Application Manual
1 Working Principles of PLC Ladder Diagram Drawing by SFC Editor (WPLSoft ) Drawing by SFC Internal Ladder Diagram View LAD-0 M1002 ZRST S0 S127 LAD-0 SET S0 S0 Transferred condition 1 0 T0 TRANS* S20 S30 1 S21 5 S31 S22 2 S22 6 S32 M1013 TMR Y2 T2 K50 3 7 S23 S33 Transferred condition 4 T13 TRANS* 4 S0 Transferred condition 7 T12 TRANS* DVP-PLC Application Manual 1-23
2 DVP-PLC Function 2.1 Summary of DVP-PLC Device Number ES, EX, SS Models: Type Device Item Usage Range Function ~X177, 128 points, octal Correspond to X External input relay Total is number system external input point 256 Y0~Y177, 128 points, octal Correspond to Y External output relay points number system external output point For general M0~M511, M768~M999, 744 points Total is Contacts can switch to M Auxiliary For latched * M512~M767, 256 points 1280 On/Off in program points (some is latched) Relay bit mode Register WORD data Pointer Constant T C S Timer Counter Step point For special 100ms timer 10ms counter 1ms timer 16-bit count up for general 16-bit count up for latched * 32-bit count 1-phase input up/down high-speed 1-phase 2 inputs counter for 2-phase 2 inputs latched* Initial step point latched * Zero point return latched * latched * M1000~M1279, 280 points (some are latched) T0~T63, 64 points T64~T126, 63 points (when M1028=On, it is 10ms, M1028=Off, it is 100ms) T127, 1 points C0~C111, 112 points C112~C127, 16 points C235~C238, C241, C242, C244, 7 points C246, C247, C249, 3 points C251, C252, C254, 3 points S0~S9, 10 points S10~S19, 10 points (use with IST command) S20~S127, 108 points T Present value of timer T0~T127, 128 points C D Present value of counter Data register For general For latched * For special For index indication Total is 128 points Total is 128 points Total is 13 points Total is 128 points C0~C127, 16-bit counter, 128 C235~C254, 32-bit counter, 13 points D0~D407, 408 points D408~D599, 192 points D1000~D1311, 312 points (for V4.9 and above) D1000~D1143, 144 points (for V4.8 and below) E(=D1028), F(=D1029), 2 points N For master control nested loop N0~N7, 8 points P For CJ, CALL commands P0~P63, 64 points I K H Time interrupt Interrupt External interrupt Communication interrupt Decimal Hexadecimal * latched area is fixed, it can t be changed. Total is 600 points Total is 312 points (144 points) When the timer indicated by TMR command attains the setting, the T contact with the same number will be ON. When the counter indicated by CNT (DCNT) command attains the setting, the C contact with the same number will be ON. Usage device of step ladder diagram (SFC) When timer attains, the contact of timer will be ON. When timer attains, the contact of timer will be ON. It can be memory area for storing data. E and F can be used as the special purpose of index indication Control point of master control nested loop Location pointer of CJ, CALL I6, 1 point ( =10~99ms) (for Version 5.7) I001, I101, I201, I301, 4 points I150 K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation) K-2,147,483,648 ~ K2,147,483,647 (32-bit operation) H0000 ~ HFFFF (16-bit operation) H00000000 ~ HFFFFFFFF (32-bit operation) Location pointer of interrupt subroutine DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-1
2 DVP-PLC Function EP/SA models: Type Device Item Range Function Relay bit mode X Y M T C S External input relay External output relay Auxiliary Relay Timer Counter Step point ~X177, 128 points, octal number system Y0~Y177, 128 points, octal number system For general M0~M511, 512 points (*1) For latched * For special 100ms 10ms 1ms 16-bit count up 32-bit count up/down 32-bit high-speed counter M512~M999, 488 points (*3) M2000~M4095, 2096 points (*3) M1000~M1999, 1000 points (some are latched) T0~T199, 200 points (*1) T192~T199 for subroutine T250~T255, 6 points (accumulative type) (*4) T200~T239, 40 points (*1) T240~T245, 6 points (accumulative type) (*4) T246~T249, 4 points (accumulative type) (*4) C0~C95, 96 points (*1) C96~C199, 104 points (*3) C200~C215, 16 points (*1) C216~C234, 19 points (*3) C235~C244, 1-phase 1 input, 9 points (*3) C246, C247, C249, 1-phase 2 inputs, 3 points (*3) C251, C252, C254, 2-phase 2 inputs, 3 points (*3) Initial step point S0~S9, 10 points (*1) For alarm S896~S1023, 128 points (*3) Total is 256 points Total is 4096 points Total is 256 points Total is 250 points Correspond to external input point Correspond to external output point Contacts can be switched during ON/OFF in the program (some is latched) When the timer that TMR command indicates attains the setting, the T contact with the same number will be On. When the timer that CNT(DCNT) command indicates attains, the contact C with the same number will be On. S10~S19, 10 points (use with IST Zero point return Total command) (*1) is Usage device of step For general S20~S512, 492 points (*1) 1024 ladder diagram points For latched * S512~S895, 384 points (*3) 2-2 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function Type Device Item Range Function Register WORD data Pointer Constant T Present value of timer T0~T255, 256 points C D Present value of counter Data register C0~C199, 16-bit counter, 200 points C200~C254, 16-bit counter, 50 points For general D0~D199, 200 points (*1) For latched* For special D200~D999, 800 points (*3) D2000~D4999, 3000 points (*3) D1000~D1999, 1000 points For index indication E0~E3, F0~F3, 8 points (*1) None File register * K0~K1599 (1600 points) (*4) N Master control nested N0~N7, 8 points P For CJ, CALL commands P0~P255, 256 points I K H For interrupt External interrupt Time interrupt High-speed counter reaches interrupt Communication interrupt Decimal number system Hexadecimal number system Total is 5000 points I001, I101, I201, I301, I401, I501, total is 6 points I6, I7, 2 points ( =1~99ms, time base=0.1ms) I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, 6 points I150 When timer attains, the contact will be On. When timer attains, the contact will be On. It is the memory area for storing data. E and F can be used as special purpose of index indication It is expansion register for storing data K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation) K-2,147,483,648 ~ K2,147,483,647 (32-bit operation) H0000 ~ HFFFF (16-bit operation) H00000000 ~ HFFFFFFFF (32-bit operation) The control point of master control nested The location point of CJ, CALL The location point of interrupt subroutine. *1: non-latched area is fixed, it can t be changed. *2: non-latched area can be changed to latched area by parameter setting. *3: latched area can be changed to non-latched area by parameter setting. *4: latched area is fixed, it can t be modified. (the area marked with can t be changed) DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-3
2 DVP-PLC Function Latched setting for each EP/SA model: M Auxiliary relay For general For latched Special auxiliary relay Latched M0~M511 M512~M999 M1000~M1999 M2000~M4095 It is fixed to be non-latched Factory setting is latched Start: D1200(K512) End: D1201(K999) Some are latched and can t be changed Factory setting is latched Start: D1202(K2000) End: D1203(K4095) 100 ms 10 ms 10ms 1 ms 100 ms T Timer C Counter S Step relay D Register Data Register T0 ~T199 T200~T239 T240~T245 T246~T249 T250~T255 It is fixed to be non-latched It is fixed to be non-latched Accumulative type It is fixed to be latched 16 bits count up 32 bits count up/down 32 bits count up/down high speed counter C0~C95 C96~C199 C200~C215 C216~C234 C235~C255 It is fixed to be It is fixed to be Factory setting is latched It is fixed to be non-latched latched Start: D1208 (K96) End: D1209 (K199) It is fixed to be non-latched latched Start: D1210 (K216) End: D1211 (K234) Start: D1212(K235) End: D1213(K255) For Special Latched general register Latched For general S0~S9 S10~S19 S20~S511 S512~S895 S896~S1023 Factory setting is latched It is fixed to be non-latched Start: D1214(K512) It is fixed to be latched End: D1215(K895) For general Latched Special register Latched D0~D199 D200~D999 D1000~D1999 D2000~D9999 Factory setting is Factory setting is latched It is fixed to be latched Some are latched and non-latched can t be changed Start: D1216 (K200) End: D1217 (K999) K0~K1599 It is fixed to be latched Start: D1218 (K2000) End: D1219 (K4999) EH model: Type Device Item Range Function Relay bit mode 2-4 X External input relay ~X377, 256 points, octal number system Y External output relay Y0~Y377, 256 points, octal number system M T Auxiliary relay Timer For general M0~M499, 500 points (*2) For latched M500~M999, 500 points (*3) M2000~M4095, 2096 points (*3) For special M1000~M1999, 1000 points (some are latched) T0~T199, 200 points (*2) 100ms T192~T199 is for subroutine T250~T255, 6-point Accumulative type (*4) 10ms T200~T239, 40 points (*2) T240~T245, 6-point Accumulative type (*4) 1ms T246~T249, 4-point Accumulative type (*4) Total is 512 points Total is 4096 points Total is 256 points Corresponds to external input point Corresponds to external output point Contacts can be switched between On/Off in the program (some is latched) When the timer that set by TMR command attains, the T contact with the same number will be On. DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function Type Device Item Range Function Register WORD data Pointer Constant C S Counter Step points C0~C99, 100 points (*2) 16-bit count up C100~C199, 100 points (*3) 32-bit count up/down C200~C219, 20 points (*2) C220~C234, 15 points (*3) C235~C244, 1-phase 1 input, 10 points (*3) High-speed C246~C249, 1-phase 2 inputs, 4 points(*3) counter C251~C254, 2-phases 2 inputs, 4 points (*3) Initial step point S0~S9, 10 points (*2) For zero point S10~S19, 10 points (use with IST command) return (*2) For general S20~S499, 480 points (*2) For latched S500~S899, 400 points (*3) For alarm S900~S1023, 124 points (*3) T Present value of timer T0~T255, 256 points C D Present value of counter Data register C0~C199, 16-bit counter, 200 points C200~C254, 132-bit counter, 53 points For general D0~D199, 200 points, (*2) For latched D200~D999, 800 points (*3) D2000~D9999, 8000 points (*3) For special D1000~D1999, 1000 points For index E0~E7, F0~F7, 16 points (*1) None File register K0~K9999(10000 points) (*4) N Master control nested N0~N7, 8 points P I K H For CJ, CALL commands P0~P255, 256 points Interrupt External interrupt Time interrupt High-speed counter attained interrupt Pulse interrupt Communication interrrupt Decimal system Hexadecimal system Total is 253 points Total is 1024 points Total is 10000 points I00 (), I10 (X1), I20 (X2), I30 (X3), I40 (X4), I50 (X5), 6 points ( =1, rising-edge trigger, =0, falling-edge trigger ) I6, I7, I8, 3 points( =1~99ms) time base=1ms I8, 1 point ( =1~99, time base=0.1ms) I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, 6 points I110, I120, I130, I140, 4 points I150 K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation) K-2,147,483,648 ~ K2,147,483,647 (32-bit operation) H0000 ~ HFFFF (16-bit operation) H00000000 ~ HFFFFFFFF (32-bit operation) When the timer that set by CNT(DCNT) command attains, the contact C will be On. Usage device of step ladder diagram (SFC) When timer attains, the contact of timer will be On. When timer attains, the contact of timer will be On. It is the memory area for storing data. E and F can be used as special purpose of index indication Expansion register for storing data Master control nested control point The location pointer of CJ, CALL The location pointer of interrupt subroutine DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-5
2 DVP-PLC Function *1: the area of non-latched is fixed, it can t be changed. *2: the area of non-latched, it can be changed to latched area by parameter setting. *3: latched area can be changed to non-latched area by parameter setting. *4: latched area is fixed, it can t be modified. (the area marked with can t be changed) Latched setting for each EH model: M Auxiliary relay T Timer C Counter S Step relay For general For latched Special auxiliary relay Latched M0~M499 M500~M999 M1000~M1999 M2000~M4095 Start: D1200(K500) End: D1201(K999) Some are latched and they can t be changed. Start: D1202(K2000) End: D1203(K4095) 100 ms 10 ms 10ms 1 ms 100 ms T0 ~T199 T200~T239 T240~T245 T246~T249 T250~T255 Factory setting is non-latched Factory setting is non-latched Start: D1204 (HFFFF)*1 End: D1205 (HFFFF)*1 Start: D1206 (HFFFF)*1 End: D1207 (HFFFF)*1 Accumulative type Fixed latched 16-bit count up 32-bit count up/down 32-bit high-speed count up/down C0~C99 C100~C199 C200~C219 C220~C234 C235~C245 C246~C255 Non-latched Non-latched Latched Latched (default) (default) (default) (default) Latched (default) Start: D1208 (K100) Start: D1210 (K220) Start: D1212 (K235) End: D1209 (K199) End: D1211 (K234) End: D1213 (K255) Initial Zero point return For general Latched Step point for alarm S0~S9 S10~S19 S20~S499 S500~S899 S900~S1023 Non-latched (default) Latched (default) Start: D1214 (K500) End: D1215 (K899) Always is latched For general Latched Special register Latched D Register D0~D199 D200~D999 D1000~D1999 D2000~D9999 Non-latched (default) Latched (default) Latched (default) Some is latched, it can t be changed Start: D1216 (K200) End: D1217 (K999) Start: D1218 (K2000) End: D1219 (K9999) * 1: HFFFF means factory setting is non-latched. When switching between power On/Off or MPU RUN/STOP mode, the memory type of version 5.5 and higher of ES, ES/EX/SS series will be as following: Memory type Non-latched Power Off=>On Clear STOP=>RUN RUN=>STOP When M1033=Off, clear When M1033=On, unchanged Clear all M1031 Non-latched area Clear all M1032 latched area Factory setting Clear Unchanged 0 Latched Unchanged Unchanged Clear Unchanged Special M, Special D, index register Initial Unchanged Unchanged Initial setting 2-6 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function The memory type of EP/SA/EH models will be as following: Memory type Non-latched Power Off=>On Clear STOP=>RUN RUN=>STOP When M1033=Off, clear When M1033=On, No change Clear all M1031 Non-latched area Clear all M1032 latched area Factory setting Clear Unchanged 0 Latched Unchanged Unchanged Clear 0 Special M, Special D, index register Initial Unchanged Unchanged File Register Unchanged 0 Initial setting 2.2 Value, constant [K] / [H] Constant K H Decimal Hexadecimal K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation) K-2,147,483,648 ~ K2,147,483,647 (32-bit operation) H0 ~ HFFFF (16-bit operation) H0 ~ HFFFFFFFF (32-bit operation) There are five value types for DVP-PLC to use by the different control destination. The following is the explanation of value types. 1. Binary Number (BIN) It uses binary system for the PLC internal operation or storage. The relative information of binary system is in the following. Bit : Bit is the basic unit of binary system, the status are 1 or 0. Nibble : It is made up of continuous 4 bits, such as b3~b0. It can be used to represent number 0~9 of decimal or 0~F of hexadecimal. Byte : It is made up of continuous 2 nibbles, i.e. 8 bits, b7~b0). It can used to represent 00~FF of hexadecimal system. Word : It is made up of continuous 2 bytes, i.e. 16 bits, b15~b0. It can used to represent 0000~FFFF of hexadecimal system. Double Word : It is made up of continuous 2 words, i.e. 32 bits, b31~b0. It can used to represent 00000000~FFFFFFFF of hexadecimal. The relations among bit, nibble, byte, word, and double word of binary number are shown as follows. DW Double Word W1 W0 Word BY3 BY2 BY1 BY0 Byte NB7 NB6 NB5 NB4 NB3 NB2 NB1 NB0 Nibble Bit 2. Octal Number (OCT) The numbers of external input and output terminal of DVP-PLC use octal number. : External input: ~X7, X10~X17 (device number) DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-7
2 DVP-PLC Function External output: Y0~Y7, Y10~Y17 (device number) 3. Decimal Number (DEC) The suitable time for decimal number to use in DVP-PLC system. To be the setting value of timer T or counter C, such as TMR C0 K50. (K constant) To be the device number of S, M, T, C, D, E, F, P, I. For example: M10, T30. (device number) To be operand in application command, such as MOV K123 D0. (K constant) 4. BCD (Binary Code Decimal, BCD) It shows a decimal number by a unit number or four bits so continuous 16 bits can use to represent the four numbers of decimal number. BCD code is usually used to read the input value of DIP switch or output value to 7-segment display to be display. 5. Hexadecimal Number (HEX) Constant K: The suitable time for hexadecimal number to use in DVP-PLC system. To be operand in application command. For example: MOV H1A2B D0. (constant H) In PLC, it is usually have K before constant to mean decimal number. For example, K100 means 100 in decimal number. Exception: The value that is made up of K and bit equipment X, Y, M, S will be bit, byte, word or double word. For example, K2Y10, K4M100. K1 means a 4-bit data and K2~K4 can be 8, 12 and 16-bit data separately. Constant H: In PLC, it is usually have H before constant to mean hexadecimal number. For example, H100 means 100 in hexadecimal number. Reference Chart: Binary (BIN) For PLC internal operation Octal (OCT) Equipment X, Y number Decimal (DEC) Constant K, equipment M, S, T, C, D, E, F, P, I number BCD (Binary Code Decimal) For DIP Switch and 7-segment display Hexadecimal (HEX) Constant H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 3 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 4 4 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 5 5 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 5 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 6 6 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 7 7 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 7 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 10 8 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 11 9 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 9 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 12 10 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 A 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 13 11 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 B 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 14 12 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 C 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 15 13 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 D 2-8 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function Binary (BIN) For PLC internal operation Octal (OCT) Equipment X, Y number Decimal (DEC) Constant K, equipment M, S, T, C, D, E, F, P, I number BCD (Binary Code Decimal) For DIP Switch and 7-segment display Hexadecimal (HEX) Constant H 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 16 14 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 E 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 17 15 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 F 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 20 16 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 10 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 21 17 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 11 : : : : : : : : : 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 143 99 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 63 2.3 The Numbering and Function of External Input/Output Contact [X] / [Y] Input/output contact number:(octal number) For MPU, the number of input and output contact will be counted from and Y0. The number will be changed with points of MPU. For I/O expansion unit, the number of input / output terminal is counted with the connection sequence of MPU. For ES, EX, SS Models: : : : : : : Model no DVP-14ES DVP-14SS DVP-20EX DVP-24ES DVP-32ES DVP-60ES Expansion I/O Input X Output Y ~X7 (8 Points) Y0~Y5 (6 Points) ~X7 (8 Points) Y0~Y5 (6 Points) ~X7 (8 Points) Y0~Y5 (6 Points) ~X17 (16 Points) Y0~Y7 (8 Points) ~X17 (16 Points) Y0~Y17 (16 Points) ~X43 (36 Points) Y0~Y27 (24 Points) X20(X50)~X177 (Note) Y20(Y30)~Y177 (Note) Note: Besides DVP-60ES, the started input number of expansion unit is from X20 and the started output number of expansion unit from Y20. The started input number of DVP-60ES is X50 and the started output number of DVP-60ES is Y30. The number of expansion I/O is increased by 8 times and if it is less than 8 points, it will count with 8 points. EP/SA model: Model no DVP-12SA (Note1) DVP-14EP DVP-32EP Expansion I/O Input X ~X7 (8 points) ~X7 (8 points) ~X17 (16 points) X20~X177 (note 2) Output Y Y0~Y3 (4 points) Y0~Y7 (8 points) Y0~Y17 (16 points) Y20~Y177 (note 2) Note 1: All SA functions are the same as EP except function expansion card. All SA expansion units share with SS series. Note 2: The started input number of expansion unit is from X20 and the started output number of expansion unit from Y20. The number of expansion I/O is increased by 8 times and if it is less than 8 points, it will count with 8 points. DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-9
2 DVP-PLC Function EH model: Model no DVP-16EH DVP-20EH DVP-32EH DVP-48EH DVP-64EH DVP-80EH Expansion I/O Input X ~X7 (8 points) ~X13(12 points) ~X17 (16 points) ~X27 (24 points) ~X37 (32 points) ~X47 (40 points) X20~X377 (note) Output Y Y0~Y7 (8 points) Y0~Y7(8 points) Y0~Y17 (16 points) Y0~Y27 (24 points) Y0~Y37 (32 points) Y0~Y47 (40 points) Y20~Y377 (note) Note: Besides DVP-16EH and DVP-20EH, the started input/output number of expansion unit starts with the last number of MPU. The started input number of DVP-60EH is X20 and the started output number of DVP-60EH is Y20. The numbers of expansion I/O are sequential numbers. The input number can be up to X377 and output number can be up to Y377. Input relay: ~X377 The number of input relay (or called input terminal) uses octal number. The points of EH model can be up to 256 points, the range as follows: ~X7, X10~X17,, X370~X377. Output relay: Y0~Y377 The number of output relay (or called output terminal) uses octal number. The points of EH model can be up to 256 points, the range as follows: Y0~Y7, Y10~Y17,, Y370~Y377. Input/output contact Function: The function of input contact X: input contact X reads input signal and enter PLC by connecting with input equipment. It is unlimited usage times for A contact or B contact of each input contact X in program. The On/Off of input contact X can be changed with the On/Off of input equipment but can t be changed by using peripheral equipment (HPP or WPLSoft). ( There is a special relay M1304 in EH model to force input contact X On/Off by peripheral equipment HPP or WPLSoft, but PLC won t receive any external input signal at this time.) Output contact Y Function: The mission of output contact Y is to drive the load that connects to output contact Y by sending On/Off signal. There are two kinds of output contact: one is relay and the other is transistor. It is unlimited usage times for A or B contact of each output contact Y in program. But there is number for output coil Y and it is recommended to use one time in program. Otherwise, the output result will be decided by the circuit of last output Y with PLC program scan method. 2-10 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function Y0 1 The output of Y0 will be decided by circuit 2, i.e. decided by On/Off of X10. Y0 is repeated X10 Y0 2 The Handling Process of PLC (Batch I/O) Input signal input X input terminal read in memory Input signal memory read state from memory Write Y0 state into Y0 read Y0 state from memory Y0 M0 Write M0 state into Output output Device Memory output latched memory output terminal Y output Input signal: 1. PLC will read the On/Off of input signal into the memory of input signal before executing program. 2. The input signal state in memory won t change if On/Off of the input signal changes during executing. The new On/Off state will be read into memory in the next scan. 3. The delay time from the changes of external signal On Off or Off On to the contact will be 10ms. : PLC executes each command in program from address 0 after reading On/Off state of input signal in input signal memory and save each On/Off of output coil into each equipment memory. Output: 1. When executing END command, send On/Off state of Y in memory to output latched memory. In fact, this memory is the coil of output relay. 2. The delay time from the change of On Off or Off On of relay coil to contact On/Off. 2.4 The Numbering and Function of Auxiliary Relay [M] The number of auxiliary relay:(decimal number) ES, EX, SS models: Auxiliary relay M For general For latched For special M0~M511, M768~M999, 744 points. It is fixed to be non-latched area. M512~M767, 256 points. It is fixed to be latched area. M1000~M1279, 280 points. Some are latched. Total is 1280 points DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-11
2 DVP-PLC Function EP/SA models: For general M0~M511, 512 points. It is fixed to be non-latched area. Auxiliary relay M For latched M512~M999, M2000~M4095, 2584 points. It can be changed to non-latched area by parameters. Total is 4096 points For special M1000~M1999, 1000 points. EH models: Auxiliary relay M For general For latched M0~M499, 500 points. It can be changed to latched area by setting parameters. M500~M999, M2000~M4095, 2596 points. It can be changed to non-latched area by setting parameters. Total is 4096 points For special M1000~M1999, 1000 points. Some are latched. Auxiliary Relay Function There are output coil and A, B contacts in auxiliary relay M and output relay Y. It is unlimited usage times in program. User can control loop by using auxiliary relay, but can t drive external load directly. There are three types divided by its characteristics. 1. Auxiliary relay for general : It will reset to OFF when power loss during running. Its state will be OFF when power on after power loss. 2. Auxiliary relay for latched : The state will be saved when power loss during running and the state when power on after power loss will be the same as the state before power loss. 3. Auxiliary relay for special : Each special auxiliary relay has its special function. Please don t use undefined auxiliary relay. Please refer to 2.10 Special relay and special register for each special auxiliary relay and 2.11 Functions of special auxiliary relay and special registers. 2.5 The Numbering and Function of Step Relay [S] The numbering of auxiliary relay (by decimal number): ES, EX, SS models: Initial latched S0~S9, 10 points. It is fixed to be latched area. Step relay S Zero point return latched S10~S19, 10 points. (use with IST command) It is fixed to be latched area. Total is 128 points Latched S20~S127, 108 points. It is fixed to be latched area. EP/SA Models: For initial S0~S9, 10 points. It is fixed to be non-latched area. For zero point S10~S19, 10 points. (use with IST command) It is fixed to be Step relay S return For general For latched non-latched area. S20~S511, 492 points. It is fixed to be non-latched area. S512~S895, 384 points. It can be changed to be non-latched area by parameters. Total is 1024 points For alarm S896~S1023, 128 points. It is fixed to be latched area. 2-12 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function EH Models: For initial For zero point return S0~S9, 10 points. It can be latched area by setting parameters. S10~S19, 10 points. (use with IST command). It can be latched area by setting parameters. Step relay S For general For latched S20~S499, 480 points. It can be latched area by setting parameters. S500~S899, 400 points. It can be non-latched area by setting parameters. Total is 1024 points For alarm S900~S1023, 124 points. It can be latched area by setting parameters. The function of step relay: Step relay S is the basic equipment of step ladder diagram and it can set process easily in PLC. In step ladder diagram (or call Sequential Function Chart, SFC), it should be used with command STL, REL and etc. There are 1024 points, S0~S1023, in step relay S. Like output relay Y, there are output coil and A, B contacts in each step relay S and unlimited usage times in program. But it can t drive external load directly. Step relay (S) can be used as general auxiliary relay when not use with step command. There are four types divided by its characteristics. 1. Initial step relay : S0~S9, 10 points. In Sequential Function Chart (SFC), it is the step point for initiating. 2. Zero point return step relay : S10~S19, 10 points. S10 S19 are for zero point return when using API 60 IST in program. If it can t use IST command, they will be used as general step relay. 3. General step relay : EP/SA model: S20~S511, 492 points. EH mode: S20~S499, 480 points. Those step points that are used as general in sequential function chart (SFC). They will be cleared when power loss after running. 4. Latched step relay : ES, EX, SS models: S20~S127, 108 points. EP models: S512~S895, 384points. EH models: S500~S899, 400 points. In sequential function chart (SFC), latched step relay will be saved when power loss after running. The state of power on after power loss will be the same as the sate before power loss. 5. Step relay for alarm : EP/SA models: S896~S1023, 128 points. EH models: S900~S1023, 124 points. The step relay for alarm uses with alarm drive command API 46 ANS to be the contact for alarm. It is used to record warning and eliminate external malfunction. 2.6 The Numbering and Function of Timer [T] The numbering of timer (by decimal number): ES, EX, SS models: Timer T 100ms for general T0~T63, 64 points 10ms for general T64~T126, 63 points (when M1028=On, it is 10ms. when M1028=Off, it is 100ms) 1ms for general T127, 1 points Total is 128 points DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-13
2 DVP-PLC Function EP/SA model: Timer T 100ms for general 100ms for accumulative 10ms for general 10ms for accumulative 1ms for accumulative T0~T199, 200 points. (T192~T199 are the timers for subroutine.) T250~T255, 6 points. It is fixed to be latched area. T200~T239, 40 points. T240~T245, 6 points. It is fixed to be latched area. T246~T249, 4 points. It is fixed to be latched area. Total is 256 points EH model: Timer T 100ms for general 100ms for accumulative 10ms for general 10ms for accumulative 1ms for accumulative T0~T199, 200 points. It can be latched area by setting parameters. (T192~T199 are the timers for subroutine.) T250~T255, 6 points. It is fixed to be latched area. T200~T239, 40 points. It can be latched area by setting parameters. T240~T245, 6 points. It is fixed to be latched area. T246~T249, 4 points. It is fixed to be latched area. Total is 256 points Timer function: The unit of timer is 1ms, 10ms and 100ms. The count method is count up. The output coil will be ON when the present value of timer equals to the settings. The setting is K in decimal number. Data register D can be also used as settings. The real setting time of timer = unit of timer * settings There are three types divided by these characteristics as follows. 1. General timer: ES/EP/SA Series Models EH Series Models : : General timer will count once when executing command END. Output coil will be On if timer attains when executing command TMR. General timer will count once when executing command TMR. Output coil will be On if timer attains when executing command TMR. T0 TMR T0 K100 Y0 10 sec When =On, timer T0 is counted up with 100ms. The output coil T0=On, when the present value of timer equals to setting (K100). When =Off or power off, timer T0 will be T0 present value K100 cleared to 0 and output coil T0 will be OFF. Y0 2. Accumulative timer: 2-14 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function ES/EP Series Models : EH Series Models : T250 Y0 General timer will count once when executing command END. Output coil will be On if timer attains when executing command TMR. General timer will count once when executing command TMR. Output coil will be On if timer attains when executing command TMR. TMR T250 K100 T1 T2 T1+T2=10sec When =On, timer T250 is counted up with 100ms. The output coil T0=On, when the present value of timer equals to settings (K100). If =Off or power off during counting, timer T250 pauses and keep on counting after =On. The present value counts up till the present value of timer equals to settings (K100), output coil T0=On. T250 Y0 present value K100 3. Timer for subroutine If timer is used in subroutine or have interrupt in subroutine, use timer T192~T194 for it. ES/EP Series Models : EH Series Models : General timer will count once when executing command END. Output coil will be On if timer attains when executing command TMR. General timer will count once when executing command TMR. Output coil will be On if timer attains when executing command TMR. If general timer is used in subroutine or interrupt to insert in subroutine and the subroutine won t be executed, timer can t count correctly. Designate method of settings: actual setting time of timer = unit * settings. 1. Designate constant K: Settings designates constant K directly 2. Designate indirectly D: Settings use data register D to be indirect designation The detail of timer: Beside timer used for subroutine, the flow chart of general timer is in the following: T0 input reflash TMR Y0 T0 K100 When =On, it starts to count. Timer will start when executing TMR command. If scan time is longer, same scan will count with plural timing pulse automatically. T0 counts to 10sec now, but contact isn On. contact T0 is On contact Y0=On 1st scan 2nd scan Nth scan (N+1)th scan From action above, the action since the coil is started to be ON in detail are in the following: T +T0 -α α : 1ms timer is 0.001 second, 10ms timer is 0.01 second, 100ms timer is 0.1 second T : Setting time of timer (second) T0 : Scan time (second) DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-15
2 DVP-PLC Function If contact is wrote prior to TMR command in program, it needs to add 2*T0 (two times scan time) in the worst situation. If timer setting is 0, output contact will be ON when TMR command is executed in the next time. 2.7 The Numbering and Function of Counter [C] The numbering of counter (by decimal number): ES, EX, SS model: Counter C 32 bits count up/down High speed counters C 16 bits count up for general 16 bits count up for latched 1-phase input 1-phase 2 inputs 2-phase inputs C0~C111, 112 points C112~C127, 16 points. it is always latched area C235~C238, C241, C242, C244, 7 points. It is always latched area C246, C247, C249, 3 points. It is always latched area C251, C252, C254, 3 points. It is always latched area Total is 141 points EP/SA models: Counter C 32 bits count up/down High speed counters C EH models: 16 bits count up for C0~C95, 96 points. It is fixed to be non-latched area. general 16 bits count up for C96~C199, 104 points. It can be non-latched area by setting latched parameters. 32 bits count up/down for C200~C215, 15 points. It is fixed to be non-latched area. general 32 bits count C216~C234, 19 points. It can be changed to be non-latched up/down for area by setting parameters. latched 1-phase input for C235~C242, C244, 9 points. It can be changed to be latched non-latched area by setting parameters. 1-phase 2 inputs C246, C247, C249, 3 points. It can be changed to be for latched non-latched area by setting parameters. 2-phase 2 inputs C251, C252, C254, 3 points. It can be changed to be for latched non-latched area by setting parameters. Total is 250 points Counter C 32 bits count up/down High-speed counters C 16-bit count up for general C0~C99, 100 points. It can be changed to be latched area by parameters. 16-bit count up for latched C100~C199, 100 points. It can be changed to be non-latched area by parameters. 32-bit count up/down for general C200~C219, 20 points. It can be changed to be latched area by parameters. 32-bit count up/down C220~C234, 15 points. It can be changed to be non-latched for latched area by parameters. Software 1-phase 1 C235~C240, 6 points. It can be changed to be non-latched input area by parameters. Hardware 1-phase 1 C241~C244, 4 points. It can be changed to be non-latched input area by parameters. Hardware 1-phase 2 C246~C249, 4 points. It can be changed to be non-latched inputs area by parameters. Hardware 1-phase 2 C251~C254, 4 points. It can be changed to be non-latched inputs area by parameters. Total is 253 points Features: 2-16 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function Item 16 bits counters 32 bits counters Type General General High speed Count direction Count up Count up/down Settings 0~32,767-2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647 Designate for Constant K or data register D Constant K or data register D (2 for designated) constant Present Counter will stop when attaining Counter will keep on counting when attaining settings value change settings Output When count attains settings, When count up attains settings, contact will be ON and latched. contact contact will be ON and latched. When count down attains settings, contact will reset to OFF. Reset action The present value will reset to 0 when RST command is executed and contact will reset to OFF. Present register 16 bits 32 bits Contact action After scanning, act together. After scanning, act together. Act immediately when count attains. It has no relation with scan period. Functions: When pulse input signal of counter is from OFF to ON, the present value of counter equals to settings and output coil is ON. Settings are decimal system and data register D can also be used as settings. 16-bit counters C0~C199: 1. Setting range of 16-bit counter is K0~K32,767. (K0 is the same as K1. output contact will be ON immediately at the first count. 2. General counter will be clear when PLC is power loss. If counter is latched, it will remember the value before power loss and keep on counting when power on after power loss. 3. If using MOV command, WPLSoft or HPP to send a value, which is large than setting to C0, register, at the next time that X1 is from Off to On, C0 counter contact will be On and present value will be set to the same as settings. 4. The setting of counter can use constant K or register D (not includes special data register D1000~D1999) to be indirect setting. 5. If using constant K to be setting, it can only be positive number but if setting is data register D, it can be positive/negative number. The next number that counter counts up from 32,767 is -32,768. : LD RST LD CNT LD C0 X1 C0 K5 C0 X1 C0 RST CNT Y0 C0 C0 K5 OUT Y0 DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-17
2 DVP-PLC Function 1. When =On, RST command is executed, C0 reset to 0 and output contact reset to OFF. 2. When X1 is from Off to On, counter will count up (add 1). X1 3. When counter C0 attains settings K5, C0 contact is ON and C0 = setting =K5. C0 won t accept X1 trigger signal and C0 remains K5. C0 present value 0 1 2 3 4 5 settings 0 Contacts Y0, C0 32-bit general addition/subtraction counters C200~C234: 1. The setting range of general 32-bit counter is K-2,147,483,648~K2,147,483,647. (not for DVP ES, EX and SS MPU) 2. Special auxiliary relay used to switch count up/down of general 32-bit addition/subtraction counters decided by M1200~M123. For example: When M1200=Off, C200 is for addition. When M1200=On, C200 is for subtraction. 3. Settings can be constant K or data register D (special data register D1000~D1999 is not included) and also can be positive/negative number. If using data register D, it will occupy two continuous data register. 4. General counter will be clear when PLC is power loss. If it is latched counter, counter will save the present value and the contacts state and keep on counting when power is on after power loss. 5. The next number will be -2,147,483,648 for counter to count up after 2,147,483,647. By the same way, once counter counts down to -2,147,483,648 the next value will be 2,147,483,647. : LD OUT X10 M1200 X10 M1200 LD X11 RST C200 LD X12 CNT C200 K-5 LD C200 OUT Y0 X11 X12 C200 RST DCNT Y0 C200 C200 K-5 2-18 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function 1. X10 drives M1200 to decide C200 is addition or subtraction. 2. When X11 is from Off to ON and RST command is executed, C200 will be clear to 0 and contact will be off. 3. When X12 is from Off to On, counter will add one (count up) or subtract 1 (count down). 4. When counter C200 is from K-6 to K-5, the contact of C200 is from Off to On. When counter C200 is from K-5 to K-6, the contact of C200 will be from On to Off. X10 X11 X12 C200 present value contacts Y0, C0 gradual increase 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 0 0 gradual decrease output contact is On before. -1-2 -3-4 -5-6 -7-8 gradual increase -3-4 -5-6 -7 0 5. If using MOV command, WPLSoft or HPP to send a value, which is large than setting to C0, register, at the next time that X1 is from Off to On, C0 counter contact will be On and present value will be set to the same as settings. 32-bit high-speed addition/subtraction counter C235~C254: 1. Setting range of 32-bit high-speed addition/subtraction counter is : K-2,147,483,648~K2,147,483,647. 2. The operation of 32-bit high-speed addition/subtraction counter C235~C244 is decided by the On/Off of special auxiliary relay M1235~M1244. For example: if M1235=Off, C235 is addition and if M1235=On, C235 is subtraction. 3. The operation of 32-bit high-speed addition/subtraction counter C246~C254 is decided by the On/Off of special auxiliary relay M1246~M1254. For example: if M1246=Off, C246 is addition and if M1246=On, C246 is subtraction. 4. The settings can be positive / negative numbers by using constant K or data register D (special data register D1000~D1999 is not included). If using data register D, the setting will occupy two continuous data register. 5. If using DMOV command, WPLSoft or HPP to send a value which is large than setting to any high-speed counter, at the next time that input point X of counter is from Off to On, this contact doesn t have any change and it will do addition and subtraction with present value. 6. The next number will be -2,147,483,648 for counter to count up after 2,147,483,647. By the same way, once counter counts down to -2,147,483,648, the next value will be 2,147,483,647. DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-19
2 DVP-PLC Function High-speed counter for ES / EX / SS series, 1-phase high-speed counter: 5KHz, total frequency: 40KHz. Type 1-phase input 1-phase 2 inputs 2-phase inputs Input C235 C236 C237 C238 C241 C242 C244 C246 C247 C249 C251 C252 C254 U/D U/D U/D U U U A A A X1 U/D R R D D D B B B X2 U/D U/D R R R R X3 U/D R S S S U: Increasing A: A phase input S: Start input D: Decreasing B: B phase input R: Clear input Input points and X1 can be used as high-speed counter and 1-phase can be up to 40KHz. High-speed counter for EP/SA series, 1-phase high-speed counter: 10KHz, total frequency: 40KHz. Type 1-phase input 1-phase 2 inputs 2-phase inputs Input C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 C240 C241 C242 C244 C246 C247 C249 C251 C252 C254 U/D U/D U/D U U U A A A X1 U/D R R D D D B B B X2 U/D U/D R R R R X3 U/D R S S S X4 U/D X5 U/D U: Increasing A: A phase input S: Start input D: Decreasing B: B phase input R: Clear input 1. Input point, X1 can be used as high-speed counter and 1-phase can be up to 20KHz 2. There are two functions for input points X5 When M1260=Off, C240 is general U/D high-speed counter. When M1260=On, it is Global reset for C235~C239. C235~C240 are high-speed counters for EH series and they are program interrupted 1-phase high-speed counter (10KHz) and total frequency is 20KHz. C241~ C254 are Hardware High Speed Counter, is called HHSC. pulse input frequency of HHSC0 and HHSC 1 can up to 100 KHz; HHSC2 and HHSC3 can up to 30KHz (both of single phase and AB phase). C241, C246, C251 share HHSC0 C242, C247, C252 share HHSC1 C243, C248, C253 share HHSC2 C244, C249, C254 share HHSC3 1. Each HHSC can be used for a number one time and it uses command DCNT to designate. 2. There are three modes for each HHSC: A. 1-phase input, it is called Pulse/Direction mode B. 1-phase 2 inputs, it is called CW/CCW mode C. 2-phase inputs, it is called AB phase mode 2-20 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function Type -interrupted 1-phase High-speed Counter Hardware High-speed Counter Type 1-phase input 1-phase input 1-phase 2 inputs 2-phase inputs C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 C240 C241 C242 C243 C244 C246 C247 C248 C249 C251 C252 C253 C254 Input U/D U/D U A X1 U/D D B X2 U/D R R R X3 U/D S S S X4 U/D U/D U A X5 U/D D B X6 R R R X7 S S S X10 U/D U A X11 D B X12 R R R X13 S S S X14 U/D U A X15 D B X16 R R R X17 S S S U: Increasing A: A phase input S: Start input D: Decreasing B: B phase input R: Clear input 3. System structure of hardware high-speed counter: A. There are Reset signal and Start signal of external inputs in HHSC0~3. It also can be Reset signal by setting special M, M1272 (HHSC0), M1274 (HHSC1), M1276 (HHSC2) and M1278 (HHSC3). And it can be Start signal by setting special M, M1273 (HHSC0), M1275 (HHSC1), M1277 (HHSC2) and M1279 (HHSC3). B. If input external control signals of R and S aren t used when using high-speed counter, the function of input signal can be closed by setting M1264/ M1266/ M1268/ M1270 and M1265 / M1267/ M1269/ M1271 to True. The corresponding external input can be used as general inputs. Please refer following for using. C. When using special M to be high-speed counter, control input with START and TRSET and the action will be affected with scan time. DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-21
2 DVP-PLC Function HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 X4 X10 X14 HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 X1 X5 X11 X15 Counting pulse Counting pulse U/D U A B D Current value of counter HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 Comparator Comparison value reached setting HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 D1225 D1226 D1227 D1228 Setting value:0~3 respectively represent Mode 1~4 (1~4 frequency mode) Counting mode selection Counting up/down flag Comparison value reached output DHSCS occupies one group setting value DHSCR occupies one group setting value DHSCZ occupies two groups setting value HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 C241 C242 C243 C244 M1241 M1242 M1243 M1244 HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 X2 X6 X12 X16 M1264 M1266 M1268 M1270 U/D mode setting flag AND OR Reset signal R HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 M1246 M1247 M1248 M1249 M1251 M1252 M1253 M1254 High speed comparison command DHSCS DHSCR DHSCZ Comparison value reached operation SET/RESET I010 ~ I060 interrupt counting value reset M1272 M1274 M1276 M1278 HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 X3 X7 X13 X17 M1265 M1267 M1269 M1271 AND OR Start signal S Interrupt inhibit flag I 010 I 020 M1289 M1290 I 030 M1291 I 040 M1292 I 050 M1293 I 060 M1294 M1273 M1275 M1277 M1279 4. Counting mode selection ES/EX/SS/EP high-speed counter uses special D1022 in 2-phase inputs counting mode to select double frequency mode. D1022 content will be loaded in at the first scan time when PLC switches from STOP to RUN. (ES/EX/SS series MPU (V5.5 and higher) supports this function. Device No. D1022 D1022=K1 D1022=K2 D1022=K4 Functions Double frequency setting of counter counting method Normal frequency mode Double frequency mode (factory setting) Four times frequency mode Double frequency mode (, means the action of counting) Counting mode 2-phase inputs 1 (normal frequency) A-phase B-phase Wave for counting mode counting up counting down 2-22 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function Counting mode Wave for counting mode A-phase frequency) 2 (double B-phase counting up counting down A-phase 4 (four times frequency) B-phase counting up counting down There are 1 to 4 times frequency for EH hardware high-speed counter (HHSC0~3) and set by Special D1225~D1228. Facotry setting is double frequency. Type 1-phase input 1-phase 2 inputs 2-phase 2 inputs Special D(settings) 1(normal frequency) 2(double frequency) 1(normal frequency) 2(double frequency) 1(normal frequency) 2(double frequency) 3(three times frequency) 4(four times frequency) U/D U/D FLAG U/D U/D FLAG U D U D A B A B A B A B Count up (+1) Count down (-1) 5. Device number and special registers for high-speed counter Device number M1150 M1151 M1152 Functions Declare DHSZ command to be used for multi-group setting comparison mode Multi-group setting comparison finishes to execute a cycle Declare DHSZ command to be used in frequency control mode DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-23
2 DVP-PLC Function Device number M1153 M1235 ~ M1244 M1246 ~ M1249 M1251 ~ M1254 M1264 M1265 M1266 M1267 M1268 M1269 M1270 M1271 M1272 M1273 M1274 M1275 M1276 M1277 M1278 M1279 M1289 M1290 M1291 M1292 M1293 M1294 M1312 M1313 M1314 M1315 M1316 M1317 M1320 M1321 M1322 M1323 M1324 M1325 M1326 M1327 M1328 M1329 M1330 M1331 Functions Frequency control finishes executing. C235 ~ C244 are count direction of high-speed counters. When M12 =Off, C2 is count up. When M12 =On, C2 is count down. C246 ~ C249, C251 ~ C254 are monitor count direction of high-speed counters. When C2 counts up, M12 =Off. When C2 count down, M12 =On. Disable external control input contact of Reset signal of HHSC0 Disable external control input contact of Start signal of HHSC0 Disable external control input contact of Reset signal of HHSC1 Disable external control input contact of Start signal of HHSC1 Disable external control input contact of Reset signal of HHSC2 Disable external control input contact of Start signal of HHSC2 Disable external control input contact of Reset signal of HHSC3 Disable external control input contact of Start signal of HHSC3 External control input contact of Start signal of HHSC0 External control input contact of Start signal of HHSC0 External control input contact of Reset signal of HHSC1 External control input contact of Start signal of HHSC1 External control input contact of Reset signal of HHSC2 External control input contact of Start signal of HHSC2 External control input contact of Reset signal of HHSC3 External control input contact of Start signal of HHSC3 Disable high-speed counter interrupt insert I010~I060 Disable EH series high-speed counter interrupt insert I010 Disable EH series high-speed counter interrupt insert I020 Disable EH series high-speed counter interrupt insert I030 Disable EH series high-speed counter interrupt insert I040 Disable EH series high-speed counter interrupt insert I050 C235 Start input point control C236 Start input point control C237 Start input point control C238 Start input point control C239 Start input point control C240 Start input point control C235 Reset input point control C236 Reset input point control C237 Reset input point control C238 Reset input point control C239 Reset input point control C240 Reset input point control C235 Start/Reset enable control C236 Start/Reset enable control C237 Start/Reset enable control C235 Start input point control C236 Start input point control C238 Start/Reset enable control 2-24 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function Device number M1332 M1333 D1022 D1150 D1151 D1152 D1153 D1225 D1226 D1227 D1228 D1225 ~ D1228 C239 Start/Reset enable control C240 Start/Reset enable control Functions ES/EX/SS/EP/SA models double frequency selection of AB phase counter The register to record the comparison item of settings comparison mode of multi-group The register to record the comparison item of frequency control mode Executing DHSZ command in frequency control mode, the high word of pulse output frequency. Executing DHSZ command in frequency control mode, the low word of pulse output frequency. First group counter setting, C241, C246 and C251 counting mode Second group counter setting, C242, C247 and C252 counting mode Third group counter setting, C243, C248 and C253 counting mode 4th group counter setting, C244, C249 and C254 counting mode HHSC0~ HHSC3 counting mode of EH hardware high-speed counter When setting to 1, it is normal frequency. Setting to 2 is double frequency.(factory setting) Setting to 3 is three times frequency and setting to 4 is four times frequency. 1-phase inputs high-speed counter: : LD RST LD OUT LD DCNT LD OUT X10 C241 X11 M1241 X12 C241 K5 C241 Y0 X10 X11 X12 C241 RST M1241 DCNT Y0 C241 C241 K5 1. X11 drives M1241 to decide C241 is addition or subtraction. 2. When X10=On and RST command is executed, clear C241 to 0 and reset output contact to off. 3. When X12=On, C241 receives count signal from and counter will count up (+1) or count down (-1). 4. When counter C241 attains settings K5, C241 will be ON. If there is still signal input for, it will keep on counting. X11,M1241 contact X10 X12 C241 present value 3 0 1 2 3 counting up 6 5 4 7 counting down 6 5 4 0 Y0, C241 contact DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-25
2 DVP-PLC Function 5. C241 for ES, EX, SS, EP series has external input Reset X1 signal. 6. C241 for EH series has external input Reset signal (X2), Start signal (X3). 7. EH series external input contact of clear signal of C241 (HHSC0) is disabled by M1264. External input contact of start signal is disabled by M1265. 8. EH series internal input contact of clear signal of C241 (HHSC0) is disabled by M1272. Internal input contact of start signal is disabled by M1273. 9. Counting mode (normal frequency or double frequency) of C246 (HHSC0) of EH series can be set by D1225. Factory setting is double frequency. 1-phase 2 inputs high-speed counters: : LD RST LD DCNT LD OUT X10 C246 X11 C246 K5 C246 Y0 X10 X11 C246 RST DCNT Y0 C246 C246 K5 1. When X10=On and RST command is executed, X10 clear C246 to 0 and reset output contact to off. X11 2. When X11=On, C246 receives count signal from input terminal and counter will count up count up X1 count down (+1) or receive count signal from X1 input terminal and counter will count down (-1). 3. When C246 attains settings K5, C246 will be on. After C246 is ON, if there is counter pulse input, C246 will keep on counting. C246 present value 3 0 Y0, C246 contact 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 5 0 4 4. C246 for EH series has external input Reset signal X2 or Start signal X3. 5. C246 (HHSC0) of EH series can be normal frequency or double frequency by setting D1225. Factory setting is double frequency. 6. EH series external input contact of clear signal ( R ) of C246 (HHSC0) is disabled by M1264. External input contact of start signal ( S ) is disabled by M1265. 7. EH series internal input contact of clear signal ( R ) of C246 (HHSC0) is disabled by M1272. Internal input contact of start signal ( S ) is disabled by M1273. 2-26 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function 2-phase AB input high-speed counter: : LD RST LD DCNT LD OUT X10 C251 X11 C251 K5 C251 Y0 X10 X11 C251 RST DCNT Y0 C251 C251 K5 1. When X11=On, RST command is executed and reset C251 to 0, output contact is reset to off. 2. C251 receives A phase counting signal of input terminal and B phase counting signal of X1 input terminal to execute add 1 (count up) or subtract 1 (count down) when X12=on. EH series can set different frequency for counting mode. 3. When counter C251 attains settings K5, C251 contact will be ON. After C251 is On, if there is counter pulse input, C251 will keep on counting. 4. For ES/EP/SA series, it can be set to normal frequency, double frequency or four times frequency by D1022 (counting mode setting). Factory setting is double frequency. 5. EH series C251 has external input reset signal X2 and start signal X3. 6. The counting mode (normal frequency, double frequency, third times frequency, four times frequency) of EH series C251 (HHSC0) can be set by D1225. Factory setting is double frequency. 7. EH series external input contact of clear signal of C246 (HHSC0) is disabled by M1264. External input contact of start signal is disabled by M1265. 8. EH series internal input contact of clear signal of C246 (HHSC0) is disabled by M1272. Internal input contact of start signal is disabled by M1273. ES/EX/SS, EP/SA series: X10 X11 A-phase B-phase X1 C251 present value 3 0 1 2 5 4 3 Counting up 6 5 4 3 2 Counting down 1 0 Y0, C251 contact DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-27
2 DVP-PLC Function EH series:(double frequency) X10 X11 A-phase B-phase X1 C251 present value 2 0 1 2 5 4 3 counting up 6 5 4 3 counting down 2 1 0 Y0. C251 contact 2.8 Register Number and Function [D], [E], [F] 2.8.1 Data register [D] It is used to store numerical data and data length is 16-bit (-32,768~+32,767). The left-most bit is sign bit. Two 16-bit registers also can be combined to a 32-bit register (The number for each 32-bit register will be (D0, D1), (D2, D3)..and the number for upper bit will be greater than low bit.) The left-most bit sign bit and the store range is -2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647. ES, EX, SS model: Data register D For general For latched * Special Index register E, F D0~D407, 408 points D408~D599, 192 points. (It is fixed to be latched area) D1000~D1143, 144 points. (Some are latched area) E(=D1028), F(=D1029), 2 points Total is 744 points EP/SA model: For general D0~D199, 200 points. (It is fixed to be unlatched area) Data register D For latched Special D200~D999, D2000~D4999, 3800 points. (It can be used to be unlatched area by setting parameter.) D1000~D1999, 1000 points. (Some are latched area) Total is 5000 points Index register E, F E0~E3, F0~F3, 8 points File register K0~K1599, MPU 1600 points. (It is fixed to be latched area) 2-28 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function EH model: Data register D File register For general For latched For special Index register E, F D0~D199, 200 points. It can be latched area by setting parameter D200~D999, D2000~D9999, 8800points. It can be non-latched area by setting parameter D1000~D1999, 1000 pints. Some are latched. E0~E7, F0~F7, 16 points. K0~K9999, MPU is 1000 points. (It is fixed to be latched area) Total is 10000 points There are five types of register which sorts by characters in the following: 1. General register : The data in register will be cleared to 0 when PLC switches from RUN to STOP or power is off. If M1033=On when PLC switches from Run to STOP, data won t be cleared but the data will be cleared to 0 when power is off. 2. Latched register : The data is the latched register won t be cleared when PLC is power off. If you want to clear the data in this register, you should use RST or ZRST command. 3. Special register : Each special register has the special definition and purpose. It is used to save system status, error messages, monitor state. Please refer to chapter 2.11 for detail. 4. Index register [E], [F] : Index registers are 16-bit registers. There are 2 points, E and F, for ES/EX/SS models. There are 8 points, E0~E3 and F0~F3, for EP models. There are 16 points, E0~E7 and F0~F7, for EH models. If you want to use index register to be 32-bit register, you should indicate E and at this moment F can t be used. 5. File register : There are 1600 file registers (K0~K1599) for EP/SA MPU and 10000 file registers (K0~K9,999) for EH MPU. There is no real device number for file register, you should execute read/write of file register by command API 147 MEMR, API 148 MEMW, peripheral device HPP or WPLSoft. 2.8.2 Index Register [E], [F] 16-bit 16-bit E0 F0 32-bit E0 F0 upper 16-bit lower 16-bit Index registers E, F are 16-bit data register, just the same as general data register. It can be wrote/read. It can be used as 32-bit register. But at this time, this register should be indicated to E and F can t be used. Otherwise, the data will be error. (It is recommend to use command DMOVP K0 E and clear E and F to 0 when power on. The combination of E and F when using as 32-bit register are: (E0, F0), (E1, F1) (E2, F2).(E7, F7) DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-29
2 DVP-PLC Function MOV K8 E0 When =On and E0=8, F0=14, D5E0=D(5+8)=D13, D10F0 =D(10+14) = D24, the content in D13 will be moved to D24. MOV K14 F0 MOV D5E0 D10F0 The function of Index register is the same as general operand. It can be used to move or compare and used to be index for byte device (KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D) and bit device (X, Y, M, S). For ES/EP/SA series, it can t be used for constant (K, H). But for EH series, it can be used for constant (K, H). ES/EX/SS models: E0, F0 2 points EP model: E0~E3, F0~F3, total is 8 points EH model: E0~E7, F0~F7, total is 16 points some commands don t support index function, please refer to chapter 5.4 for using index register E and F. When using command mode of WPLSoft to use constant (K,H) to be index register, it needs to use symbol @ : : MOV K10@E0 D0F0 2.8.3 File Register Function and Characteristics EP/SA/EH series will check following when PLC is power on or change from STOP RUN. 1. M1101 (if it starts file register function) 2. D1101 (the start number of file register of EP/SA series (K0~K1599), for EH series is K0~K9999) 3. D1102 (item number for reading, EP/SA series is K0~K1600 and EH series is K0~K10000) 4. D1103 (the address to save the reading data, the start address of designated file register D (K2000~K9999). It is used to decide if transferring file to designated register automatically. Note: The action which read from file register to data register D won t be executed when D1101 for EP/SA model is greater than 1600, D1101 for EH model is greater than 8,000 or the value of D1103 is less than 2,000 or greater than 9,999. When starting executing the action to read data from file register to data register, PLC will stop reading once the address of file register or data register D exceeds usage range. There are 1600 file registers for EP/SA models and 10000 file registers for EH models. There is no actual number for file register, therefore it should use command API 147 MEMR, API 148 MEMW or peripheral HPP02 and WPLSoft to execute the read/write of file register. If the address of file register for reading exceeds useful range, the data for reading will be 0. 2.9 Nest Level Pointer[N], Pointer[P], Interrupt Pointer [I] 2-30 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function ES, EX, SS models: Pointer N For master control nested N0~N7, 8 points P For CJ, CALL commands P0~P63, 64 points I Insert timer interrupt Interrupt Insert external interrupt Insert communication interrupt I6, 1 point ( =10~99ms, time base=1ms) (for Version 5.7) I001, I101, I201, I301, 4 points I150 Control point of master control nested Location pointer of CJ, CALL Location pointer of interrupt subroutine EP/SA models: Pointer N Master control nested N0~N7, 8 points The control point of master control nested P For CJ, CALL commands P0~P255, 256 points The location point of CJ, CALL Insert external interrupt I001, I101, I201, I301, I401, I501, total is 6 points I6, I7, 2 points ( =10~99ms, time Insert time interrupt base=1ms) I For interrupt Insert high-speed counter attained interrupt Insert communication interrupt I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, 6 points I150 The location point of interrupt subroutine. EH models: Pointer N Master control nested N0~N7, 8 points P For CJ, CALL commands P0~P255, 256 points I Insert external interrupt Master control nested control point The location pointer of CJ, CALL I00 (), I10 (X1), I20 (X2), I30 (X3), I40 (X4), I50 (X5), 6 points ( =1, rising-edge trigger, =0, falling-edge trigger ) I6, I7, I8, 2 points ( = 1~99ms, time base=1ms) Insert time interrupt I8, 1 points ( =0.1~9.9ms, time The location pointer of Interrupt base=0.1ms) Insert high-speed interrupt subroutine counter attained I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, 6 points interrupt Insert pulse I110, I120, I130, I140, 4 points interrupt Insert communication I150 interrupt Nest Level Pointer N: used with command MC and MCR. MC is master start command. When MC command is executed, the commands between MC and MCR will be executed normally. MC-MCR master command supports nested program structure and the maximum is 8 levels, which is numbered from N0 to N7. Refer to chapter3.7 for detail information. DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-31
2 DVP-PLC Function Pointer P: use with application commands API 00 CJ, API 01 CALL, API 02 SRET. Refer to chapter 5.5 commands CJ, CALL, SRET usage method for more information. CJ condition jump: 0 CJ P** P1 When =On, program will jump from 0 to N (designated label P1) and keep on executing P1 N X1 X2 Y1 Y2 without executing the address between 0 and N. When =Off, program will execute from 0 and keep on executing the followings. CJ command won t be executed at this time. CALL subroutine, SRET subroutine END: P** When is On, it will jump 20 CALL P2 Call subroutine P** to P2 to execute the X1 designated subroutine as 24 Y1 executing CALL FEND command. When executing SRET P2 Y0 command, return to (subroutine P2) subroutine address 24 to go on Y0 executing. SRET subroutine return Interrupt pointer I: It is used with application command API 04 EI, API 05DI, API 03 IRET. Refer to chapter 5.5 for more information. There are five functions below. Interrupt insert should be used with EI, interrupt insert enable, interrupt insert disable and IRET interrupt insert return, etc. 1. External interrupt insert : When input signal of input terminal ~X5 is triggered on rising-edge or falling-edge, it will interrupt present program and jump to the designated interrupt insert subroutine pointer I00 (), I10 (X1), I20 (X2), I30 (X3), I40 (X4), I50 (X5) to execute and return to previous address to execute when executing IRET command. That is due to special hardware circuit design of PLC MPU and is not affected by scan period. 2. Timer interrupt insert : It is special hardware circuit design in PLC MPU. It will stop present program and jump to the designated interrupt insert subroutine to execute automatically every a period time (can be set to 10ms~99ms). 3. Counter attained interrupt insert : The comparison command API 53 DHSCS of high-speed counter can designate to interrupt present program and jump to the designated interrupt insert subroutine to execute interrupt pointer I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060 when comparison attained. 2-32 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function 4. Pulse interrupt insert : Using pulse output command API 57 PLSY to send interrupt vector I130(corresponds to M1342) and I140(corresponds to M1343) at the same time when pulse output the first pulse. But it should start flag M1342 and M1343 first. And it also can set to send interrupt vector I110 (corresponds to M1340) and I120(corresponds to M1341) once pulse finishes to output the last pulse. 5. Communication interrupt insert : When using communication command RS, it can be set to have interrupt request when receiving specific charcters. Interrupt number is I150 and specific characters is set to low byte of D1168. When PLC connects to communication device and received data length is not the same, setting end character to D1168 and interrupt subroutine to I150. When PLC receives this end character, it will execute interrupt subroutine I150. 2.10 Special Auxiliary Relay and Special Register The kinds and functions of special auxiliary relay (Special M) and special registers (special D) are as shown in the following. Please notice that some equipment with the same number will be different to the different model. In the following chart, the meaning of column Attribute are: R means can only read. R/W means can read/write. - means can do nothing. # means system setting, user can read the detail explanation of the setting in the manual. * means can refer following for explanation. ES Off STOP RUN Special EP Function EX M SA EH Attribute Latched Factory setting SS On RUN STOP Normally open contact (a contact). This contact M1000* is ON when running and it is ON when the Off On Off R NO Off status is set to RUN. Normally OFF contact (b contact). This contact M1001* is OFF in running and it is OFF when the status On Off On R NO On is set to RUN. M1002* ON only for 1 scan after RUN. Initial pulse is contact a. It will get positive pulse in the RUN moment. Pulse width=scan period. Off On Off R NO Off M1003* OFF only for 1 scan after RUN. Initial pulse is contact a. It will get negative pulse in the RUN moment. Pulse width=scan period. On Off On R NO On M1004* On when error occurs Off Off - R NO Off Password of data backup memory card and M1005 Off Off - R NO Off MPU password don t match M1006 Data backup memory card isn t initial Off Off - R NO Off M1008* Monitor timer flag (ON: PLC WDT time out) Off Off - R NO Off M1009 System used - - - - - - - - - ES/EX/SS and EP/SA: PLSY Y0 mode M1010 selection. It is continuous output when it is ON. EH:PULSE will be output at the END. Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1011* 10ms clock pulse, 5ms On/5ms Off Off - - R NO Off M1012* 100ms clock pulse, 50ms On / 50ms Off Off - - R NO Off M1013* 1s clock pulse, 0.5s On / 0.5s Off Off - - R NO Off M1014* 1min clock pulse, 30s On / 30s Off Off - - R NO Off M1015* High-speed timer activates Off Off Off R/W NO Off When it is Off, it will display two right-most bits. M1016* When it is On, it will display (two right-most bits + 2000). Off - - R/W NO Off M1017* ±30 seconds adjustment Off - - R/W NO Off M1018 Flag for Radian/Degree, On for degree Off - - R/W NO Off M1019 * Cancle ~X17 input delay Off - - R/W NO Off DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-33
2 DVP-PLC Function ES Off STOP RUN Special EP Function EX M SA EH Attribute Latched Factory setting SS On RUN STOP M1020 Zero flag Off Off Off R NO Off M1021 Borrow flag Off Off Off R NO Off M1022 Carry flag Off Off Off R NO Off M1023 PLSY Y1 mode selection, it is continuous output when it is ON. Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1024 System used flag - - - - - - - - - If PLC receive illegal communication request M1025 when HPP, PC or HMI connects to PLC, M1025 Off - - R NO Off will be set and save the error code in D1025. M1026 EP/EH: Startup flag of RAMP module Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1027 PR output flag Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1028 10ms/100ms time switch flag. The base setting flag of T64~T126 is 100ms, when timer is OFF and the base setting flag is 10ms when it is ON. Off - - R/W NO Off ES/EX/SS and EP/SA: Pulse output Y0 of PLSY and PLSR command M1029* completed or other relative command completed EH: The first group pulse CH0 (Y0, Y1) output complete executing or other relative command completed Off Off Off R NO Off ES/EX/SS and EP/SA: Pulse output Y1 of PLSY and PLSR command M1030* completed EH: The second group pulse CH1 (Y2, Y3) output complete executing Off Off Off R NO Off M1031* Clear all non-latched memory Off - - R/W NO Off M1032* Clear all latched memory Off - - R/W NO Off M1033* Memory latched at STOP Off - - R/W NO Off M1034* All Y outputs disable Off - - R/W NO Off Start X input point to be RUN/STOP switch and M1035* correspond to D1035 (for EP/SA models, only - - - R/W YES Off X7 can be used) M1039* Constant scan mode Off - - R/W NO Off M1040 Step transition inhibits Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1041 Step transition starts Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1042 Start pulse Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1043 Zero point return completed Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1044 Zero point condition Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1045 All outputs clear inhibit Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1046 STL state setting (On) Off - - R NO Off M1047 STL monitor enable Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1048 Flag for alarm point state Off - - R NO Off M1049 Monitor flag for alarm point Off - - R/W NO Off M1050 I001 masked Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1051 I101 masked Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1052 I201 masked Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1053 I301 masked Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1054 I401 masked Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1055 I501 masked Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1056 I6 masked Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1057 I7 masked Off Off Off R/W NO Off 2-34 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function ES Off STOP RUN Special EP Function EX M SA EH Attribute Latched Factory setting SS On RUN STOP M1059 I010~I060 masked Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1060 System error message 1 Off - - R NO Off M1061 System error message 2 Off - - R NO Off M1062 System error message 3 Off - - R NO Off M1063 System error message 4 Off - - R NO Off M1064 Operator error Off Off - R NO Off M1065 Syntax error Off Off - R NO Off M1066 error Off Off - R NO Off M1067* error Off Off - R NO Off M1068* Execution error locked (D1068) Off Off - R NO Off ES/EX/SS and EP/SA: time pulse unit switch of PWM command Y1. When it is ON, the time pulse unit is 100us and when it is OFF, the time M1070 pulse unit is 1ms. EH: Unit setting for PWM command of the 1 st pulse CH0 (Y0, Y1). On is 100us and Off is 1ms. Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1071 Unit setting for PWM command of the 2nd pulse CH1 (Y2, Y3). On is 100us and Off is 1ms. Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1072 Execute PLC RUN command Off - - R/W NO Off M1073 System used - - - - - - - - - M1074 System used - - - - - - - - - M1075* FLASH write error Off - - R NO Off M1076* Real time clock error Off - - R NO Off M1077 Battery voltage is too low or malfunction Off - - R NO Off M1078 PLSY command Y0 pulse output stop immediately flag Off - - R/W NO Off M1079 PLSY command Y1 pulse output stop immediately flag Off - - R/W NO Off M1080 System used - - - - - - - - - M1081 FLT command change direction flag Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1083 Enable/Disable execute interrupt program in FROM/TO mode Off - - R/W NO Off M1088 Matrix compared flag. If the result is the same, M1088 = 1. If the result is different, M1088 = 0. Off Off - R/W NO Off M1089 Matrix search start flag. Compare from the first bit and M1090=1. Off Off - R NO Off M1090 Matrix search start flag. Compare from the first bit and M1090=1. Off Off - R NO Off M1091 Matrix finding bit flag. When find it, it will stop comparing and M1091=1. Off Off - R NO Off M1092 Matrix pointer error flag. When pointer Pr Off Off exceeds this range, M1092=1. - R NO Off M1093 Matrix pointer increases flag. It will add 1 to Off Off present pointer. - R/W NO Off M1094 Matrix pointer clears flag. It will clear present Off Off pointer to 0. - R/W NO Off M1095 Carry flag for matrix rotate/shift output Off Off - R NO Off M1096 Complement flag for matric shift input Off Off - R/W NO Off M1097 Direction flag for matrix rotate/shift Off Off - R/W NO Off M1098 Matrix count bit 0 or 1 flag Off Off - R/W NO Off M1099 It is On when matrix count result 0 Off Off - R/W NO Off DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-35
2 DVP-PLC Function ES Off STOP RUN Special EP Function EX M SA EH Attribute Latched Factory setting SS On RUN STOP M1100 A sampling flag of SPD command Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1101* To decide whether start file register or not - - - R/W Yes Off M1104* DIP switch function card SW1 state Off Off - R NO Off M1105* DIP switch function card SW2 state Off Off - R NO Off M1106* DIP switch function card SW3 state Off Off - R NO Off M1107* DIP switch function card SW4 state Off Off - R NO Off M1108* DIP switch function card SW5 state Off Off - R NO Off M1109* DIP switch function card SW6 state Off Off - R NO Off M1110* DIP switch function card SW7 state Off Off - R NO Off M1111* DIP switch function card SW8 state Off Off - R NO Off M1112* TR1 transistor output Off Off - R NO Off M1113* TR2 transistor output Off Off - R NO Off M1115* Start switch for accel/decel pulse output Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1116* Acceleration flag for accel/decel pulse output Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1117* Target attained frequency flag Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1118* Deceleration flag for accel/decel pulse output Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1119* Completed function flag Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1120 Communication protocol holding Off - - R/W NO Off M1121 Transmission ready Off Off Off R NO Off M1122 Sending request Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1123 Receiving completed Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1124 Receiving wait Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1125 Communication reset Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1126 STX/ETX user/system selection Off - - R/W NO Off M1127 MODRD/RDST/MODRW commands. Data receivingcompleted. Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1128 Transmit/Receive Indication Off - - R/W NO Off M1129 Receiving time out Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1130 STX/ETX selection Off - - R/W NO Off M1131 MODRD/RDST/MODRW, M1131=On when data convert to HEX Off Off Off R NO Off M1133* Special high-speed pulse (50KHz) output switch (On is start) Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1134* Special high-speed pulse (50KHz) output. On is continuous output switch Off Off - R/W NO Off M1135* Output pulse numbers attained flag Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1140 MODRD/MODWR/MODRW data received error Off Off Off R NO Off M1141 MODRD/MODWR/MODRW command error Off Off Off R NO Off M1142 VFD-A command data received error Off Off Off R NO Off M1143 ASCII/RTU mode selections (use with MODRD / MODWR / MODRW) (it is Off when in ASCII Off Off Off R/W NO Off mode and it is On when in RTU) M1144* Ouput start switch of accel/decel pulse output function of adjustable slope Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1145* Acceleration flag of accel/decel pulse output function of adjustable slope Off Off - R NO Off M1146* Target attained frequency flag of accel/decel pulse output function of adjustable slope Off Off - R NO Off M1147* Deceleration flag of accel/decel pulse output Off Off - R NO Off 2-36 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function Special M Function function of adjustable slope DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-37 ES EX SS Off EP SA EH On STOP RUN RUN STOP Attribute Latched Factory setting M1148* Complete function flag of accel/decel pulse output function of adjustable slope Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1149* Stop counting temporality flag of accel/decel pulse output function of adjustable slope Off Off - R/W NO Off M1150 Declare DHSZ command used for multi-group settings comparison mode Off - - R/W NO Off M1151 Finish executing multi-group settings comparison mode Off Off Off R NO Off M1152 Declare DHSZ command used to be frequency control mode Off - - R/W NO Off M1153 Finish executing frequency control mode Off Off Off R NO Off Start designated deceleration function flag of M1154* accel/decel pulse output function of adjustable Off - - R/W NO Off slope M1161 8/16 bits mode (it is On when in 8 bits mode) Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1167 HKY input is 16 bits mode Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1168 SMOV working mode indication Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1170* Start executing single step Off - - R/W NO Off M1171* Execute single step Off - - R/W NO Off M1172* 2-phase pulse output switch (on is start) Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1173* On is continuous output switch Off - - R/W NO Off M1174* Output pulse number attained flag Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1178* VR0 potentiometer starts Off - - R/W NO Off M1179* VR1 potentiometer starts Off - - R/W NO Off M1196 System used - - - - - - - - - M1197 System used - - - - - - - - - M1198 System used - - - - - - - - - M1199 System used - - - - - - - - - M1200 C200 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1201 C201 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1202 C202 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1203 C203 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1204 C204 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1205 C205 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1206 C206 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1207 C207 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1208 C208 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1209 C209 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1210 C210 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1211 C211 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1212 C212 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1213 C213 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off
2 DVP-PLC Function Special M Function ES EX SS Off EP SA EH On STOP RUN RUN STOP Attribute Latched Factory setting M1214 C214 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1215 C215 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1216 C216 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1217 C217 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1218 C218 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1219 C219 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1220 C220 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1221 C221 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1222 C222 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1223 C223 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1224 C224 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1225 C225 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1226 C226 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1227 C227 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1228 C228 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1229 C229 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1230 C230 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1231 C231 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1232 C232 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1233 C233 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1234 C234 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1235 C235 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1236 C236 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1237 C237 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1238 C238 counting mode (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1239 C239 counter mode setting (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1240 C240 counter mode setting (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1241 C241 counter mode setting (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1242 C242 counter mode setting (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1243 C243 counter mode setting (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1244 C244 counter mode setting (on: count down) Off - - R/W NO Off M1246 C246 counter monitor (on: count down) Off - - R NO Off M1247 C247 counter monitor (on: count down) Off - - R NO Off M1248 C247 counter monitor (on: count down) Off - - R NO Off M1249 C249 counter monitor (on: count down) Off - - R NO Off M1251 C251 counter monitor (on: count down) Off - - R NO Off M1252 C252 counter monitor (on: count down) Off - - R NO Off M1253 C254 counter monitor (on: count down) Off - - R NO Off 2-38 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function Special M Function ES EX SS Off EP SA EH On STOP RUN RUN STOP Attribute Latched Factory setting M1254 C254 counter monitor (on: count down) Off - - R NO Off M1256 System used - - - - - - - - - M1258 Swap Y0 and Y1 pulse output signal Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1259 Swap Y2 and Y3 pulse output signal Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1260 M1261 Let X5 be the reset input signal of all high-speed counter DHSCR command High-speed comparison flag Off - - R/W NO Off Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1264 HHSC0 Start function enable Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1265 HHSC0 Reset function enable Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1266 HHSC1 Start function enable Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1267 HHSC1 Reset function enable Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1268 HHSC2 Start function enable Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1269 HHSC2 Reset function enable Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1270 HHSC3 Start function enable Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1271 HHSC3 Reset function enable Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1272 HHSC0 Start control Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1273 HHSC0 Reset control Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1274 HHSC1 Start control Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1275 HHSC1 Reset control Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1276 HHSC2 Start control Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1277 HHSC2 Reset control Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1278 HHSC3 Start control Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1279 HHSC3 Reset control Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1280 I00 flag disable Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1281 I10 flag disable Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1282 I20 flag disable Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1283 I30 flag disable Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1284 I40 flag disable Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1285 I50 flag disable Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1286 I6 flag disable Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1287 I7 flag disable Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1288 I8 flag disable Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1289 I010 flag disable Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1290 I020 flag disable Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1291 I030 flag disable Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1292 I040 flag disable Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1293 I050 flag disable Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1294 I060 flag disable Off Off Off R/W NO Off DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-39
2 DVP-PLC Function Special M Function ES EX SS Off EP SA EH On STOP RUN RUN STOP Attribute Latched Factory setting M1303 Swap high and low byte Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1304* X input point can decide to be On-Off Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1305 Factory setting Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1312 C235 Start input point control Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1313 C236 Start input point control Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1314 C237 Start input point control Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1315 C238 Start input point control Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1316 C239 Start input point control Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1317 C240 Start input point control Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1320 C235 Reset input point control Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1321 C236 Reset input point control Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1322 C237 Reset input point control Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1323 C238 Reset input point control Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1324 C239 Reset input point control Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1325 C240 Reset input point control Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1328 C235 Start/Reset function enable Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1329 C236 Start/Reset function enable Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1330 C237 Start/Reset function enable Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1331 C238 Start/Reset function enable Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1332 C239 Start/Reset function enable Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1333 C240 Start/Reset function enable Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1334 Stop CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse output temporarily Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1335 Stop CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse output temporarily Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1336 CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse send flag Off Off Off R NO Off M1337 CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse send flag Off Off Off R NO Off M1338 Start CH0 (Y0, Y1) offset pulse flag Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1339 Start CH1 (Y2, Y3) offset pulse flag Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1340 M1341 M1342 M1343 To have interrupt (I110) after finishing sending CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse To have interrupt (I120) after finishing sending CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse To have interrupt (I130) at the same time that sending CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse To have interrupt (I140) at the same time that sending CH1 (Y2,Y3) pulse Off Off Off R/W NO Off Off Off Off R/W NO Off Off Off Off R/W NO Off Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1344 Start CH0 (Y0, Y1) compensation pulse flag Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1345 Start CH1 (Y2, Y3) compensation pulse flag Off Off Off R/W NO Off M1350* PLC LINK start flag Off - - R/W NO Off M1351* Start PLC LINK automatically or by manual Off - - R/W NO Off M1360* PLC LINK ID 1 exists Off - - R NO Off M1361* PLC LINK ID 2 exists Off - - R NO Off 2-40 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function Special M Function DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-41 ES EX SS Off EP SA EH On STOP RUN RUN STOP Attribute Latched Factory setting M1362* PLC LINK ID 3 exists Off - - R NO Off M1363* PLC LINK ID 4 exists Off - - R NO Off M1364* PLC LINK ID 5 exists Off - - R NO Off M1365* PLC LINK ID 6 exists Off - - R NO Off M1366* PLC LINK ID 7 exists Off - - R NO Off M1367* PLC LINK ID 8 exists Off - - R NO Off M1368* PLC LINK ID 9 exists Off - - R NO Off M1369* PLC LINK ID 10 exists Off - - R NO Off M1370* PLC LINK ID 11 exists Off - - R NO Off M1371* PLC LINK ID 12 exists Off - - R NO Off M1372* PLC LINK ID 13 exists Off - - R NO Off M1373* PLC LINK ID 14 exists Off - - R NO Off M1374* PLC LINK ID 15 exists Off - - R NO Off M1375* PLC LINK ID 16 exists Off - - R NO Off M1376* PLC LINK ID 1 acts Off - - R NO Off M1377* PLC LINK ID 2 acts Off - - R NO Off M1378* PLC LINK ID 3 acts Off - - R NO Off M1379* PLC LINK ID 4 acts Off - - R NO Off M1380* PLC LINK ID 5 acts Off - - R NO Off M1381* PLC LINK ID 6 acts Off - - R NO Off M1382* PLC LINK ID 7 acts Off - - R NO Off M1383* PLC LINK ID 8 acts Off - - R NO Off M1384* PLC LINK ID 9 acts Off - - R NO Off M1385* PLC LINK ID 10 acts Off - - R NO Off M1386* PLC LINK ID 11 acts Off - - R NO Off M1387* PLC LINK ID 12 acts Off - - R NO Off M1388* PLC LINK ID 13 acts Off - - R NO Off M1389* PLC LINK ID 14 acts Off - - R NO Off M1390* PLC LINK ID 15 acts Off - - R NO Off M1391* PLC LINK ID 16 acts Off - - R NO Off M1392* PLC LINK ID 1 ERROR Off - - R NO Off M1393* PLC LINK ID 2 ERROR Off - - R NO Off M1394* PLC LINK ID 3 ERROR Off - - R NO Off M1395* PLC LINK ID 4 ERROR Off - - R NO Off M1396* PLC LINK ID 5 ERROR Off - - R NO Off M1397* PLC LINK ID 6 ERROR Off - - R NO Off M1398* PLC LINK ID 7 ERROR Off - - R NO Off M1399* PLC LINK ID 8 ERROR Off - - R NO Off
2 DVP-PLC Function Special M Function ES EX SS Off EP SA EH On STOP RUN RUN STOP Attribute Latched Factory setting M1400* PLC LINK ID 9 ERROR Off - - R NO Off M1401* PLC LINK ID 10 ERROR Off - - R NO Off M1402* PLC LINK ID 11 ERROR Off - - R NO Off M1403* PLC LINK ID 12 ERROR Off - - R NO Off M1404* PLC LINK ID 13 ERROR Off - - R NO Off M1405* PLC LINK ID 14 ERROR Off - - R NO Off M1406* PLC LINK ID 15 ERROR Off - - R NO Off M1407* PLC LINK ID 16 ERROR Off - - R NO Off M1408* PLC LINK ID 1 read completed Off - - R NO Off M1409* PLC LINK ID 2 read completed Off - - R NO Off M1410* PLC LINK ID 3 read completed Off - - R NO Off M1411* PLC LINK ID 4 read completed Off - - R NO Off M1412* PLC LINK ID 5 read completed Off - - R NO Off M1413* PLC LINK ID 6 read completed Off - - R NO Off M1414* PLC LINK ID 7 read completed Off - - R NO Off M1415* PLC LINK ID 8 read completed Off - - R NO Off M1416* PLC LINK ID 9 read completed Off - - R NO Off M1417* PLC LINK ID 10 read completed Off - - R NO Off M1418* PLC LINK ID 11 read completed Off - - R NO Off M1419* PLC LINK ID 12 read completed Off - - R NO Off M1420* PLC LINK ID 13 read completed Off - - R NO Off M1421* PLC LINK ID 14 read completed Off - - R NO Off M1422* PLC LINK ID 15 read completed Off - - R NO Off M1423* PLC LINK ID 16 read completed Off - - R NO Off M1424* PLC LINK ID 1 write completed Off - - R NO Off M1425* PLC LINK ID 2 write completed Off - - R NO Off M1426* PLC LINK ID 3 write completed Off - - R NO Off M1427* PLC LINK ID 4 write completed Off - - R NO Off M1428* PLC LINK ID 5 write completed Off - - R NO Off M1429* PLC LINK ID 6 write completed Off - - R NO Off M1430* PLC LINK ID 7 write completed Off - - R NO Off M1431* PLC LINK ID 8 write completed Off - - R NO Off M1432* PLC LINK ID 9 write completed Off - - R NO Off M1433* PLC LINK ID 10 write completed Off - - R NO Off M1434* PLC LINK ID 11 write completed Off - - R NO Off M1435* PLC LINK ID 12 write completed Off - - R NO Off M1436* PLC LINK ID 13 write completed Off - - R NO Off M1437* PLC LINK ID 14 write completed Off - - R NO Off 2-42 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function Special M Function ES EX SS Off EP SA EH On STOP RUN RUN STOP Attribute Latched Factory setting M1438* PLC LINK ID 15 write completed Off - - R NO Off M1439* PLC LINK ID 16 write completed Off - - R NO Off Special D Function ES EP EX SA EH SS DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-43 Off On STOP RUN RUN Attribute Latched STOP D1000* Watchdog timer (WDT) value (Unit: 1ms) 200 - - R/W NO 200 D1001 DVP model number+memory capacity / type (user can read PLC program version from this register. For example, D1001 = H XX27 means version 2.7. When reading from HPP it will display Knnnnn and you can convert it to hexadecimal number by pressing <H> key. Factory setting - - - R NO # D1002* capacity - - - R NO # D1003 Sum of program memory (sum of the PLC internal program memory. User can identify the content of PLC control program by this register) - - - R NO # D1004* Check code for grammar 0 0 - R NO 0 D1005 System used - - - - - - - - - D1008* STEP address when WDT timer is ON 0 - - R NO 0 D1010* Present scan time (Unit: 0.1ms) 0 0 0 R NO 0 D1011* Minimum scan time (Unit: 0.1ms) 0 0 0 R NO 0 D1012* Maximum scan time (Unit: 0.1ms) 0 0 0 R NO 0 D1015* 0~32,767(unit: 0.1ms) addition type of high-speed connection timer 0 - - R/W NO 0 D1018* πpi (Low byte) H 0FDB H 0FDB H 0FDB R/W NO H 0FDB D1019* πpi(high byte) H 4049` H 4049` H 4049` R/W NO H 4049` ES/EX/SS and EP/SA: ~X7 input filter (unit: ms) D1020* EH: ~X17 input filter (unit: ms) 10 - - R/W NO 10 ES/EX/SS and EP/SA: X10~X17 input delay D1021* setting (unit: ms) EH: X20~X377 input filter (unit: ms) 10 - - R/W NO 10 D1022 Double frequency selection for AB phase counter of ES/EX/SS and EP/SA models 0 - - R/W NO 0 D1024 System used flag - - - - - - - - - D1025* Communication error code 0 - - R NO 0 D1028 Index register E0 0 0 0 R/W NO 0 D1029 Index register F0 0 0 0 R/W NO 0 D1030 Output numbers of Y0 pulse (Low word) 0 - - R NO 0 D1031 Output numbers of Y0 pulse (High word) 0 - - R NO 0 D1032 Output numbers of Y1 pulse (Low word) 0 - - R NO 0 D1033 Output numbers of Y1 pulse (High word) 0 - - R NO 0 D1035* Set the number of X input point of RUN/STOP 0 - - R/W NO 0 D1037 HKY command scan time setting, unit: 1ms - - - R/W YES 500 D1038* When PLC MPU is slave, the setting of data response delay time. Time unit is 0.1ms. 0 - - R/W NO 0
2 DVP-PLC Function Special D Function ES EP EX SA EH SS Off On STOP RUN RUN Attribute Latched STOP D1039* Constant scan time (ms) 0 - - R/W NO 0 D1040 On state number 1 of STEP point S 0 - - R NO 0 D1041 On state number 2 of STEP point S 0 - - R NO 0 D1042 On state number 3 of STEP point S 0 - - R NO 0 D1043 On state number 4 of STEP point S 0 - - R NO 0 D1044 On state number 5 of STEP point S 0 - - R NO 0 D1045 On state number 6 of STEP point S 0 - - R NO 0 D1046 On state number 7 of STEP point S 0 - - R NO 0 D1047 On state number 8 of STEP point S 0 - - R NO 0 D1049 On number of alarm point 0 - - R NO 0 Factory setting D1050 D1055 PLC will automatically convert the ASCII data saved in D1070~D1085 to HEX. 0 - - R NO 0 Present value of EX MPU analog input channel 0 D1056* (CH0) and EP/EH MPU AD card channel 0 (CH0) 0 - - R NO 0 Present value of EX MPU analog input channel 1 D1057* (CH1) and EP/EH MPU AD card channel 1(CH1) 0 - - R NO 0 Present value of EX MPU analog input channel 2 D1058* (CH2) 0 - - R NO 0 Present value of EX MPU analog input channel 3 D1059* (CH3) 0 - - R NO 0 D1061 System used flag - - - - - - - - - D1065 System used flag - - - - - - - - - D1066 System used flag - - - - - - - - - D1067* Algorithm error code 0 - - R NO 0 D1068* Lock the algorithm error address 0 - - R NO 0 D1069 D1070 D1085 D1089 D1099 Step number of errors associated with flags M1065~M1067 When the PLC built-in RS-485 communication command receives feedback signals from receiver. The signals will be saved in the registers D1070~D1085. User can use the contents saved in the registers to check the feedback data. When the PLC built-in RS-485 communication command is executed, the transmitting signals will be stored in the registers D1089~D1099. User can use the contents saved in registers to check the feedback data. 0 - - R NO 0 0 - - R NO 0 0 - - R NO 0 D1101* Start address of file register 0 - - R/W Yes 0 D1102* Copy numbers of file register 1600 - - R/W Yes 1600 Set start D number for file register to store (the D1103* 2000 number should be large than 2000) - - R/W Yes 2000 Parameter index for Accel/Decel pulse output Y0 D1104* (corresponds to device D) 0 0 - R/W NO 0 Average of EX series analog input channel 0 (CH D1110* 0) and EP/EH series DA card channel 0 (CH0) 0 - - R NO 0 Average of EX series analog input channel 1 (CH D1111* 1) and EP/EH series DA card channel 1 (CH1) 0 - - R NO 0 2-44 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function Special D Function ES EP EX SA EH SS Off On STOP RUN RUN Attribute Latched STOP Average of EX series analog input channel 2 (CH D1112* 2) 0 - - R NO 0 Average of EX series analog input channel 3 (CH D1113* 3) 0 - - R NO 0 EX series analog output channel 0 (CH 0) and D1116* EP/EH series DA card channel 0 (CH0) 0 - - R/W NO 0 EX series analog output channel 1 (CH 1) and D1117* EP/EH series DA card channel 0 (CH0) 0 - - R/W NO 0 For EX model only. It is the filter wave time setting between the A/D conversions, and with the default D1118* setting as 0 and the unit as 1ms, all will be 5 - - R/W NO 5 regarded as 5ms if D1118<=5. D1119 System used - - - - - - - - - D1120 RS-485 communication protocol H 86 - - R/W NO H 86 D1121 PLC communication address (the address that save PLC communication address, it is latched) Factory setting - - - R/W Yes 1 D1122 Residual words of transmitting data 0 0 0 R NO 0 D1123 Residual words of receiving data 0 0 0 R NO 0 D1124 Start character definition (STX) H 3A - - R/W NO H 3A D1125 First ending character definition (EXT1) H 0D - - R/W NO H 0D D1126 Second ending character definition (EXT2) H 0A - - R/W NO H 0A D1129 RS-485 time-out setting (ms) 0 - - R/W NO 0 D1130 MODBUS return error code record 0 - - R NO 0 D1133* Special high-speed pulse output register (D) index 0 - - R/W NO 0 D1137* Address of operator error occurs 0 0 - R NO 0 Connection number of BCD module expansion D1139* 0 - - R NO 0 unit (the maximum is two units) Special expansion module number, maximum is 8 D1140* 0 - - R NO 0 units D1141 System used - - - - - - - - - D1142 Input points (X) of expansion unit 0 - - R NO 0 D1143 Output points (Y) of expansion unit 0 - - R NO 0 D1144* Parameter index for Accel/Decel pulse output of adjustable slope (corresponds to component D) 0 - - R/W NO 0 D1145* Connection number of KEY module expansion unit 0 - - R NO 0 D1146* Connection number of DISP module expansion unit 0 - - R NO 0 D1148 System used - - - - - - - - - D1149 D1150 Memory card type: 0: no card, 1: RS-232, TS-01, RS-422, 4: potentiometer switch, 5: DIP switch, 6: transitor output card, 7: high-speed pulse output card, 8: 2AD card, 9: 2DA card Table count register in multi-group setting comparison mode - - - R NO 0 0 0 0 R NO 0 D1151 Table count register in frequency control mode 0 0 0 R NO 0 D1152 The change value of high word of DHSZ D 0 0 0 R NO 0 D1153 The change value of low word of DHSZ D 0 0 0 R NO 0 DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-45
2 DVP-PLC Function Special D D1154* D1155* D1156 D1165 Function Recommended Interval of accelerated time (10~32767 ms) of Accel/Decel pulse output of adjustable slope Recommended Interval of decelerated time (-1~ -32700 ms) of Accel/Decel pulse output of adjustable slope Special D that indicated by RTMU command (K0~K9) ES EP EX SA EH SS Off On STOP RUN RUN Attribute Latched STOP Factory setting 200 - - R/W NO 200-1000 - - R/W NO -1000 0 - - R/W NO 0 D1170* PC value when executing single step 0 0 0 R NO 0 D1172* 2-phase pulse output frequency (12Hz~20KHz) 0 - - R/W NO 0 D1173* 2-phase pulse output mode selection (K1and K2) 0 - - R/W NO 0 Target number for 2-phase pulse outputs (low D1174* 16-bit) Target number for 2-phase pulse outputs (high D1175* 16-bit) Present output number of 2-phase pulse (low D1176* 16-bit) Present output number of 2-phase pulse (high D1177* 16-bit) 0 - - R/W NO 0 0 - - R/W NO 0 0 - - R/W NO 0 0 - - R/W NO 0 D1178* VR0 value 0 - - R NO 0 D1179* VR1 value 0 - - R NO 0 D1182 Pointer register E1 0 0 0 R/W NO 0 D1183 Pointer register F1 0 0 0 R/W NO 0 D1184 Pointer register E2 0 0 0 R/W NO 0 D1185 Pointer register F2 0 0 0 R/W NO 0 D1186 Pointer register E3 0 0 0 R/W NO 0 D1187 Pointer register F3 0 0 0 R/W NO 0 D1188 Pointer register E4 0 0 0 R/W NO 0 D1189 Pointer register F4 0 0 0 R/W NO 0 D1190 Pointer register E5 0 0 0 R/W NO 0 D1191 Pointer register F5 0 0 0 R/W NO 0 D1192 Pointer register E6 0 0 0 R/W NO 0 D1193 Pointer register F6 0 0 0 R/W NO 0 D1194 Pointer register E7 0 0 0 R/W NO 0 D1195 Pointer register F7 0 0 0 R/W NO 0 D1196 System used - - - - - - - - - D1197 System used - - - - - - - - - D1198 System used - - - - - - - - - D1199 System used - - - - - - - - - D1200* Start address of M0~M999 auxiliary relay latched - - - R/W Yes # D1201* End address of M0~M999 auxiliary relay latched - - - R/W Yes 999 D1202* Start address of M2000~M4095 auxiliary relay latched - - - R/W Yes 2000 2-46 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function Special D D1203* Function End address of M2000~M4095 auxiliary relay latched ES EP EX SA EH SS DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-47 Off On STOP RUN RUN Attribute Latched STOP Factory setting - - - R/W Yes 4095 D1204* Start latched address of 100ms timer T0~T199 - - - R/W Yes H FFFF D1205* End latched address of 100ms timer T0~T199 - - - R/W Yes H FFFF D1206* Start latched address of 10ms timer T200~T239 - - - R/W Yes H FFFF D1207* End latched address of 10ms timer T200~T239 - - - R/W Yes H FFFF D1208* Start latched address of 16-bit counter C0~C199 - - - R/W Yes # D1209* End latched address of 16-bit counter C0~C199 - - - R/W Yes 199 Start latched address of 32-bit counter D1210* C200~C234 End latched address of 32-bit counter D1211* C200~C234 Start latched address of 32-bit high-speed counter D1212* C235~C255 End latched address of 32-bit high-speed counter D1213* C235~C255 - - - R/W Yes # - - - R/W Yes 234 - - - R/W Yes 235 - - - R/W Yes 255 D1214* Start latched address of step point (S0~S1023) - - - R/W Yes # D1215* End latched address of step point (S0~S1023) - - - R/W Yes # D1216* Start latched address of register D0~D999 - - - R/W Yes 200 D1217* End latched address of register D0~D999 - - - R/W Yes 999 D1218* Start latched address of register D2000~D9999 - - - R/W Yes 2000 D1219* End latched address of register D2000~D9999 - - - R/W Yes # The first group of pulse output phase 00: 1-phase D1220 (Y0 output) 01:A Phase 02:B Phase 0 - - R/W NO 0 The second group of pulse output phase 00:1- D1221 phase (Y2 output) 01:A Phase 02:B Phase 0 - - R/W NO 0 The first group of the count setting of counter D1225 (HHSC0). It is the count mode of C241, C246, 0 - - R/W NO 0 C251. D1226 The second group of the count setting of counter (HHSC1).. It is the count mode of C242, C247, 0 - - R/W NO 0 C252. D1227 The third group of the count setting of counter (HHSC2).. It is the count mode of C243, C248, 0 - - R/W NO 0 C253. D1228 The forth group of the count setting of counter (HHSC3).. It is the count mode of C244, C249, 0 - - R/W NO 0 C254. MODRW command of RS-485 is built-in. The D1256 characters that sent during executing is saved in D1256~D1295. User can check according to the D1295 content of these registers. 0 - - R NO 0 D1296 MODRW command of RS-485 is built-in. PLC system will convert ASCII in the content of the register that user indicates to HEX and save it in D1311 D1296 D1311. 0 - - R NO 0 D1313* Real time clock (RTC) second 00~59 0 - - R/W NO 0 D1314* Real time clock (RTC) minute 00~59 0 - - R/W NO 0 D1315* Real time clock (RTC) hour 00~23 0 - - R/W NO 0 D1316* Real time clock (RTC) day 01~31 0 - - R/W NO 1
2 DVP-PLC Function Special D Function ES EP EX SA EH SS Off On STOP RUN RUN Attribute Latched STOP D1317* Real time clock (RTC) month 01~12 0 - - R/W NO 1 D1318* Real time clock (RTC) week 1~7 0 - - R/W NO 6 D1319* Real time clock (RTC) year 00 99 0 - - R/W NO 0 D1320* The 1st special expansion module ID 0 - - R NO 0 D1321* The 2nd special expansion module ID 0 - - R NO 0 D1322* The 3rd special expansion module ID 0 - - R NO 0 D1323* The 4th special expansion module ID 0 - - R NO 0 D1324* The 5th special expansion module ID 0 - - R NO 0 D1325* The 6th special expansion module ID 0 - - R NO 0 D1326* The 7th special expansion module ID 0 - - R NO 0 D1327* The 8th special expansion module ID 0 - - R NO 0 D1328 CH0 (Y0,Y1) offset pulse number (Low word) 0 - - R/W NO 0 D1329 CH0 (Y0,Y1) offset pulse number (High word) 0 - - R/W NO 0 D1330 CH1 (Y2,Y3) offset pulse number (Low word) 0 - - R/W NO 0 D1331 CH1 (Y2,Y3) offset pulse number (High word) 0 - - R/W NO 0 D1332 CH0 (Y0,Y1) residual pulse number (Low word) 0 - - R NO 0 D1333 CH0 (Y0,Y1) residual pulse number (High word) 0 - - R NO 0 D1334 CH1 (Y2,Y3) residual pulse number (Low word) 0 - - R NO 0 D1335 CH1 (Y2,Y3) residual pulse number (High word) 0 - - R NO 0 D1336 Present value of CH0 pulse (Low word) Y0, Y1 0 0 0 R NO 0 D1337 Present value of CH0 pulse (High word) Y0, Y1 0 0 0 R NO 0 D1338 Present value of CH1 pulse (Low word) Y2, Y3 0 0 0 R NO 0 D1339 Present value of CH1 pulse (High word) Y2, Y3 0 0 0 R NO 0 D1340 The 1 st step acceleration frequency 200 - - R/W Yes 200 D1341 D1342 Maximum output frequency (Low word) (it is fixed to 200KHz) Maximum output frequency (High word) (it is fixed to 200KHz) Factory setting H 04D0 - - R Yes H 04D0 3 - - R Yes 3 D1343 Acceleration /Deceleration time 100 - - R/W Yes 100 D1344 CH0 (Y0,Y1) complement pulse number (Low word) - - - R/W NO 0 D1345 D1346 D1347 D1355* D1356* 2-48 CH0 (Y0,Y1) complement pulse number (High word) CH1 (Y2,Y3) complement pulse number (Low word) CH1 (Y2,Y3) complement pulse number (High word) Communication address that read by PLC LINK ID 1 Communication address that read by PLC LINK ID 2 D1357* Communication address that read by PLC LINK ID 3 - - - R/W NO 0 - - - R/W NO 0 - - - R/W NO 0 H1064 - - R/W NO H1064 H1064 - - R/W NO H1064 H1064 - - R/W NO H1064 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function Special D ID 3 Function Communication address that read by PLC LINK D1358* ID 4 Communication address that read by PLC LINK D1359* ID 5 Communication address that read by PLC LINK D1360* ID 6 Communication address that read by PLC LINK D1361* ID 7 Communication address that read by PLC LINK D1362* ID 8 Communication address that read by PLC LINK D1363* ID 9 Communication address that read by PLC LINK D1364* ID 10 Communication address that read by PLC LINK D1365* ID 11 Communication address that read by PLC LINK D1366* ID 12 Communication address that read by PLC LINK D1367* ID 13 Communication address that read by PLC LINK D1368* ID 14 Communication address that read by PLC LINK D1369* ID 15 Communication address that read by PLC LINK D1370* ID 16 ES EP EX SA EH SS Off On STOP RUN RUN Attribute Latched STOP Factory setting H1064 - - R/W NO H1064 H1064 - - R/W NO H1064 H1064 - - R/W NO H1064 H1064 - - R/W NO H1064 H1064 - - R/W NO H1064 H1064 - - R/W NO H1064 H1064 - - R/W NO H1064 H1064 - - R/W NO H1064 H1064 - - R/W NO H1064 H1064 - - R/W NO H1064 H1064 - - R/W NO H1064 H1064 - - R/W NO H1064 H1064 - - R/W NO H1064 D1375* The first KEY module X coordinate 0 - - R NO 0 D1376* The first KEY module Y coordinate 0 - - R NO 0 D1377* The first KEY module button number 0 - - R NO 0 D1378* The second KEY module X coordinate 0 - - R NO 0 D1379* The second KEY module Y coordinate 0 - - R NO 0 D1380* The second KEY module button number 0 - - R NO 0 D1381* The first BCD module (Low byte) 0 - - R NO 0 D1382* The first BCD module (High byte) 0 - - R NO 0 D1383* The second BCD module (Low byte) 0 - - R NO 0 D1384* The second BCD module (High byte) 0 - - R NO 0 D1385* The first DISP module (Low byte) 0 H FFFF - R/W NO 0 D1386* The first DISP module (High byte) 0 H FFFF - R/W NO 0 D1387* The decimal setting of first DISP module 0 0 - R/W NO 0 D1388* The second DISP module (High byte) 0 H FFFF - R/W NO 0 D1389* The second DISP module (Low byte) 0 H FFFF - R/W NO 0 D1390* The decimal setting of second DISP module 0 0 - R/W NO 0 D1391* The third DISP module (High byte) 0 H FFFF - R/W NO 0 D1392* The third DISP module (Low byte) 0 H FFFF - R/W NO 0 D1393* The decimal setting of third DISP module 0 0 - R/W NO 0 DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-49
2 DVP-PLC Function Special D Function Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK D1415* ID 1 Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK D1416* ID 2 Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK D1417* ID 3 Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK D1418* ID 4 Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK D1419* ID 5 Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK D1420* ID 6 Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK D1421* ID 7 Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK D1422* ID 8 Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK D1423* ID 9 Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK D1424* ID 10 Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK D1425* ID 11 Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK D1426* ID 12 Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK D1427* ID 13 Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK D1428* ID 14 Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK D1429* ID 15 Communication address that wrote by PLC LINK D1430* ID 16 ES EP EX SA EH SS Off On STOP RUN RUN Attribute Latched STOP Factory setting H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8 H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8 H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8 H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8 H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8 H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8 H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8 H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8 H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8 H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8 H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8 H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8 H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8 H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8 H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8 H10C8 - - R/W NO H10C8 D1431* PLC LINK times 0 - - R/W NO 0 D1432* PLC LINK counts 0 - - R/W NO 0 D1433* PLC LINK units 0 - - R/W NO 0 D1434* Read items of PLC LINK ID 1 16 - - R/W NO 16 D1435* Read items of PLC LINK ID 2 16 - - R/W NO 16 D1436* Read items of PLC LINK ID 3 16 - - R/W NO 16 D1437* Read items of PLC LINK ID 4 16 - - R/W NO 16 D1438* Read items of PLC LINK ID 5 16 - - R/W NO 16 D1439* Read items of PLC LINK ID 6 16 - - R/W NO 16 D1440* Read items of PLC LINK ID 7 16 - - R/W NO 16 D1441* Read items of PLC LINK ID 8 16 - - R/W NO 16 D1442* Read items of PLC LINK ID 9 16 - - R/W NO 16 D1443* Read items of PLC LINK ID 10 16 - - R/W NO 16 D1444* Read items of PLC LINK ID 11 16 - - R/W NO 16 D1445* Read items of PLC LINK ID 12 16 - - R/W NO 16 D1446* Read items of PLC LINK ID 13 16 - - R/W NO 16 2-50 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function Special D Function ES EP EX SA EH SS DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-51 Off On STOP RUN RUN Attribute Latched STOP D1447* Read items of PLC LINK ID 14 16 - - R/W NO 16 D1448* Read items of PLC LINK ID 15 16 - - R/W NO 16 D1449* Read items of PLC LINK ID 16 16 - - R/W NO 16 D1450* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 1 16 - - R/W NO 16 D1451* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 2 16 - - R/W NO 16 D1452* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 3 16 - - R/W NO 16 D1453* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 4 16 - - R/W NO 16 D1454* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 5 16 - - R/W NO 16 D1455* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 6 16 - - R/W NO 16 D1456* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 7 16 - - R/W NO 16 D1457* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 8 16 - - R/W NO 16 D1458* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 9 16 - - R/W NO 16 D1459* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 10 16 - - R/W NO 16 D1460* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 11 16 - - R/W NO 16 D1461* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 12 16 - - R/W NO 16 D1462* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 13 16 - - R/W NO 16 D1463* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 14 16 - - R/W NO 16 D1464* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 15 16 - - R/W NO 16 D1465* Wrote items of PLC LINK ID 16 16 - - R/W NO 16 D1480* D1495* D1496* D1511* D1512* D1527* D1528* D1543* D1544* D1559* D1560* D1575* D1576* D1591* D1592* D1607* D1608* D1623* ID 1 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for ID 1 reads is in D1355. The range is D100-D115 of ID 1 PLC. ID 1 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 1 writes is in D1415. The range is D200-D215 of ID 1 PLC. ID 2 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for ID 2 reads is in D1356. The range is D100-D115 of ID 2 PLC. ID 2 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 2 writes is in D1416. The range is D200-D215 of ID 2 PLC. ID 3 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for ID 3 reads is in D1357. The range is D100-D115 of ID 3 PLC. ID 3 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 3 writes is in D1417. The range is D200-D215 of ID 3 PLC. ID 4 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for ID 4 reads is in D1358. The range is D100-D115 of ID 4 PLC. ID 4 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 4 writes is in D1418. The range is D200-D215 of ID 4 PLC. ID 5 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for ID 5 reads is in D1359. The range is D100-D115 of ID 5 PLC. Factory setting 0 - - R NO 0 0 - - R/W NO 0 0 - - R NO 0 0 - - R/W NO 0 0 - - R NO 0 0 - - R/W NO 0 0 - - R NO 0 0 - - R/W NO 0 0 - - R NO 0
2 DVP-PLC Function Special D D1624* D1639* D1640* D1655* D1656* D1671* D1672* D1687* D1688* D1703* D1704* D1719* D1720* D1735* D1736* D1751* D1752* D1767* D1768* D1783* D1784* D1799* D1800* D1815* D1816* D1831* D1832* D1847* D1848* D1863* D1864* D1879* D1880* D1895* D1896* D1911* D1912* Function ID 5 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 5 writes is in D1419. The range is D200-D215 of ID 5 PLC. ID 6 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for ID 6 reads is in D1360. The range is D100-D115 of ID 6 PLC. ID 6 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 6 writes is in D1420. The range is D200-D215 of ID 6 PLC. ID 7 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for ID 7 reads is in D1361. The range is D100-D115 of ID 7 PLC. ID 7 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 7 writes is in D1421. The range is D200-D215 of ID 7 PLC. ID 8 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for ID 8 reads is in D1362. The range is D100-D115 of ID 8 PLC. ID 8 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 8 writes is in D1422. The range is D200-D215 of ID 8 PLC. ID 9 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for ID 9 reads is in D1363. The range is D100-D115 of ID 9 PLC. ID 9 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 9 writes is in D1423. The range is D200-D215 of ID 9 PLC. ID 10 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for ID 10 reads is in D1364. The range is D100-D115 of ID 10 PLC. ID 10 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 10 writes is in D1424. The range is D200-D215 of ID 10 PLC. ID 11 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for ID 11 reads is in D1365. The range is D100-D115 of ID 11 PLC. ID 11 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 11 writes is in D1425. The range is D200-D215 of ID 11 PLC. ID 12 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for ID 12 reads is in D1366. The range is D100-D115 of ID 12 PLC. ID 12 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 12 writes is in D1426. The range is D200-D215 of ID 12 PLC. ID 13 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for ID 13 reads is in D1367. The range is D100-D115 of ID 13 PLC. ID 13 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 13 writes is in D1427. The range is D200-D215 of ID 13 PLC. ID 14 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for ID 14 reads is in D1368. The range is D100-D115 of ID 14 PLC. ID 14 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 14 writes is in D1428. The range is ES EP EX SA EH SS Off On STOP RUN RUN Attribute Latched STOP Factory setting 0 - - R/W NO 0 0 - - R NO 0 0 - - R/W NO 0 0 - - R NO 0 0 - - R/W NO 0 0 - - R NO 0 0 - - R/W NO 0 0 - - R NO 0 0 - - R/W NO 0 0 - - R NO 0 0 - - R/W NO 0 0 - - R NO 0 0 - - R/W NO 0 0 - - R NO 0 0 - - R/W NO 0 0 - - R NO 0 0 - - R/W NO 0 0 - - R NO 0 0 - - R/W NO 0 2-52 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function Special D Function D200-D215 of ID 14 PLC. D1927* D1928* D1943* D100-D115 of ID 15 PLC. D1944* D1959* D200-D215 of ID 15 PLC. D1960* D1975* D100-D115 of ID 16 PLC. D1976* D1991* ID 15 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for ID 15 reads is in D1369. The range is ID 15 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 15 writes is in D1429. The range is ID 16 LINK PLC reads. Communication address for ID 16 reads is in D1370. The range is ID 16 LINK PLC writes. Communication address for ID 16 writes is in D1430. The range is D200-D215 of ID 16 PLC. ES EP EX SA EH SS 2.11 Special Auxiliary Relay and Special Register Functions Off On STOP RUN RUN Attribute Latched STOP Factory setting 0 - - R NO 0 0 - - R/W NO 0 0 - - R NO 0 0 - - R/W NO 0 PLC Operation Flag M1000~M1003 1. M1000: M1000 is On contact during runing, i.e. a normally open contact a. Using M1000 to drive indicated lamp during running, you can know that PLC is in RUN state. M1000 is always on when PLC is RUN. M1000 Y0 PLC is running M1000 is On contact during operation always ON 2. M1001: M1001 is Off contact during running, i.e. a normally close contact b. M1001 is always Off when PLC is RUN. 3. M1002: M1002 will be ON at the first scan when PLC starts RUN and then is Off. M1002 can be regarded as scan initial pulse and pulse width is a scan time. It can be used to initial, i.e. start positive pulse (it is ON once it is RUN). 4. M1003: It is Off at the first scan when PLC is RUN and then is ON later, i.e. start negative pulse (it is Off once it is RUN). PLC RUN M1000 M1001 M1002 M1003 scan time DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-53
2 DVP-PLC Function D1000 Monitor Timer 1. Monitor timer is used to moitor PLC scan time. When scan time exceeds the setting time of moitor timer, RED ERROR LED will be light and all outputs will be Off. 2. The initial value of monitor timer is 200ms. You can use command MOV to change the setting of monitor timer in the program when program is long or calculation is complicated. Following example is set moinitor timer to 300ms. M1002 0 MOV K300 D1000 Primary pulse 3. The maximum setting for monitor timer is 32,767ms. But please notice that if monitor timer settings is too large, the detected time of calculation abnormal will be delay. Therefore, if it is not the complicated calculateion makes scan time exceeds 200ms, it is better to set monitor timer around 200ms. 4. Please monitor D1010~D1012 to check if scan time exceeds D1000 setting when calculation is complicated or PLC MPU connects too many special module to cause scan time too long. In this situation, besides modify D1000 setting, you can also use WDT command (API 07) in PLC program. When CPU excutes WDT command, internal monitor timer will be clear to 0 to make scan time not exceed monitor timer setting. D1002 Capacity It is different program capacity for different series: 1. ES, EX, SS series: 3792 Steps 2. EP, SA series: 7920 Steps 3. EH series: 15872 Steps Grammar Check M1004 D1004, D1137 1. If there is grammar error, PLC ERROR LED will blinking and special relay M1004=On. 2. Time to check PLC grammar: When power is from Off On. Other time: Writing program into PLC by WPLSoft or HPP Using On-line ming function by EH series and WPLSoft 3. It will happen with illegal operand (device) or grammar error. You can get the fault by checking special register D1004 with fault code information. Fault address is saved in data register D1137 (if it is general circuit error, D1137 will be invalid). 4. Refer to chapter 2.1 Summary of DVP-PLC device number for each device usage range. 5. Refer to chapter 2.12 Troubleshooting and Fault Information for checking grammar. Scan Time-out Timer M1008, D1008 1. When scan time-out during executing, PLC ERROR LED will light and M1008=On. 2. Using WPLSoft or HPP to monitor D1008 which saves timeout STEP address as WDT timer is ON. 2-54 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function Scan Time Monitor D1010~D1012 Internal Clock Pulse M1011~M1014 The present value, minimum value and maximum value of scan time are saved in D1010~D1012. 1. D1010: the present scan time. 2. D1011: the minimum scan time. 3. D1012: the maximum scan time. 1. There are four following clock pulses in PLC. Once PLC is power on, these four clock pulse will act automatically. 10 ms M1011 (10 ms) 100 Hz 100 ms M1012 (100 ms) 10 Hz 1 sec M1013 (1 sec) 1 min 1 Hz M1014 (60 sec) 2. When PLC is STOP, clock pulse will also act. The start timing of clock pulse and RUN are not synchronized. High-speed Timer M1015, D1015 1. The steps for using special M and special D directly: Only valid when PLC is RUN. When M1015=On, it will start high-speed timer D1015 once PLC finish executing END command of that scan period. The minimum unit of D1015 is 100us. The range of D1015 is 0~32,767. When it counts to 32,767, it will start from 0. When M1015=Off, D1015 will stop counting immediately. 2. There is high-speed timer command HST for EH series, refer command API 196 HST for detail. 3. : When X10 is On, set M1015=On to start high-speed timer and record in D1015. When X10=Off, set M1015=Off to close high-speed timer. X10 M1015 DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-55
2 DVP-PLC Function Real Time Clock M1016, M1017 M1076 D1313~D1319 1. The relative command special M and special D. Device name Fuunction M1016 Year display of real Off: show the 2 right most bits time clock On: show the (2 right most bits + 2000) When Off On, it is triggered to adjust M1017 When it is during 0~29 seconds, minute won t change ±30 seconds and second will be reset to 0. adjustment When it is during 30~59 seconds, it will add 1 to minute and reset second to 0. M1076 Real time clock It will be ON when setting exceeds range or battery malfunction has run down. D1313 Second 0~59 D1314 Minute 0~59 D1315 Hour 0~23 D1316 Day 1~31 D1317 Month 1~12 D1318 Week 1~7 D1319 Year 0~99(2 right-most bit) 2. If real time clock setting is error, time will reset to Jan. 1, 2000. 00:00 Saturday when PLC is power on again. 3. Adjust method of perpetual clock: It can use specific command TWR to adjust for EP/EH mode built-in real time clock. Refer to API 167 TWR for detail. Using peripherial WPLSoft and digital setting display DU-01 to set. π(pi) D1018, D1019 1. It uses 32-bit data register which is combined with D1019 and D1018 to save floating point value π(pi), 2. Floating point value = H 40490FDB 2-56 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function Response time adjustment of input terminal M1019 D1020, D1021 1. Digital filter circuit is built-in input terminals ~X17 can set response time of receive pulse from input terminal by the content of D1020 and D1021. Unit is ms. 2. When PLC is from Off On, the content of D1020 and D1021 will become to 10 automatically. Terminal X17 response time 0ms 1ms 10ms 15ms 0 1 setting by D1020 (default is 10) 10 15 input reflash state memory 3. When setting ~X17 response time to 0ms to execute following program, the faster response time in input terminla will be 50µs due to input terminal connects to RC filter circuit in series. M1000 MOV K0 D1020 normally ON contact 4. It is not necessary to adjust response time when using high-speed counter, interrupt insert or fast pulse catch (M1056~M1059) in program. 5. It is the same to use command REFF (API 51) or change the content of D1020 and D1021. Execution Completed Flag M1029, M1030 Execution Completed Flag: 1. API 52 MTR, API 71 HKY, API 72 DSW, API 74 SEGL, API 77 PR: M1029=On for a scan period once the command finish executing. 2. API 57 PLSY, API 59 PLSR: For EP/SA/ES/EX/SS MPU, M1029 will be On after Y0 pulse finishes output and M1030 will be On after Y1 pulse completes output. When commands PLSY and PLSR are Off, M1029 and M1030 will be Off. For EH MPU, M1029 will be On after Y0 and Y1 pulses complete output and M1030 will be On after Y2 and Y3 pulse complete output. When commands PLSY, PLSR are Off, M1029 or M1030 will be Off. It is needed to clear by user after executing M1029 and M1030. 3. API 63 INCD: M1029 will be On for a scan period when designated group finish comparison. DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-57
2 DVP-PLC Function 4. API 67 RAMP, API 69 SORT: M1029= On after completing, M1029 is needed to clear by user. If this command is Off, M1029 will be Off. 5. API 155 DABSR, API 156 ZRN, API 158 DRVI, API 158 DRVA: M1029=On when the first output group Y0 and Y1 pulses complete sending and M1030=On when the second output group Y2 and Y3 pulses complete sending. M1029 or M1030 will be Off when execute this command in the next time and it will be On after completing. Communication Error Code D1025 Error code when communication error: 01: illegal command. 02: illegal equipment address. 03: request data exceeds range. 07: checksum error Clear Command 1. M1031 (clear unlatched area), M1032 (clear latched area) Device The component that will be cleared M1031, M1032 M1031 Clear unlatched area M1032 Clear latched area The contact state of Y, general M, general S T contact for general and time coil C contact for general, time coil reset coil D present register for general T present register for general C present register for general The contact state of M and S for latched Accumulative timer T contact and time coil Latched C and hig-speed counter C contact, count coil Present register D for latched Present register of accumulative timer T Latched C and present register of high-speed counter C Output Latched in STOP mode M1033 When M1003 is On, the On/Off state of output will be held once PLC is from RUN to STOP. If output contact load of PLC is heater, heater s state will be held as PLC is from RUN to STOP and RUN after program modification. 2-58 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function All Output Y are inhibited When M1034 is drove to be On, all output Y will be Off. M1034 M1034 all outputs inhibited RUN/STOP Switch M1035, D1035 Communication Response Delay 1. For EH series, when M1035 is drove to be On to start input point ~X17 to be RUN/STOP switch by the content of D1035 (0~17). 2. For EP/SA series, When M1035 is drove to be On to start input point X7 to be RUN/STOP switch. For ES/EX/SS/EP/SA series, data response delay time can be set when PLC MPU is to be Slave in RS-485 communication. Unit is 0.1ms. D1038 Constant Scan Time M1039, D1039 1. When M1039 is On, program scan time is determined by D1039. When program finishes executing, it will execute the next scan as constant scan time attained. If D1039 is less than program scan time, it will scan by program scan time. M1000 M1039 Constant scan time normally ON contact MOV P K20 D1039 Scan time is fixed to 20ms 2. The relative commands of scan time are RAMP(API 67), HKY(API 71), SEGL(API 74), ARWS(API 75) and PR(API 77). They should be used with constant scan time or constant time insert interrupt. 3. Especial for command HKY(API 71), scan time should be set to 20ms and above when it is used 4 4 matrix to be 16 keys to operate. 4. Scan time D1010~D1012 display also include constant scan time. DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-59
2 DVP-PLC Function Analog Function D1056~D1059 D1110~D1113 D1116~D1118 1. For EX MPU, analog input channel resolution 10 bits (±10V or ±20mA) 2. For EX MPU, analog output channel resolution 8 bits (0~10V or 0~20mA) 3. It is analog digital converter filter time setting for EX series. The factory setting is 0 and unit is 1ms. If D1118 5, it will be regarded as 5ms. 4. Resolution of EP/EH analog input AD card: 12 bits (±10V or ±20mA) 5. Resolution of EP/EH analog input DA card: 12 bits (0~10Vor 0~20mA) Device Function D1056 Present value of EX MPU analog input channel 0 (CH0) and EP/EH MPU AD card channel 0 (CH0) D1057 Present value of EX MPU analog input channel 1 (CH 1) and EP/EH MPU AD card channel 1 (CH1) D1058 Present value of EX MPU analog input channel 2 (CH 2) D1059 Present value of EX MPU analog input channel 3 (CH 3) D1110 Average value of EX MPU analog input channel 0 (CH 0) and EP/EH MPU AD card channel 0 (CH0) D1111 Average value of EX MPU analog input channel 1 (CH 1) and EP/EH MPU AD card channel 1 (CH1) D1112 Average value of EX MPU analog input channel 2 (CH 2) D1113 Average value of EX MPU analog input channel 3 (CH 3) D1116 D1117 D1118 EX MPU analog output channel 0 (CH 0), EP/EH MPU DA card channel 0 (CH0) EX MPU analog output channel 1 (CH 1), EP/EH MPU DA card channel 1 (CH1) EX series analog input filter setting (ms) Algorithm Error Flag M1067~M1068 D1067~D1068 1. Algorithm error flag: Component Explanation Latched STOP RUN RUN STOP M1067 Algorithm error flag none clear latched M1068 Algorithm error lock flag none unchanged latched D1067 Algorithm error code none clear latched D1068 STEP value of algorithm error none unchanged latched 2. Error code explanation: D1067 error code Function 0E18 BCD conversion error 0E19 Divisor is 0 0E1A Usage exceeds limit (include E and F) 0E1B It is negative number after doing radical 0E1C FROM/TO communication error 2-60 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function File Register M1101 D1101~D1103 1. For EP/EH series, When PLC is power on or from STOP to RUN, it will check start file register function from M1101, the start number of file register from D1101 (file registers for EP/SA series: K0~K1,599; for EH series: K0~K9,999), read item number of file register from D1102(read items of file registers for EP/SA series: K0~K1,600; for EH series: K0~K8,000), D1103(file registers for save and read, start number of designated data register D (for EP/SA series: K2,000~K4,999, for EH series: K2,000~K9,999) to determine to send file register to designated data register automatically or not). 2. Please refer to commands API 148 MEMR and API 149 MEMW explantion. DIP Switch Function Card M1104~M1111 Transistor Output Card 1. When PLC is RUN with DIP switch card, 8 DIP switches correspond to M1104~M1111 separately. 2. Please refer to command API 109 SWRD for detail. When PLC is RUN with transistor output card, M1112 and M1113 correspond to 2 points transistors output TR1 and TR2 separately. M1112, M1113 Pulse Output with Acceleration/ Deceleration 1. The definition of special D and special M which are used by pulse output with acceleration/ deceleration: M1115~M1119 D1104 Device M1115 M1116 M1117 M1118 M1119 D1104 Function Start switch for accel/decel pulse output Flag that is used in acceleration Target frequency attained flag Flag that is used in deceleration Complete function flag Using parameter index (correspond to D component) 2. Corresponding table for parameter (frequency range is 25Hz~10KHz) index Function +0 Start frequency (SF) +1 Gap frequency (GF) +2 Target frequency (TF) +3 Total number of pulse output number (lower 16-bit of 32-bit) +4 Total number of pulse output number (upper 16-bit of 32-bit) +5 Output pulse number in acceleration area (lower 16-bit of 32-bit) +6 Output pulse number in deceleration area (upper 16-bit of 32-bit) (TP) (AP) 3. It doesn t need to use command, it just need to fill parameter chart and set M1115 to start. This function can use Y0 output only, the timing is as following. DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-61
2 DVP-PLC Function GF Acceleration/Deceleration step number = (TF-SF)/GF Frequency TF GP Output pulse number for each step GP= AP/(Acceleration or Deceleration step number) SF AP AP Pulse number AP is pulse number of acceleration/deceleration 4. Note: This function should be executed under the following conditions all exist. Once a condition doesn t exist, this function can t execute. Start frequency must be less than target frequency. Gap frequency must be less than (target frequency start frequency) Total number of pulse number must be greater than (accel/decel pulse number *2) Start frequency and target frequency: the minimum is 25Hz and the maximum is 10KHz. Accel/decel pulse number must be more than accel/decel step number When M1115 is from On to Off, M1119 will be cleared and M1116, M1117 and M1118 aren unchanged. When PLC is from STOPRUN or from RUNSTOP, M1115~M1119 will be cleared to Off. And D1104 will be cleared to 0 only when it is from OffOn. If the function acceleration/deceleration pulse output and command PLSY Y0 output exist at the same time, it will execute one action which starts Y0 output first. 5. How to calculate action time of each section If start frequency is set to 1KHz, gap frequency is set to 1KHz, target frequency is set to 5KHz, total pulse number is 100 and accel/decel pulse number is 40, timing chart of accel/decel area is in the following. 2-62 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function Frequency (Hz) 5000 4000 3000 2000 1000 Time (sec) t t t t 1 2 3 4 You can get accel/decel step = (5K 1K) / 1K = 4 and output number of each pulse is 40 / 4 = 10. Therefore, you can get t1 = (1 / 1K) * 10 = 10ms, t2 = (1 / 2K) * 10 = 5ms, t3 = (1 / 3K) * 10 = 3.33ms and t4 = (1 / 4K) * 10 = 2.5ms from the following figure. : Forward/Reverse accel/decel step motor control M1002 MOV K500 D1104 Using D500-D506 to be parameter address MOV K1000 D500 1KHz start frequency MOV K100 D501 100Hz gap frequency MOV K10000 D502 10KHz target frequency DMOV K80000 D503 80000 pulses output DMOV K10000 D505 10000 pulses in acceleration/deceleration section SET M1115 When PLC is RUN, it will save each parameter setting into the register that designated by D1104. When M1115=On, acceleration/deceleration pulse starts to output. M1116=On during acceleration, M1117=On when speed attained, M1118=On in deceleration and M1119=On after finishing executing. M1115 won t be reset automatically and it needs to be cleared by user. Actual pulse output curve is in the following: DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-63
2 DVP-PLC Function Frequency (Hz) 10K 1K 10000 90000 100000 Pulse number Special High-speed pulse output 1. For EP series, the definition of special D and special M for special high-speed pulse (50KHz) output function: M1133~M1135 D1133 Device M1133 M1134 M1135 D1133 Function Special high-speed pulse (50KHz) output switch (On is start executing) On is continuous output switch Output pulse number attained flag Index for special high-speed pulse output register (D) 2. Corresponding table for D1133 parameter Index Function +0 Special high-speed pulse output frequency (lower 16-bit of 32 bits) +1 Special high-speed pulse output frequency (upper 16-bit of 32 bits) +2 Special high-speed pulse output number (lower 16-bit of 32 bits) +3 Special high-speed pulse output number (upper 16-bit of 32 bits) +4 +5 Display present special high-speed pulse output number (lower 16-bit of 32 bits) Display present special high-speed pulse output number (upper 16-bit of 32 bits) 3. Function explanation: Output frequency and output numbers above can be modified when M1133=On and M1135=Off. It won t affect present output pulse once output frequency or output target number is changed. Present output pulse number will be displayed once a scan time update. It will be cleared to 0 when M1133 is from OffOn and it will keep that last output number when M1133 is from OnOff. 2-64 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function 4. Note: This special high-speed pulse output function can use special Y1 output point in RUN. It can exist with PLSY Y1 at the same time and PLSY (Y0) won t be affected. If command PLSY (Y1) is executed prior to this function, this function can t be used and vice versa. When executing this function, general Y1 output will be invalid and outputs point of Y0 and Y2~Y7 can be used. The difference between this function and command PLSY is higher than output frequency. The maximum output can up to 50KHz. Extension Connected Detection D1139, D1140 D1142, D1143 D1145, D1146 1. D1139: connection number of BCD expansion module, the maximum is 2 connections to use with KEY expansion module. 2. D1140: special expansion module (AD, DA, XA, PT, TC, RT, HC, PU) numbers, the maximum is 8. 3. D1142: Digital expansion input X point number. 4. D1143: Digital expansion input Y point number. 5. D1145: connection number of KEY expansion module, the maximum is 2connects to use with BCD expansion module. 6. D1146: connection number indication of DISP expansion module, the maximum is 3 connections. BCD Module 1. For EH series, special D and special M definition of BCD module: D1139 D1381~D1384 Device D1139 D1381 D1382 D1383 D1384 Function connection number indication of BCD expansion module, the maximum is 2 connections to use with KEY expansion module Low byte of first BCD module High byte of first BCD module Low byte of second BCD module High byte of second BCD module 2. Explanation: PLC will update BCD module to read out BCD module value by each scan. Special D above will be updated automatically when PLC is RUN. The maximum number for a MPU is 2 connections, such as 2 KEY modules, a KEY module and a BCD expansion unit or 2 BCD expansion units. DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-65
2 DVP-PLC Function 3. BCD module external wiring terminal: DIP Switch W8 W4 W2 W1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 4. BCD module wiring example: D7 D6 D5 D0 DIP switch group W8 W4 W2 W1 it needs to connect a diode in series (1N4148 is recommended) KEY Module D1145 D1375~D1380 1. For EH series, the definition of special D and special M of KEY module: Device Function D1145 Connection number indication of KEY expansion module, the maximum is 2 connections to use with BCD expansion module D1375 X coordinate of the first KEY module (1~8) D1376 Y coordinate of the first KEY module (1~8) D1377 Button number of the first KEY module (1~64) D1378 X coordinate of the second KEY module (1~8) D1379 Y coordinate of the second KEY module (1~8) D1380 Button number of the second KEY module (1~64) 2-66 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function 2. Explanation: KEY module uses scan method to read data to PLC, it will just care the first button once there are two more keys are pressed at the same time. The maximum number for a MPU to connect is 2 connections, such as 2 KEY modules, a KEY module and a BCD expansion unit or 2 BCD expansion units. KEY module will be updated in each scan when PLC is RUN. Calculated method of button number is: H+(V-1)*8. For coordinate (5,1) button, its number is 5. 3. KEY module external wiring terminal: Matrix Keypad V 1 V 2 H1H2 4. KEY module wiring example: Button coordinate(x,y) (D1375, D1376) (D1378, D1379) (1,1) Button number D1377(D1380) V 1 1 H1 (1,1) (2,1) (3,1) (4,1) (5,1) (6,1) (7,1) (8,1) V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 (1,2) (2,2) (3,2) (4,2) (5,2) (6,2) (7,2) (8,2) V 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 2 (1,3) (2,3) (3,3) (4,3) (5,3) (6,3) (7,3) (8,3) 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 V 3 (1,4) (2,4) (3,4) (4,4) (5,4) (6,4) (7,4) (8,4) 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 V 4 (1,5) (2,5) (3,5) (4,5) (5,5) (6,5) (7,5) (8,5) V 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 5 (1,6) (2,6) (3,6) (4,6) (5,6) (6,6) (7,6) (8,6) V 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 6 (1,7) (2,7) (3,7) (4,7) (5,7) (6,7) (7,7) (8,7) 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 V 7 (1,8) (2,8) (3,8) (4,8) (5,8) (6,8) (7,8) (8,8) V 8 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 H 1 H 2 H 3 H 4 H 5 H 6 H 7 H 8 DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-67
2 DVP-PLC Function DISP Module 1. For EH series, the definition of special D and special M definition of DISP module (7-segment display): D1146 D1385~D1393 Device D1146 D1385 D1386 D1387 D1388 D1389 D1390 D1391 D1392 D1393 Function Connection number indication of DISP expansion module, the maximum is 3 connections. Low byte of first DISP module High byte of first DISP module The floating point and Pre-zero setting of the first DISP module Low byte of the second DISP module High byte of the second DISP module The floating point and Pre-zero setting of the second DISP module Low byte of the third DISP module High byte of the third DISP module The floating point and Pre-zero setting of the third DISP module 2. Explanation: It needs to use common cathode 7-segment display. The maximum DISP module expansion units that a PLC can connect are 3 DISP module expansion units and each DISP module expansion unit has 8 7-segment displays. Each 7-segment display uses 4-BITS to display. Dot setting: there are 8 7-segment displays on a 7-segment display expansion unit. There is a dot in each 7-segment display and each dot setting can be filled in 1~8 to display the dot of DISP1~DISP8. If the setting is out of range, no dot of 7-segment display will light. Pre-zero: this function is used to decide if it needs to display 0. It will check from the left-most bit and display 0 after non-zero bit. For example: if the values of DISP8~DISP1 are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and the 0 of DISP8 won t be displayed. First DISP D1385 D1386 D1387 BIT b12~b15 b8~b11 b4~b7 b0~b3 b12~b15 b8~b11 b4~b7 b0~b3 b15~b8 b7~b0 DISP number DISP4 DISP3 DISP2 DISP1 DISP8 DISP7 DISP6 DISP5 The value of STOP->RUN Prezero F F F F F F F F 0 0 dot 2-68 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function 3. DISP module external wiring terminal: cathode 7-segment display (8-bit) a b c d e f g dot D 7 D 6 D 5 D 4 D 3 D 2 D 1 D 0 4. of DISP module wiring: Common cathode 7-segment display circuit: the device from BCD to Common cathode 7-segment display. Power Input 1. using external +24VDC to be driven power of display module. 2. Using internal +24VDC to be driven power of display module. Short circuit P 24VDC OV additional DC 24V P 24VDC OV Common cathode 7-segment display connection: a b c d e f g dot D 7 D 6 D 5 D 4 D 3 D 2 D 1 D 0 DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-69
2 DVP-PLC Function Adjustable Acceleration/ Deceleration Pulse Output Function Explanation M1144~M1149, M1154 D1032, D1033 D1144, D1154 D1155 1. For EP/SA series, the definition of special D and special M of adjustable accel/decel pulse output function: Device Function M1144 Start switch of accel/decel pulse output M1145 Flag that is used in acceleration M1146 Target frequency attained flag M1147 Flag that is used in deceleration M1148 Completed function flag M1149 stop counting temporarily flag M1154 Start designated deceleration gap time flag and frequency flag D1032 Lower 16-bit of 32-bit of Y1 pulse accumulative output numbers D1033 Upper 16-bit of 32-bit of Y1 pulse accumulative output numbers D1144 Using parameter index (correspond to D component) D1154 Recommended value of designated deceleration gap time (10~32767 ms) D1155 Recommended value of designated acceleration gap frequency (-1~ - 32700 Hz) 2. Corresponding table of parameter D1144 Index Function +0 Total segment number (n) (the maximum number is 10) +1 Present segment (read only) +2 Start frequency of first segment (SF1) +3 Interval time of first segment (GT1) +4 Interval frequency of first segment (GF1) +5 Target frequency of first segment (TF1) +6 Lower 16-bit of 32-bit of target number of first segment output pulse +7 Upper 16-bit of 32-bit of target number of first segment output pulse +8 Start frequency of second segment (SF2) +9 Interval time of second segment (GT2) +10 Interval frequency of second segment (GF2) +11 Target frequency of second segment (TF2) +12 Lower 16-bit of 32-bit of target number of second segment output pulse +13 Upper 16-bit of 32-bit of target number of second segment output pulse : : +n*6+2 Start frequency of nth segment (SFn) +n*6+3 Interval time of nth segment (GTn) +n*6+4 Interval frequency of nth segment (GFn) +n*6+5 Target frequency of nth segment (TFn) +n*6+6 Lower 16-bit of 32-bit of target number of nth segment output pulse +n*6+7 Upper 16-bit of 32-bit of target number of nth segment output pulse 2-70 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function 3. Function Explanation: This function can only be used for Y1 output point and the timing will be as follows. After filling parameter table, set M1144 to start (it should be used in RUN mode) GF TF1 Frequency(Hz) SF2 TF2 GT SF3 TF3 SF4 TF4 GT GF SF1 Time(ms) 1st section pulse number (SE1) 4. Usage rule and restriction: 2nd section pulse number (SE2) 3rd section pulse number (SE3) 4th section pulse number (SE4) The minimum frequency of start frequency and target frequency should be equal to or greater than 200Hz. If it is less than 200Hz, it means finish executing or not to execute. The maximum frequency of start frequency of target frequency is 32700Hz. It will execute in 32700Hz as it is greater than 32700Hz. The interval time range is 1~32767ms and its unit is ms. The interval frequency range in acceleration segment is 1Hz~32700Hz and in deceleration segment is -1~-32700Hz. If it is set to 0Hz, the executed segment can t be up to target frequency, but it will tansfer to execute next segment after reaching target number. Target number of segment pulse output should be greater than ((GF*GT/1000)* ((TF-SF)/GF). Refer to example 1 for detail. Once Target number of segment pulse output isn t greater than ((GF*GT/1000)* ((TF-SF)/GF), this function can t be used. The improve method is to add interval time or add target number of pulse output. If there is Y1 output designated by high-speed command in RUN mode, Y1 output command will be started as high priority. DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-71
2 DVP-PLC Function After starting to execute M1144, if M1148 outputs without attaining completed function flag and M1144 is closed, this function will start deceleration function. If designated acceleration function flag M1154 is Off, it will reduce 200Hz per 200ms and stop output pulse till output frequency is less than 200Hz and set M1147 to deceleration flag. But if designated deceleration flag M1154 is On, it will be executed by interval time and frequency that defined by user. And interval time can t be less than or equal to 0 (if it is less than or equal to 0, factory setting will be set to 200ms). Interval frequency can t be greater than or equal to 0 (factory setting will be set to -1KHz when it is equal to 0 and factory setting will be added negative sign automatically when it is greater than 0.) When M1148 attains completed function flag and M1144 is closed, this function won t start deceleration function and it will clear M1148 flag. Once M1144 is closed, it will clear M1149 flag. The segment of this function will execute by total segment number. The maximum segment is 10 segments. The acceleration/deceleration of this function will execute by start frequency of the next segment, i.e. when target frequency of segment is less than start frequency of the next segment, the next segment is acceleration and the target frequency of the next segment must be greater than start frequency of the next segment. When target frequency of segment is greater than the next segment frequency, the next segment is deceleration, therefore, target frequency of the next segment must be less than start frequency of the next segment. If user can t set it by this way, we can t ensure that you can get correct output pulse. When STOPRUN, M1144~M1149 will be cleared to Off. When RUNSTOP, M1144 will be cleared and M1145~M1149 won t be cleared. D1144 will be cleared to 0 when it is from OffOn and unchanged in other case. The usage parameter range of EP/SA series is D0~D999 and D2000~D4999. It won t execute this command and close M1144 if parameter is out of range (includes all usage segment parameter). 5. 1: calculate output number of acceleration/deceleration of each segment and target frequency If setting start frequency of segment to 200Hz, segment interval time to 100ms, segment gap frequency to 100Hz, segment target frequency to 500Hz and target number of segment pulse is 1000 pulses. The calculation will be in the following: Output pulse number at start acceleration/deceleration is 200*100/1000 = 20 pulses Output pulse number of the first acceleration interval is 300*100/1000 = 30 pulses Output pulse number of the second acceleration interval is 400*100/1000 = 40 pulses Output pulse number of target frequency is 1000 (40+30+20) = 910 pulses (NOTE: it is recommended to set this number to be greater than 10) 2-72 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function Output time of target frequency is 1 / 500 * 910 = 1820 ms Total time of this segment is 1820 + 3*100 = 2120 ms 6. 2: simple acceleration/deceleration pulse output program of a segment acceleration and a segment deceleration M1002 MOV K200 MOV K2 D200 MOV K250 D202 MOV K500 D203 MOV K250 D204 MOV D205 D206 MOV K750 D208 MOV K500 D209 MOV K-250 D210 MOV K250 D211 M0 K200 D212 END 7. 3: pulse output program of a segment acceleration/deceleration with direction DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-73
2 DVP-PLC Function Y7=OFF TF1 SF2 SF1 =ON TF2 Position Zero point TF2 SF1 Explanation: SF2 TF1 Y7=On Acceleration/deceleration setting is as example 2. Figure above is the example of position movement. When contact is On, it will start to move and it will stop when contact is Off. (Y7 is for direction setting) is shown in the following. M1002 RST M0 M1 M1 M1 M0 RST SET ALT Y7 SET M1 M0 M1 M1148 M0 RST RST END 8. 4: apply acceleration and deceleration of a segment to zero point return program. Relative flag timing chart is shown in the following. 2-74 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function Acceleration for returning to zero point Deceleration for returning to zero point Stop returning to zero point M1144 M1148 M1149 Stop pulse output The relation between frequency and position are shown in the following. Frequency(Hz) zero point Position Acceleration for returning to zero point Deceleration for returning to zero point Number setting of acceleration/deceleration, frequency and pulse are shown in the following. (correspond to component D) Started number of D + index Settings +0 2 +2 250(Hz) +3 100(ms) +4 500(Hz) +5 10000(Hz) +6, +7 10(pulse) +8 9750(Hz) +9 50(ms) +10-500(Hz) +11 250(Hz) +12, +13 30000(pulse) is shown in the following: (it assumes contact X7 to be start reset trigger switch) DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-75
2 DVP-PLC Function X7 SET SET RST SET RST END Explanation: After contact X7 is triggered, M1144 will set to start acceleration and set M1149 not to count pulse number. And it will send 10 pulses once deceleration switch is triggered and then enter deceleration segment. To set M1148 to end pulse output by manual and close this function once is closed. Note: This example is just an application method that user should adjust parameters settings used in acceleration/deceleration segment according to actual machine characteristics and limitation. Single Step Execution Function M1170, M1171 D1170 1. The definition of special D and special M of EH series single step function Device Function explanation M1170 Start flag of single step function M1171 Single step flag D1170 STEP number of present PLC command 2. Function Explanation: Execution time: this flag is valid when PLC is at RUN mode. Action Steps: A. Start M1170 to enter single step mode. PLC will stay at specific command which the STEP is saved in D1170 and execute that command one time. B. When Forcing M1171 to be On, PLC will execute the next command and stop at the next command, at the same time, PLC will force M1171 to be Off. D1170 will display present STEP value. 2-76 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function 3. Note: Those commands that will be affected by scan time will be incorrect due to single STEP. : when HKY command is executed, it needs 8 scan time to get a valid input value of a button. Thus, single step will have faults. Some commands like Pulse input/output, high-speed comparison command, won t be affected by single STEP due to hardware start. 2-phase Pulse Output Function M1172~M1174 D1172~D1177 1. For EP/SA series, the definition of special D and special M of 2-phase output function: Device Function Explanation M1172 2-phase pulse output switch M1173 On is continuous output switch M1174 Output pulse number attained flag D1172 2-phase output frequency (12Hz~20KHz) D1173 2-phase output mode selection (k1and k2) D1174 Lower bit of 32-bit of 2-phase output pulse target number D1175 Upper bit of 32-bit of 2-phase output pulse target number D1176 Lower bit of 32-bit of 2-phase present output pulse number D1177 Upper bit of 32-bit of 2-phase present output pulse number 2. Function Explanation: Output frequency = 1/T as shown in the figure below. There are two output modes, k1 and k2, k1 means A phase gets ahead of B phase and k2 means B phase gets ahead of A phase. Output number calculation adds 1 once there is a phase difference, such as figure below, there are 8 output pulses. When output numbers attains, M1174 will be On and if you want to clear M1174, you should close M1172. T Y0(A) Y1(B) 1 2 7 8 DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-77
2 DVP-PLC Function Output frequency, output target number and mode selection can be modified when M1172=On and M1174=Off. The modification of output frequency and output target number won t affect present output pulse number but mode selection modification will clear present output pulse number to 0. Present output pulse number will be updated once scan time updates and it will clear to 0 when M1172 is from StopRun, and keep that last output number when M1172 is from RunStop. 3. Note: This function just can be used at RUN mode and can exist in program with PLSY command. But if command PLSY is executed first, this function can t be used, and vice versa. VR Potentiometer M1178~M1179 D1178~D1179 1. For EH/EP/SA series, the definition of special D and special M of built-in 2 points VR potentiometer function: Device Function M1178 Start potentiometer VR0 M1179 Start potentiometer VR1 D1178 VR0 value D1179 VR1 value 2. Function explanation: This function only can be used at RUN mode. When M1178=On, the variational value of VR 0 will be converted to digit 0~255 to save in D1178. When M1179=On, the variational value of VR 1 will be converted to digit 0~255 to save in D1179. 3. Please refer to command API 85 VRRD for detail. MODEM Connection Function 1. System connection PC MODEM DVP-EP/EH series MPU M1184~M1188 WPLSoft is executing telecommunication network MODEM DVP-F232 interface 2. EP/EH series special M definition for MODEM connection: Device Function Explanation Remark M1184 Start-up MODEM When M1184=On, following actions are valid. Start-up MODEM This flag will be Off after finishing M1185 initialization initialization. M1186 Fail to initial MODEM When M1185=On, M1186=Off. M1187 Succeed to initial MODEM When M1185=On, M1187=Off. Display if MODEM is M1188 connected or not On means in connection NOTE: special M is always valid no matter PLC is RUN or STOP. 2-78 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function 3. Operation: (Please operate by following steps) (a) (b) Setting M1184=On on PLC side (start-up MODEM) STEP 2: Setting M1185=On (start-up PLC s MODEM initialization) (c) STEP 3: Check the result of MODEM initialization: M1186=On means succeed to initial. M1187=On means fail to initial. (d) STEP 4: After initialing successful, WPL software can be ready for connection on remote PC side. WPL connection method: setting -> modem connection (you need to install modem s driver first) -> to get dial connection dialog box and then fill in dial information as following. 4. Caution: (a) It must use with RS-232 card when connecting MODEM on PLC side. If not, above special M are invalid. (b) (c) You must set M1185=On to initial MODEM after MODEM start-up (M1184=On). If not, it can t start-up MODEM auto dial function on PLC side. MODEM will enter auto dial mode after initialization. (d) MODEM will enter to ready for dial mode on PLC side after remote PC stops connection. If user turn MODEM power off now, it should need to initial at the next time when turning on MODEM. (e) (f) MODEM connection baud rate on PLC side is fixed to 9600bps and can t be modified. Besides, MODEM speed must be 9600bps and faster. The initial format that used to MODEM on PLC side are ATZ and ATS0=1. Power Loss Latched Range Setting D1200~D1219 Input Point X can force to be ON/OFF M1304 1. For EH/EP/SA series to set latched range. The latched range will be from start address number to end address number. 2. Please refer to chapter 2.1 for detail. 1. For EP/SA series, When M1304=On, input point X (-X17) of MPU can force to be On-Off by using peripheral WPLSoft and HPP. 2. For EH series, When M1304=On, input point X of MPU can force to be On-Off by using peripheral WPLSoft and HPP. DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-79
2 DVP-PLC Function Special Extension Module ID D1320~D1327 For EH series, it will display expansion module ID in D1320~ D1327 by order when connecting to special expansion module. Special expansion module ID of EH series: Expansion Module Expansion Module Expansion Module ID Name Name Expansion Module ID DVPEH04AD H 0400 DVPEH01PU H 0110 DVP04DA-H H 0401 DVPEH01HC H 0120 DVPEH04PT H 0402 DVPEH02HC H 0220 DVPEH04TC H 0403 DVPEH01DT H 0130 DVPEH06XA H 0604 DVPEH02DT H 0230 DVPEH06RT H 0405 Easy PLC Link M1350-M1352 M1360-M1439 D1355-D1370 D1415-D1465 D1480-D1991 1. Explanation of Special D and special M explanation of EH series EASY PLC LINK ID1 ID8: SLAVE ID 1 read Write out in D1480 D1495 Item number SLAVE ID 2 read Write out in D1496 D1512 D1528 D1511 D1527 D1543 Item number Item number Item number SLAVE ID 3 read Write out in D1544 D1559 Item number D1560 D1575 Item number MASTER PLC SLAVE ID SLAVE ID 4 5 read Write read Write out in out in D1576 D1591 Item number SLAVE ID 6 read Write out in SLAVE ID 7 read Write out in SLAVE ID 8 read Write out in D1592 D1608 D1624 D1640 D1656 D1672 D1688 D1704 D1720 D1607 D1623 D1639 D1655 D1671 D1687 D1703 D1719 D1735 Item number Item number Item number Item number Item number Item number Item number Item number Item number D1434 D1450 D1435 D1451 D1436 D1452D1437 D1453 D1438 D1454 D1439 D1455 D1440 D1456 D1441 D1457 Device Communication Address D1355 D1415 D1356 D1416 D1357 D1417 D1358 D1418 D1359 D1419 D1360 D1420 D1361 D1421 D1362 D1422 If there is LINK in SLAVE PLC M1360 M1361 M1362 M1363 M1364 M1365 M1366 M1367 Action indication flag for master PLC do to slave PLC M1376 M1377 M1378 M1379 M1380 M1381 M1382 M1383 Read/write error flag M1392 M1393 M1394 M1395 M1396 M1397 M1398 M1399 Read completed flag (Whenever finishing a PLC read/write, this flag will be Off automatically) M1408 M1409 M1410 M1411 M1412 M1413 M1414 M1415 Write completed flag (whenever finishing a PLC read/write, this flag will be Off automatically) M1424 M1425 M1426 M1427 M1428 M1429 M1430 M1431 SLAVE ID 1 SLAVE ID 2 SLAVE ID 3 SLAVE ID 4 read Write read Write read Write read Write out in out in out in out in D100 D115 D200 D215 D100 D115 D200 D215 D100 D115 D200 D215 D100 D115 D200 D215 SLAVE ID 5 read Write out in D100 D115 D200 D215 SLAVE ID 6 read Write out in D100 D115 D200 D215 SLAVE ID 7 read Write out in D100 D115 D200 D215 SLAVE ID 8 read Write out in D100 D115 D200 D215 Factory setting of Communication address for reading is H1064 (D100). Factory setting of Communication address for writing is H10C8 (D200). 2-80 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function 2. Explanation of Special D and special M explanation of EH series EASY PLC LINK ID9 ID16: SLAVE ID 9 read Write out in D1736 D1751 Item number D1752 D1767 Item number SLAVE ID 10 read Write out in D1768 D1783 Item number D1784 D1799 Item number SLAVE ID 11 read Write out in D1800 D1815 Item number D1816 D1831 Item number MASTER PLC SLAVE ID SLAVE ID 12 13 read Write read Write out in out in D1832 D1847 Item number D1848 D1863 Item number SLAVE ID 14 read Write out in SLAVE ID 15 read Write out in SLAVE ID 16 read Write out in D1864 D1880 D1896 D1912 D1928 D1944 D1960 D1976 D1879 D1895 D1911 D1927 D1943 D1959 D1975 D1991 Item number Item number Item number Item number Item number Item number Item number Item number D1442 D1458 D1443 D1459 D1444 D1460 D1445 D1461 D1446 D1462 D1447 D1463 D1448 D1464 D1449 D1465 Device Communication Address D1363 D1423 D1364 D1424 D1365 D1425 D1366 D1426 D1367 D1427 D1368 D1428 D1369 D1429 D1370 D1430 If there is LINK in SLAVE PLC M1368 M1369 M1370 M1371 M1372 M1373 M1374 M1375 Action indication flag for master PLC do to slave PLC M1384 M1385 M1386 M1387 M1388 M1389 M1390 M1391 Read/write error flag M1400 M1401 M1402 M1403 M1404 M1405 M1406 M1407 Read completed flag (Whenever finishing a PLC read/write, this flag will be Off automatically) M1416 M1417 M1418 M1419 M1420 M1421 M1422 M1423 Write completed flag (whenever finishing a PLC read/write, this flag will be Off automatically) M1432 M1433 M1434 M1435 M1436 M1437 M1438 M1439 SLAVE ID 9 SLAVE ID 10 SLAVE ID 11 SLAVE ID 12 read Write read Write read Write read Write out in out in out in out in D100 D115 D200 D215 D100 D115 D200 D215 D100 D115 D200 D215 D100 D115 D200 D215 SLAVE ID 13 read Write out in D100 D115 D200 D215 SLAVE ID 14 read Write out in D100 D115 D200 D215 SLAVE ID 15 read Write out in D100 D115 D200 D215 SLAVE ID 16 read Write out in D100 D115 D200 D215 Factory setting of Communication address for reading is H1064 (D100). Factory setting of Communication address for writing is H10C8 (D200). 3. Explanation: The basic communication protocol for EASY PLC LINK is MODBUS When connecting to RS-485, the baud rate for all slave peripheral and communication format should be the same as master PLC, such as set D1120 for PLC. When EP MPU is used to be slave, only ASCII mode can be used. When EH MPU is used to be slave, ASCII mode and RTU mode can be used. All communication format used to connect to PLC should be the same (set D1120 for PLC) and it supports ASCII and RTU mode. DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-81
2 DVP-PLC Function The maximum slave PLCs for a master PLC to connect is 16 slave PLCs. The ID of slave PLC should be fixed to 1~16 and each slave ID can t be repeated. RS-232, RS-485 and RS-422 can be used in one-to-one connection. When slave PLC uses RS-232, only ASCII mode can be used and communicatioin format is (7, E, 1). One to multiple connection can connect to RS-485 in series 4. Operation: Setting Master PLC ID by D1121 and slave ID first. ID can t be repeated. Setting read/write items of slave (the maximum is 16 items). (refer to special D for detail) Setting device communication address to read/write to slave. (refer to Special D explanation above for special D setting. Factory setting of communication address for reading is H1064 (D100) and writing is H10C8 (D200). Setting PLC LINK automatically (M1351) Setting PLC LINK manually (M1352) Start MASTER PLC LINK (M1350) 5. Master PLC action explanation: Slave ID detection: When M1350=On, Master PLC is started and then detect slave number to record number in D1433. You can see if there is slave PLC by M1360-M1375 which save slave ID 1-16 separately. On means exist. If detection of slave PLC number is 0, M1350 will be Off and stop Link at the same time. PLC will only detect slave PLC number only at start that M1350=On. Read/write of master and slave PLC: After finishing detecting slave, master PLC will read/write to each slave. The slave that master can do read/write is slave ID got after detecting slave ID. Once slave PLC is added after detecting, master can t do read/write to it till the next detection. Master PLC will read first and the maximum range is 16 slave PLCs start from D100. After reading, PLC will write and the maximum range is 16 slave PLCs start from D200. Master PLC will read/write to slave PLC in order, i.e. it will read/write to the next slave after finishing a slave. 6. Automatic/ Manual model explanation: Automatic mode: it should set M1351 to Off. Master PLC will read/write to slave till M1350 is Off. 2-82 DVP-PLC Application Manual
2 DVP-PLC Function Manual mode: It needs to set times of read to D1431. One time means finish all Slave read/write. When PLC starts Link, D1432 will start to count times of Link. When D1431 = D1432, PLC will stop Link and force M1351 to be Off at the same time. If M1351 is forced to be On, PLC will start to link according to D1431 value automatically. Caution: 1. Automation mode M1351 and manual mode M1352 can t be On at the same time. 2. For EH modes, it need to clear M1350 first befor switching auto/manual mode. For EP modes, it is unnecessary. 3. Please clear M1350 first before switching automation/manual mode. 4. Communication time-out can be set by D1129. The setting range is from 300 to 3000. When it is out of range, it will be regarded as 300 when it is less than 300 and regarded as 3000 when it is larger than 3000. Besides, this setting is valid when it is set before linking. 5. PLC LINK function is only valid when baud rate is larger than 1200 bps. When baud rate is less than 9600 bps, please set communication time-out to more than 1 second. 6. It won t communicate when write/read item is 0. 7. It doesn t allow 32-bit counter read/write in. DVP-PLC Application Manual 2-83
2 DVP-PLC Function 2.12 Fault Code Information If the PLC ERROR LED is flashing or special relay M1004=On after writing program in PLC, the problem may be an invalid operand or error grammar. You can get fault code saved in special register D1004 to check in following table to get error message and error address is saved in D1137. (D1137 will be invalid if it is general loop error) Please refer to chapter 2.1 for each model usage range. Fault Code Description Fault Code Description 0001 Operand bit device S exceeds the usage range 0F06 SFTR misuse operand 0002 Label P exceeds the usage range or duplicated 0F07 SFTL misuse operand 0003 Operand KnSm exceeds the usage range 0F08 REF misuse operand 0102 Interrupt pointer I exceeds the usage range or duplicated 1000 ZRST misuse operand 0202 Command MC exceeds the usage range C400 An unrecognized command code is being used 0302 Command MCR exceeds the usage range C401 Loop error 0401 Operand bit device X exceeds the usage LD / LDI continuously use more than 9 C402 range times 0403 Operand KnXm exceeds the usage range C403 MPS continuously use more than 9 times 0501 Operand bit device Y exceeds the usage range C404 FOR-NEXT exceeds 6 levels 0503 Operand KnYm exceeds the usage range C405 STL/RET used between FOR-NEXT SRET/IRET used between FOR-NEXT MC/MCR used between FOR-NEXT END / FEND used between FOR-NEXT 0601 Operand bit device T exceeds the usage range 0604 Operand word device T register usage exceeds limit C407 STL continuously use more than 9 times 0801 Operand bit device M exceeds the usage Use command MC/MCR in STL C408 range Use I/P in STL 0803 Operand KnMm exceeds the usage range C409 Use STL/RET in subroutine Use STL/RET in interrupt program 0D01 DECO misuse operand Use MC/MCR in subroutine C40A 0D02 ENCO misuse operand Use MC/MCR in interrupt program 0D03 DHSCS misuse operand MC/MCR doesn t start from N0 or C40B 0D04 DHSCR misuse operand discontinuously 0D05 PLSY misuse operand MC/MCR corresponding value N is C40C 0D06 PWM misuse operand different 0D07 FROM/TO misuse operand C40D Use I/P incorrectly 0D08 PID misuse operand IRET doesn t follow by the last FEND 0E01 command Operand bit device C exceeds the usage C40E SRET doesn t follow by the last FEND range command Operand word device C register usage 0E04 The number of input/output points of I/O exceeds limit C41C expansion unit exceeds usage range 0E05 DCNT misuse operand CXXX 0E18 BCD conversion error Special expansion module exceeds usage C41D 0E19 Division error (divisor=0) range 0E1A Component exceeds usage range (include Hardware setting of special expansion C41E E and F error) module error 0E1B It is negative number after radical expression C41F Data write in memory failure 0E1C FROM/TO communication error C4FF Invalid command (no this command) 0F04 Operand word device D register usage exceeds limit C4EE No END command in program 0F05 DCNT misuse operand DXXX 2-84 DVP-PLC Application Manual
3 Basic Commands 3.1 Summary of Basic Command and Step Ladder Command Basic Commands Command Code Function Operands Execution speed (us) ES/EX/SS/EP/SA EH STEP Page LD Load contact A X, Y, M, S, T, C 5.6 0.24(0.56) 1~3 3-3 LDI Load contact B X, Y, M, S, T, C 5.68 0.24(0.56) 1~3 3-3 AND Series connection with A contact X, Y, M, S, T, C 4.8 0.24(0.56) 1~3 3-3 ANI Series connection with B contact X, Y, M, S, T, C 4.88 0.24(0.56) 1~3 3-4 OR Parallel connection with A contact X, Y, M, S, T, C 4.8 0.24(0.56) 1~3 3-4 ORI Parallel connection with B contact X, Y, M, S, T, C 4.88 0.24(0.56) 1~3 3-5 ANB Series connects the circuit block None 4.4 0.24 1~3 3-5 ORB Parallel connects the circuit block None 4.4 0.24 1~3 3-5 MPS Save the operation result None 4.64 0.24 1~3 3-6 MRD Read the operation result (the pointer not moving) None 4 0.24 1 3-6 MPP Read the result None 4.4 0.24 1 3-6 Output commands Command Code Function Operands Execution speed (us) ES/EX/SS/EP/SA EH STEP Page OUT Drive coil Y, S, M 6.4 0.24(0.56) 1~3 3-7 SET Action latched (ON) Y, S, M 5.04 0.24(0.56) 1~3 3-7 RST Clear the contacts or the registers Y, M, S, T, C, D, E, F 7.6 0.24(0.56) 3 3-7 Timers, Counters API Command Code Function Operands Execution speed (us) ES/EX/SS/EP/SA EH STEP Page 96 TMR 16-bit timer T-K or T-D 9.6 25 4 3-8 97 CNT 16-bit counter C-K or C-D(16 bits) 12.8 30 4 3-8 97 DCNT 32-bit counter C-K or C-D(32 bits) 14.32 50 6 3-9 Main control commands Command Code Function Operands Execution speed (us) ES/EX/SS/EP/SA EH STEP Page MC Connect the common series connection contacts N0~N7 5.6 20 3 3-10 MCR Disconnect the common series connection contacts N0~N7 5.76 15 3 3-10 DVP-PLC Application Manual 3-1
3 Basic Commands Rising-edge/falling-edge detection commands of contact API Command Code Function Operands Execution speed (us) ES/EX/SS/EP/SA EH STEP Page 90 LDP Rising-edge detection operation starts S, X, Y, M, T, C 8.16 0.56(0.88) 3 3-11 91 LDF Falling-edge detection operation starts S, X, Y, M, T, C 8.32 0.56(0.88) 3 3-11 92 ANDP Rising-edge detection series connection S, X, Y, M, T, C 7.68 0.56(0.88) 3 3-11 93 ANDF Falling-edge detection series connection S, X, Y, M, T, C 7.76 0.56(0.88) 3 3-12 94 ORP Rising-edge detection parallel connection S, X, Y, M, T, C 7.68 0.56(0.88) 3 3-12 95 ORF Falling-edge detection parallel connection S, X, Y, M, T, C 7.76 0.56(0.88) 3 3-13 Rising-edge/falling-edge output commands API Command Code Function Operands Execution speed (us) ES/EX/SS/EP/SA EH STEP 89 PLS Rising-edge output Y, M 9.92 0.56(0.88) 3 3-13 99 PLF Falling-edge output Y, M 10.16 0.56(0.88) 3 3-13 End command Page Command Code Function Operands Execution speed (us) ES/EX/SS/EP/SA EH STEP END end none 7.44 0.24 1 3-14 Other commands API Command Code Function Operands Execution speed (us) ES/EX/SS/EP/SA EH STEP Page Page NOP No function none 3.52 0.16 1 3-14 98 INV Inverting operation none 3.92 0.24 1 3-15 P Pointer P0~P255 - - 1 3-15 I Interrupt pointer I - - 1 3-15 Step ladder commands Command Code Function Operands STEP Page STL Step transition ladder start command S 1 4-1 RET Step transition ladder return command none 1 4-1 Note: The value wrote in () in the column of speed of EH series is the speed of specific operand M1536~M4095. 3-2 DVP-PLC Application Manual
3 Basic Commands 3.2 Basic Commands Explanations Command Functions Adaptive model LD Load A contact ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH Operand ~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999 - Command Explanation The LD command is used on the A contact that has its start from the left BUS or the A contact that is the start of a contact circuit. Function of the command is to save present contents, and at the same time, save the acquired contact status into the accumulative register. Ladder Diagram: X1 Y1 Command Code: LD AND OUT X1 Y1 Command code explanation: Load contact A of Connect to contact A of X1 in series Drive Y1 coil Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH LDI Load B contact Operand ~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999 - Command Explanation The LDI command is used on the B contact that has its start from the left BUS or the B contact that is the start of a contact circuit. Function of the command is to save present contents, and at the same time, save the acquired contact status into the accumulative register. Ladder Diagram: X1 Y1 Command Code: LDI AND X1 OUT Y1 Command code explanation: Load contact B of Connect to contact A of X1 in series Drive Y1 coil Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH AND Series connection-a contact Operand ~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999 - DVP-PLC Application Manual 3-3
3 Basic Commands Command Explanation The AND command is used in the series connection of A contact. The function of the command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first, and then to perform the AND calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register. Ladder Diagram: X1 Y1 Command Code: LDI X1 AND OUT Y1 Command code explanation: Load contact B of X1 Connect to contact A of in series Drive Y1 coil Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH ANI Series connection-b contact Operand ~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999 - Command Explanation The ANI command is used in the series connection of B contact. The function of the command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first, and then to perform the AND calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register. Ladder Diagram: X1 Y1 Command Code: LD X1 ANI OUT Y1 Command code explanation: Load contact A of X1 Connect to contact B of in series Drive Y1 coil Command Functions Adaptive model OR Parallel connection-a contact ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH Operand ~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999 - Command Explanation The OR command is used in the parallel connection of A contact. The function of the command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts, and then to perform the OR calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register. Ladder Diagram: X1 Y1 Command Code: LD OR X1 OUT Y1 Command code explanation: Load contact A of Connect to contact A of X1 in parallel Drive Y1 coil 3-4 DVP-PLC Application Manual
3 Basic Commands Command Functions Adaptive model ORI Parallel connection-b contact ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH Operand ~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999 - Command Explanation The ORI command is used in the parallel connection of B contact. The function of the command is to readout the status of present specific series connection contacts, and then to perform the OR calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the accumulative register. Ladder Diagram: X1 Y1 Command Code: LD ORI X1 OUT Y1 Command code explanation: Load contact A of Connect to contact B of X1 in parallel Drive Y1 coil Command Functions Adaptive model ANB Series connection (Multiple Circuits) ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH Operand none Command Explanation To perform the AND calculation between the previous reserved logic results and contents of the accumulative register. Ladder Diagram: ANB X1 X2 X3 Block A Block B Y1 Command Code: LD ORI LDI OR ANB OUT X2 X1 X3 Y1 Command code explanation: Load contact A of Connect to contact B of X2 in parallel Load contact B of X1 Connect to contact A of X3 in parallel Connect circuit block in series Drive Y1 coil Command Functions Adaptive model ORB Parallel connection (Multiple circuits) ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH Operand None Command Explanation To perform the OR calculation between the previous reserved logic results and contents of the accumulative register. DVP-PLC Application Manual 3-5
3 Basic Commands Ladder Diagram: X2 X1 X3 Block A ORB Block B Y1 Command Code: LD ANI LDI AND ORB OUT X1 X2 X3 Y1 Command code explanation: Load contact A of Connect to contact B of X1 in series Load contact B of X2 Connect to contact A of X3 in series Connect circuit block in parallel Drive Y1 coil Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH MPS Store the operation result Operand None Command Explanation To save contents of the accumulative register into the operation result. (the result operation pointer pulses 1) Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP EH MRD Reads the operation result Operand None Command Explanation Reading content of the operation result to the accumulative register. (the pointer of operation result doesn t move) Command Functions Adaptive model MPP Reads, then clears the operation result ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH Operand None Command Explanation To retrieve the previous reserved logic calculation result from the operation result and save it into the accumulative register. (the pointer of result operation minus 1) Ladder Diagram: MRD MPP MPS X1 X2 Y1 M0 Y2 END Command Code: LD MPS AND X1 OUT Y1 MRD AND X2 OUT M0 MPP OUT Y2 END Command code explanation: Load contact A of Save to stack Connect to contact A of X1 in series Drive M0 coil Read from stack Drive Y2 coil end 3-6 DVP-PLC Application Manual
3 Basic Commands Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH OUT Output coil Operand ~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999 - - - - Command Explanation Output the logic calculation result before the OUT command to specific device. Motion of coil contact: Operation result Ladder Diagram: Coil OUT command Contact A contact (normally open) FALSE OFF Non-continuity Continuity B contact (normally close) TRUE ON Continuity Non-continuity X1 Y1 Command Code: LDI AND OUT X1 Y1 Command code explanation: Load contact B of Connect to contact A of X1 in series Drive Y1 coil Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH SET Latch(ON) Operand ~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999 - - - - Command Explanation When the SET command is driven, its specific device is set to be ON, which will keep ON whether the SET command is still driven. You can use the RST command to set the device to OFF. Ladder Diagram: Y0 SET Y1 Command Code: LD ANI Y0 SET Y1 Command code explanation: Load contact A of Connect to contact B of Y0 in series Y1 latch (ON) Command Functions Adaptive model RST Clear the contact or the register ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH Operand ~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999 E, F - DVP-PLC Application Manual 3-7
3 Basic Commands Command Explanation When the RST command is driven, motion of its specific device is as follows: Device Status S, Y, M Coil and contact will be set to OFF. T, C Present values of the timer or counter will be set to 0, and the coil and contact will be set to OFF. D, E, F The content value will be set to 0. If the RST command is not executed, status of specific device will not be changed. Ladder Diagram: RST Y5 Command Code: LD RST Y5 Command code explanation: Load contact A of Clear contact Y5 Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH TMR 16-bit timer Operand T-K T-D T0~T255, K0~K32,767 T0~T255, D0~D9,999 Command Explanation When TMR command is executed, the specific coil of timer is ON and timer will start to count. When the setting value of timer is attained (counting value >= setting value), the contact will be as following: NO(Normally Open) contact NC(Normally Closed) contact Ladder Diagram: TMR T5 K1000 Open collector Close collector Command Code: LD TMR T5 K1000 Command code explanation: Load contact A of T5 timer Setting is K1000 Footnote Please refer to the specification of every model for the operand T usage. Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH CNT 16-bit counter Operand C-K C-D C0~C199, K0~K32,767 C0~C199, D0~D9,999 3-8 DVP-PLC Application Manual
3 Basic Commands Command Explanation When the CNT command is executed from OFFON, which means that the counter coil is driven, and 1 should thus be added to the counter s value; when the counter achieved specific set value (value of counter = the setting value), motion of the contact is as follows: NO(Normally Open) contact Continuity NC(Normally Closed) contact Non-continuity If there is counting pulse input after counting is attained, the conatcts and the counting values will be un unchanged. To re-count or to conduct the CLEAR motion, please use the RST command. Ladder Diagram: CNT C20 K100 Command Code: LD CNT C20 K100 Command code explanation: Load contact A of C20 counter Setting is K100 Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH DCNT 32-bit counter Operand C-K C-D C200~C254,K-2,147,483,648~K2,147,483,647 C200~C254, D0~D9,999 Command Explanation DCNT is the startup command for the 32-bit high-speed counter that is utilized especially in counters C232 to C255. For general addition/subtraction counter C200~C234, the present value will count up (add 1) or count down (subtract 1) when command DCNT is from Off On. When specific high-speed counter pulse input of high-speed addition/subtraction counters C235~C254 is from Off On, it will execute counting. If counter trigger input keeps being On or Off, the counter value will be unchanged. See chapter 2.7 timer number and function for high-speed pulse input terminals (~X17) and counting (count up (add 1) and count down (subtract 1)). When DCNT command is OFF, the counter will stop counting, but the counting values will not be cleared. Users can use RST C2XX command to remove the counting values and the contacts. High-speed addition/subtraction counters C235~C254 can use external specific input point to remove the counting values and the contacts. LadderDiagram: M0 DCNT C254 K1000 Command Code: LD M0 DCNT C254 K1000 LD M0 DCNT C254 K1000 Command code explanation: Load contact A of M0 and C254 counter Setting is K1000 DVP-PLC Application Manual 3-9
3 Basic Commands Command Functions Adaptive model MC / MCR Master control Start/Reset command ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH Operand N0~N7 Command Explanation MC is the main-control start command. When the MC command is executed, the of commands between MC and MCR will not be interrupted. When MC command is OFF, the motion of the commands that between MC and MCR is described as follows: Timer Accumulative timer Counter Coils driven up by the OUT command Devices driven up by the SET and RST commands Application commands The counting value is set back to zero, the coil and the contact are both turned OFF The coil is OFF, and the timer value and the contact stay at their present condition The coil is OFF, and the counting value and the contact stay at their present condition All turned OFF Stay at present condition All of them are not acted MCR is the main-control ending command that is placed at the end of the main-control program and there should not be any contact commands prior to the MCR command. Commands of the MC-MCR main-control program supports the nest program structure, with 8 layers as its greatest. Please use the commands in order from N0~ N7, and refer to the following: Ladder Diagram: Command Code Explanation LD Load A contact of MC N0 Enable N0 common series MC N0 connection contact X1 LD X1 Load A contact of X1 Y0 OUT Y0 Drive Y0 coil : X2 LD X2 Load A contact of X2 MC N1 MC N1 Enable N1 common series connection contact X3 LD X3 Load A contact of X3 Y1 OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil : MCR N1 MCR N1 Disable N1 common series connection contact : MCR N0 MCR N0 Disable N0 common series X10 connection contact : MC N0 LD X10 Load A contact of X10 X11 MC N0 Enable N0 common series Y10 connection contact LD X11 Load A contact of X11 MCR N0 OUT Y10 Drive Y10 coil : MCR N0 Disable N0 common series connection contact 3-10 DVP-PLC Application Manual
3 Basic Commands Command Functions Adaptive model LDP Rising-edge detection operation ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH Operand ~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999 - Command Explanation Footnote Usage of the LDP command is the same as the LD command, but the motion is different. It is used to reserve present contents and at the same time, saving the detection status of the acquired contact rising-edge into the accumulative register. Ladder Diagram: X1 Y1 Command code: LDP AND OUT X1 Y1 Please refer to the specification of every model for the operand usage. Command code explanation: Start rising-edge detection Series connection A contact of X1 Drive Y1 coil If specific rising-edge contact state is On before PLC is power on, rising-dedge contact will be True after PLC is power on. Command Functions Adaptive model LDF Falling-edge detection operation ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH Operand ~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999 - Command Explanation Usage of the LDF command is the same as the LD command, but the motion is different. It is used to reserve present contents and at the same time, saving the detection status of the acquired contact falling-edge into the accumulative register. Ladder Diagram: X1 Y1 Command code: LDF AND OUT X1 Y1 Command code explanation: Start falling-edge detection Series connection A contact of X1 Drive Y1 coil Command Functions Adaptive model ANDP Series connection command for the riding-edge detection operation ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH Operand ~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999 - DVP-PLC Application Manual 3-11
3 Basic Commands Command Explanation ANDP command is used in the series connection of the contacts rising-edge detection. Ladder Diagram: X1 Y1 Command Code: LD ANDP X1 OUT Y1 Command code explanation: Load A contact of X1 rising-edge detection in series connection Drive Y1 coil Command Functions Adaptive model ANDF Series connection command for the falling-edge detection operation ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH Operand ~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999 - Command Explanation ANDF command is used in the series connection of the contacts falling-edge detection. Ladder Diagram: X1 Y1 Command Code: LD ANDF X1 OUT Y1 Command code explanation: Load A contact of X1 falling-edge detection in series connection Drive Y1 coil Command Functions Adaptive model ORP Parallel connection command for the rising-edge detection operation ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH Operand ~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999 - Command Explanation The ORP commands are used in the parallel connection of the contact s rising-edge detection. Ladder Diagram: X1 Y1 Command Code: LD ORP X1 OUT Y1 Command code explanation: Load A contact of X1 rising-edge detection in parallel connection Drive Y1 coil 3-12 DVP-PLC Application Manual
3 Basic Commands Command Functions Adaptive model ORF Parallel connection command for the falling-edge detection operation ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH Operand ~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999 - Command Explanation The ORP commands are used in the parallel connection of the contact s falling-edge detection. Ladder Diagram: X1 Y1 Command Code: LD ORF X1 OUT Y1 Command code explanation: Load A contact of X1 falling-edge detection in parallel connection Drive Y1 coil Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH PLS Rising-edge output Operand ~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999 - - - - - Command Explanation When =OFF ON (rising-edge trigger), PLS command will be executed and M0 will send the pulse of one time which the length is a scan time. Ladder Diagram: M0 Timing Diagram: PLS SET M0 Y0 Command Code: LD PLS M0 LD M0 SET Y0 Command code explanation: Load A contact of M0 rising-edge output Load the contact A of M0 Y0 latched (ON) M0 a scan time Y0 Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH PLF Falling-edge output Operand ~X377 Y0~Y377 M0~M4,095 S0~S1,023 T0~T255 C0~C255 D0~D9,999 - - - - - DVP-PLC Application Manual 3-13
3 Basic Commands Command Explanation When = ON OFF (falling-edge trigger), PLF command will be executed and M0 will send the pulse of one time which the length is the time for scan one time. Ladder Diagram: M0 Timing Diagram: PLF SET M0 Y0 Command Code: LD PLF M0 LD M0 SET Y0 Command code explanation: Load A contact of M0 falling-edge output Load the contact A of M0 Y0 latched (ON) M0 a scan time Y0 Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH END End Operand None Command Explanation It needs to add the END command at the end of ladder diagram program or command program. PLC will scan from address o to END command, after executing it will return to address 0 to scan again. Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH NOP No operation Operand none Command Explanation This is a no-operation command and has no effect on the previous operation. NOP is used in the following cases: To delete a command without changing the number of steps. (Overwrite with NOP) Ladder Diagram: Command NOP will be omitted when ladder diagram displays. NOP Y1 Command Code: LD NOP OUT Y1 Command code explanation: Load B contact of No operation Drive Y1 coil 3-14 DVP-PLC Application Manual
3 Basic Commands Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH INV Inverting Operation Operand None Command Explanation Inverting the operation result and use the new data as an operation result. Ladder Diagram: Y1 Command Code: LD INV OUT Y1 Command code explanation: Load A contact of Inverting the operation result Drive Y1 coil Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH P Pointer Operand P0~P255 Command Explanation Pointers are used with the jump commands (CJ, CALL) in two different ways as follows. But a number cannot be used repeatedly. Ladder Diagram: X1 P10 CJ Y1 P10 Command Code: LD CJ : P10 LD OUT P10 X1 Y1 Command code explanation: Load A contact of Jump from command CJ to P10 Pointer P10 Load a contact of X1 Drive Y1 coil Command Functions Adaptive model ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH I Interrupt Pointers (I) Operand I00, I10, I20, I30, I40, I50, I6, I7, I8 I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060, I110, I120, I130, I140 Command Explanation Interrupt programs should begin with interrupt pointer (I )and ends with application command to be as interrupt end and return. It must use with application commands API 03 IRET, API 04 EI, API 05 DI. DVP-PLC Application Manual 3-15
3 Basic Commands Ladder Diagram: interrupt Service program pointer I 001 X1 X2 EI Y1 DI FEND Y2 IRET range for inserting program interrupt program interrupt insert into subroutine Command Code: Command code explanation: EI Interrupt Enable LD X1 Load A contact of X1 OUT Y1 Drive Y1 coil : DI Interrupt Disable : FEND end I001 Insert point LD X2 Load A contact of X2 OUT : IRET Y2 Drive Y2 coil Interrupt and return Footnote The number of interrupt pointer I of ES / EX / SS series: There are four external interrupts (I001, ), (I101, X1), (I201, X2) and (I301, X3). The number of interrupt pointer I of EP series: 1. There are 6 external interrupt points: (I001, ), (I101, X1), (I201, X2), (I301, X3), (I401, X4) and (I501, X5). ( =1 means interrupt in rising-edge, =0 means interrupt in falling-edge) 2. There are two time interrupt points: I6, I7. ( =10~99ms) 3. There are six high-speed counter attained interrupt points: I010 (use with C235, C241, C244, C246, C247, C249, C251, C252, C254), I020(use with C236), I030 (use with C237, C242), I040(use with C238), I050(use with C239), I060 (use with C240). (use with command API 53 DHSCS to produce interrupt signal) The number of interrupt pointer I of EH series: 1. There are six interrupt points of external interrupt: (I00, ), (I10, X1), (I20, X2), (I30, X3), (I40, X4), (I50, X5). ( =1 means interrupt in rising-edge, =0 means interrupt in falling-edge) 2. There are three time interrupt points: I6, I7, I8. ( =10~99ms) 3. There are six points of high-speed counter attained interrupt: I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060. (use with API 53 DHSCS command to produce interrupt signal) 4. Pulse wave output interrupts I110, I120 (they are triggered at the end of pulse wave. I130, I140 (they are triggered at the beginning of first pulse wave). 3-16 DVP-PLC Application Manual
4 Step Ladder Commands 4.1 Step Ladder Command [STL], [RET] Common Function Operand Adaptive model STL Step Transition Ladder Start Command S0~S1023 ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH Command Explanation The step ladder command, STL Sn, has constituted the stepping point, and when the STL command showed up in the program, it implies that the program is now at the step ladder diagram condition that is controlled by the step procedure. The step ladder command RET represents the end of the step ladder diagram (from S0~S9) that is to return to the BUS command. The SFC diagram is represented through the step ladder diagram composed of STL/RET. The number of step point S can t be repeated. Common Function Operand Adaptive model RET Step Transition Ladder Return Command None ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH Command Explanation At the end of the step procedure, be sure to write in the RET command; the RET command indicates the end of the step procedure. Maximum is 10 step procedures (S0~S9) for a PLC program and it should have RET command at the end of each step procedure. Ladder Diagram: M1002 S0 S S20 S S30 S S40 S X1 X2 X3 ZRST S0 S127 SET SET Y0 SET Y1 SET Y2 S0 RET S0 S20 S30 S40 SFC: M1002 X1 X2 X3 S0 S20 S30 S40 S0 Y0 Y1 Y2 END 4.2 Sequential Function Chart (SFC) In automatic control field, it often needs to cooperate with electric control and mechanical control to reach the goal. SFC can be divided into several serial STEP (i.e. several phases). Each STEP should finish its actions. It usually has transition to transfer from each step to the next step. That is the design concept of Sequential Function Chart to have transition to end the action of the previous step and start the action of the next step (the previous step will be clear at this time). DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-1
4 Step Ladder Commands Features: 1. You don t need to do SFC design for constant state step. PLC will execute the action of interlock and double output between each state. It is only needed do simple SFC design for each state and make machine works. 2. The action is easy to understand and easy to adjust initial PLC start-up, detect and maintain. 3. SFC edition theory is made by IEC1131-3. It is figure edition mode and the structure looks like flow chart. Each PLC internal step relay S is used to be step point and also equal to each step of flow chart. After finishing present step, it will transfer to the next step, i.e. next step point S, by setting condition. By repeating this way, it can reach the result that user needs. 4. Explanation of right side SFC figure: each step has its own transition condition to move from one step to the next step. In this figure, primary step point S0 will move to step point S21 once this transition condition is established, and S21 can move to S22 or S24 by transition condition X1 or X2 and S25 will move to S0 to finish a whole procedure once transition condition X6 is established. By this way, it can circulate control with repeat again and again. SFC: It is used for ladder step mode. This figure means internal edition program is a general step ladder diagram not step ladder program. It is for primary step point. This double-frame is used for SFC primary step point and the usage devices are S0~S9. It is used for general step point and the usage devices are S10~S1023. It is JUMP step point that used to move from step point to another which is not next to it. (it can be used to disconnected jump up or jump down in the same program procedure, return to primary step point or jump between different program procedure. X1 X3 X4 X5 X6 S0 S21 S22 S24 S25 It is the transition condition of step point that used to move between each step point. It is alternative divergence that used for a step point to move to different corresponding step point by different transition condition. It is alternative convergence that used for two step points and above to move to the same step point according to transition condition. It is simultaneous divergence that used for a step point move to two step points and above by the same transition condition. It is simultaneous convergence that used for two step points and above to move to the same step point with the same transition condition when the condition is established at the same time. 4.3 Step Ladder Command Explanation STL command: this command is used in the syntax design for the Sequential Function Chart (SFC). This command helps the program designer to have clearer ideas on the program procedure, and thus the procedure will be more readable. As shown in the following diagrams, we could switch our procedure diagram from the left diagram to the right PLC structure diagram. S0 X2 S24 4-2 DVP-PLC Application Manual
4 Step Ladder Commands At the end of the step procedure, be sure to write in the RET command; the RET command indicates the end of the step procedure. Several step procedures could be written in to the same program, just make sure to write in the RET command at the end of the step procedure. There is no limitation to the usage of the RET command, and this command should match up with the usage of the step points (S0~S9). If the RET command is not written in at the end of the step procedure, this error will be detected by the editing device. S0 M1002 primary pulse M1002 S0 S SET SET S0 S21 S21 S21 S SET S22 S22 S22 S S23 S SET S0 S23 S23 RET 1. Step Ladder Action: The step ladder is made up of numerous step points; each step point represents one control procedure action, and each step point needs to execute following three missions: A. drive output coil B. specific transition condition C. designate what step point is to be appointed to take over the control power of the present step point : S10 S Y0 S10 S Y0 S20 S X1 SET SET Y10 SET Y1 S20 S30 When =ON, S20=On, S10=Off. S20 S X1 SET SET Y10 SET Y1 S20 S30 Explanation: When S10=ON, Y0 and Y1 are ON. When =ON, S20=ON and Y10 is ON, too. And when S10 is OFF, Y0 will be OFF, but Y1 is ON. (Since Y1 uses the SET command, it will keep in ON status) 2. Step ladder timing: when state contact Sn is On, circuit will be activated and circuit won t be activated when state contact Sn is Off. (Above action will be executed after delaying a scan time) 3. The repeated usage of the output coil: DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-3
4 Step Ladder Commands 1. Output coils of the same number could be used in different step points. 2. Such as right diagram, there is the same output device Y0 in the different state. No matter S10 or S20 is On, Y0 will be On. 3. Y0 will be close during the transition from S10 to S20 and output Y0 after S20 is On. Thus in this case, Y0 will be On no matter S10 or S20 is On. 4. For general ladder diagrams, repeated usages of the output coils should be avoided. Output coil number used in step point should be avoided to use after returning to general ladder diagram. S10 S S20 S X1 Y0 SET SET Y0 SET Y1 S20 S30 4. Repeated usage of the timer: Same as general output points, the timer could be used repeatedly for different step points. (this is one feature of step ladder diagram, but for general ladder diagrams, repeated usages of the output coils should be avoided. Output coil number used in step point should be avoided to use after returning to general ladder diagram.) Note: as right diagram, ES/EX/SS/EP/SA series timer only used repeatedly in disconnected step point. S20 X1 S30 X2 S40 TMR T1 K10 TMR T2 K20 TMR T1 K30 5. Transfer of the step point: SET Sn and OUT Sn commands are both used to start (or to transfer to) another step point, and the occasions to use these commands could be different: when the controlling power is transferred to another step point, the status of the original step point S and the action of the output point would all be erased. Due to that numerous step control procedures could exist at the same program simultaneously (take S0~S9 as the starting and ending points to lead the step ladder diagram), the transfer of steps could thus be on the same step procedure or could be transferred to different step procedures. And thus, the transfer commands, SET Sn and OUT Sn, of the step point might vary somewhat in usage; please refer to the following explanations: SET Sn Within the same procedure, it is used to drive up the next status step point, and after the status is transferred, outputs of previous action status points will be clear. S10 S S12 S X1 Y10 SET Y11 SET S12 S14 When executing ET S12? status step point moves from S12 to S10 and clear S10 and all outputs (Y10). OUT Sn Within the same procedure, transfer of the simultaneous convergence point and different procedures are used to drive up separate step points, and after the status is transferred, outputs of previous action status points will be clear. 4-4 DVP-PLC Application Manual
4 Step Ladder Commands Within the same procedure, it is used to return to primary step point. Within the same procedure, it is used for the step points to jump up or down between disconnected step point. SFC diagram: OUT S0 S21 S24 S25 X7 OUT X2 S25 uses OUT to return to primary step point S0 Ladder diagram: S0 S S21 S S23 S S24 S S25 S X2 X7 Drive jump step point Using OUT S24 S24 return to primary step point Using OUT S0 S0 RET At different procedures, it is used to drive up separate step points. SFC figure: OUT S0 S21 S23 OUT X2 OUT S1 S41 S42 S43 S0 and S1 two different step procedures S23 return to primary step point S0 by using OUT S43 return to primary step point S1 by using OUT ladder diagram: S0 S S21 S S23 S S1 S S42 S S43 S X2 Drive separate step point Using OUT S42 S42 RET RET step procedure inducted by S0 step procedure inducted by S1 6. Notice of Driving Output Points: As in the following left diagram, after the LD or LDI command is written in the second line of BUS beyond the step point, output coil can t be connected from BUS directly. There will be error when compiling. It is needed to modify to following middle and left diagram to correct diagram. BUS Sn Sn Sn S Y0 S Y0 S Y0 M0 M0 Y1 Y2 or Y1 M0 M1000 Y2 Y1 Y2 modify position normally open contact in RUN mode 7. Usage restrictions for partial commands: of every step point is identical to the general ladder diagram, and every kind of series and parallel connection circuits or application commands could all be utilized, however, part of the commands are under certain restrictions, please refer to the following descriptions: DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-5
4 Step Ladder Commands Basic commands that are to be used within the step point Step point Basic command LD/LDI/LDP/LDF AND/ANI/ANDP/ANDF OR/ORI/ORP/ORF INV/OUT/SET/RST ANB/ORB MPS/MRD/MPP MC/MCR Primary step point/ General step point Yes Yes No Diverging step point/ General output Yes Yes No Converging step point Step point transfer Yes No No MC/MCR commands are not to be used within the step point. The STL command could not be used in general sub-programs and the interruption service sub-program. Use of the CJ command is not prohibited within the STL command, however, it will complicate the action and should thus be avoided. MPS/MRD/MPP command position: Step Ladder Diagram: Command code: Explanation: LD Sn S BUS MPS MRD MPP X1 X2 X3 Y1 M0 Y2 STL LD MPS AND OUT MRD AND OUT MPP AND OUT Sn X1 Y1 X2 M0 X3 Y2 The BUS of step point can t use commands MPS / MRD / MPP directly. It needs to use command LD or LDI before using commands MPS / MRD / MPP. 8. Other Notice: For general, commands (SET S or OUT S ) that used to transfer to next state are better to use after finishing all relative outputs and actions. In the following figure, they are the same after executing by PLC. If there are many conditions or actions in S10, it is recommended to execute SET S20 after modifying from left figure to right figure and finishing all relative outputs and actions. In this way, the procedure is clear and easy to maintain. S10 S Y0 S10 S Y0 SET S20 Y1 S20 S Y1 Y2 S20 S SET Y2 S20 4-6 DVP-PLC Application Manual
4 Step Ladder Commands It is needed to add RET command after finishing step ladder program and RET command is also needed to add S20 S X1 S0 after STL as shown in right figure. RET S20 S X1 S0 RET 4.4 Reminder of Design on the Step Ladder 1. The step point up front in SFC is called the primary step point, S0~S9. Utilize the primary step point to be the start of the procedure, and use the RET command as the end to construct a complete procedure. 2. If the STL command is not in use, S could be served as general auxiliary relay. 3. The number for the step point, S, could not be used repeatedly. 4. Categories of procedures: Single procedure: there is only a procedure in a program (the alternative diverge and converge, the simultaneous diverge and converge aren t included) Complicated single procedure: there is only a procedure in a program and it includes alternative diverge, alternative converge procedures, Simultaneous diverge and simultaneous converge procedures. Combination procedure: there are numerous single procedures in a program and maximum is 10 (S0~S9) procedures. 5. Procedure separation: it is allowed to write in numerous procedures within one step ladder diagram There are two single procedures S0 and S1 at the right diagram; procedure of the program is to write in S0 ~S30 first, OUT S0 OUT S1 and then S1~S43. Either one step point on the procedure could jump to any one S21 S41 specified step point on other procedures. Once the condition below S21 at the right diagram is held, it OUT S42 could jump to the specified S42 step point on the S1 procedure; this motion is called the separate step point. S30 S43 6. Restrictions on the diverging procedure: (See following examples) A. Up to 8 diverging step points could be used within a diverging procedure. B. Up to 16 loops could be used in the combination of plural diverging or simultaneous converging procedures. C. Either one step point on the procedure could jump to any one specified step point on other procedures. 7. Reset of the step point and the output prohibition: A. Use the ZRST command to Reset a section f step points to be OFF. DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-7
4 Step Ladder Commands B. Use the output Y prohibition of PLC (M1034=ON). 8. Retaining step point: When PLC encountered power failure, the retaining step point will memorize the ON/OFF status, and go on with the before the power failure after the power is turned back on. S0~S127 are currently the retaining step points. 9. Special auxiliary relay and special register: refer to chapter 4.6 IST command for detail. Device M1040 M1041 M1042 M1043 M1044 M1045 M1046 M1047 D1040 D1041 D1042 D1043 D1044 D1045 D1046 D1047 Description Step transition inhibits. When M1040 is On, all movement of step point are inhibited. Step transition start. Flag for IST command. Start pulse. Flag for IST command. Origin reset completed. Flag for IST command. Origin condition. Flag for IST command. All outputs clear inhibit. Flag for IST command. STL state setting. Once there is a step point On, M1046 is On. STL monitor enable ON state number 1 of step point S ON state number 2 of step point S ON state number 3 of step point S ON state number 4 of step point S ON state number 5 of step point S ON state number 6 of step point S ON state number 7 of step point S ON state number 8 of step point S 4.5 Categories of Procedures A. Single procedure: the basic step action is single procedure control action. The first step point of step ladder diagram is called primary step point and the number is S0~S9. Those step points after primary step point are called general step point and the number are S10~S1023. S10~S19 will be used as origin reset step points once use command IST. A-1 Single Procedure without Divergence and Convergence After finishing a procedure, transferring control power of step point to primary step point. 4-8 DVP-PLC Application Manual
4 Step Ladder Commands Step Ladder Diagram M1002 S0 S S20 S S30 S S40 S X1 X2 ZRST S0 S127 SET S0 SET S20 Y0 SET S30 Y1 SET S40 Y2 SFC diagram M1002 S0 S20 X1 S30 X2 S40 X3 S50 X4 S60 Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 X3 SET S50 X5 S50 S Y3 S0 X4 SET S60 S60 S X5 Y4 S0 RET END DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-9
4 Step Ladder Commands A-2 JUMP Procedure 1. Transfer control power of step point to upper certain step point. 2. Transfer control power of step point to step point of other procedure. OUT S0 OUT S0 OUT S1 S21 OUT S21 S41 OUT S42 S42 S41 S43 S43 A-3 Reset Procedure At the right diagram, S50 will Reset itself and end the procedure when condition is held. S0 S21 RST S50 B. Complicated single procedure: it includes alternative diverge, alternative converge procedures, Simultaneous diverge and simultaneous converge procedures. B-1 Structure of simultaneous divergence The situation that transfers to many states when present condition is held is called structure of simultaneous divergence as shown in following. When =On, S20 will transfer to S21, S22, S23 and S24 at the same time. Ladder diagram of simultaneous divergence: 4-10 DVP-PLC Application Manual
4 Step Ladder Commands S20 S SET S21 SET S22 SET S23 SET S24 SFC diagram of simultaneous divergence: S20 S21 S22 S23 S24 B-2 Structure of the alternative divergence The situation that transfers to individual state when individual condition of present state is held is called structure of alternative divergence as shown in following. S20 will transfer to S30 when =On, S20 will transfer to S31 when X1=On and S20 will transfer to S32 when X2=On. Ladder diagram of alternative divergence: S20 S SET S30 X1 SET S31 X2 SET S32 SFC diagram of alternative divergence: S20 X1 X2 S30 S31 S32 B-3 Structure of the simultaneous convergence The situation that transfers to next state when continuous states are held at the same time is called simultaneous convergence. DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-11
4 Step Ladder Commands Ladder diagram of simultaneous convergence: S40 S S41 S S42 S X2 SET S50 SFC diagram of simultaneous convergence: S40 S41 S42 X2 S50 B-4 Structure of the alternative convergence The following ladder diagram is alternative convergence. That means it will transfer to S60 once one of S30, S40 and S50 is held. Ladder diagram of alternative convergence: S30 S SET S60 S40 S X1 SET S60 S50 S X2 SET S60 SFC diagram of alternative convergence: S30 S40 S50 X1 X2 S60 4-12 DVP-PLC Application Manual
4 Step Ladder Commands of the alternative divergence and alternative convergence procedures M1002 ZRST S0 S127 M1002 S1 S S20 S S30 S S40 S S31 S S41 S S32 S S42 S S50 S S60 S X1 X4 X7 X2 X3 X5 X6 X10 X11 T1 X12 SET S1 SET S20 Y0 SET S30 SET S31 SET S32 Y1 SET S40 Y2 SET S50 Y3 SET S41 Y4 SET S50 Y5 SET S42 Y6 SET S50 TMR T1 K10 SET S60 Y7 S1 S1 S20 X1 S30 X2 S40 X3 S50 T1 S60 X12 S1 Y0 X4 Y1 S31 X5 Y3 Y2 S41 Y4 X6 TMR T1 K10 Y7 X7 S32 X10 S42 X11 Y5 Y6 RET END DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-13
4 Step Ladder Commands of the simultaneous divergence and simultaneous convergence procedures M1002 S3 S S20 S X1 ZRST S0 S127 SET S3 SET S20 Y0 SET S30 M1002 S3 S20 X1 S30 X2 Y0 Y1 S31 X3 Y3 X4 S32 Y5 SET S31 S40 Y2 S41 Y4 S42 Y6 S30 S S40 S S31 S S41 S S32 S X2 X3 X4 SET Y1 SET Y2 Y3 SET Y4 Y5 SET S32 S40 S41 S42 X5 S50 T1 S60 X6 S3 TMR T1 K10 Y7 S42 S Y6 S40 S S41 S S42 S X5 SET S50 S50 S S60 S T1 X6 TMR T1 K10 SET S60 Y7 S3 RET END 4-14 DVP-PLC Application Manual
4 Step Ladder Commands of the simultaneous divergence and alternative convergence procedures M1002 ZRST S0 S127 M1002 S4 S4 S S20 S X1 SET SET Y0 SET S4 S20 S30 S20 X1 S30 X2 S40 X3 Y0 Y1 Y2 S31 X4 S41 X5 Y3 Y4 S32 X6 S42 X7 Y5 Y6 SET S31 S50 TMR T1 K10 S30 S S40 S S31 S S41 S X2 X3 X4 X5 SET Y1 SET Y2 SET Y3 SET Y4 SET S32 S40 S50 S41 S50 T1 S60 S4 Y7 S32 S X6 Y5 SET S42 S42 S X7 Y6 SET S50 S50 S S60 S T1 X6 TMR SET Y7 S4 T1 S60 K10 RET END DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-15
4 Step Ladder Commands DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-16 Combination example 1: (includes the alternative divergence and convergence, the simultaneous divergence and convergence) S127 M1002 ZRST S0 SET S0 Y1 SET S30 Y2 SET S40 Y3 S X1 S30 S X4 S31 S X5 SET S31 SET S32 SET S40 Y5 S40 S X7 SET S50 Y7 S50 S X11 SET S60 Y13 S60 S SET S51 X2 X3 S20 Y0 SET S20 S S0 END Y10 S51 S X12 SET S61 S61 S X15 SET S70 Y14 Y17 S70 S X17 RET S0 S60 S S61 S Y4 S32 S X6 SET S41 Y6 S41 S X10 SET S52 SET S53 Y12 S63 S X14 SET S63 Y15 S62 S Y16 S63 S X16 S0 S62 S S63 S Y11 S52 S X13 SET S62 S0 S20 S30 S40 S0 M1002 X1 X4 X17 Y1 Y2 Y5 S50 X7 S70 Y17 S51 S61 X12 Y10 Y14 S52 S62 X13 Y11 Y15 X11 X15 S60 Y13 Y0 Y7 S31 Y3 X5 X2 S32 Y4 X6 X3 S41 Y6 X10 X16 S53 S63 Y12 Y16 X14 S0
4 Step Ladder Commands Combination example 2: (includes the alternative divergence and convergence, the simultaneous divergence and convergence) M1002 ZRST S0 S127 M1002 S0 S S30 S S31 S S32 S X1 X1 X2 SET SET Y0 SET SET Y1 SET Y2 S0 S30 S31 S32 S33 S0 S30 X1 S31 X2 S33 X4 Y0 Y1 Y3 X1 S32 X3 Y2 S33 S X3 X4 SET Y3 SET S33 S34 S34 X5 S35 Y4 Y5 S36 X6 S37 Y6 Y7 SET S36 X7 S34 S Y4 S0 X5 SET S35 S35 S Y5 S36 S Y6 X6 SET S37 S37 S Y7 S35 S S37 S X7 S0 RET END Restrictions on the divergence procedure: 1. Up to 8 divergence step points could be used in a divergence procedure. In following diagram, maximum divergence step points after step point S20 are 8 (S30 - S37). 2. Up to 16 loops could be used in the combination of plural divergence or simultaneous convergence procedures. In following diagram, 4 step points after step point S40, 7 step points after step point S41 and 5 step points after step point S42. In this procedure, maximum is 16 loops. 3. Either one step point on the procedure could jump to any one specified step point on other procedures. M1002 S0 S20 Y0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 S30 Y1 S31 Y2 S32 Y3 S32 Y4 S34 Y5 S35 Y6 S36 Y7 S37 Y10 X11 S40 X20 S50 X32 S70 X44 S80 X51 X12 X14 X15 X13 SET Y11 OUT S0 S41 S20 X21 Y14 S51 Y15 S52 Y16 OUT S53 S20 X33 X34 Y32 S71 Y33 S72 Y34 X35 S73 X45 Y41 S81 X15 Y12 Y17 S54 Y35 Y42 X15 X22 Y20 S55 X36 S74 X46 X16 RST S36 X23 X24 OUT S58 Y24 Y21 S56 Y22 S57 Y23 S20 X37 RST S58 Y36 X17 S42 Y13 X25 X26 S59 Y25 S60 X40 X41 S75 Y37 X47 SET S0 X27 Y26 S61 X42 X30 X31 Y27 S62 Y30 S63 X43 S76 Y40 X50 OUT S42 Y31 SET X52 S0 SET S0 DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-17
4 Step Ladder Commands 4.6 IST command API 60 IST Manual/Auto Control Applicable models ES/EX/SS EP/SA EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D 1 D 2 Note: Operand S will occupy 8 continuous devices. The usage range of operand D 1 and D 2 is S20~S899 and D 2 >D 1. IST command only can be used one time in program. Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (7 STEPS) IST Continuous - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1040~M1047. Refer to following for detail. Command Explanation 1 : The starting input number of specific operation mode. : The smallest number for the specific status step point under the auto mode. : The greatest number for the specific status step point under the auto mode. The IST is a convenient command made specifically for the initial state of the step ladder control procedure to accommodate the special auxiliary relay to the convenient auto control command. M1000 IST X10 S20 S60 X10: Individual operation (Manual operation) X11: Zero point return X12: Step operation X13: One cycle operation X14: Continuous operation X15: Zero point return start switch X16: Start switch X17: Stop switch When the IST command is executed, the following special auxiliary relay will switch automatically. M1040: Movement inhibited S0: Manual operation/initial state step point M1041: Movement start S1: Zero point return/initial state step point M1042: Status pulse S2: Auto operation/initial state step point M1047: STL monitor enable When IST command is used, S10~S19 are for zero point return operation and the step point of this state can t be used as general step point. However, when using S0~S9 step points, S0 initiates manual operation, S1 initiates zero point return operation and S2 initiates auto operation. Thus, there should be three circuits of these three initial state step points first written in program. When switching to S1 (zero point return mode), zero point return won t have any actions once one of S10~S19 is On. When switching to S2 (auto operation mode), auto operation won t have any actions once one of between to is On or M1043=On 4-18 DVP-PLC Application Manual
4 Step Ladder Commands 2 : the Robot arm control (use IST command): Motion request: In the example, two kinds of balls (big and small) are separated and moved to different boxes. Distribute the control panel for the control. Motion of the Robot arm: lower robot arm, collect balls, raise robot arm, shift to right, lower robot arm, release balls, raise robot arm, shift to left to finish motion in order. I/O Device: Left-limit X1 Y0 Upper-limit X4 Y3 Y1 Upper-limit X5 Control panel Y2 Big/small sensor Right-limit X2 (big balls) Big Right-limit X3 (small balls) Small Collect balls X20 Release balls X21 Power start Power stop Raise Shift robot arm to right X22 Lower robot arm X23 X24 Shift to left X25 Zero return X15 Zero return X11 Manual operation X10 Step X12 Auto start X16 Auto stop X17 One cycle operation X13 Continuous operation X14 Big/small sensor. The left-limit of the robot arm X1, the right-limit X2 (big balls), the right-limit X3 (small balls), the upper-limit X4, and the lower-limit X5. Raise robot arm Y0, lower robot arm Y1, shift to right Y2, shift to left Y3, and collect balls Y4. START circuit: M1000 X1 Y4 M1044 IST X10 S20 S80 DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-19
4 Step Ladder Commands Manual operation mode: S0 S X20 X21 X22 Y1 X23 Y0 X24 X4 X25 X4 Y3 Y2 SET RST Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y4 Collect balls Raise robot arm Release balls Lower robot arm Shift to right Shift to left Condition interlock Condition interlock Raise robot arm to the upper-limit (X4 is ON) Zero point return mode: SFC figure: S1 X15 S10 RST Y4 Release balls RST Y1 Stop lowering robot arm X4 Y0 Raise robot arm to the upper-limit (X4 is ON) S11 RST Y2 Stop shifting to right X1 Y3 Shift to left and shift to the left-limit (X1 is On) S12 SET M1043 Start zero return completed flag RST S12 Zero return operation completed 4-20 DVP-PLC Application Manual
4 Step Ladder Commands Ladder Diagram: S1 S S10 S X15 SET RST S10 Y4 Enter zero return operation mode Release balls RST Y1 Stop lowering robot arm S11 S X4 Y0 SET RST S11 Y2 Raise robot arm to the upper-limit (X4 is ON) Stop shifting to right S12 S X1 Y3 SET SET S12 M1043 Shift to left and shift to the left-limit (X1 is On) Start zero return completed flag RST S12 Zero return operation completed Auto operation (step/one-cycle/continuous operation modes): SFC figure: S2 M1041 M1044 S20 Y1 X5 S30 SET Y4 X5 S40 SET Y4 T0 TMR T0 K30 T1 TMR T1 K30 S31 Y0 S41 Y0 X4 S32 X2 Y2 X4 S42 X3 Y2 X2 X3 X5 S50 S60 Y1 RST Y4 T2 S70 X4 S80 X1 S2 X1 TMR T2 K30 Y0 Y3 DVP-PLC Application Manual 4-21
4 Step Ladder Commands Ladder Diagram: S2 M1041 M1044 S S20 S S30 S X5 X5 SET Y1 SET SET SET S20 S30 S40 Y4 Enter auto operation mode Lower robot arm Collect balls S31 S S32 S S40 S T0 X4 X2 X2 TMR SET Y0 SET Y2 SET SET T0 S31 S32 S50 Y4 K30 Raise robot arm to the upper-limit (X4 is ON) Shift to right Collect balls S41 S S42 S S50 S S60 S T1 X4 X3 X3 X5 TMR SET Y0 SET Y2 SET Y1 SET RST T1 S41 S42 S50 S60 Y4 K30 Raise robot arm to the upper-limit (X4 is ON) Shift to right Lower robot arm Release balls S70 S S80 S T2 X4 X1 X1 TMR SET Y0 SET Y3 S2 T2 S70 S80 K30 Raise robot arm to the upper-limit (X4 is ON) Shift to left and shift to the left-limit (X1 is On) RET END 4-22 DVP-PLC Application Manual
5 Application Commands 5.1 Summary of Parameters Mnemonic Codes Applicable models STEPS Classification API P Function Command 16 bits 32 bits ES EP EH 16-bit 32-bit Loop Control Transmission Comparison Four Fundamental Operations of Arithmetic Rotation and Displacement 00 CJ Conditional jump 3 6-1 01 CALL Call subroutine 3 6-5 02 SRET Subroutine return 1 6-5 03 IRET Interrupt return 1 6-7 04 EI Enable interrupts 1 6-7 05 DI Disable interrupts 1 6-7 06 FEND First end 1 6-11 07 WDT Watchdog timer refresh 1 6-12 08 FOR Start of FOR-NEXT loop 3 6-14 09 NEXT End of FOR-NEXT loop 1 6-14 10 CMP DCMP Compare 7 13 6-17 11 ZCP DZCP Zone compare 9 17 6-18 12 MOV DMOV Data Move 5 9 6-19 13 SMOV Shift move 11 6-20 14 CML DCML Compliment 5 9 6-22 15 BMOV Block move 7 6-23 16 FMOV DFMOV Fill move 7 13 6-24 17 XCH DXCH Data exchange 5 9 6-25 18 BCD DBCD Convert BIN data into BCD 5 9 6-26 19 BIN DBIN Convert BCD data into BIN 5 9 6-27 20 ADD DADD Perform the addition of BIN data 7 13 6-29 21 SUB DSUB Perform the subtraction of BIN data 7 13 6-30 22 MUL DMUL Perform the multiplication of BIN data 7 13 6-31 23 DIV DDIV Perform the division of BIN data 7 13 6-32 24 INC DINC Perform the addition of 1 3 5 6-34 25 DEC DDEC Perform the subtraction of 1 3 5 6-34 26 WAND DAND Perform the logical product (AND) operation 7 13 6-35 27 WOR DOR Perform the logical sum (OR) operation 7 13 6-36 28 WXOR DXOR Perform the exclusive logical add (XOR) operation 7 13 6-37 29 NEG DNEG Negation 3 5 6-38 30 ROR DROR Rotate to the right 5 9 6-41 31 ROL DROL Rotate to the left 5 9 6-42 32 RCR DRCR Rotate to the right with the carry flag attached 5 9 6-43 33 RCL DRCL Rotate to the left with the carry flag attached 5 9 6-44 34 SFTR Shift the data of device specified to the right 9 6-45 35 SFTL Shift the data of device specified to the left 9 6-46 36 WSFR Shift the register to the right 9 6-47 37 WSFL Shift the register to the left 9 6-48 38 SFWR Shift register write 7 6-49 39 SFRD Shift register read 7 6-50 40 ZRST Resets a range of device specified 5 6-51 41 DECO 8 256 bits decoder 7 6-53 Page DVP-PLC Application Manual 5-1
5 Application Commands Mnemonic Codes Applicable models STEPS Classification API P Function Command 16 bits 32 bits ES EP EH 16-bit 32-bit Data Operation High Speed Processing Convenience Command External I/O Display Serial I/O 42 ENCO 256 8 bits encoder 7 6-54 43 SUM DSUM Sum of ON bits 5 9 6-56 44 BON DBON Check specified bit status 7 13 6-56 45 MEAN DMEAN Mean value 7 13 6-57 46 ANS Alarm device output 7 6-58 47 ANR Alarm device reset 1 6-58 48 SQR DSQR Square root of BIN 5 9 6-60 49 FLT DFLT Convert BIN integer to binary floating point 5 9 6-61 50 REF I/O refresh 5 7-1 51 REFF Refresh and adjust the response time of input filter 3 7-2 52 MTR Input matrix 9 7-3 53 DHSCS High speed counter comparison SET 13 7-6 54 DHSCR High speed counter comparison RESET 13 7-15 55 DHSZ Zone comparison (High-speed counter) 17 7-17 56 SPD Speed detection 7 7-24 57 PLSY DPLSY Pulse output 7 13 7-25 58 PWM Pulse width modulation output 7 7-30 59 PLSR DPLSR Pulse wave output with acceleration/deceleration speed 9 17 7-31 60 IST Manual/Auto control 7 7-36 61 SER DSER Search a data stack 9 17 7-42 62 ABSD DABSD Absolute drum sequencer 9 17 7-43 63 INCD Increment drum sequencer 9 7-44 64 TTMR Teaching timer 5 7-46 65 STMR Special timer 7 7-48 66 ALT On/Off alternate command 3 7-49 67 RAMP Ramp signal 9 7-50 69 SORT Data sort 11 7-52 70 TKY DTKY 10-key keypad input 7 13 7-54 71 HKY DHKY 16-key keypad input 9 17 7-56 72 DSW Digital Switch input 9 7-58 73 SEGD Decode the 7-step display panel 5 7-60 74 SEGL 7-step display scan output 7 7-61 75 ARWS Arrow keypad input 9 7-65 76 ASC ASCII code conversion 11 7-66 77 PR Print 5 7-67 78 FROM DFROM Read special module CR data 9 17 7-69 79 TO DTO Special module CR data write in 9 17 7-69 80 RS Serial data communication 9 7-74 81 PRUN DPRUN Octal number system transmission 5 9 7-87 82 ASCII Convert HEX to ASCII 7 7-88 83 HEX Convert ASCII to HEX 7 7-92 84 CCD Check code 7 7-95 85 VRRD Potentiometer read 5 7-97 86 VRSC Potentiometer scale 5 7-99 87 ABS DABS Absolute value 3 5 7-100 88 PID DPID PID calculation 9 7-100 Page 5-2 DVP-PLC Application Manual
5 Application Commands Mnemonic Codes Applicable models STEPS Classification API P Function Command 16 bits 32 bits ES EP EH 16-bit 32-bit Basic Command Communication command of Delta AC Motor Drives Floating Operation 89 PLS Rising-edge output 3 3-13 90 LDP Rising-edge detection operation 3 3-11 91 LDF Falling-edge detection operation 3 3-11 92 ANDP Series connection command for the rising-edge detection 3 3-11 operation 93 ANDF Series connection command for the falling-edge detection 3 3-12 operation 94 ORP Parallel connection command for the rising-edge detection 3 3-12 operation 95 ORF Parallel connection command for the falling-edge detection 3 3-13 operation 96 TMR Timer 4 3-8 97 CNT DCNT Counter 4 6 3-8 98 INV Inverting operation 1 3-15 99 PLF Falling-edge output 3 3-13 100 MODRD MODBUS data Read 7 8-1 101 MODWR MODBUS data write in 7 8-5 102 FWD VFD-A series drive forward command 7 8-8 103 REV VFD-A series drive reverse command 7 8-9 104 STOP VFD-A series drive stop command 7 8-9 105 RDST VFD-A series drive status read 5 8-11 106 RSTEF VFD-A series drive abnormal reset 5 8-13 107 LRC LRC error check 7 8-13 108 CRC CRC error check 7 8-15 109 SWRD Digital switch read 3 8-18 110 DECMP Binary floating point comparison 13 8-19 111 DEZCP Binary floating point zone comparison 17 8-20 116 DRAD Degree Radian 9 8-21 117 DDEG Radian Degree 9 8-21 118 DEBCD Convert binary floating point to decimal floating point 9 8-23 119 DEBIN Convert decimal floating point to binary floating point 9 8-23 120 DEADD Binary floating point addition 13 8-24 121 DESUB Binary floating point subtraction 13 8-25 122 DEMUL Binary floating point multiplication 13 8-26 123 DEDIV Binary floating point division 13 8-27 124 DEXP Perform exponent operation of binary floating point 9 8-28 125 DLN Perform natural logarithm operation of binary floating point 9 8-29 126 DLOG Perform logarithm operation of binary floating point 13 8-30 127 DESQR Square root of binary floating point 9 8-31 Page DVP-PLC Application Manual 5-3
5 Application Commands Mnemonic Codes Applicable models STEPS Classification API P Function Command 16 bits 32 bits ES EP EH 16-bit 32-bit Floating Operation Additional Command Positioning Control Perpetual Calendar Gray Code 128 DPOW 129 INT DINT 130 DSIN 131 DCOS 132 DTAN 133 DASIN 134 DACOS 135 DATAN 136 DSINH 137 DCOSH 138 DTANH 144 GPWM Perform power operation of binary floating point Convert binary floating point to BIN integer Sine operation of binary floating point Cosine operation of binary floating point Tangent operation of binary floating point Arcsine operation of binary floating point Arccosine operation of binary floating point Arctangent operation of binary floating point Hyperbolic sine operation of binary floating point Hyperbolic cosine operation of binary floating point Hyperbolic tangent operation of binary floating point General pulse width modulation output Page 13 8-32 5 9 8-33 9 8-34 9 8-36 9 8-37 9 8-39 9 8-40 9 8-41 9 8-42 9 8-42 9 8-43 7 8-44 145 FTC Fuzzy temperature control 9 8-45 147 SWAP DSWAP Swap high/low byte 3 5 8-48 148 MEMR DMEMR Data backup MEMORY read 7 13 8-49 149 MEMW DMEMW Data backup MEMORY write in 7 13 8-50 150 MODRW MODBUS data read/write in 11 9-1 151 PWD Input pulse width detection 5 9-11 152 RTMU Start to measure the time of I interrupt 5 9-11 153 RTMD End to measure the time of I interrupt 3 9-12 154 RAND Random value 9 9-13 155 ABSR DABSR ABS current value read 7 13 9-14 156 ZRN DZRN Zero point return 9 17 9-18 157 PLSV DPLSV Variable speed pulse output 7 13 9-21 158 DRVI DDRVI Drive to increment 9 17 9-22 159 DRVA DDRVA Drive to absolute 9 17 9-26 160 TCMP Time compare 11 9-35 161 TZCP Time zone compare 9 9-36 162 TADD Time addition 7 9-37 163 TSUB Time subtraction 7 9-38 166 TRD Time data read 3 9-40 167 TWR Time data write in 3 9-42 169 HOUR DHOUR Hour meter 7 13 9-44 170 GRY DGRY Convert BIN to Gray code 5 9 9-44 171 GBIN DGBIN Convert Gray code to BIN 5 9 9-45 180 MAND Matrix AND 9 9-47 181 MOR Matrix OR 9 9-49 182 MXOR Matrix XOR 9 9-50 183 MNOR Matrix NOR 9 9-51 184 MINV Matrix inverse 7 9-52 5-4 DVP-PLC Application Manual
5 Application Commands Mnemonic Codes Applicable models STEPS Classification API P Function Command 16 bits 32 bits ES EP EH 16-bit 32-bit Matrix Handling High-level Command Contact Type Logic Operation Contact Type Compare Command 185 MCMP Matrix compare 9 9-52 186 MBRD Matrix bit read 7 9-54 187 MBWR Matrix bit write 7 9-55 188 MBS Matrix bit shift 7 9-56 189 MBR Matrix bit rotate 7 9-58 190 MBC Matrix bit state count 7 9-59 196 HST DHST High speed counter 3 9-60 197 PLST DPLST Multi-frequency variable pulse output 9 9 6-8 198 PLSK DPLSK Multi-frequency fixed pulse output 9 9 6-9 199 PLSA DPLSA Multi-step pulse slope output 11 11 6-10 215 LD& DLD& Comparison contact is ON when S1 & S2 is true 5 9 10-1 216 LD DLD Comparison contact is ON when S1 S2 is true 5 9 10-1 217 LD^ DLD^ Comparison contact is ON when S1 ^ S2 is true 5 9 10-1 218 AND& DAND& Comparison contact is ON when S1 & S2 is true 5 9 10-2 219 AND DAND Comparison contact is ON when S1 S2 is true 5 9 10-2 220 AND^ DAND^ Comparison contact is ON when S1 ^ S2 is true 5 9 10-2 221 OR& DOR& Comparison contact is ON when S1 & S2 is true 5 9 10-3 222 OR DOR Comparison contact is ON when S1 S2 is true 5 9 10-3 223 OR^ DOR^ Comparison contact is ON when S1 ^ S2 is true 5 9 10-3 224 LD= DLD= Comparison contact is ON when S1 = S2 is true 5 9 10-4 225 LD> DLD> Comparison contact is ON when S1 > S2 is true 5 9 10-4 226 LD< DLD< Comparison contact is ON when S1 < S2 is true 5 9 10-4 228 LD<> DLD<> Comparison contact is ON when S1 S2 is true 5 9 10-4 229 LD<= DLD<= Comparison contact is ON when S1 S2 is true 5 9 10-4 230 LD>= DLD>= Comparison contact is ON when S1 S2 is true 5 9 10-4 232 AND= DAND= Comparison contact is ON when S1 = S2 is true 5 9 10-5 233 AND> DAND> Comparison contact is ON when S1 > S2 is true 5 9 10-5 234 AND< DAND< Comparison contact is ON when S1 < S2 is true 5 9 10-5 236 AND<> DAND<> Comparison contact is ON when S1 S2 is true 5 9 10-5 237 AND<= DAND<= Comparison contact is ON when S1 S2 is true 5 9 10-5 238 AND>= DAND>= Comparison contact is ON when S1 S2 is true 5 9 10-5 240 OR= DOR= Comparison contact is ON when S1 = S2 is true 5 9 10-6 Page DVP-PLC Application Manual 5-5
5 Application Commands Mnemonic Codes Applicable models STEPS Classification API P Function Command 16 bits 32 bits ES EP EH 16-bit 32-bit 241 OR> DOR> 242 OR< DOR< 244 OR<> DOR<> 245 OR<= DOR<= 246 OR>= DOR>= Comparison contact is ON when S1 > S2 is true Comparison contact is ON when S1 < S2 is true Comparison contact is ON when S1 S2 is true Comparison contact is ON when S1 S2 is true Comparison contact is ON when S1 S2 is true Page 5 9 10-6 5 9 10-6 5 9 10-6 5 9 10-6 5 9 10-6 Note 1: Applicable models ES series above includes EX and SS series; EP includes SA series. Note 2: Above commands for ES/EX/SS models don t possess pulse command (P command). 5-6 DVP-PLC Application Manual
5 Application Commands 5.2 Application Command Structure Many commands may be divided into an command and a operand as follows: Command Operand : Indicates the executive functions of the command : Indicates the device that calculates the operand A command usually allows one step to be used and an operand usually allows two or four steps to be used based on the command is a 16-bit or 32-bit command. Explanation of the format of application command: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 API 41 DECO P S D n 8 to 256 bit Encoder Applicable models ES/EX/SS EP EH 15 14 13 12 S D n Bit device Word device 16-bit command (7 STEPS) X Y M S K H T C D E F DECO Continuous DECOP Note: When D is a bit device, n=1~8 When D is a word device, n=1~4 Please refer the general specifications of each series models to see the usage range of each device. 11 32-bit command Flag: None 10 8 Pulse 9 API number for application command Upper row indicates 16-bit command. If the border of the row is dotted line, it means it is not available in 16-bit command. Lower row indicates 32-bit command. If the border of the row is dotted line, it means it is not available in 32-bit command. A D is added to the head of the mnemonic code to indicate 32-bit command. (For example: API 12 DMOV) The mnemonic code of application command A symbol in the upper row indicates the command is generally applied by using pulse command. A P in the lower row indicates the command is used with the pulse command. (For example: API 12 MOVP) The operand format of application command The description of application command function Applicable models of DVP series PLC The step numbers occupied by the command in 16-bit operation, the name of continuous command and pulse executive command The step numbers occupied by the command in 32-bit operation, the name of continuous command and pulse command The related flag of the application command A symbol * is the device can use index register. Note A symbol * is given to device which can be used for this operand Device name Device type DVP-PLC Application Manual 5-7
5 Application Commands Application Commands Input Some application commands are only combined by command codes API, but most of them are combined by command codes API and several operands. The application commands of DVP-Series PLC are controlled by command codes API 00 to API 246. Each command code has its own meaning, for example, API 12 stands for MOV (move data). When using ladder diagram editor to input programs, you will need to type in the command MOV. If using the HPP to input the program, we will have to enter the API command codes. Each application command has its unique operand. MOV K10 D10 command operand This command is to move the value of operand to the appointed operand. Source operand: if there is more than 1 source operand, then we use, to display. Destination operand: if there is more than one operand, then we use,. to display. If the operand may only be represented as a constant K, H or register then we will use,,,,, to display. The Length of Operand (16-bit or 32-bit command) The length of operand can be divided into two groups: 16-bit and 32-bit to process different length data. A D before a command separates 32-bit from 16-bit commands. 16-bit MOV command MOV K10 D10 When =On, K10 has been sent to D10. 32-bit DMOV command X1 D10 D20 When X1=On, Data of (D11, D10) have been sent to (D21, D20) Continuous command and Pulse command The type of command can be divided into two types: continuous command and pulse command. Due to the time is shorter when the commands have not been executived, please use the pulse command as far as possible to reduce the scan cycle of programming. A P to be added directly after the command, which is pulse commands. Most used commands usually 5-8 DVP-PLC Application Manual
5 Application Commands use pulse commands for application, for example, INC, DEC and MOV etc. related commands. Therefore, pulse commands are identified by the symbol on the right top of the command. Pulse command D10 D12 When goes from OFF ON, the MOVP command will be executed one time and command cannot be re-executed again in the scan of program scan. This is called pulse command. Continuous command X1 MOV D10 D12 When X1=ON, the MOV command can be re-executed again in every scan of program. This is called continuous command. The above figures show that when, X1=OFF, the command will not be executed and the contents of the destination operand D will retmain unchanged. The Assigned Devices of Operands 1. Bit device such as X, Y, M, S can be combined together and are defined as the WORD device. In application commands, the bit device can serve as the word device (KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS) to store the numeric values to operate. 2. Data register D, Timer T, Counter C and Index Register E, F are all assigned devices of operands. 3. A data register is usually a 16-bit register and it is also a register D. Hence, assigning a 32-bit register also means assigning two register D with continuous numbers. 4. If the operand of 32-bit command assign D0, the 32-bit data register which is combined by D1 and D0 will be occupied. D1 is the upper 16-bit and D0 is the lower 16-bit. The using rule of timer T and 16-bit Counter(C0~C199) is the same. 5. When the 32-bit counter(c200~c255) is used as Data register, one point indicates 32-bit length. Only the operand of 32-bit command can be assigned, the operand of 16-bit command can not be assigned. Operand Data format 1. X, Y, M, S are only be single point ON/OFF, these are defined as a bit device. 2. However, 16-bit (or 32-bit) device T, C, D, E, F are data registers and are defined as Word device. 3. We also can add Kn in front of X, Y, M and S to be defined as word device, whereas n=1 means 4-bit. So 16-bit can be described from K1 to K4, and 32-bit can be described from K1 to K8. For example, K2M0 means there are 8-bit from M0 to M7. DVP-PLC Application Manual 5-9
5 Application Commands MOV K2M0 D10 When =On, move the contents of M0 to M7 to D10 segments 0 to 7, and segments 8 to 15 are set to 0. Specified Number of Digits 16-bit command 32-bit command Specified Number of Digits (16-bit command): K-32,768~K+32,767 Specified Number of Digits (32-bit command): K-2,147,483,648~K+2,147,483,647 16-bit command: (K1~K4) 32-bit command: (K1~K8) K1 (4 points) 0~15 K1 (4 points) 0~15 K2 (8 points) 0~255 K2 (8 points) 0~255 K3 (12 points) 0~4,095 K3 (12 points) 0~4,095 K4 (16 points) -32,768~+32,767 K4 (16 points) 0~65,535 K5 (20 points) 0~1,048,575 K6 (24 points) 0~167,772,165 K7 (28 points) 0~268,435,455 K8 (32 points) -2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647 Flags 1. General Flags For the operation result of application commands, there are following flags of DVP series PLC: : M1020 : Zero flag M1022 : Carry flag M1021 : Borrow flag M1029 : Command completed flag When executing the command, all flags will be turned to ON or OFF by the operation result of application commands. However, when the command has not been executed, the ON/OFF state of the flags will remain. Therefore, please notice that the above flags may not only be in connection with specified commands but also many commands. The program example of command completed flag, i.e. M1029 When the conditional contact is ON, the digital switch input command (DSW) will specify 4 output points with 0.1 second frequency and circulate in order automatically to read the values of DSW. During the intermediate period of operation, if the conditional contact is OFF, the DSW command is suspended and the above-mentioned command will be re-executed from the beginning of the program cycle.when the conditional contact is ON again, please refer the circuit below if you desire to stop the interrupt. 5-10 DVP-PLC Application Manual
5 Application Commands M0 M1029 SET M0 DSW X10 Y10 D0 K0 RST M0 When =ON, DSW command is activated. When =OFF, wait for the program cycle of DSW command being completed, after M1029=ON, then M0 will be OFF. 2. Error Operation Flags If the combination of the application command is error and/or the assigned devices of operands are out of range, errors will occur and the error flags and numbers in the following table will be shown during the excution of the application commands. M1067 D1067 D1069 When error operations occur, M1067=On, D1067 will show the error number and D1069 will show the error address. If other errors occur, the contents of D1067 and D1069 will be refreshed. (when the error is resetd, M1067=Off) M1068 D1068 When error operations occur, M1068=On, D1068 will show the error address. If other errors occur, the contents of D1068 will not be refreshed, M1068 must use RST command to reset to OFF, otherwise the error will remain. 3. Flags for Extending Functions Some application commands can extend the functions by using some special flags. : command RS can switch transmission mode 8-bit and 16-bit by using M1161. The Limited Using Times for Executing Commands: Some commands can be used several times in the program, but some of them only can be used twice or even once in the program. However, these commands can be modified by index register to extend more functions of the commands in the operands. 1. Only can be used once in the program: API 58 (PWM) (ES/EX/SS models) API 74 (SEGL) (ES/EX/SS models) API 60 (IST) (ES/EX/SS/EP/SA/EH models) API 88 (PID) (ES/EX/SS/EP/SA models) 2. Only can be used twice in the program: API 57 (PLSY) (ES/EX/SS models) API 74 (SEGL) (EH models) API 59 (PLSR) (ES/EX/SS models) API 77 (PR) (EP/SA/EH models) 3. Only can be used four times in the program: API 169 (HOUR) (EP/SA models) 4. Only can be used eight times in the program: API 64 (TTMR) (EP/SA models) DVP-PLC Application Manual 5-11
5 Application Commands 5. API 53 (DHSCS) and API 54 (DHSCR), these commands only can be executed simultaneously less than four times in the program of DVP-ES/EX/SS models. 6. API 53 (DHSCS), API 54 (DHSCR), API 55(DHSZ) these commands only can be executed simultaneously less than six times in the program of DVP-EP/SA models. The Limited Using Times for Executing Commands Simultaneously: There is no limited using time for executing the same command in the program. However, there are limited using times for executing the commands simultaneously. 1. API 52 (MTR), API 56 (SPD), API 62 (ABSD), API 63 (INCD), API 69 (SORT), API 70 (TKY), API 71 (HKY), API 72 (DSW) (EP models), API 74 (SEGL)(EP models), API 75 (ARWS), API 80 (RS), API 100 (MODRD), API 101 (MODWR), API 102 (FWD), API 103 (REV), API 104 (STOP), API 105 (RDST), API 106 (RSTEF), API 150 (MODRW), API 151 (PWD), these commands only can be executed simultaneously once in the program. 2. API 57 (PLSY), API 58 (PWM), API 59 (PLSR), API 72 (DSW) (EH models), these commands only can be executed simultaneously twice in the program. 3. API 169 (HOUR) (EH models) only can be executed four times in the program. 4. API 64 (TTMR) (EH models) only can be executed eight times in the program. 5. In the program of DVP EH models, there is no limited using time for hardware high speed counter related commands, like DHSCS, DHSCR and DHSZ. However, there are limited using times for executing the commands simultaneously. DHSCS, DHSCR command will use one memory unit and DHSZ command will use two memory units. When these commands are executed simultaneously, the total used memory units can not exceed eight memory units. If exceeding eight memory units, system will totalize the used memory units of the commands which have been scanned and executed first, the others will be ignored. 5.3 Handling of Numeric Values Device such as X, Y, M, S are bit devices and there are only two state, ON and OFF. However, T, C, D, E, F are data registers and are defined as word devices. Although bit device can only be single point ON/OFF but it can be used as numeric value in the operands of application commands if adding the specified bit device in front. The specified bit device is the specified number of digit and it would look like Kn where n can be a number from the range of 0 to 8. 16-bit can be described from K1 to K4, and 32-bit can be described from K1 to K8. For example, K2M0 means there are 8-bit from M0 to M7. 5-12 DVP-PLC Application Manual
5 Application Commands valid data M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 clear to 0 transmit 1 low byte D1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 equal to low byte D1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Transmit K1M0, K2M0, K3M0 to 16-bit registers and insufficient upper bit data have not been transmitted. It s the same as sending K1M0, K2M0, K3M0, K4M0, K5M0, K6M0, K7M0 to 32-bit registers and the insufficient upper bit data have not been transmitted also. The insufficient upper bit will be defined as 0 if the content of the operand assign K1 to K3 in 16-bit operation or assign K4 to K7 in 32-bit operation. Therefore, it means the operation result is positive. M0 The BCD value combined by X4 to X13 will be converted to BIN K2X4 D0 D0 as BIN value. The numbers of Bit device can specify freely. However, it is recommended to use 0 in the lowest digit decimal place of X and Y devices (, X10, X20 Y0, Y10, Y20). For M and S Series, it is recommended to use the multiple 8 but the use of 0 is the most device efficient, like M0, M10, M20 etc. Assign Continuous Numbers For example, like D date register, the continuous numbers of D are D0, D1, D2, D3, D4 etc. For the bit device, the continuous numbers are shown as follows: K1 K1X4 K1X10 K1X14 K2Y0 K2Y10 K2Y20 Y2X30 K3M0 K3M12 K3M24 K3M36. K4S0 K4S16 K4S32 K4S48. The bit device numbers are all of the above. To avoiding errors, please do not skip over the continuous numbers. Furthermore, if K4Y0 is used in 32-bit operation, the upper 16bit is defined as 0. Therefore, it is recommended to use K8Y0 in 32bit operation. Floating Point Operation The internal operation of DVP series PLC usually is operated by BIN integer format. When performing integer division operation, the decimal point will be discarded. For example: 40 3 = 13, remainder is 1 and the decimal point will be discarded. But if use floating point operation, the decimal point can be given. DVP-PLC Application Manual 5-13
5 Application Commands The application commands related to floating point operation are shown in the following table. API 49 (FLT), API 110 (D ECMP), API 111 (D EZCP), API 116 (D RAD), API 117 (D DEG), API 118 (D EBCD), API 119 (D EBIN), API 120 (D EADD), API 121 (D ESUB), API 122 (D EMUL), API 123 (D EDIV), API 124 (D EXP), API 125 (D LN), API 126 (D LOG), API 127 (D ESQR), API 128 (D POW) API 129 (INT) API 130 (D SIN) API 131 (D COS) API 132 (D TAN) API 133 (D ASIN) API 134 (D ACOS) API 135 (D ATAN) API 136 (D SINH) API 137 (D COSH) API 138 (D TANH) Binary Floating Point DVP PLC represents floating point number with 32-bit number by IEEE754 and the format is in the following: 8-bit 23-bit S exponent mantissa b 31 b 0 S E B Equation ( 1 ) 2 1. M ; B = 127 Sign bit 0: positive 1: negative Therefore, the range of 32-bit floating is from ±2-126 to ±2 +128, i.e. from ±1.1755 10-38 to ±3.4028 10 +38. 1: using 32-bit floating point to represent decimal number 23 Step 1: convert 23 to binary number: 23.0=10111 Step 2: Normalizing the binary: 10111=1.0111 2 4, 0111 is mantissa and 4 is an exponent. Step 3: get exponent: E-B=4 E-127=4 E=131=100000112 Step 4: We can now combine the sign, exponent, and normalized mantissa into the binary IEEE short real representation. 0 10000011 01110000000000000000000 2 =41B80000 16 2: using 32-bit floating point to represent decimal number 23 The conversion steps are the same as decimal number 23. Only need to modify sign bit from 0 to 1 to get value 1 10000011 01110000000000000000000 2 =C1B80000 16 DVP PLC also uses two registers with continuous number to store binary floating point. The following is the example that uses register (D1, D0) to store binary floating point. D1(b15~b0) D0(b15~b0) 7 6 5 1 0-1 -2-3 -17-18 -19-20 -21-22 -23 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 S E7 E6 E5 E1 E0 A22 A21 A20 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 b31 b30 b29 b28 b24 b23 b22 b21 b20 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 8 bits of exponent 23 bits of constant E0~E7=0 or 1 A0~A22=0 or 1 sign bit (0: positive 1:negative) When b0~b31 is 0, the content is 0. 5-14 DVP-PLC Application Manual
5 Application Commands Decimal Floating Point The binary floating point is not accepted by most people. Therefore, binary floating point format can be converted to decimal floating point format for people to perform the operation of decimal numbers. However, the DVP series PLC use binary floating point to perform the operation of decimal numbers. Decimal floating point is stored in the register with 2 continuous numbers. The register with small number stores constant and the register with larger number stores exponent. For example, using register (D1, D0) to store a decimal floating point. Decimal floating point = [constant D0] X 10 constant D0 = ±1,000~±9,999 exponent D1 = - 41~+35 [exponent D1 ] the most significant bit of (D1, D0) is symbol bit. Besides, constant 100 doesn t exist in D0 due to 100 will be shown with 1,000 10-1. The range of decimal number is from ±1175 10-41 to ±3402 10 +38. Decimal floating point can be used in the following commands. The conversion command for Binary floating point Decimal floating point (D EBCD) The conversion command for Decimal floating point Binary floating point (D EBIN) Zero flag (M1020), Borrow flag (M1021) and carry flag (M1022) The flags that corresponds to the floating command are: Zero flag: when the result is 0, M1020=On. Borrow flag: when the result is least than the minimum unit, M1021=On Carry flag: when the absolute value of result exceeds usage range, M1022=On 5.4 Index register E, F The index register is 16-bit register. There are 2 devices for ES/EX/SS models (E and F), 8 devices for EP models (E0~E3, F0~F3) and 16 devices for EH models (E0~E7, F0~F7). E and F are also 16-bit register just the same as general register. It can be wrote/read freely. 16-bit 16-bit E0 F0 32-bit E0 F0 upper bit lower bit If using a 32-bit register, you should specify E. In this condition, F will be covered by E and cannot be used anymore; otherwise the contents of E will become incorrect. (When PLC start-up, it is commended to use MOVP command to clear the contents of F and reset it to 0) When using 32-bit index register, the combination of E, F are as follows. (E0, F0), (E1, F1), (E2, F2) (E7, F7). DVP-PLC Application Manual 5-15
5 Application Commands MOV K20E0 D10F0 E0=8 F0=14 20+8=28 10+14=24 K28 D24 transmit As the left figure shown, the contents of operand will change according to the contents of E, F. and we name this kind of modification as Index. For example, E0=8 and K20E0 all represent constant K28(20+8). If the contact is ON, constant K28 will be transmitted to register D24. Devices can use Index register to modify in ES/EX/SS Series are: P, X, Y, M, S, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D. Devices can use Index register to modify in EP Series are: P, X, Y, M, S, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D Devices can use Index register to modify in EH Series are: P, I, X, Y, M, S, K, H, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D The above device can use index register E, F to modify. However, index register E, F cannot modify itself, either Kn. (K4M0E0 is available, K0E0M0 is not available). In each application command, if the symbol * is added in the table of operand, it means the device can use index register E, F to modify. Index register E, F can be used to modify P, I, X, Y, M, S, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D these devices under certain condition. Two devices, E or F can be specified when using 16-bit register. If using index register E, F to modify constant K, H in 32-bit command, only one device, E can be specified. When constant (K,H) is used to be index function in WPLSoft command mode, it needs to use symbol @. : MOV K10@E0 D0F0 The program example of index: 5 The digit switch input X3~, which be selected by Timer T DVP - PLC T0 can use index register F0 to shorten the program and display the 7 present value of T0~T9 on the external 7-step display panel. M1000 BIN K1 F0 (X3~)BCD (F0)BIN BCD T0F0 K4Y0 (T0F0)BIN (Y17~Y0)BCD When F0=0~9, T0F0=T0~T9. The 7-step display output Y17~Y0, which be used to display the present value of Timer T There are limited using times of some commands. If using the index register E, F to modify, the final result can be the same as the operation result of using the same command repeatedly. 5-16 DVP-PLC Application Manual
5 Application Commands 5.5 Index for Commands Sort by Characters Classification API A B C Mnemonic Codes P Applicable models STEPS Function Command 16 bits 32 bits ES EP EH 16-bit 32-bit 87 ABS DABS Absolute value 3 5 7-100 62 ABSD DABSD Absolute drum sequencer 9 17 7-43 155 ABSR DABSR ABS current value read 7 13 9-14 20 ADD DADD Perform the addition of BIN data 7 13 6-29 66 ALT On/Off alternate command 3 7-49 218 AND& DAND& Comparison contact is ON when S1 & S2 is true 5 9 10-2 220 AND^ DAND^ Comparison contact is ON when S1 ^ S2 is true 5 9 10-2 219 AND DAND Comparison contact is ON when S1 S2 is true 5 9 10-2 234 AND< DAND< Comparison contact is ON when S1 < S2 is true 5 9 10-5 237 AND<= DAND<= Comparison contact is ON when S1 S2 is true 5 9 10-5 236 AND<> DAND<> Comparison contact is ON when S1 S2 is true 5 9 10-5 232 AND= DAND= Comparison contact is ON when S1 = S2 is true 5 9 10-5 233 AND> DAND> Comparison contact is ON when S1 > S2 is true 5 9 10-5 238 AND>= DAND>= Comparison contact is ON when S1 S2 is true 5 9 10-5 93 ANDF 92 ANDP Series connection command for the falling-edge detection operation Series connection command for the rising-edge detection operation Page 3 3-12 3 3-11 47 ANR Alarm device reset 1 6-58 46 ANS Alarm device output 7 6-58 75 ARWS Arrow keyboard input 9 7-65 76 ASC ASCII code conversion 11 7-66 82 ASCII Convert HEX to ASCII 7 7-88 133 DASIN Arcsine operation of binary floating point 9 8-39 134 DACOS 135 DATAN Arccosine operation of binary floating point Arctangent operation of binary floating point 9 8-40 9 8-41 18 BCD DBCD Convert BIN data into BCD 5 9 6-26 19 BIN DBIN Convert BCD data into BIN 5 9 6-27 15 BMOV Block move 7 6-23 44 BON DBON Determine the ON bits 7 13 6-56 01 CALL Call subroutine 3 6-5 84 CCD Check code 7 7-95 00 CJ Conditional jump 3 6-1 14 CML DCML Compliment 5 9 6-22 DVP-PLC Application Manual 5-17
5 Application Commands Classification API C D E Mnemonic Codes P Applicable models STEPS Function Command 16 bits 32 bits ES EP EH 16-bit 32-bit 10 CMP DCMP Compare 7 13 6-17 97 CNT DCNT Counter 4 6 3-8 131 DCOS Cosine operation of binary floating point 9 8-36 137 DCOSH Hyperbolic cosine operation of binary floating point 9 8-42 108 CRC CRC error check 7 8-15 25 DEC DDEC Perform the subtraction of 1 3 5 6-34 41 DECO 8 256 bits decode 7 6-53 117 DDEG Radian Degree 9 8-21 05 DI Disable interrupts 1 6-7 23 DIV DDIV Perform the division of BIN data 7 13 6-32 159 DRVA DDRVA Data backup MEMORY write in 9 17 9-26 158 DRVI DDRVI Drive to increment 9 17 9-22 72 DSW Digital Switch input 9 7-58 120 DEADD Binary floating point addition 13 8-24 118 DEBCD Convert binary floating point to decimal floating point 9 8-23 119 DEBIN Convert decimal floating point to binary floating point 9 8-23 110 DECMP Binary floating point comparison 13 8-19 123 DEDIV Binary floating point division 13 8-27 04 EI Enable interrupts 1 6-7 122 DEMUL Binary floating point multiplication 13 8-26 42 ENCO 256 8 bits encode 7 6-54 127 DESQR Square root of binary floating point 9 8-31 121 DESUB Binary floating point subtraction 13 8-25 Page 124 DEXP 111 DEZCP Convert binary floating point to perform exponent operation Binary floating point zone comparison 9 8-28 17 8-20 06 FEND First end 1 6-11 F G H 49 FLT DFLT Convert BIN integer to binary floating point 5 9 6-61 16 FMOV DFMOV Multiple devices movement 7 13 6-24 08 FOR Start of FOR-NEXT loop 3 6-14 78 FROM DFROM Read special module CR data 9 17 7-69 102 FWD VFD-A series drive forward command 7 8-8 145 FTC Fuzzy temperature control 9 8-45 144 GPWM General pulse width modulation output 7 8-44 171 GBIN DGBIN Convert Gray code to BIN P P 5 9 9-45 170 GRY DGRY Convert BIN to Gray code P P 5 9 9-44 83 HEX Convert ASCII to HEX P P 7 7-92 71 HKY DHKY 16-key keyboard input P P 9 17 7-56 5-18 DVP-PLC Application Manual
5 Application Commands Classification API H I L Mnemonic Codes P Applicable models STEPS Function Command 16 bits 32 bits ES EP EH 16-bit 32-bit 169 HOUR DHOUR Hour meter P P 7 13 9-44 54 DHSCR High speed counter comparison RESET P P 13 7-15 53 DHSCS High speed counter comparison SET 13 7-6 196 HST DHST High speed counter 3 9-60 55 DHSZ Zone comparison (High-speed counter) 17 7-17 24 INC DINC Perform the addition of 1 3 5 6-34 63 INCD Increment drum sequencer 9 7-44 129 INT DINT Convert binary floating point to BIN integer Page 5 9 8-33 98 INV Inverting operation 1 3-15 03 IRET Interrupt return 1 6-7 60 IST Manual/Auto control 7 7-36 215 LD& DLD& Comparison contact is ON when S1 & S2 is true 5 9 10-1 217 LD^ DLD^ Comparison contact is ON when S1 ^ S2 is true 5 9 10-1 216 LD DLD Comparison contact is ON when S1 S2 is true 5 9 10-1 226 LD< DLD< Comparison contact is ON when S1 < S2 is true 5 9 10-4 229 LD<= DLD<= Comparison contact is ON when S1 S2 is true 5 9 10-4 228 LD<> DLD<> Comparison contact is ON when S1 S2 is true 5 9 10-4 224 LD= DLD= Comparison contact is ON when S1 = S2 is true 5 9 10-4 225 LD> DLD> Comparison contact is ON when S1 > S2 is true 5 9 10-4 230 LD>= DLD>= Comparison contact is ON when S1 S2 is true 5 9 10-4 91 LDF Falling-edge detection operation 3 3-11 90 LDP Rising-edge detection operation 3 3-11 125 DLN Convert binary floating point to perform natural logarithm operation 9 8-29 126 DLOG Convert binary floating point to perform logarithm operation 13 8-30 M 107 LRC LRC error check 7 8-13 180 MAND Matrix AND 9 9-47 190 MBC Matrix bit state count 7 9-59 189 MBR Matrix bit rotate 7 9-58 186 MBRD Matrix bit read 7 9-54 188 MBS Matrix bit shift 7 9-56 187 MBWR Matrix bit write 7 9-55 185 MCMP Matrix compare 9 9-52 45 MEAN DMEAN Mean value 7 13 6-57 148 MEMR DMEMR Data backup MEMORY read 7 13 8-49 DVP-PLC Application Manual 5-19
5 Application Commands Classification API M N O O P Mnemonic Codes P Applicable models STEPS Function Command 16 bits 32 bits ES EP EH 16-bit 32-bit 149 MEMW DMEMW MEMORY write in 7 13 8-50 184 MINV Matrix inverse 7 9-52 183 MNOR Matrix NOR 9 9-51 100 MODRD MODBUS data Read 7 8-1 150 MODRW MODBUS data read/write in 11 9-1 101 MODWR MODBUS data write in 7 8-5 181 MOR Matrix OR 9 9-49 12 MOV DMOV Data Move 5 9 6-19 52 MTR Input matrix 9 7-3 22 MUL DMUL Perform the multiplication of BIN data 7 13 6-31 182 MXOR Matrix XOR 9 9-50 29 NEG DNEG Negation 3 5 6-38 09 NEXT End of FOR-NEXT loop 1 6-14 221 OR& DOR& Comparison contact is ON when S1 & S2 is true 5 9 10-3 223 OR^ DOR^ Comparison contact is ON when S1 ^ S2 is true 5 9 10-3 222 OR DOR Comparison contact is ON when S1 S2 is true 5 9 10-3 242 OR< DOR< Comparison contact is ON when S1 < S2 is true 5 9 10-6 245 OR<= DOR<= Comparison contact is ON when S1 S2 is true 5 9 10-6 244 OR<> DOR<> Comparison contact is ON when S1 S2 is true 5 9 10-6 240 OR= DOR= Comparison contact is ON when S1 = S2 is true 5 9 10-6 241 OR> DOR> Comparison contact is ON when S1 > S2 is true 5 9 10-6 246 OR>= DOR>= Comparison contact is ON when S1 S2 is true 5 9 10-6 95 ORF 94 ORP Parallel connection command for the falling-edge detection operation Parallel connection command for the rising-edge detection operation Page 3 3-13 3 3-12 88 PID PID calculation 9 7-100 99 PLF Falling-edge output 3 3-13 89 PLS Rising-edge output 3 3-13 59 PLSR DPLSR Pulse wave output with acceleration/deceleration speed 9 17 7-31 157 PLSV DPLSV Variable speed pulse output 7 13 9-21 57 PLSY DPLSY Pulse output 7 13 7-25 128 DPOW Convert binary floating point to perform power operation 13 8-32 77 PR Print 5 7-67 81 PRUN DPRUN Octal number system transmission 5 9 7-87 5-20 DVP-PLC Application Manual
5 Application Commands Classification API Mnemonic Codes P Applicable models STEPS Function Command 16 bits 32 bits ES EP EH 16-bit 32-bit Page P R 151 PWD Input pulse width detection 5 9-11 58 PWM Pulse width modulation output 7 7-30 116 DRAD Degree Radian 9 8-21 67 RAMP Ramp signal 9 7-50 154 RAND Random value 9 9-13 33 RCL DRCL Rotate to the left with the carry flag attached 5 9 6-44 32 RCR DRCR Rotate to the right with the carry flag attached 5 9 6-43 105 RDST VFD-A series drive status read 5 8-11 R S 50 REF I/O refresh 5 7-1 51 REFF 103 REV Refresh and adjust the response time of input filter VFD-A series drive reverse command 3 7-2 7 8-9 31 ROL DROL Rotate to the left 5 9 6-42 30 ROR DROR Rotate to the right 5 9 6-41 80 RS Serial data communication 9 7-74 106 RSTEF 153 RTMD 152 RTMU VFD-A series drive abnormal reset End to measure the time of I interrupt Start to measure the time of I interrupt 5 8-13 3 9-12 5 9-11 73 SEGD Decode the 7-step display panel 5 7-60 74 SEGL 7-step display scan output 7 7-61 61 SER DSER Search a data stack 9 17 7-42 39 SFRD Shift register read 7 6-50 35 SFTL Shift the data of device specified to the left 9 6-46 34 SFTR Shift the data of device specified to the right 9 6-45 38 SFWR Shift register write 7 6-49 130 DSIN Sine operation of binary floating point 9 8-34 136 DSINH Hyperbolic sine operation of binary floating point 9 8-42 13 SMOV Shift move 11 6-20 69 SORT Data sort 11 7-52 56 SPD Speed detection 7 7-24 48 SQR DSQR Square root of BIN 5 9 6-60 02 SRET Subroutine return 1 6-5 65 STMR Special timer 7 7-48 104 STOP VFD-A series drive stop command 7 8-9 21 SUB DSUB Perform the subtraction of BIN data 7 13 6-30 43 SUM DSUM Sum of ON bits 5 9 6-56 DVP-PLC Application Manual 5-21
5 Application Commands Classification API S Mnemonic Codes P Applicable models STEPS Function Command 16 bits 32 bits ES EP EH 16-bit 32-bit 147 SWAP DSWAP Swap high/low byte 3 5 8-48 109 SWRD Digital switch read 3 8-18 162 TADD Real time clock data addition 7 9-37 132 DTAN 138 DTANH Tangent operation of binary floating point Hyperbolic tangent operation of binary floating point Page 9 8-37 9 8-43 160 TCMP Time compare 11 9-35 T 70 TKY DTKY 10-key keyboard input 7 13 7-54 96 TMR Timer 4 3-8 79 TO DTO Special module CR data write in 9 17 7-69 166 TRD Time data read 3 9-40 163 TSUB Time subtraction 7 9-38 64 TTMR Teaching timer 5 7-46 167 TWR Time data write in 3 9-42 161 TZCP Time zone compare 9 9-36 V 85 VRRD Potentiometer read 5 7-97 86 VRSC Potentiometer scale 5 7-99 26 WAND DAND Perform the logical product (AND) operation 7 13 6-35 07 WDT Watchdog timer refresh 1 6-12 W 27 WOR DOR Perform the logical sum (OR) operation 7 13 6-36 37 WSFL Shift the register to the left 9 6-48 36 WSFR Shift the register to the right 9 6-47 28 WXOR DXOR Perform the exclusive logical add (XOR) operation 7 13 6-37 X 17 XCH DXCH Data exchange 5 9 6-25 Z 11 ZCP DZCP Zone compare 9 17 6-18 156 ZRN DZRN Zero point return 9 17 9-18 40 ZRST Resets a range of device specified 5 6-51 Note 1: Applicable models ES series above includes EX and SS series; EP includes SA series. Note 2: Above commands for ES/EX/SS models don t possess pulse command (P command). 5-22 DVP-PLC Application Manual
6 Application Commands API 00-49 API 00 CJ P Conditional Jump Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F Note: Operand S can assign P P can be modified by Index register E, F ES Series models: Operand S can assign P0~P63 EP / EH Series models: Operand S can assign P0~P255 ES series models do not support the pulse command (CJP) 16-bit command (3 STEPS) Continuous CJ CJP Pulse 32-bit command - - - - Flag: None Command Explanation : The destination pointer of conditional jump CJ command can be used in the following conditions: 1. In order to shorten the program scan time when user do not want to execute some unnecessary parts of PLC program. 2. In double or dual coils designation. When the program that pointer P indicats is before CJ command, please note that the error of WDT exceeding time. If PLC stop running, please use carefully. CJ command can assign the same pointer P repeatedly. However, CJ command and CALL command cannot assign the same pointer P, otherwise the error will occur. The explanation of each device when executing the CJ command: 1. Y, M, S remains its previous state before the condition jump occurs. 2. The timer 10ms, 100ms that execute the counting will stop. 3. The timer T192~T199 that execute the subroutine program will continue and the output contact will execute normally. 4. The high-speed counter that executes the counting will continue and the output contact will execute normally. 5. The general counter will stop. 6. If the reset command of the accumulative type timer is activated before the condition jump is activated, the device will be still in the reset state when condition jump is executing. 7. The general application commands will not be executed. 8. The executing application commands, i.e. API 53 DHSCS, API 54 DHSCR, API 55 DHSZ, API 56 SPD, API 57 PLSY, API 58 PWM, API 59 PLSR, API 157 PLSV, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA, will continue executing. DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-1
6 Application Commands API 00-49 1 When =On, the program will skip from address 0 to N (label P1) automatically and keep on executing. But the area between address 0 and N will be skipped and will not be executed. When =Off, as usual, the program will keep on executing from address 0. CJ command will not be executed. (CJ command) P*** 0 CJ P1 P1 N X1 X2 Y1 Y2 2 There are five situations that the CJ command can be executed between the commands MC and MCR. 1. Out of MC~MCR. 2. Valid in the loop P1 in the following chart. 3. In the same level N, inside of MC~MC. 4. Inside of MC, out of MCR. 5. Jump from this MC~MCR to another MC~MCR. (1) (1) This function is only provided in V4.9 (included) or higher version of ES series models and EP/EH series models. The explanations of V4.7(included) or lower version of ES series models: CJ command is used between MC and MCR command but It is only used in the range out of MC~MCR or in the same level N inside the MC~MCR. CJ command can not be used to jump from this range of MC~MCR to another range of MC~MCR, otherwise the error will occur. CJ command can execute correctly in the above-mentioned condition 1 and 3 but the error will occur if it is not used in other conditions. MC N0 X2 CJ P0 X3 CJ P1 X1 MC N1 P1 M1000 Y1 MCR N1 P0 M1000 Y0 MCR N0 6-2 DVP-PLC Application Manual
6 Application Commands API 00-49 3 The states of each device are shown in the following: Device Y, M, S The contact state before CJ M1, M2, M3 Off M1, M2, M3 On The contact state during CJ M1, M2, M3 OffOn M1, M2, M3 OnOff The output coil state during CJ Y1 (note1), M20, S1 Off Y1 (note1), M20, S1 On 10ms, 100ms M4 Off M4 OffOn Timer is not activated Timer The interrupt of timer latched. (ES/EP/EH) M4 On M4 OnOff Keep on counting after M0 is off. M6 Off M6 OffOn Timer (T240) is not activated 1ms, 10ms, 100ms Timer (for accumulative) EP/EH C0~C234 Application command M6 On M7, X10 Off M7 Off, X10 On/Off trigger M11 Off M11 On M6 OnOff M10 On/Off trigger M10 On/Off trigger M11 OffOn M11 OnOff All accumulative timers will stop but latched once executing command CJ. When M0 is from OnOff, T240 will be unchanged. Timer does not count The interrupt of counter latched. Keep on counting after M0 is off. Application commands won t be executed. Do not execute the skipped application command but API 53~59, API 157~159 keep executing. Note 1: Y1 is dual output. When M0 is Off, it is controlled by M1. when M0 is On, it is controlled by M12. Note 2: When timer that subroutine used (T192~T199, for EP/EH) executes CJ command, it will keep counting. After timer attains, output contact of timer will be On. Note 3: When high-speed counters (C235~C255) execute CJ command, it will kekep counting and output point will also continue act. DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-3
6 Application Commands API 00-49 Y1 is double or dual coil designation. When M0=Off, it is controlled by M1. When M0=On, it is controlled by M12. M0 CJ P0 M1 Y1 M2 M20 M17 CJ P0 M3 S1 M4 TMR T0 K10 M5 RST T127 M6 TMR T127 K1000 M7 RST C0 M1 CNT C0 K20 M11 MOV K3 D0 M0 P0 CJ P63 M12 Y1 M13 P63 RST T127 RST RST C0 D0 END 6-4 DVP-PLC Application Manual
6 Application Commands API 00-49 API 01 CALL P Call Subroutine Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F Note: Operand S can assign P. P can be modified by Index register E, F. ES Series models: operand S can assign P0~P63. EP / EH Series models: operand S can assign P0~P255. ES Series models do not support the pulse command (CALLP). 16-bit command (3 STEPS) CALL Continuous CALLP Pulse 32-bit command - - - - Flag: None Command Explanation : The desinition pointer of call subrountine. continues in the subroutine after the FEND command. Subroutine pointers of CALL command and the pointers of CJ command are not allowed to coincide. If only using CALL command, it can call subrountine of the same pointer number with no limit of times. Subroutine can be nested for 5 levels including the initial CALL command. (If entering the six level, the subroutine won t be executed.) API 02 SRET Subroutine Return Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F Note: No operand The command driven by contact is not necessary. 16-bit command (1 STEPS) SRET Continuous - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: None Command Explanation 1 Indicates the end of subroutine program. The subroutine will return to main program by SRET after the termination of subroutine and execute the sequence program located at the next step to the CALL command. When = ON, then start CALL command, jump to P2 and run subroutine. When run SRET command, it will jump back to address 24 and keep running. DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-5
6 Application Commands API 00-49 20 24 X1 CALL P*** P2 Y1 call subroutine P*** P2 Subroutine P2 FEND Y0 Y0 SRET subroutine subroutine return 2 When X10 is the rising-edge triggered CALL P10 command that goes from Off to On, jump to P10 and run subroutine. When X11 is On, execute CALL P11, jump to P11 and run subroutine. When X12 is On, execute CALL P12, jump to P12 and run subroutine. When X13 is On, execute CALL P13, jump to P13 and run subroutine. When X14 is On, execute CALL P14, jump to P14 and run subroutine. When run SRET command, it will jump back to the last P*** subroutine and keep running. Run SRET command in the P10 subroutine and return to the main program. INC D0 X2 P12 INC D30 X10 Y0 CALL INC P10 D1 Main X13 X2 Y10 CALL INC P13 D31 subroutine Y1 Y11 P10 X2 FEND INC D10 P13 X2 SRET INC D40 X11 X2 Y4 CALL INC P11 D11 subroutine X14 X2 Y12 CALL INC P14 D41 subroutine Y5 Y13 P11 X2 SRET INC D20 P14 X2 SRET INC D50 X12 X2 Y6 CALL INC P12 D21 subroutine Y14 SRET END subroutine Y7 SRET 6-6 DVP-PLC Application Manual
6 Application Commands API 00-49 API 03 IRET Interrupt Return Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F Note: No operand The command driven by contact is not necessary. 16-bit command (1 STEPS) IRET Continuous - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: None Command Explanation IRET denotes the interrupt of subroutine program. Terminate the processing of interrupt program and return to the main program by IRET command. Execute the original program to produce the next interrupt command. API 04 EI Enable Interrupts Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F Note: No operand The command driven by contact is not necessary. The pulse width of interrupt signal should be higher than 200us. Please refer to the footnote of DI command to see the range of numbers of each model. 16-bit command (1 STEPS) Continuous EI - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1050~M1059, M1280~M1294 (Please refer to the footnote of DI command) API 05 DI Disable Interrupts Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F Note: No operand The command driven by contact is not necessary. 16-bit command (1 STEPS) Continuous DI - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: None Command Explanation EI command enables interrupt subroutine to be processed in the program, e.g. External interrupt, Time interrupt, High-speed counter interrupt. In the program, using interrupt subroutine between EI and DI command is allowed. However, it is not allowed to use DI command if there is no disable interrupt period during the program. DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-7
6 Application Commands API 00-49 Even in the interrupt allowed range when interrupting special the auxiliary relay M1050 to M1059 in ES / EP series models and M1280 to M1294 in EH series models, the corresponding interrupting request will not be activated. Interrupting cursor ( I ) must be used after the FEND command. Other interrupts are not allowed to occur during executing the interrupt routine program. When most interrupts occur, priority is given to the interrupt occuring first. If the interrupts occur simultaneously, the interrupt with the lower pointer number will be given the higher priority. Any interrupt request occuring between DI and EI commands cannot be executed immediately. The request will be memorized and execute the subroutine in the enabling range of the interrupt. When using the interrupt pointer, please do not repeatly use the high-speed counter driven by the same X input contact. When the interrupt routine program is running and the I/O is immediately activated, the state of I/O can be refreshed by writing REF command in the program. During the PLC operation, the program scans the commands between EI and DI, if X1 or X2 are ON, the subroutine A or B will be interruptted. When IRET is reached, the main program will resume. EI Y1 DI EI FEND Enabled interrupt Disabled interrupt Enabled interrupt I 101 I 201 Y0 IRET Y0 IRET Interrupt subroutine A Interrupt subroutine B 6-8 DVP-PLC Application Manual
6 Application Commands API 00-49 Footnote Interrupt pointer I numbers of ES series models: 1. External interrupts: (I001, ), (I101, X1), (I201, X2), (I301, X3) 4 points. 2. Time interrupts: I6, 1 point ( =10~99, time base=1ms) (support for V5.7) 3. Communication interrupt for specific characters received (I150) (support for V5.7) Interrupt pointer I numbers of EP series models: 1. External interrupts: (I001, ), (I101, X1), (I201, X2), (I301, X3), (I401, X4), (I501, X5) 6 points. 2. Time interrupts: I6, I7 2 points. ( =1~99ms, time base=1ms) 3. High-speed counter interrupts: I010, I020, I030, I040 4 points. (used with API 53 DHSCS command and interrupt signal occurs) 4. Communication interrupt for specific characters received (I150) 5. The order of interrupt point I: high-speed counter interrupt, external interrupt, time interrupt and communication interrupt for specific characters received. Interrupt pointer I Number of EH series models: 1. External interrupts: (I00, ), (I10, X1), (I20, X2), (I30, X3), (I40, X4), (I50, X5) 6 points. ( =0 indicates the interrupt of falling-edge, =1 indicates the interrupt of rising-edge) 2. Time interrupts: I6, I7, 2 points. ( =1~99ms, time base=1ms) I8 1 point. ( =1~99ms, time base=0.1ms) 3. High-speed counter interrupts: I010, I020, I030, I040 4 points. (used with API 53 DHSCS command and interrupt signal occurs) 4. The interrupt, start and end of pulse output interrupt should be used with API 57 PLSY command. I130, I140 are triggered at the beginning of the pulse output by the start-arranged flag of pulse output command M1342, M1343. Then, M1340, M1341 will trigger I110, I120 at the end of pulse output command to interrupt the executing program and jump to the assigned interrupt subroutine to execute. 5. Communication interrupt for specific characters received (I150) 6. The order of the interrupt pointer I : External interrupts, time interrupts, high-speed counter interrupts, and pulse output interrupts. Interrupt Inhibit Flag of ES series models: Flag M1050 M1051 M1052 M1053 Function External interrupt, I 001 masked External interrupt, I 101 masked External interrupt, I 201 masked External interrupt, I 301 masked DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-9
6 Application Commands API 00-49 Interrupt Inhibit Flag of EP series models: Flag M1050 M1051 M1052 M1053 M1054 M1055 M1056 M1057 M1059 Function External interrupt, I 001 masked External interrupt, I 101 masked External interrupt, I 201 masked External interrupt, I 301 masked External interrupt, I 401 masked External interrupt, I 501 masked Time interrupt, I6 masked Time interrupt, I7 masked High-speed counter interrupt, I010~I040 masked Interrupt Inhibit Flag of EH series models: Flag M1280 M1281 M1282 M1283 M1284 M1285 M1286 M1287 M1288 M1289 M1290 M1291 M1292 M1293 M1294 M1295 M1296 M1297 M1298 M1299 M1340 M1341 M1342 M1343 Function External interrupt, I00 masked External interrupt, I10 masked External interrupt, I20 masked External interrupt, I30 masked External interrupt, I40 masked External interrupt, I50 masked Time interrupt, I60 masked Time interrupt, I70 masked Time interrupt, I80 masked High-speed counter interrupt, I010 masked High-speed counter interrupt, I020 masked High-speed counter interrupt, I030 masked High-speed counter interrupt, I040 masked High-speed counter interrupt, I050 masked High-speed counter interrupt, I060 masked Pulse output interrupt insert I110 masked Pulse output interrupt insert I120 masked Pulse output interrupt insert I130 masked Pulse output interrupt insert I140 masked Pulse output interrupt insert I150 masked After CH0 pulse is transmitted, I110 interrupt occur After CH1 pulse is transmitted, I120 interrupt occur CH0 pulse is transmitted; meanwhile, I130 interrupt occur simultaneously CH1 pulse is transmitted; meanwhile, I140 interrupt occur simultaneously 6-10 DVP-PLC Application Manual
6 Application Commands API 00-49 API 06 FEND First End Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F Note: No operand The command driven by contact is not necessary. 16-bit command (1 STEPS) FEND Continuous - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: None Command Explanation This command denotes the end of the main routine program. It has the same function as END command during PLC operation. CALL must follow right after FEND command and add SRET command at the end of the subroutine. Interrupt commands also have to follow after FEND command and add IRET command at the end of the service program. If using several FEND commands, please place the subroutine and interrupt service programs between the last FEND and END command. After CALL command is executed, the program error will occur when execute the FEND command before SRET command is executed. After FOR command is executed, the program error will occur when execute the FEND command before NEXT command is executed. CJ Command Flow The program flow when =off, X1=off 0 X1 main program CJ CALL P0 P63 The program flow when =On program jumps to P0 main program P0 main program P63 command CALL subroutine I301 interrupt subroutine DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-11
6 Application Commands API 00-49 CALL Command Flow The program flow when =off, X1=off 0 X1 main program CJ CALL P0 P63 The program flow when =Off, X1=On. main program P0 main program P63 command CALL subroutine I301 interrupt subroutine API 07 WDT P Watchdog Timer Refresh Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F Note: No operand ES series models do not support the pulse command (WDTP). 16-bit command (1 STEPS) WDT Continuous WDTP Pulse 32-bit command - - - - Flag: None 6-12 DVP-PLC Application Manual
6 Application Commands API 00-49 Command Explanation WDT (Watch Dog Timer) is used to monitor the PLC operation in the DVP series PLC system. The WDT command can be used to reset the Watch Dog Timer. If the PLC scanning time (from step 0 to END or FEND command) is more than 200ms, the ERROR LED will flash. The user will have to turn the PLC off and then back ON to clear the fault. PLC will determine the status of RUN/STOP according to RUN/STOP switch. If there is no RUN/STOP switch, PLC will return to STOP automatically. When to use WDT: When error occur in PLC system. When the executing time of the program is too long to cause the scanning time to exceed the content value of D1000. It can be modified by using the following two methods. Use WDT command STEP0 WDT END(FEND) T1 t2 Use the set value of D1000 (default is 200ms) to change the watchdog time. If the program scanning time is over 300ms, users can divide the program into 2 parts. Insert the Watchdog Timer in between, so both programs scanning time will be less than 200ms. 300ms program END 150ms program WDT Dividing the program to two parts so that both parts?scan time are less than 200ms. Watchdog timer reset 150ms program END DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-13
6 Application Commands API 00-49 API 08 FOR Start of FOR-NEXT Loop Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S Note: The contact command is not necessary Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (3 STEPS) FOR Continuous - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: None Command Explanation : The number of repeats for the nested loop API 09 NEXT End of FOR-NEXT loop Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F Note: No operand The command driven by contact is not necessary. 16-bit command (1 STEPS) NEXT Continuous - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: None Command Explanation FOR and NEXT commands are used when n nested loops are needed. N may be within the range of K1 to K32767. If the range N K1, N will always be K1. When it is not desired to execute the FOR to NEXT commands, use the CJ command. Error will occur in the following conditions: NEXT command is before FOR command. With FOR command, without NEXT command. There is a NEXT command after the FEND or END command. The numbers of FOR to NEXT commands are different. The FOR to NEXT loop can be nested for five levels but please notice that if there are too many loops, the PLC scanning time will increase and it may cause the watchdog timer to be activated and result in error. User can use WDT command to modify. 6-14 DVP-PLC Application Manual
6 Application Commands API 00-49 1 After loop A operate 3 times, the program after the NEXT command will resume. For every completed cycle of loop A, loop B will completely executed for 4 times, therefore, the total number of times that loop B operate will be 3 4=12 times. FOR K3 FOR NEXT K4 B A NEXT 2 which executes the FOR to NEXT commands when X7 is off. It does not execute the FOR to NEXT commands when X7 is on and CJ command jump to P6. X7 CJ P6 M0 MOV K0 D0 FOR K3 M0 MOV D0 D1 INC D0 P6 X10 MEXT Y10 DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-15
6 Application Commands API 00-49 3 When the FOR to NEXT command are not executed, CJ command can be used to jump. When the most internal loop of FOR to NEXT, X1 will be ON and CJ command will jump to P0 and not be executed. TMR T0 K10 FOR INC FOR INC FOR INC FOR WDT K4X100 D0 K2 D1 K3 D2 K4 X1 INC CJ FOR INC NEXT D3 P0 K5 D4 P0 NEXT NEXT NEXT NEXT END 6-16 DVP-PLC Application Manual
6 Application Commands API 00-49 API 10 D CMP P Compare Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D Note: If operand S 1, S 2 use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit command. Operand D occupies 3 continuous devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse command (CMPP, DCMPP). 16-bit command (7 STEPS) CMP Continuous CMPP Pulse 32-bit command (13 STEPS) DCMP Continuous DCMPP Pulse Flag: None Command Explanation : First comparison value : Second comparison value : Comparison result. The contents of the comparison source and are compared and denotes the compare result. Two comparison values are compared algebraically and this function compares the two values that are considered binary values. If b15=1 in 16-bit command or b31=1 in 32-bit command, the comparison will regard the value as the negative of the binary value. If is set to Y0, then Y0, Y1, Y2 will work as the program example as below. When X10=On, CMP command is driven and one of Y0, Y1, Y2 is On. When X10=Off, CMP command is not driven and Y0, Y1, Y2 remain in the previous status. The comparison result of,, commands can be got by the parallel connection of Y0~Y2. X10 Y0 Y1 CMP K10 D10 Y0 If K10>D10, Y0 = On If K10=D10, Y1 = On Y2 If K10<D10, Y2= On Please use RST or ZRST command to reset the comparison result. X10 RST M0 X10 ZRST M0 M2 RST M1 RST M2 DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-17
6 Application Commands API 00-49 API 11 D ZCP P Zone Compare Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 S D Note: If operand S 1, S 2, S use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit command. Operand S 1 should be less than Operand S 2. Operand D occupies 3 continuous devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse command (ZCPP, DZCPP). 16-bit command (9 STEPS) ZCP Continuous ZCPP Pulse 32-bit command (17 STEPS) DZCP Continuous Pulse DZCPP Flag: None Command Explanation : First comparison value (Minimum) : Second comparison value (Maximum) : Comparison value : Comparison result. is compared with its limits and and denotes the compare result. When >, set as the limit to compare. Two comparison values are compared algebraically and this function compares the two values that are considered binary values. If b15=1 in 16-bit command or b31=1 in 32-bit command, the comparison will regard the value as the negative of the binary value. If is set to M0, then M0, M1, M2 will work as the program example as below. When =On, ZCP command is driven and one of M0, M1, M2 is On. When =Off, ZCP command is not driven and M0, M1, M2 remain in the previous status. ZCP K10 K100 C10 M0 M0 M1 M2 If C10 < K10, M0 = On If K10 < = C10 < = K100, M1 = On If C10 > K100, M2 = On Please use RST or ZRST command to reset the comparison result. RST M0 ZRST M0 M2 RST M1 RST M2 6-18 DVP-PLC Application Manual
6 Application Commands API 00-49 API 12 D MOV P Data Move Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D Note: If operand S, D use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse command (MOVP, DMOVP) 16-bit command (5 STEPS) MOV Continuous MOVP Pulse 32-bit command (9 STEPS) DMOV Continuous DMOVP Pulse Flag: None Command Explanation S : Data source : Data move destination When the MOV command is driven, the data of is moved to without any change. If the MOV command is not driven, the content of remain unchanged. If the calculation result is a 32-bit output, (i.e. the application MUL) and the data of a 32-bit high-speed counter, users will have to use DMOV command. MOV command is used in 16-bit command to move data. When =Off, the content of D10 remain unchanged. If =On, the data of K10 is moved to D10 data register. When X1=Off, the content of D10 remain unchanged. If X1=On, the data of T0 is moved to D10 data register. DMOV command is used in 32-bit command to move data When X2=Off, the content of (D31, D30) and (D41, D40) remain unchanged. If X2=On, the data of (D21, D20) is moved to (D31, D30) data register. Meanwhile, the data of C235 is moved to (D41, D40) data register. MOV K10 D0 X1 X2 MOV T0 D10 DMOV D20 D30 DMOV C235 D40 DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-19
6 Application Commands API 00-49 API 13 SMOV P Shift Move Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S m 1 m 2 D n Note: The usage range of operand m 1 : m 1 =1~ 4 The usage range of operand m 2 : m 2 =1~ m1 The usage range of operand n: n=m 2 ~ 4 Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (11 STEPS) SMOV Continuous SMOVP Pulse 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1168 (mode setting operation of SMOV) When M1168=On, BIN mode. When M1168=Off, BCD mode. Command Explanation 1 : Data movementsource : Source position of the first digit to be moved : Number of source digits to be moved : Data destination of movement : Destination position for the first digit This command can arrange or combine the data. When M1168=Off, =On, assign the content of the two digits from the 4 th digit (thousands place digital) of D10 (decimal number) and move the assigned data to the two digits from the 2 nd digit (hundreds' place digits) of D20 (decimal number). Then, the content of 10 3 and 10 0 of D20 remain unchaged after SMOV command is executed. When BCD number is higher than 9,999 or be negative (outside range of 0 to 9,999), an operation error will occur in PLC. Then, the command will not be executed and M1067, M1068 will be On, D1067 record error code 0E18 (hexidecimal number). M1001 M1168 SMOV D10 K4 K2 D20 K3 10 3 10 2 10 1 10 0 No variation No variation 10 3 10 2 10 1 10 0 D10(BIN 16bit) Auto conversion D10(BCD 4 digits) Shift move D20(BCD 4 digits) 2 Auto conversion D20(BIN 16bit) If D10=H1234,D20=H5678 before executing, D10 won t change and D20=H5128 after finishing. When M1168=On, if use SMOV command, the D10 and D20 do not move data in BCD format. However the data is moved as a 4 digit BIN number. 6-20 DVP-PLC Application Manual
6 Application Commands API 00-49 M1000 M1168 SMOV D10 K4 K2 D20 K3 Digit 4 Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1 D10(BIN 16bit) Shift move 3 Digit 4 Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1 No variation No variation D20(BIN 16bit) Digit switch connected to the interrupted number inputs can use SMOV command to combine. Move the right second digit switch to the right second digit of D2 and move the left first digit switch to the right first digit of D1. Use SMOV command to move the first digit to the third digit of D2 and combine these two digit switches into one group. 10 2 10 1 10 0 6 4 2 8 8 X13~X10 8 X27~X20 M1001 M1000 PLC M1168 BIN K2X20 D2 BIN K1X10 D1 (X20~X27)BCD 2 digits D2(BIN) (X10~X13)BCD 1 digit D1(BIN) SMOV D1 K1 K1 D2 K3 DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-21
6 Application Commands API 00-49 API 14 D CML P Compliment Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D Note: If operand S, D use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse command (CMLP, DCMLP) 16-bit command (5 STEPS) CML Continuous CMLVP 32-bit command (9 STEPS) DCML Continuous DCMLP Flag: None Pulse Pulse Command Explanation 1 : Transfer data source : Transfer destination device Counter phase the contents of (0 1, 1 0) and have the contents transferred to. If the content is Constant K, this Constant K will be converted to the BIN value automatically. This command can be used during the counter-phase output. When X10=ON, contents of D1, b0~b3, will be counter transferred to K1Y0. X10 CML D1 K1Y0 b 15 b 3 b 2 b 1 b 0 D1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Symbol bit (0=positive, 1=negative) 0 1 0 1 2 No variation Transfer the counter-phase data The left loop shown below can be displayed as the right program example by using CML command. 00 M0 01 M1 02 M2 03 M3 M1000 CML K1 K1M0 00 M0 Normal on contact 01 M1 02 M2 03 M3 6-22 DVP-PLC Application Manual
6 Application Commands API 00-49 API 15 BMOV P Block Move Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D n Note: The usage range of operand n=1~ 512 Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse command (BMOVP). 16-bit command (7 STEPS) BMOV Continuous BMOVP Pulse 32-bit command - - - - Flag: None Command Explanation 1 2 : Head source device : Head destination device : Block of multiple data This command is used to move an assigned block of multiple data to a new destination. Move the contents of the register, with this register obtained from counting the registers within the -assigned numbers, to the register within the -assigned number. If the -assigned points exceed the usage range of this device, only those that are within the enabled range will be moved. When X10=On, move the contents of the four registers D0~D3 to their corresponding registers D20~D23. X10 D20 K4 D0 D20 D1 D21 n=4 D2 D22 D3 D23 If move the specified bit device, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, the digit numbers of and should be the same and this also means the number of n should be the same. ES series models do not support KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS devices. M1000 D0 D20 K4 M0 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 n=3 M8 M9 M10 M11 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-23
6 Application Commands API 00-49 3 The BMOV command has built the automatic movement as the program example below to prevent overwriting errors from occurring when the specified numbers of and coincide. When >, the BMOV command is processed in the order as 1 2 3 When <, the BMOV command is processed in the order as 3 2 1. But, be sure to avoid the specified number being continuous when < in ES series models. Otherwise, the result will be the same value. For example, when the BMOV command is processed in the order as 3 2 1, the content value of D11 to D13 will all be the content value of D10. X10 X11 1 BMOV D20 D19 K3 D20 D19 2 D21 D20 3 D22 D21 3 BMOV D10 D11 K3 D10 D11 2 D11 1 D12 D13 API 16 D FMOV P Fill Move Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D n Note: If operand S, D use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit command. The usage range of operand n: n=1~ 512(16-bit command), n=1~ 256 (32-bit command) Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse command (FMOVP, DFMOVP) 16-bit command (7 STEPS) FMOV Continuous FMOVP 32-bit command (13 STEPS) DFMOV Continuous DFMOVP Flag: None Pulse Pulse Command Explanation : Source device : Head destination device : A quantity of multiple devices The data stored in the source device is moved to every device within the range of destination device. Move the contents of to the register, with this register obtained from counting the registers within the -assigned numbers. If the -assigned devices exceed the usage range, only those that are within the enabled range will be moved. ES series models do not support KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS devices. 6-24 DVP-PLC Application Manual
6 Application Commands API 00-49 When =ON, move Constant K10 to the continuous five registers (D10~D14) starting from D10. X10 FMOV K10 D10 K5 K10 K10 K10 D10 D11 K10 K10 K10 D12 D13 D14 n=5 API Applicable models XCH Data Exchange ES EP EH 17 D P Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F D 1 D 2 Note: If operand D 1, D 2 use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse command (XCHP, DXCHP). 16-bit command (5 STEPS) XCH Continuous XCHP Pulse 32-bit command (9 STEPS) DXCH Continuous DXCHP Pulse Flag: None Command Explanation : First exchange data : Second exchange data Exchange the contents of and with each other. This command is usually pulse (XCHP). 1 When =Off On, the contents of D20 and D40 exchange with each other. XCHP D20 D40 Before D20 120 After 40 D20 D40 40 120 D40 DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-25
6 Application Commands API 00-49 2 When =Off On, the contents of D20 and D40 exchange with each other. D100 D200 D100 Before After D100 D101 20 40 D101 D200 D200 Footnote D201 40 20 D201 In 16-bit command, when the devices specified by and are the same and M1303=On, the upper and lower 8-bit contents of that specified devices will exchange. In 32-bit command, when the devices specified by and are the same and M1303=On, the upper and lower 8-bit contents of that 32-bit devices will exchange. When =On and M1303=On, the upper and lower 8-bit contents of D100, D0101 will exchange. Before After M1303 D100L 9 20 D100L DXCHP D100 D100 D100H D101L D101H 20 8 40 9 40 8 D100H D101L D101H API 18 D BCD P Converts BIN Data into BCD Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D Note: If operand S, D use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse command (BCDP, DBCDP) 16-bit command (5 STEPS) BCD Continuous BCDP Pulse 32-bit command (9 STEPS) DBCD Continuous Pulse DBCDP Flag: M1067 (operation error) M1068 (operation error) D1067 (error code) Command Explanation Converts BIN data (0 to 9999) of the source device into BCD and transfers the result to the device. If the BCD conversion result is outside the range of 0 to 9999, an operation error occurs, the error flag M1067, M1068 will be On and D1067 record error code 0E18 (hexadecimal number). 6-26 DVP-PLC Application Manual
6 Application Commands API 00-49 If the DBCD conversion result is outside the range of 0 to 99,999,999, an operation error occurs, the error flag M1067, M1068 will be On and D1067 record error code 0E18 (hexadecimal number). The operation value of four fundamental operations (+,,, ), INC and DEC command in PLC are executed in BIN format. This command can be used to output BIN format data in BCD format value directly to a seven segment display. When =ON, the binary data D10 is converted into BCD number, and stored at K4Y0 (Y0~Y3). BCD D10 K1Y0 When D10=001E (Hex)=0030 (decimal number), the result will be Y0~Y3=0000(BIN). API 19 D BIN P Converts BCD Data into BIN Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D Note: If operand S, D use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse command (BINP, DBINP) 16-bit command (5 STEPS) BIN Continuous BINP Pulse 32-bit command (9 STEPS) DBIN Continuous Pulse DBINP Flag: M1067 (operation error) M1068 (operation error) D1067 (error code) Command Explanation : Data source : Converted result Converts BCD data (0 to 9,999) of the source device into BIN and transfers the result to the device. The enabled range of source device : BCD (0 to 9,999), DBCD (0 to 99,999,999) If the content of source device is not BCD value (each digit of which is indicated as HEX being outside the range of 0 to 9), an operation error will occur, the error flag M1067, M1068 will be On and D1067 records error code 0E18. Constant K and H is automatically converted into the BIN data. There is no necessity for constant to use this command. When =ON, the BCD data K1 is converted to BIN data, and stored the result at D10. BIN K1 D10 DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-27
6 Application Commands API 00-49 Footnote The application explanation of BCD and BIN command: The BIN command is used to covert the source data into BIN data and store in the PLC when PLC read a BCD format digit switch from external equipment. The BCD command is used to convert the stored data into BCD data and transmit it to the 7-segment display when PLC display the stored data on a BCD format 7-segment display from external equipment. When =On, convert K4(BCD data) into BIN data and transmit it to D100. Then, convert BIN data of D100 into BCD data and transmit it to K4Y20. BIN K4 D100 BCD D100 K4Y20 10 3 10 2 10 1 10 0 6 6 4 2 4 digit BCD format switch 8 8 8 8 X17 4 digit BCD value use the BIN command to store BIN value into D100 use the BCD command to convert the BIN value in D100 convert to be 4 digit BCD value Y37 Y20 4 digit BCD format 7-segment display 6-28 DVP-PLC Application Manual
6 Application Commands API 00-49 API 20 D ADD P Perform the Addition of BIN Data Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D Note: If operand S 1, S 2, D use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse command (ADDP, DADDP). 16-bit command (7 STEPS) ADD Continuous ADDP Pulse 32-bit command (13 STEPS) DADD Continuous DADDP Pulse Flag: M1020 (Zero flag) M1021 (Borrow flag) M1022 (Carry flag) Refer to following for detail. Command Explanation : Augend : Addend : Addition result + =. Performs the addition on BIN data and the BIN data, and stores the addition result into the device. The most significant bit are the symbolic bit 0 and 1. 0 indicates positive and 1 indicates negative. All calculation are algebraically processed, i.e. 3 + (-9) = -6. Flag changes of binary addition 1 2 16-bit command: If the operation result is 0, then the Zero flag, M1020 is set to ON. If the operation result exceeds -32,768, the borrow flag, M1021 is set to ON. If the operation result exceeds 32,767, the carry flag, M1022 is set to ON. 32-bit command: 1. If the operation result is 0, then the Zero flag, M1020 is set to ON. 2. If the operation result exceeds -2,147,483,648, the borrow flag, M1021 is set to ON. 3. If the operation result exceeds 2,147,483,647, the carry flag, M1022 is set to ON. 16-bit command: When is ON, the data contained within the augend D0 and addend D10 is combined and the total is stored in the result device D20. ADD D0 D10 D20 32-bit command: (D0) + (D10) = (D20) When is ON, the data contained within the augend (D31, D30) and addend (D41, D40) is combined and the total is stored in the result device (D51, D50). (D30, D40, D50 is the lower 16-bit data, and D31, D41, D51 is the higher 16-bit data) X10 DADD D30 D40 D50 (D31, D30) + (D41, D40) = (D51, D50) DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-29
6 Application Commands API 00-49 Footnote Flag operations: 16-bit command: Zero flag Zero flag Zero flag -2B -1B 0B -32,768-1B 0B 1 32,767B 0B 1B 2 Borrow flag the most significant bit becomes??(negative) the most significant bit becomes??(positive) Carry flag 32-bit command: Zero flag Zero flag Zero flag -2B -1B 0B -2,147,483,648-1B 0B 1 2,147,483,647B 0B 1B 2 Borrow flag the most significant bit becomes??(negative) the most significant bit becomes??(positive) Carry flag API 21 D SUB P Perform the Subtraction of BIN Data Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D Note: If operand S1, S2, D use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse command (SUBP, DSUBP). 16-bit command (7 STEPS) SUB Continuous SUBP Pulse 32-bit command (13 STEPS) DSUB Continuous Pulse DSUBP Flag: M1020 (Zero flag) M1021 (Borrow flag) M1022 (Carry flag) Please refer to the command explanation of ADD command Command Explanation : Minuend : Subtrahend : Subtraction result =. Performs the subtraction of BIN data and the BIN data, and stores the subtraction result into the device. The most significant bit are the symbolic bit 0 and 1. 0 indicates positive and 1 indicates negative. All calculation are algebraically processed. Flag changes of binary subtraction 16-bit command: If the operation result is 0, then the Zero flag, M1020 is set to ON. If the operation result exceeds 32,768, the borrow flag, M1021 is set to ON. If the operation result exceeds 32,767, the carry flag, M1022 is set to ON. 32-bit command:. If the operation result is 0, then the Zero flag, M1020 is set to ON.. If the operation result exceeds 2,147,483,648, the borrow flag, M1021 is set to ON.. If the operation result exceeds 2,147,483,647, the carry flag, M1022 is set to ON. 6-30 DVP-PLC Application Manual
6 Application Commands API 00-49 1 2 The flag operations of SUB command please refer to the flag operations of ADD command on the previous page. 16-bit command: When is ON, the data contained within the subtrahend D10 is subtracted from the data contained within the minuend D0 and the result of this calculation is stored in the result device D20. SUB D0 D10 D20 32-bit command: (D0) (D10) = (D20) When is ON, the data contained within the subtrahend (D41, D40) is subtracted from the data contained within the minuend (D31, D30) and the result of this calculation is stored in the result device (D51, D50). (D30, D40, D50 is the lower 16-bit data, and D31, D41, D51 is the higher 16-bit data) X10 DSUB D30 D40 D50 (D31, D30) (D41, D40) = (D51, D50) API 22 D MUL P Perform the Multiplication of BIN Data Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D Note: If operand S1, S2 use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit command. If operand D use with device E, it is only available in 16-bit command. In 16-bit command, operand D occupies 2 continuous devices. In 32-bit command, operand D occupies 4 continuous devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse Command (MULP, DMULP). 16-bit command (7 STEPS) MUL Continuous MULP Pulse 32-bit command (13 STEPS) DMUL Continuous DMULP Pulse Flag: None Command Explanation : Multiplicand : Multiplier : Multiplication result =. Performs the Multiplication of BIN data and the BIN data, and stores the multiplication result into the device. Please pay careful attention to the polarity display of the operation result of, and in the 16-bit and 32-bit command. 16-bit command: DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-31
6 Application Commands API 00-49 b15... b00 b15... b00 X = +1 b31... b16 b15...b00 b15 is a symbol bit b15 is a symbol bit b31 is a symbol bit (b15 of D+1) b15=0,s 1 is a positive value b15=1,s 1 is a negative value b15=0,s 2 is a positive value b15=1,s 2 is a negative value b31=0,s 2 is a positive value b31=1,s 2 is a negative value When is bit device, it can specify K1~K4 and produce a 16-bit result. Then, the flag M1067, M1068 will be On and D1067 record error code 0E19. 32-bit command: +1 +1 +3 +2 +1 b31..b16 b15.. b00 b31.. b16 b15..b00 X = b63. b48 b47. b32 b31. b16 b15. b00 b31 is a symbol bit b31 is a symbol bit b63 is a symbol bit (b15 of D+1) b31=0,s 1(S 1+1) are positive value b31=1,s 1(S 1+1) are negative value b31=0,s 2(S 2+1) are positive value b31=1,s 2(S 2 +1) are negative value b63=0, D1(D1+1) (D1+2) (D1+3) are positive value b63=1, D1(D1+1) (D1+2) (D1+3) are negative value When is bit device, it can specify K1~K8 and produce a 32-bit result. The destination device is used to store low 32-bit data only. 16-bit command: A 16-bit data source, D10 is multiplied by another 16-bit data source, D0 and the total is a 32-bit result, D20. The upper 16-bit data is stored in D21 and the lower one is stored in D20. The polarity of the result is indicated by the OFF/ON of the most significant bit. OFF indicates the value of positive 0 and ON indicates the value of negative 1. MUL D0 D10 D20 MUL D0 D10 K8M0 (D0) (D10) = (D21, D20) 16-bit 16-bit = 32-bit API 23 D DIV P Perform the Division of BIN Data Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D Note: If operand S1, S2 use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit command. If operand D use with device E, it is only available in 16-bit command. In 16-bit command, operand D occupies 2 continuous devices. In 32-bit command, operand D occupies 4 continuous devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse Command (ADDP, DADDP). 16-bit command (7 STEPS) DIV Continuous DIVP Pulse 32-bit command (13 STEPS) DDIV Continuous Pulse DDIVP Flag: None 6-32 DVP-PLC Application Manual
6 Application Commands API 00-49 Command Explanation : Dividend : Divisor : Quotient and Remainder =. Performs the division of BIN data and the BIN data, and stores the result into the device. Please pay careful attention to the polarity display of the operation result of, and in the 16-bit and 32-bit command. This command is not executed when the divisor is 0. Then, the flag M1067, M1068 will be On and D1067 record error code 0E19. 16-bit command: Quotient Remainder +1 / = When D is bit device, it can specify K1~K4 to produce a 16-bit result and occupies 2 continuous groups. In regards to the operation result, the quotient and remainder are stored. 32-bit command: Quotient Remainder +1 +1 +1 +3 +2 / = When D is bit device, it can specify K1~K8 and produce a 32-bit result. In regards to the operation result, only the quotient is stored. When is ON, the primary source D0 (divisor) is divided by the second source D10 (dividend). The quotient is specified to be stored in D20 and the remainder is specified to be stored in D21. The polarity of the result is indicated by the OFF/ON of the most significant bit. OFF indicates the value of positive and ON indicates the value of negative. DIV D0 D10 D20 DIV D0 D10 K4Y0 DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-33
6 Application Commands API 00-49 API Applicable models INC Perform the Addition of 1 ES EP EH 24 D P Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F D Note: If operand D use with device F, it is only available 16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse (INCP, DINCP). 16-bit command (3 STEPS) INC Continuous INCP 32-bit command (5 STEPS) DINC Continuous DINCP Flag: None Pulse Pulse Command Explanation : Destination device If the command is not the pulse command, 1 is added to the value of destination device on every of the command. This command is usually pulse (INCP, DINCP). In 16-bit command, when +32,767 is reached, 1 is added and it will write a value of 32,768 to the destination device. In 32-bit command, when +2,147,483,647 is reached, 1 is added and it will write a value of -2,147,483,648 to the destination device. Flag M1020~M1022 won t be influenced by the operation result of this command. When is ON, the content of D0 will perform the addition of 1. INCP D0 API Applicable models DEC Perform the Subtraction of 1 ES EP EH 25 D P Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F D Note: If operand D use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse the (DECP, DDECP). 16-bit command (3 STEPS) DEC Continuous DECP 32-bit command (5 STEPS) DDEC Continuous DDECP Flag: None Pulse Pulse Command Explanation : Destination device If the command is not the pulse command, 1 is subtracted to the value of destination device on every of the command. This command is usually pulse (INCP, DINCP). In 16-bit command, when 32,768 is reached, 1 is subtracted and it will write a value of +32,767 to the destination device. In 32-bit command, when -2,147,483,648 is reached, 1 is subtracted and it will write a value of +2,147,483,647 to the destination device. 6-34 DVP-PLC Application Manual
6 Application Commands API 00-49 Flag M1020~M1022 won t be influenced by the operation result of this command. When is ON, the content of D0 will perform the subtraction of 1. DECP D0 API W 26 D AND P Perform the Logical Product (AND) Operation Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D Note: If operand S 1, S 2, D use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse (WANDP, DANDP) 16-bit command (7 STEPS) WAND Continuous WANDP Pulse 32-bit command (13 STEPS) DAND Continuous Pulse DANDP Flag: None Command Explanation 1 : First data source device : Second data source device : Operation result Performs the logical product of the data source device and, and stores the operation result into the device. General operation rule: If one of the bit contained within the data source devices is 0, then the operation result is also 0. When is ON, the 16-bit data source device D0 and D2 are analyzed and the operation result of the logical WAND command is stored in the device D4. WAND D0 D2 D4 Before After b15 D0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 D2 D4 WAND b00 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-35
6 Application Commands API 00-49 2 When X1 is ON, the 32-bit data source device (D11, D10) and (D21, D20) are analyzed and the operation result of the logical DAND command is stored in the device (D41, D40). X1 DAND D10 D20 D40 Before After b31 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 D11 D10 D21 D20 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 D41 D40 DAND b15 b0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 API W 27 D OR P Perform the Logical Sum (OR) Operation Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D Note: If operand S 1, S 2, D use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse (WORP, DORP) 16-bit command (7 STEPS) WOR Continuous WORP Pulse 32-bit command (13 STEPS) DOR Continuous Pulse DORP Flag: None Command Explanation 1 : First data source device : Second data source device : Operation result Performs the logical sum of the data source device and, and stores the operation result into the device. General operation rule: If one of the bit contained within the data source devices is 1, then the operation result is also 1. When is ON, the 16-bit data source device D0 and D2 are analyzed and the operation result of the logical WOR command is stored in the device D4. WOR D0 D2 D4 b15 b00 D0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Before WOR D2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 After D4 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 6-36 DVP-PLC Application Manual
6 Application Commands API 00-49 2 When X1 is ON, the 32-bit data source device (D11, D10) and (D21, D20) are analyzed and the operation result of the logical DOR command is stored in the device (D41, D40). X1 DOR D10 D20 D40 Before After b31 b15 b0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 D11 D10 DOR 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 D21 D20 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 D41 D40 API W 28 D XOR P Perform the Exclusive Logical Add (XOR) Operation Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D Note: If operand S 1, S 2, D use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support the pulse (WXORP, DXORP). 16-bit command (7 STEPS) WXOR Continuous WXORP Pulse 32-bit command (13 STEPS) DXOR Continuous DXORP Pulse Flag: None Command Explanation 1 : First data source device : Second data source device : Operation result Performs the exclusive logical add of the data source device and, and stores the operation result into the device. General operation rule: If both of the bit contained within the two data source devices are the same, then the operation result is 0. But if both of the bit contained within the two data source devices are different, then the operation result is 1. When is ON, the 16-bit data source device D0 and D2 are analyzed and the operation result of the logical WXOR command is stored in the device D4. WXOR D0 D2 D4 Before After D0 D2 D4 b15 b00 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 WOR 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-37
6 Application Commands API 00-49 2 When X1 is ON, the 32-bit data source device (D11, D10) and (D21, D20) are analyzed and the operation result of the logical DXOR command is stored in the device (D41, D40). X1 DXOR D10 D20 D40 Before After b31 b15 b0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 D11 D10 DXOR 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 D21 D20 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 D41 D40 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 API Applicable models ES EP EH 29 D NEG Negation P Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F D Note: If operand D uses with device F, it is only available in 16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse (NEGP, DNEGP). 16-bit command (3 STEPS) NEG Continuous NEGP Pulse 32-bit command (5 STEPS) DNEG Continuous DNEGP Pulse Flag: None Command Explanation : Once the command is executed, the specified device,, will be served as the complement of 2. This command can convert the negative BIN value to the positive number, and that is, to get its absolute value. This command is usually pulse (NEGP, DNEGP). 1 When X goes from OFF ON, every bit of the D10 contents will be countered (0 1, 1 0) and be added with 1, and will then be saved in the original register, D10. NEGP D10 2 Obtaining the absolute value of a negative value: 1. When the 15 th bit of D0 is 1, M0 is ON. (D0 is a negative value). 2. When M0 is ON, the absolute value of D0 can be obtained using the NEG command. M1000 BON D0 M0 K15 Normal ON contact M0 NEGP D0 6-38 DVP-PLC Application Manual
6 Application Commands API 00-49 3 Obtaining the absolute value by the result of the subtraction 1. When D0>D2, M0=ON. 2. When D0=D2, M1=ON. 3. When D0<D2, M2=ON. 4. Then D4 can be obtained and it will be a positive value. CMP D0 D2 M0 M0 SUB D0 D2 D4 M1 M2 SUB D2 D0 D4 DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-39
6 Application Commands API 00-49 Footnote Indication of the negative value and absolute value The content of the most significant bit of the register indicates the positive and negative value. It is a positive value when the content is 0 and it is a negative value when the content is 1. If it is a negative value, the absolute value can be obtained by using the NEG command (API 29). (D0=2) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 (D0=1) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 (D0=0) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D0=-1) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (D0=-2) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 (D0)+1=1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 (D0)+1=2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 (D0=-3) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 (D0=-4) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 (D0=-5) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 (D0)+1=3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 (D0)+1=4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 (D0)+1=5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 (D0=-32,765) 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 (D0=-32,766) 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 (D0=-32,767) 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 (D0=-32,768) 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (D0)+1=32,765 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 (D0)+1=32,766 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 (D0)+1=32,767 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (D0)+1=32,768 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Max. absolute value is 32,767 6-40 DVP-PLC Application Manual
6 Application Commands API 00-49 API Applicable models ROR Rotate to the Right ES EP EH 30 D P Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F D n Note: If operand D uses with device F, it is only available in 16-bit command. If operand D is specified as KnY, KnM, KnS, only K4 (16-bit) and K8 (32-bit) is valid. Essential condition: 1 n 16 (16-bit), 1 n 32 (32-bit) Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse (RORP, DRORP). 16-bit command (5 STEPS) ROR Continuous RORP 32-bit command (9 STEPS) DROR Continuous DRORP Flag: M1022 (Carry flag) Pulse Pulse Command Explanation : Rotation device (destination device) : Bit places of one time rotation The bit pattern of device is rotated bit places to the right on every operation of the command. This command is usually pulse (RORP, DRORP). When goes from OFF to ON, the 16 bit data of D10 will rotate 4 bits to the right, as shown in the diagram, and b3 that located at D10 originally will then be moved to the carry flag (CY) M1022. RORP D10 K4 Rotate to the right D10 upper bit 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 lower bit 16 bits After one rotation upper bit to the right lower bit D10 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 * Carry flag Carry flag DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-41
6 Application Commands API 00-49 API Applicable models ROL Rotate to the Left ES EP EH 31 D P Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F D n Note: If operand D uses with device F, it is only available in 16-bit command. If operand D is specified as KnY, KnM, KnS, only K4 (16-bit) and K8 (32-bit) is valid. Essential condition: 1 n 16 (16-bit), 1 n 32 (32-bit) Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse (ROLP, DROLP). 16-bit command (5 STEPS) ROL Continuous ROLP 32-bit command (9 STEPS) DROL Continuous DROLP Flag: M1022 (Carry flag) Pulse Pulse Command Explanation : Rotation device (destination device) : Bit places of one time rotation The bit pattern of device is rotated bit places to the left on every operation of the command. This command is usually pulse (ROLP, DROLP). When goes from OFF ON, the 16 bit data of D10 will rotate 4 bits to the left, as shown in the diagram, and b12 that located at D10 originally will then be moved to the carry flag (CY) M1022. D10 K4 Carry flag Carry flag Rotate to the left upper bit lower bit 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 upper bit 16 bits After one rotation to the left lower bit 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 D10 D10 6-42 DVP-PLC Application Manual
6 Application Commands API 00-49 API Applicable models Rotate to the Right with the Carry RCR ES EP EH 32 D P flag Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F D n Note: If operand D uses with device F, it is only available in 16-bit command. If operand D is specified as KnY, KnM, KnS, only K4 (16-bit) and K8 (32-bit) are valid. Essential condition: 1 n 16 (16-bit), 1 n 32 (32-bit) Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse (RCRP, DRCRP). 16-bit command (5 STEPS) RCR Continuous RCRP Pulse 32-bit command (9 STEPS) DRCR Continuous DRCRP Pulse Flag: M1022 (Carry flag) Command Explanation : Rotation device (destination device) : Bit places after one time rotation The bit pattern of device with the attached carry flag (M1022) is rotated bit places to the right on every operation of the command. This command is usually pulse (RCRP, DRCRP). When goes from OFF to ON, the 16 bit data of D10, including the attached carry flag (M1022), will rotate 4 bits to the right, as shown in the diagram, and b3 that located at D10 originally will then be moved to the carry flag M1022, and that the original contents of the carry flag M1022 will be moved to the bit of b12. Rotate to the right D10 K4 D10 D10 upper bit 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 16 bits lower bit After one rotation upper bit to the right lower bit 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 Carry flag Carry flag DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-43
6 Application Commands API 00-49 API Applicable models Rotate to the Left with the Carry RCL ES EP EH 33 D P flag Attached Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F D n Note: If operand D uses with device F, it is only available in 16-bit command. If operand D is specified as KnY, KnM, KnS, only K4 (16-bit) and K8 (32-bit) is valid. Essential condition: 1 n 16 (16-bit), 1 n 32 (32-bit) Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse (RCLP, DRCLP). 16-bit command (5 STEPS) RCL Continuous RCLP 32-bit command (9 STEPS) DRCL Continuous DRCLP Flag:M1022 (Carry flag) Pulse Pulse Command Explanation : Rotation device (destination device) : Bit places after one time rotation The bit pattern of device with the attached carry flag (M1022) is rotated bit places to the left on every operation of the command. This command is usually pulse (RCLP, DRCLP). When goes from OFF to ON, the 16 bit data of D10, including the attached carry flag (M1022), will rotate 4 bits to the left, as shown in the diagram, and b12 that located at D10 originally will then be moved to the carry flag M1022, and that the original contents of the carry flag M1022 will be moved to the bit of b3. RCLP D10 K4 Rotate to the left Carry flag Carry flag upper bit lower bit 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D10 16 bits After one rotation upper bit to the left lower bit 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 D10 6-44 DVP-PLC Application Manual
6 Application Commands API 00-49 API Applicable models Shifts the Data of Device SFTR ES EP EH 34 P Specified to the Right Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D n 1 n 2 Note: Essential condition: 1 n 1 1024, 1 n 2 n1 In ES series models: 1 n 2 n 1 512 Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse (SFTRP). 16-bit command (9 STEPS) SFTR Continuous SFTRP Pulse 32-bit command - - - - Flag: None Command Explanation : Starting number of shift device (source device) : Starting number of specified shift device (destination device) : Specified bit stack of data length : Bit places after one time shift Shifts data bits of device to the right by bits. bits, which begin with, are shifted to the right. This command is usually pulse (SFTRP). When is in the rising-edge, the 16 bit data of M0~M15 will shift 4 bits to the right. Please refer to the following ~ steps to perform SFTR command of one time scan. M3~M0 carry M7~M4 M3~M0 M11~M8 M7~M4 M15~M12 M11~M8 X3~ M15~M12 complete SFTR M0 K16 K4 5 X3 X2 X1 4 bits in a group shift to the right M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0 carry 4 3 2 1 DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-45
6 Application Commands API 00-49 API Applicable models Shifts the Data of Device SFTL ES EP EH 35 P Specified to the Left Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D n 1 n 2 Note: Essential condition: 1 n 1 1024, 1 n 2 n1 In ES series models: 1 n 2 n 1 512 Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse (SFTLP). 16-bit command (9 STEPS) SFTL Continuous SFTLP Pulse 32-bit command - - - - Flag: None Command Explanation : Starting number of shift device (source device) : Starting number of specified shift device (destination device) : Specified bit stack of data length : Bits after one time shift Shifts data bits of device to the left by bits. bits, which begin with, are shifted to the left. This command is usually pulse (SFTLP). When is in the rising-edge, the 16 bit data of M0~M15 will rotate 4 bits to the left. Please refer to the following ~ steps to perform SFTL command of one time scan. M15~M12 carry M11~M8 M15~M12 M7~M4 M11~M8 M3~M0 M7~M4 X3~ M3~M0 complete SFTR M0 K16 K4 carry 4 bits in a group shift to the left X3 X2 X1 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0 5 1 2 3 4 6-46 DVP-PLC Application Manual
6 Application Commands API 00-49 API Applicable models WSFR Shift the Register to the Right ES EP EH 36 P - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D n1 n2 Note: When using bit devices as operand S (source) and D (destination) the specified device must be equal, for example, one kind is the K n X, K n Y, K n M, K n S and the other kind is T, C, D. When using bit devices as operand S (source) and D (destination) the Kn value must be equal. Essential condition: 1 n 1 512, 1 n 2 n1 Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse (WSFR, WSFRP). 16-bit command (11 STEPS) WSFR Continuous Pulse WSFRP 32-bit command - - - - Flag: None Command Explanation 1 : Starting number of shift device (source device) : Starting number of specified shift device (destination device) : Specified bit stack of data length : Words after one time shift Shifts data words of device to the right by words. words, which begin with, are shifted to the right. This command is usually pulse (WSFRP). When goes from OFF to ON, the 16 register data of D20~D35 are paralleled a shift area and shift 4 register to the right. Please refer to the following ~ steps to perform WSFR command of one times. D23~D20 carry D27~D24 D23~D20 D31~D28 D27~D24 D35~D32 D31~D28 D13 ~D10 D35~D32 complete WSFRP D10 D20 K16 K4 5 D13 D12 D11 D10 4 registers in one group shift to the right D35 D34 D33 D32 D31 D30 D29 D28 D27 D26 D25 D24 D23 D22 D21 D20 Carry 4 3 2 1 DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-47
6 Application Commands API 00-49 2 When goes from OFF to ON, the word register data of Y10~Y27 are paralleled a shift area and shift 2 digits to the right. Please refer to the following ~ steps to perform WSFR command of one time shift. Y17~Y10 carry Y27~Y20 Y17~Y10 X27~X20 Y27~Y20 complete When using Kn device, the specified value must be equal WSFRP K1X20 K1Y10 K4 K2 3 X27 X26 X25 X24 X23 X22 X21 X20 2 digits shift to the right Y27 Y26 Y25 Y24 Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20 Y17 Y16 Y15 Y14 Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10 Carry 2 1 API Applicable models WSFL Shift the Register to the Left ES EP EH 37 P - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D n1 n2 Note: When using bit devices as operand S (source) and D (destination) the specified device must be equal, for example, one kind is the K n X, K n Y, K n M, K n S and the other kind is T, C, D. When using bit devices as operand S (source) and D (destination) the Kn value must be equal. Essential condition: 1 n 1 512, 1 n 2 n1 Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse (WSFL, WSFLP) 16-bit command (11 STEPS) WSFL Continuous Pulse WSFLP 32-bit command - - - - Flag: None Command Explanation : Starting number of shift device (source device) : Starting number of specified shift device (destination device) : Specified bit stack of data length : Words after one time shift Shifts data words of device to the left by words. words, which begin with, are shifted to the left. This command is usually pulse (WSFLP). 6-48 DVP-PLC Application Manual
6 Application Commands API 00-49 When goes from OFF to ON, the 16 register data of D20~D35 are paralleled a shift area and shift 4 register to the right. Please refer to the following ~ steps to perform WSFL command of one time shift. D35~D32 carry D31~D28 D35~D32 D27~D24 D31~D28 D23~D20 D27~D24 D13~D10 D23~D20 complete WSFLP D10 D20 K16 K4 Carry 4 registers in one group shift to the left D13 D12 D11 D10 D35 D34 D33 D32 D31 D30 D29 D28 D27 D26 D25 D24 D23 D22 D21 D20 5 1 2 3 4 API Applicable models SFWR Shift Register Write ES EP EH 38 P - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D n Note: Essential condition: 2 n 512 Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse (SFWR, SFWRP). 16-bit command (7 STEPS) SFWR Continuous SFWRP Pulse 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1022 (Carry flag) Command Explanation : Source device which the data is written in : Head address device : Data length is the length of the First-in/First-OUT stack and the destination device is the head address device of the First-in/First-OUT stack. Use the first number device as the pointer and add 1 to the content value of the pointer when executing this command. The contents of the devices specified by are written into the position specified by the pointer of the First-in/First-OUT stack. If the contents of the pointer exceed the value n-1, the insertion into the First-in/First-OUT stack will stop and the carry flag M1022 will be turned ON. This command is usually pulse (SFWRP). First, reset the content of D0 to 0. When goes from OFF to ON, the content of D0 becomes 1 when the content of D20 is created and built in D1. After changing the content of D20, is executed to goes from OFF to ON again, then the content of D0 becomes 2 when the content of D20 is created and built in D2. DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-49
6 Application Commands API 00-49 Please refer to the following ~steps to perform SFWR command. The content of D20 is created and built in D1. The content of D0 becomes 1. X10 RST D0 reset the content of D0 to 0 (zero) previously SFWRP D20 D0 -K10 D20 n = 10 points D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 pointer Footnote D0 = 3 2 1 This API 38 SFWR command can be used with the API 39 SFRD command to execute the Write-in/Read Control of the First-in/First-OUT stack. API Applicable models SFRD Shift Register Read ES EP EH 39 P - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D n Note: Essential condition: 2 n 512 Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse (SFRD, SFRDP). 16-bit command (7 STEPS) SFRD Continuous SFRDP Pulse 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1020 (Zero flag) Command Explanation : Head address device : destination device : Data length is the length of the First-in/First-OUT stack and the source device is the head address device of the First-in/First-OUT stack. Use the first number device as the pointer and subtract 1 to the content value of the pointer when executing this command. The contents of the devices specified by are written into the position specified by the pointer of the First-in/First-OUT stack. If the contents of the pointer are equal to 0 (zero), the First-in/First-OUT stack will be empty and the carry flag M1022 will be turned ON. This command is usually pulse (SFRDP). 6-50 DVP-PLC Application Manual
6 Application Commands API 00-49 When X1 goes from OFF to ON, D9~D2 are all shifted one register to the right and the content of D0 is substracted by 1 when the content of D1 is read and moved to D21. Please refer to the following ~ steps to perform SFRD command. The content of D1 is read and moved to D21. D9~D2 are all shifted one register to the right. The content of D0 is substracted by 1. SFRDP D0 D21 K10 Footnote n = 10 points D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D21 pointer data read This API 38 SFWR command can be used with the API 39 SFRD command to execute the Write-in/Read Control of the First-in/First-OUT stack. API Applicable models ZRST Resets a Range of Device Specified ES EP EH 40 P Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F D 1 D 2 Note: Essential condition: D 1 must be less than or equal to ( ) D 2. Operand D 1 and D 2 must be in the same category. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse command (ZRSTP). 16-bit command (5 STEPS) ZRST Continuous ZRSTP Pulse 32-bit command - - - - Flag: None Command Explanation : First destination device : Second destination device For ES series models, standard and High speed counters cannot be mixed. For EH/EP series models, standard and High speed counters can be mixed use. When >, then only device is reset. This command is usually pulse (ZRSTP). DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-51
6 Application Commands API 00-49 When is ON, M300 to M399 (auxiliary relays) will be reset to OFF. When X1 is ON, C0 to C127 (16-bit counter) will all be reset. (0 is written in and contact and coil will be reset to OFF) When X10 is ON, T0 to T127 (timer) will all be reset. (0 is written in and contact and coil will be reset to OFF) When X2 is ON, the status of S0 to S127 will be reset to OFF. When X3 is ON, the data of D0 to D100 (data register) will be reset to 0. When X4 is ON, C235 to C254 (32-bit counter) will all be reset. (0 is written in and contact and coil will be reset to OFF) ZRST M300 M399 X1 ZRST C0 C127 X10 ZRST T0 T127 X2 ZRST S0 S127 X3 ZRST D0 D100 X4 ZRST C235 C254 Footnote The RST command can be independently used in the bit device, i.e. Y, M, S and in word device, i.e. T, C, D. API 16 FMOV command can also be used to transmit the data of K0 to word device, i.e. T, C, D or to bit register, i.e. KnY, KnM, KnS, just as RST command. RST M0 RST T0 RST Y0 FMOV K0 D10 K5 6-52 DVP-PLC Application Manual
6 Application Commands API 00-49 API Applicable models DECO 8 256 Bits Decoder ES EP EH 41 P Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D n Note: When operand D is bit device, n=1~8 When operand D is word device, n=1~4 Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse command (DECOP). 16-bit command (7 STEPS) DECO Continuous DECOP Pulse 32-bit command - - - - Flag: None Command Explanation 1 : Decode source device : Destination device for storing the encode result : Decode data length Decodes the data of lower n bit of source device and stores the result of 2 n bit at device. This command is usually pulse (DECOP). is used in case of a bit device, 0<n 8. But if n=0 or n>8, the calculation error will occur. When n=8, the maxium decoded data is 2 8, equal 256 points. (Must notice the range of the stored device after decoding. Please do not use repeatly.) When X10 goes from Off On, the data of ~X2 will be decoded to M100~M107. If data source is 1+2=3, M103 at the third position from M100 turns ON and is set to 1. After the is completed, X10 is changed to OFF. The device which have been decoded is still action. X10 DECOP M100 K3 X2 X1 0 1 1 4 2 1 3 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 M107 M106 M105 M104 M103 M102 M101 M100 DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-53
6 Application Commands API 00-49 2 is used in case of a bit device, 0<n 4, but if n=0 or n>4, the calculation error will occur. When n=4, the maxium decoded data is 2 4, equal 16 points. When X10 goes from Off On, the data in D10 (b2 to b0) will be decoded and stored at D20 (b7 to b0). The unused bits in D20 (b15 to b8) will be all set to 0. Decodes three lower bits in D10 and stores at eight lower bits in D20 (one bit will be 1) and the content of eight upper bits are all 0. After the is completed, X10 is changed to OFF. The device which have been decoded is still action. X10 DECOP D10 D20 K3 b15 D10 b0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 4 2 1 all be 0 (zero) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 b15 D20 b0 When 3 is specified at b2 to b0 of D10 result after decoding b3 at the third position from b0 turns ON and is set to 1 When 3 is specified as effective bits, 8 points are occupied. API Applicable models ENCO 256 8 Bits Encoder ES EP EH 42 P Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D n Note: When operand S is bit device, n=1~8 When operand S is word device, n=1~4 Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse command (ENCOP). 16-bit command (7 STEPS) ENCO Continuous ENCOP Pulse 32-bit command - - - - Flag: None Command Explanation : Encode source device : Destination device for storing encode data : Encode data length Encodes the data of lower 2 n bit in source device and stores the result at device. If the source device is a multiple bit and its value is 1, processing is performed for the last bit position. This command is usually pulse (ENCOP). 6-54 DVP-PLC Application Manual
6 Application Commands API 00-49 1 is used in case of a bit device, 0<n 8. But if n=0 or n>8, the calculation error will occur. When n=8, the maxium decoded data is 2 8, equal 256 points. When goes from Off On, the data of 2 3 (M0 to M7) will be decoded and stored at three lower bits of D0 (b2 to b0). The unused bits in D0 (b15 to b3) will be all set to 0. After the is completed, X10 is changed to OFF and the data in remain unchanged. ENCOP M0 D0 K3 When 3 is specified as effective bits, 8 points are occupied. M07 M06 M05 M04 M03 M02 M01 M00 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 all be 0 (zero) 4 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 b15 D0 1 1 b0 result after encoding Which point, counting from M0, is ON and stored in BIN. 2 is used in case of a word device, 0<n 4. But if n=0 or n>4, the calculation error will occur. When n=4, the maxium decoded data is 2 4, equal 16 points. When goes from Off On, the data of 2 3 (b0 to b7) in D10 will be decoded and stored at three lower bits (b2 to b0) at D20. The unused bits in D20 (b15 to b3) will be all set to 0. (b8 to b15 in D10 is not available) After the is completed, X10 is changed to OFF and the data in remain unchanged. ENCOP D10 D20 K3 Data inactivated b0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 b15 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 D10 7 all be 0 (zero) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 b15 D20 1 b0 result after encoding When 3 is specified as effective bits, 8 points are occupied. DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-55
6 Application Commands API 00-49 API 43 D SUM P Sum of ON Bits Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D Note: If operand S, D use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse command (SUMP, DSUMP). 16-bit command (5 STEPS) SUM Continuous SUMP 32-bit command (9 STEPS) DSUM Continuous DSUMP Flag: M1020 (Zero flag) Pulse Pulse Command Explanation : Source device : Destination device for storing counted number If the contents of these 16 bits are all 0, the Zero flag, M1020=ON. will occupy two registers when using in 32-bit command. When X10 is ON, all the bits that with 1 as its content within D0 will be counted and have this counted number stored in D2. X10 SUM D0 D2 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 3 D0 D2 API 44 D BON P Check Specified Bit Status Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D n Note: If operand S uses with device F, it is only available in 16-bit command. Essential condition: n=0~15 (16-bit), n=0~31 (32-bit) Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse command (BONP, DBONP). 16-bit command (7 STEP) BON Continuous BONP Pulse 32-bit command (13 STEPS) DBON Continuous DBONP Pulse Flag: None Command Explanation : Source device : Result device for storing determined bit : Specified determined bit When is ON, and if the 15th bit of D0 is 1, M0 is ON. But if the 15th bit of D0 is 0, M0 is OFF. Once is switched to OFF, M0 will stay at its previous ON/OFF status. 6-56 DVP-PLC Application Manual
6 Application Commands API 00-49 BON D0 M0 K15. b15 b0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 D0 b15 b0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 D0 M0=Off M0=On API 45 D MEAN P Mean Value Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D n Note: If operand D uses with device F, it is only available in 16-bit command. Essential condition: n=1~64 Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse command (MEANP, DMEANP). 16-bit command (7 STEPS) MEAN Continuous MEANP 32-bit command (13 STEPS) DMEAN Continuous DMEANP Flag: None Pulse Pulse Command Explanation : Starting device for taking mean value : Destination device for storing the mean value : Device number for taking mean value Add the contents of registers specified by, and have the sum divided by to take a mean value. To save this mean value in the designated. If there is remainder in this calculation, ignore the remainder. If the specified device number exceeds the normal usable range, only those that within the range could be processed. If the value of is out of the stated range (1~64), an operation error will be generated. When X10 is ON, add up the contents of the three registers starting from D0 (specified by this command), and divide the sum by three to take the mean vlaue. Then store this mean value in the specified device D10 and ignore the remainder. X10 MEAN D0 D10 K3 (D0+D1+D2)/D3 D10 D0 K100 D1 K113 K112 D10 D2 K125 reminder = 3, be ignored DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-57
6 Application Commands API 00-49 API 46 ANS Alarm Device Output Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S m D Note: Operand S available range: for EP series: T0~T191 for EH series: T0~T199. Operand m available range: K0~K32,767, in units of 100 ms Operand D available range: S900~S1023 Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse command (ANS). 16-bit command (7 STEPS) ANS Continuous - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1048 (Alarm point is activated) M1049 (Monitor is valid) Refer to following for detail. Command Explanation : A timer which detect alarm : Time setting : Alarm device ANS command is used to drive the output alarm device. If alarm device S999=On when X3 is On for more than 5 seconds, S999 will keep being On afterward even X3=Off later. (but T10 will be reset to Off, present value=0) X3 ANS T10 K50 S999 API Applicable models ANR Alarm Device Reset ES EP EH 47 P - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F Note: No operand ES series models do not support pulse command (ANR, ANRP). 16-bit command (1 STEP) ANR Continuous ANRP Pulse 32-bit command - - - - Flag: None Command Explanation ANR command is used to reset alarm device. When several alarm devices are ON, the lower number of alarm device will be reset. This command is usually pulse (ANRP). When X10 and X11 are simultaneously ON more than 2 seconds, the alarm device S910 is ON. Then even if X10 and X11 are changed to OFF, the alarm device S910 will still remain ON. (But T10 will reset to OFF, present value is 0.) When X10 and X11 are simultaneously ON less than 2 seconds, the present value of T10 is reset to 0. 6-58 DVP-PLC Application Manual
6 Application Commands API 00-49 When X3 goes from Off On, for EP series, the activated alarm device S896~S1023 will be reset. for EH series, the activated alarm device S899~S1023 will be reset. When X3 goes from Off On again, the second lower alarm device will be reset. X10 X11 ANS T10 K20 S910 X3 ANRP Footnote Flag: 1. M1048 (Alarm device is activated): When M1049 is driven to be ON, if any one alarm device of S899~S1023 (in EP series)/ S899~S1023 (in EH series) outputs, M1048 is ON. 2. M1049(Monitor is valid): When M1049 is driven to be ON, D1049 will automatically display the lowest number during the of this command. Application of alarm device: I/O devices arrangement: : forward switch, X1: backward switch, X2: front location switch, X3: back location switch, X4: alarm device reset button, Y0: forward, Y1: forward, Y2: alarm indicator, S910: forward alarm device, S920: backward alarm M1000 M1049 Y0 X2 ANS T0 K100 S910 Y1 X3 ANS T1 K200 S920 X2 Y0 Y0 X1 Y1 X3 Y1 M1048 X4 Y2 ANRP DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-59
6 Application Commands API 00-49 1. When M1049=On, M1048, D1049 is valid. 2. If Y0=ON more than 10 seconds and not reach the front location X2, S910=ON. 3. If Y1=ON more than 20 seconds and not reach the back location X3, S920=ON. 4. When backward switch X1=ON, backward device Y1=ON and the signal reach the back location switch X3, Y1 is switched to be OFF. 5. If there is a driven alarm device, alarm indicator Y2=ON. 6. The alarm device which have been activated will be reset one by one, each time the reset button X4 of alarm device is ON during the of this command. The lower activated alarm device is reset on every of this command. API 48 D SQR P Square Root of BIN Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D Note: If operand S, D use with device F, it is only available in 16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse command (SQR, SQRP, DSQR, DSQRP). 16-bit command (5 STEPS) SQR Continuous DSQR 32-bit command (9 STEPS) SQRP Continuous DSQRP Flag: M1020 (Zero flag) M1021 (Borrow flag) M1067 (Operation error) Pulse Pulse Command Explanation : Source device : Destination device which store the result This command performs a square root operation on source device and stores the result at the destination device. only can be a positive value. Performing any square root operation on a negative value will result in an operation error this command will not be executed.the error flag M1067 and M1068 will be On and D1067 records error code 0E1B (hexadecimal). The operation result of is calculated as the integer only, decimal is ignored. If there is decimal ignored, the Borrow flag M1021=ON. When operation result of is 0, the Zero flag M1020=On. When X10=On, the content of D0 will be stored in D12 after the operation of square root. X10 SQR D0 D12 D0 D12 6-60 DVP-PLC Application Manual
6 Application Commands API 00-49 API 49 D FLT P Convert BIN Integer to Binary Floating Point Applicable models ES EP EH - - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse command (FLT, FLTP, DFLT, DFLTP). 16-bit command (5 STEPS) FLT Continuous DFLT Pulse 32-bit command (9 STEPS) FLTP Continuous Pulse DFLTP Flag: M1081 (FLT command function exchange) Command Explanation : Source device : Destination device which store the converted result When M1081 is OFF, the source data is converted from BIN integer to binary floating point. At this time, source device of 16-bit command FLT occupies 1 register and Destination device occupies 2 registers. If absoluted value of conversion result is larger than max. floating value, carry flag M1022=On. If absoluted value of conversion result is less than min. floating value, carry flag M1021=On. If conversion result is 0, zero flag M1020=On. When M1081 is ON, the source data is converted from binary floating point to BIN 1 integer. (ignore the decimal) At this time, source device of 16-bit command FLT occupies 2 registers and Destination device occupies 1 register. The action is the same as command INT. If conversion result exceeds BIN integer range of (16-bit is -32,768~32,767 and 32-bit is -2,147,483,648~2,147,483,647), it wil be represented with max. value or min. value. Then carry flag will be set to M1022=On. If the decimal of conversion result is ignored, borrow flag M1021=On. If conversion result is 0, zero flag M1020=On. After conversion, is saved by 16 bits. When M1081 is OFF, the source data is converted from BIN integer to binary floating point. When X10 is ON, D0 (BIN integer) is converted to D13, D12 (binary floating point). When X11 is ON, D1, D0 (BIN integer) are converted to D21, D20 (binary floating point). If D0=K10, X10 will be On. 32-bit of floating point after conversioin will be H41200000 and it will be saved in 32-bit register D12(D13). If 32-bit register D0(D1)=K100,000, X11 will be On. 32-bit of floating point after conversioin will be H4735000 and it will be saved in 32-bit register D20(D21). DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-61
6 Application Commands API 00-49 M1002 X10 X11 RST M1081 FLT D0 D12 DFLT D0 D20 2 When M1081 is On, the source data is converted from binary floating point to BIN integer. (ignore the decimal) When X10 is ON, D0 and D1(binary floating point) are converted to D12 (BIN integer). If D0(D1)=H47C35000, the floating point is 100,000. The result will be D12=K32,767, M1022=On due to the value exceeds max. value of 16-bit register D12. When X11 is ON, D1, D0 (binary floating point) are converted to D21, D20 (BIN integer). If D0(D1)=H47C35000, the floating point is 100,000. The result will be saved in 32-bit register D20(D21). M1002 SET M1081 X10 FLT D0 D12 X11 DFLT D0 D20 3 Please use this application command to complete the following operation. (D10) (X7~) K61.5 16 bit BIN 2 bit BCD 6 (D21,D20) binary floating point 1 2 5 (D101,D100) (D200) BIN binary floating point 3 4 (D301,D300) binary floating point 7 8 (D31,D30) decimal floating point (for monitor) (D41,D40) 32 bit integer (D203,D202) binary floating point (D401,D400) binary floating point 6-62 DVP-PLC Application Manual
6 Application Commands API 00-49 M1000 FLT D10 D100 1 BIN K2 D200 2 3 FLT D200 D202 DEDIV K615 K10 D300 4 DEDIV D100 D202 D400 5 DEMUL D400 D300 D20 6 DEBCD D20 D30 7 DINT D20 D40 8 1. Covert D10 (BIN integer) to D101, D100 (binary floating point). 2. Covert the value of X7~ (BCD value) to D200 (BIN value). 3. Covert D200 (BIN integer) to D203, D202 (binary floating point). 4. Save the result of K615 K10 to D301, D300 (binary floating point). 5. The division of binary floating point: Save the result of of (D101, D100) (D203, D202) to D401, D400 (binary floating point). 6. The multiplication of binary floating point: Save the result of (D401, D400) (D301, D300) to D21, D20 (binary floating point). 7. Covert binary floating point (D21, D20) to decimal floating point (D31, D30). 8. Covert binary floating point (D21, D20) to BIN integer (D41, D40). DVP-PLC Application Manual 6-63
7 Application Commands API 50-99 API 50 REF P I/O Refresh Immediately Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F D n Note: Operand D should be a multiple of 10, i.e. 00, 10, 20, 30 etc., so it should be, X10, Y0, Y10 etc., please refer to the command explanation. Essential condition: n=8~256, and should be a multiple of 8, i.e. 8, 16, 24, 32 etc. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse command (REFP). 16-bit command (5 STEPS) REF Continuous REFP Pulse 32-bit command - - - - Flag: None Command Explanation 1 : Starting device of I/O refresh : Refreshed I/O number The state of all PLC inputs and outputs will be refreshed after scanning to END. The state of inputs is read from external inputs to save in inputs memory. The output terminals send outputs memory to output device after END command. Therefore, this command can be used during algorithm process when need to input/output the newest data. The state of all inputs and outputs may change immediately after they are scanned. If the user does not want to wait for the next scan time, the REF command may be used. should always be a multiple of 10, i.e. 00, 10, 20, 30 etc., so it should be, X10, Y0, Y10 etc. should always be a multiple of 8, i.e. 8, 16, 24, 32 etc. and its available range is 8~256. If the value of is out of the stated range (8~256) or not a multiple of 8, an operation error will be generated. The usage range may be different by various models, please refer to the footnote for detail. When = ON, PLC will read the state of ~X7 input points immediately and refreshed. There is no input delay occurs. REF K16 DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-1
7 Application Commands API 50-99 2 When = ON, the output signal Y0~Y7 (8 points) are sent to output terminal immediately and refreshed. It desn t need to output till END command. REF Y0 K8 Footnote For ES and EP series models, the input and output points processed by this command are the I/O points of MPU: ~X17, Y0~Y17 and n=k8 or K16. API 51 REFF P Refresh and Adjust the Response Time of Input Filter Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F n Note: None 16-bit command (3 STEPS) REFF Continuous REFFP Pulse 32-bit command - - - - Flag: None Command Explanation : Response time setting, in units of ms. PLC is provided with the input filter to prevent the noises or interferences. The input filters of ~X17 inputs of DVP series PLC are digital filters and using REFF command can adjust the response time of the input filters. Command will set in D1020 and D1021 directly and adjust reaction time of ~X7 and X10~X17 separately. The operation rules when the input filters of ~X17 inputs of DVP series PLC adjust the response time: When the power of PLC turns from Off to On or execute to END command, response time is decided by the content value of D1020 and D1021. During the program, the setting value can be moved to D1020 and D1021by using MOV command. The response time can be changed by using REFF command in the of the program. At this time, the response time specified by REFF command will be moved into D1020, D1021and it will be adjusted again in the next scan. 7-2 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 When the power of PLC turns from Off to On, the response time of ~X17 inputs is decided by the content value of D1020 and D1021. When X20=On, REFF K5 command is executed, respone time is changed to 5 ms and and it will X20 X20 REFF Y1 REFF K5 K20 be adjusted again in the next scan. When X20=Off, the REFF command will not be X1 Y2 executed, the response time is changed to 20ms and it will be adjusted again in the next scan. END Footnote When using the interrupt parameters, or high-speed counter, or SPD command (API 56), the response time of corresponding input terminals won t delay and its action has no ralation with this command. API 52 MTR Input Matrix Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D 1 D 2 n Note: Operand S should be a multiple of 10, i.e. 00, 10, 20, 30 etc., so it should be, X10 etc. and occupies 8 continuous devices. Operand D 1 should be a multiple of 10, i.e. 00, 10, 20, 30 etc., so it should be Y0, Y10 etc. and occupies n continuous devices Operand D 2 should be a multiple of 10, i.e. 00, 10, 20, 30 etc., so it should be Y0, M0, S0 etc. Essential condition: n=2~8 Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (9 STEPS) MTR Continuous - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1029 Execution completed flag Command Explanation : Head address of input matrix : Head address of output matrix : Corresponding head address of matrix scan : Number of banks for the matrix is the head address that specify all inputs of the matrix. Once the input is specified, a selection of 8 continuous input devices is called as input matrix. is the head address of transister output Y of the matrix. DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-3
7 Application Commands API 50-99 This command allows a selection of 8 continuous input devices (head address ) to be used multiple ( ) times. Each input has more than one and different signal being processed. Each set of 8 input signals are grouped into a bank and there are number of banks. Each bank is selected by the quantity of outputs from, used to achieve the matrix are equal to the number of banks. The result is stored in a matrix-table which starts at corresponding head address. The maximum inputs can achieve 64 inputs (8 inputs 8 banks). When this command is used on an interrupt format, processing each bank of inputs every 25msec. This would result in an 8 bank matrix, i.e. 64 inputs (8 inputs 8 banks) being read in 200msec. Hence, this command is not available for the input signal which its On/Off speed is over than 200ms. It is recommended to use special auxiliary relay M1000, normally open contact. After the completion of performing MTR command, the command completed flag M1029 is turned ON and this flag is automatically reset when the MTR command is turned OFF. This command can only be used ONCE. When =On, MTR command starts to execute. The external 2 banks, total 16 devices are read by order and the result are stored in the internal relay M10~M17, M20~M27. M1000 MTR X40 Y40 M10 K2 The figure below is an example wiring diagram for the operation of MTR command. The external 2 banks consist of X40~47 and Y40~41 and total 16 devices correspond to the internal relay M10~M17, M20~M27 are used with MTR command. For a general precaution to aid successful operation, diodes should be placed after each input devices. These diodes should have a rating of 0.1A, 50V. 7-4 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Diode 0.1A/50V M20 M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 Input devices X41 X42 X43 X44 X45 X46 X47 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 COM X40 X41 X42 X43 X44 X45 X46 X47 COM Y40 Y41 Y42 Y43 Y44 Y45 Y46 Y47 When output Y40 is ON, only those inputs in the first bank are read. These result are stored in auxiliary coils M10~M17. The second step involves Y40 going OFF and Y41 coming ON and this time only inputs in the second bank are read. These results are stored in M20~M27. Read input signal in the first bank Y40 1 3 Read input signal in the second bank Y41 2 4 25ms Processing time of each bank is about 25ms DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-5
7 Application Commands API 50-99 API 53 D HSCS High-speed Counter Comparison SET Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D Note: Operand S 2 should be C235~C240, C241~C244, C246~C249, C251~C254 or available high-speed counters, please refer to the footnote for details. The usage range of operand D: I010 to I060 can be set, also can use index register E, F to modify. There is no 16-bit command for API 53, only 32-bit command DHSCS is available. Refer to each model specification for usage range. In ES and EP series models, operand S 2 and D cannot use index register E, F to modify. 16-bit command - - - - 32-bit command (13 STEPS) DHSCS Continuous - - Flag: M1150~M1333. Refer to the footnote for details. M1289~M1294. High-speed counter interrupt disabled flags in EH series models. Refer to the program example 3 below. Command Explanation : Compare value : Numver of high-speed counter : Compare result All high-speed counters use an interrupt process, therefore, all compare result devices are updated immediately. HSCS command compares the current value of the selected high-speed counter 1 against a selected comapre value. When the counters currrent value changes to a value equal to, the device specified as is set ON. Even if the compare result is unequal, the status of device will still be ON. If the devices specified as the device are Y0~Y17, when the compare value and the present value of high-speed counter are equal, the compare result will immediately output to the external inputs Y0~Y17, and other Y devices will be affected by the scan cycle. However, M, S devices are immediate output, not being affected by the scan cycle. After PLC perform the RUN command, if M0=On, DHSCS command starts to operate. Y10 will ON immediately when C235 s present value stepped from 99 100 or 101 100 and be ON constantly. M1000 DCNT C235 K1000 M0 DHSCS K100 C235 Y10 On immediately 7-6 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 2 Difference between Y output of DHSCS command and general Y output: When C249 s value stepped from 99 100 and 101 100, Y10 output of DHSCS command immediately output to the external output by using interrupt process so it is irrelevant to the program scan time. However, there will still be a delay due to the output of module relay (10ms) or transistor (10us). When the present value of high-speed timer C249 changes from 99 to 100, C249 will be activated, and Y17 will be ON after END command due to the program scan time. M1000 DCNT C249 K100 C249 DHSCS K100 C249 Y10 ON immediately SET Y17 3 High-speed counter interrupt: ES series models do not support high-speed counter interrupt function. The limit when EP series models using high-speed counter interrupt When using DHSCS command to specify I interrupt, the specified high-speed counter can not be use in other DHSCS, DHSCR, DHSZ command. If using it, it will result in error. The interrupt pointers I010 to I060 can be used as D operand of DHSCS command and this enables the interrupt routine to be executed when the value of the specified high-speed counter reaches the value in DHSCS command. In EP series models, there are six high-speed counter interrupts: I010, I020, I030, I040, I050, I060 6 points can be used. I010 is used with C235, C241, C244, C246, C247, C249, C251, C252, C254. I020 is used with C236; I030 is used with C237, C242; I040 is used with C238; I050 is used with C239 and I060 is used with C240. When the present value of C251 changes from 99 100and 101 100, the program will jump to the interrupt pointer I010 to execute the interrupt routine. DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-7
7 Application Commands API 50-99 M1000 DCNT C251 K1000 DHSCS K100 C251 I010 I010 M1000 FEND Y1 IRET END In EP series models, M1059 is high-speed counter interrupt inhibit flag. In EH series models, M1289~M1294 are high-speed counter interrupt inhibit flag, I010 to I060 masked. For example, when M1294 is On, Interrupt pointer I060 masked. Interrupt pointer interrupt inhibit Interrupt pointer I Number flag I Number interrupt inhibit flag I010 M1289 I040 M1292 I020 M1290 I050 M1293 I030 M1291 I060 M1294 Footnote The ouput contact of high-speed counter and the compare output of DHSCS (API 53) command, DHSCR (API 54) command and DHSZ(API 55) command are all activated when there are counted inputs. If using data operation command, such as DADD, DMOV etc. commands to change the present value of high-speed counter equal to the setting value, there is comparsion will be set or output because there is no counted inputs. High-speed counter provided in ES series models: total counting frequency is 30 KHz. Type 1-phase 1 input 1-phase 2 inputs 2-phase inputs C235 C236 C237 C238 C241 C242 C244 C246 C247 C249 C251 C252 C254 Input U/D U/D U/D U U U A A A X1 U/D R R D D D B B B X2 U/D U/D R R R R X3 U/D R S S S U: Increasing input A: A phase input S: Start input D: Decreasing input B: B phase input R: Reset input 1. Input point and X1 can plan to be higher speed counter and 1-phase can be up to 30KHz. But total counting frequency of these input points should be less than or equal to total frequency 30KHz. If counting input is A/B phase signal, frequency will be four times of counting frequency. Therefore, counting frequency of A/B phase is almost 7KHz. 2. In ES series models, DHSCS and DHSCR command can not be used more than 4 times. 7-8 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 High-speed counter provided in EP series models: 1-phase high-speed counter: total counting frequency is 30 KHz. Type 1-phase 1 input 1-phase 2 inputs 2-phase inputs C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 C240 C241 C242 C244 C246 C247 C249 C251 C252 C254 Input U/D U/D U/D U U U A A A X1 U/D R R D D D B B B X2 U/D U/D R R R R X3 U/D R S S S X4 U/D X5 U/D U: Increasing input A: A phase input S: Start input D: Decreasing input B: B phase input R: Reset input 1. Input point and X1 can plan to be higher speed counter and 1-phase can be up to 30KHz. But total counting frequency of these input points should be less than or equal to total frequency 30KHz. If counting input is A/B phase signal, frequency will be four times of counting frequency. Therefore, counting frequency of A/B phase is almost 7KHz. 2. Input X5 has two functions. When M1260=Off, C240 is general U/D high-speed counter. When M1260=On, X5 is the global reset of C235~C239. 3. In EP series models, DHSCS, DHSCR and DHSZ command can not be used more than 6 times. High-speed counter provided in EH series models: 1. interrupt type 1-phase high-speed counter, C235~C240: general counting frequency is up to 10KHz, maximum total counting frequency is 20 KHz. 2. DVP-EH series has four Hardware high-speed counter (hereinafter referred to as HHSC), HHSC0~3 and available device number for HHSC0~3 are C241~ C254. Pulse output frequency of each group can reach 250 KHz. Available device number for HHSC0: C241, C246, C251 Available device number for HHSC1: C242, C247, C252 Available device number for HHSC2: C243, C248, C253 Available device number for HHSC3: C244, C249, C254 Each HHSC can only be specified one time for one device number. Use DCNT command to specify the HHSC. Available counter modes of each HHSC: 1). 1-phase 1 input, also called as Pulse/Direction mode 2). 1-phase 2 inputs, also called as CW/CCW mode. 3). 2-phase 2 inputs, also called as AB phase mode. DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-9
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Counter Type Type 3. Please refer to the following table for the available high-speed counters: interrupt type 1-phase high-speed counter Hardware high-speed counter 1-phase 1 input 1-phase 1 input 1-phase 2 inputs 2-phase input Input C235 C236 C237 C238 C239 C240 C241 C242 C243 C244 C246 C247 C248 C249 C251 C252 C253 C254 U/D U/D U A X1 U/D D B X2 U/D R R R X3 U/D S S S X4 U/D U/D U A X5 U/D D B X6 R R R X7 S S S X10 U/D U A X11 D B X12 R R R X13 S S S X14 U/D U A X15 D B X16 R R R X17 S S S U: Increasing input A: A phase input S: Start input D: Decreasing input B: B phase input R: Reset input 4. In the program of DVP EH series models, there is no limited using time for hardware high-speed counter related commands, like DHSCS, DHSCR and DHSZ. However, there are limited using times for executing the commands simultaneously. DHSCS, DHSCR command will use one group setting and DHSZ command will use two groups settings. When these commands are executed simultaneously, the total used groups settings can not exceed eight groups settings. If exceeding eight groups settings, system will totalize the used memory units of the commands which have been scanned and executed first, the others will be ignored. 5. System structure of hardware high-speed counter: 7-10 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 X4 X10 X14 HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 X1 X5 X11 X15 Counting pulse Counting pulse U/D U A B D Current value of counter HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 Comparator Comparison value reached setting HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 D1225 D1226 D1227 D1228 Setting value:0~3 respectively represent Mode 1~4 (1~4 frequency mode) Counting mode selection Counting up/down flag Comparison value reached output DHSCS occupies one group setting value DHSCR occupies one group setting value DHSCZ occupies two groups setting value HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 C241 C242 C243 C244 M1241 M1242 M1243 M1244 HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 X2 X6 X12 X16 M1264 M1266 M1268 M1270 U/D mode setting flag AND OR Reset signal R HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 M1246 M1247 M1248 M1249 M1251 M1252 M1253 M1254 High speed comparison command DHSCS DHSCR DHSCZ Comparison value reached operation SET/RESET I010 ~ I060 interrupt counting value reset M1272 M1274 M1276 M1278 HHSC0 HHSC1 HHSC2 HHSC3 X3 X7 X13 X17 M1265 M1267 M1269 M1271 AND OR Start signal S Interrupt inhibit flag I 010 I 020 M1289 M1290 I 030 M1291 I 040 M1292 I 050 M1293 I 060 M1294 M1273 M1275 M1277 M1279 6. HHSC0~3 all have reset and start signal of external input. Reset signal (R) can be set by M1272/M1274/M1276/M1278 (belong to HHSC0 ~3) and start signal can be set by M1273/M1275/M1277/M1279 (belong to HHSC0 ~3). When using high-speed counter, if do not use the external signal input of R and S, you can set M1264/M1266/M1268/M1270 and M1265/M1267/M1269 /M1271 as TRUE. Close the operation of the input signal and the corresponding external inputs can be used as general inputs. Please refer to the above example figure for usage. 7. Select counter modes High-speed conter of ES / EP series is 2-phase 2 inputs counter mode and set by special device D1022 with four double frequency modes. The content value of register D1022 is loaded at the first scan time when PLC controller switch from Stop to Run status. (Only V5.5 and above of DVP-ES series MPU support this function) Device No. D1022 D1022=K1 D1022=K2 D1022=K4 Function Explanation Use counting method of counter to set double frequency Select (normal frequency) mode Select (double frequency) mode Select (4 times frequency) mode DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-11
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Double frequency mode: Counter mode 1 (normal frequency) A-phase B-phase Signal Diagram Counting up Counting down 2 A-phase 2-phase 2 inputs (double frequency) B-phase Counting up Counting down 4 (four times frequency) A-phase B-phase Counting up Counting down According to the different type of counter modes, HHSC 0~3 of EH series models can set normal, double, thriple and four times these four frequency modes by using special device D1225 to D1228: Counter mode Setting value Type of special D 0 (normal 1-phase frequency) 1 input 1 (double frequency) 0 (normal 1-phase frequency) 2 inputs 1 (double frequency) U/D U/D FLAG U/D U/D FLAG U D U D Signal Diagram Counting up(+1) Counting down(-1) 7-12 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Counter mode Setting value Type of special D 0 (normal frequency) 1 (double frequency) 2-phase 2 inputs 2 (triple frequency) 3 (four times frequency) A B A B A B A B Counting up(+1) Signal Diagram Counting down(-1) U/D FLAG are special M device, M1241~M1244 and each indicates the setting flag of C241~C244 counting up and down. Related flags and special register of high-speed counter: Flag Function Explanation M1150 Announce that DHSZ command is used as multi groups setting value compare mode M1151 DHSZ command multi groups setting value compare mode completed M1152 Announce that DHSZ command is used as frequency control mode M1153 Frequency control mode completed Specify counting direction of C235 ~ C244 high-speed counter M1235 ~ M1244 When M12 =Off, C2 counting up When M12 =On, C2 counting down Monitor counting direction of C246~C249, C251~C254 M1246 ~ M1249 M1251 ~ M1254 high-speed counter When C2 counting up, M12 =Off. C2 counting down, M12 =On. M1260 X5 is the reset input signal of all high-speed counters M1261 High-speed compare flag of DHSCR command M1264 HHSC0 reset signal end (R) external control signal input contact disable DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-13
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Flag M1265 M1266 M1267 M1268 M1269 M1270 M1271 M1272 M1273 M1274 M1275 M1276 M1277 M1278 M1279 M1289 M1290 M1291 M1292 M1293 M1294 M1312 M1313 M1314 M1315 M1316 M1317 M1320 M1321 M1322 M1323 M1324 M1325 M1328 M1329 M1330 M1331 M1332 M1333 Function Explanation HHSC0 start signal end (S) external control signal input contact disable HHSC1 reset signal end (R) external control signal input contact disable HHSC1 start signal end (S) external control signal input contact disable HHSC2 reset signal end (R) external control signal input contact disable HHSC2 start signal end (S) external control signal input contact disable HHSC3 reset signal end (R) external control signal input contact disable HHSC3 start signal end (S) external control signal input contact disable HHSC0 reset signal end (R) internal control signal input contact HHSC0 start signal end (S) internal control signal input contact HHSC1 reset signal end (R) internal control signal input contact HHSC1 start signal end (S) internal control signal input contact HHSC2 reset signal end (R) internal control signal input contact HHSC2 start signal end (S) internal control signal input contact HHSC3 reset signal end (R) internal control signal input contact HHSC3 start signal end (S) internal control signal input contact High-speed counter interrupt, I010 masked High-speed counter interrupt, I020 masked High-speed counter interrupt, I030 masked High-speed counter interrupt, I040 masked High-speed counter interrupt, I050 masked High-speed counter interrupt, I060 masked C235 Start input control C236 Start input control C237 Start input control C238 Start input control C239 Start input control C240 Start input control C235 Reset input control C236 Reset input control C237 Reset input control C238 Reset input control C239 Reset input control C240 Reset input control C235 Start/Reset enable control C236 Start/Reset enable control C237 Start/Reset enable control C238 Start/Reset enable control C239 Start/Reset enable control C240 Start/Reset enable control 7-14 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Special register D1022 D1150 D1151 D1152 (lower-bit) D1153 (upper-bit) D1225 D1226 D1227 D1228 D1225 ~ D1228 Function Explanation Double frequency selection of AB phase counter in ES/EP series models DHSZ command for table counting register of multi-group setting comparison mode DHSZ command for table counting register of frequency control mode DHSZ command saves table counting register value that read in sequence from pulse output frequency of each group in D1153 and D1152. First counter counting method setting, C241, C246, C251 counter mode Second counter counting method setting, C242, C247, C252 counter mode Third counter counting method setting, C243, C248, C253 counter mode Forth counter counting method setting, C244, C249, C254 counter mode Counter mode of Hardware high-speed counter, HHSC0~HHSC3 of EH series model When setting value is 0, it is normal frequency counter mode. When setting value is 1, it is double frequency counter mode. When setting value is 2, it is triple frequency counter mode. When setting value is 3, it is four times frequency counter mode. API 54 D HSCR 32-bit High-speed Counter Comparison Reset Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D Note: Operand S 2 should be C235~C240, C241~C244, C246~C249, C251~C254. Please refer to the footnote of API 53 DHSCS command for details. Operand D uses the same counter as S 2 operand. There is no 16-bit command for API 54, only 32-bit command DHSCR is available. Refer to each model specification for usage range. In ES and EP series models, D operand cannot use C device. In ES and EP series models, S 2, D operand cannot use index register E, F to modify. 16-bit command - - - - 32-bit command (13STEPS) DHSCR Continuous - - Flag: M1150~M1333. Refer to the footnote of API 53 DHSCS command for details. M1261. High-speed counter external reset mode selection. ES and EP series models doesn t support. Refer to the footnote for details. Command Explanation : Compare value : Numver of high-speed counter : Compare result HSCR command compares the current value of the selected high-speed counter against a selected comapre value. When the counters currrent value changes to a value equal to, the device specified as is set Off. Even if the compare result is unequal, the status of device will still be Off. DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-15
7 Application Commands API 50-99 If the devices specified as the device are Y0~Y17, when the compare value and the present value of high-speed counter are equal, the compare result will immediately output to the external inputs Y0~Y17 (specified Y output will be reset), and other Y devices will be affected by the scan cycle. However, M, S devices are immediate output, not being affected by the scan cycle. 1 2 When M0=On and C251 s present value stepped from 99 100 or 101 100, Y10 will be set Off. When C251 s present value change from 199 to 200, the contact C251 will be On and force Y0=On, but there will still be a program scan time delay output. Y10 is status immediately reset device when specified counter reach. It also can be used to specify the same number high-speed counter. Please refer to the program example 2. M1000 DCNT C251 K200 M0 DHSCR K100 C251 Y10 C251 SET Y0 When specifing the same number high-speed counter, the current value of high-speed counter C251 will change from 9991000 or 10011000 and C251 contact will be reset to Off. M1000 DCNT C251 K200 1000 DHSCR K1000 C251 C251 200 C251 output contact it doesn affect by scan time Footnote affect by scan time Please refer to the footnote of API 53 DHSCS command for the high-speed counters and their usage range provided in each series models. For EH series, M1261 is used to specify the external reset mode of high-speed counter. Some high-speed counters provide input points for external reset. When these input points being On, the corresponding current value of high-speed counter will all be reset to 0 and the output contacts will turn Off. Therefore, user must use flag M1261 to specify the external reset mode of high-speed counter and force the external output being executed. 7-16 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 The function limit of M1261: Only can be used in hardware high-speed counters C241~C254. The followings are the using example: The input point of external reset of C251 is X2. If Y10=On. When M1261=Off, X2=On, the current value of C251 is reset to 0 and its contact turns Off. When DHSCR command has been executed, there is no counter input and the compared result does not output. Therefore, Y10=On will remain unchaged. When M1261=On, X2=On, the current value of C251 is reset to 0 and its contact turns Off. When DHSCR command has been executed, although there is no counter input, but compared result will still output. Therefore, the content of Y10 will be reset. M1000 DCNT C251 K1000 X10 DHSCR K0 C251 Y10 M1261 API 55 D HSZ Zone Comparison (High-speed Counter) Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 S D Note: Operand S 1 should be equal to or smaller than operand S 2 (S 1 S 2 ) Operand S 2 should be C235~C240, C241~C244, C246~C249, C251~C254. Please refer to the footnote of API 53 DHSCS command for details. Operand D occupies 3 continuous devices. There is no 16-bit command for API 55, only 32-bit command DHSZ is available. Refer to each model specification for usage range. In EP series models, operand D cannot use index register E, F to modify. 16-bit command - - - - 32-bit command (17 STEPS) DHSZ Continuous - - Flag: M1150~M1333. Refer to the footnote of API 53 DHSCS command. M1150, M1151. DHSZ command execute multi devices comparison mode. Refer to the program 3 below. EP series models do not support these flags. M1152, M1153 DHSZ command has been used as frequency control mode. Refer to the program 4 below. EP series models do not support these flags. Command Explanation : Lower-limit value of zone comparison : Upper-limit value of zone comparison : Number of high-speed counter : compared result should be equal to or smaller than (S1 S2). Output operation won t be affected by the scan time. All outputs and zone comparison all use interrupt operation. DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-17
7 Application Commands API 50-99 1 The specified device is Y0, then Y0~Y2 will be occupied automatically. When DHSZ command has been executed and high-speed counter C246 is counting, if the upper- and lower limit value is reached, one of Y0~Y2 will be On. M1000 DCNT C246 K20000 DHSZ K1500 K2000 C246 Y0 Y0 Y1 Y2 When current value of C246 < K1500, Y0On When K1500 < current value of C246 < K2000, Y1=On When current value of C246 > K2000, Y2=On 2 When using DHSZ command to control and stop high/low speed, C251 is AB phase high-speed counter. There will be comparison value output of DHSZ command only when counting pulse is stored in C251. Therefore, even the counting current value is 0, Y10 will not be On. When X10=On, DHSZ command force Y10=On when counting current value K2,000. In order to improve this problem, use DZCPP command to compare C251 against and K2,000 when the program RUN at the beginning. When counting current value K2,000, Y10=On and DZCPP command is Pulse command. Command DZCPP only can be executed ONCE in program and Y10 will be still be On. When drive contact X10=Off, Y10~Y12 will be reset to Off. X20 RST C251 ZRST Y10 Y12 M1000 X10 DCNT C251 K10000 DZCPP K2000 K2400 C251 Y10 DHSZ K2000 K2400 C251 Y10 7-18 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Timing diagram Speed of variable speed rotational equipment 0 X10 high speed forward low speed forward Stop Y10 Y11 Y12 current value of C251 counter 2000 2400 3 0 When using the multi groups setting value comparison mode of DHSZ command, if of DHSZ command is specified as special auxiliary relay M1150, it can execte a current value of high-speed counter and has the function which can compare and output multi groups setting value. Under this mode, is defined as starting device of comparison table. It only can be data register D and can be modified by index register E, F. But the number modified by index register E, F is unchanged after the command has been executed. is defined as the data groups of comparison data. It only can be K1~K128 or H1~H80 and also can be can be modified by index register E, F. After the command has been executed, it is disabled to change this value. is defined as the number of high-speed counter and it should be C235~C254. is defined as mode setting. It only can be M1150 and can be modified by index register E, F. But if it is not M1150, then will be disabled. The comparison table of high-speed counter consists of the head number of register specified by and bank numbers (groups number) specified by. Please input the setting value of each register before the command being executed. When current value of C251 high-speed counter specified by is equal to the setting value of (D1, D0), output Y specified by D2 will be reset to Off (D3=K0) or On (D3=K1) and latched. All of output Y use interrupt operation. DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-19
7 Application Commands API 50-99 When the current value of C251 is equal to the setting value of the first groups in the comparison table, D1150=K1. If the current value of C251 is equal to the setting value of the second groups, D1150=K2. Then the comparison will continute to execute in the above described order. After the comparison operation of all groups are completed, M1151=On for one scan cycle and D1150 will be reset to 0, then jump back to the first groups to execute. When the drive contact X10 turns Off, the operation of the command will be interruptted and the content of table counting register D1150 will be reset to 0. But the ON/OFF state is unchanged at that time. When this command command has been executed and first scan to END command, all setting value inside of the diagram are valid. This function of this command only can be used ONCE in program. In EP series models, this function does not provided. This function of this command only can be used in hard ware high-speed counter C241~C254. X10 DHSZ D0 K4 C251 M1150 Comparison table 32-bit comparison data Number of output On/Off Table counting High word Low word Y indication register D1150 D1 (K0) D0 (K100) D2 (K10) D3 (K1) 0 D5 (K0) D4 (K200) D6 (K11) D7 (K1) 1 D9 (K0) D8 (K300) D10 (K10) D11 (K0) 2 D13 (K0) D12 (K400) D14 (K11) D15 (K0) 3 K10:Y10 K11:Y11 K0:Off K1:On 0 1 2 3 0 Cyclic scan C251 current value 400 300 200 100 Y10 Y11 M1151 D1050 0 1 2 3 0 7-20 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Related flags and special register of high-speed counter: Flag Function Explanation M1150 Announce that DHSZ command is used as multi groups setting value compare mode M1151 For DHSZ command, Multi groups setting value compare mode completed Special register D1150 Function Explanation For DHSZ command, Table index of DHSZ Y output 4 Frequency control operation (Combined DHSZ and DPLSY command): When of DHSZ command is special auxiliary relay M1152, it can execte a current value of high-speed counter and has the function which can control pulse output frequency of DPLSY command. Under this mode, is defined as starting device of comparison table. It only can be data register D and can be modified by index register E, F. But the number modified by index register E, F is unchanged after the command has been executed. is defined as the data groups of comparison data. It only can be K1~K128 or H1~H80 and also can be can be modified by index register E, F. After the command has been executed, it is disabled to change this value. is defined as the number of high-speed counter and it should be C235~C254. is defined as mode setting. It only can be M1152 and can be modified by index register E, F. But if it is not M1152, then will be disabled. This function of this command only can be used ONCE in program. In EP series models, this function does not provided. For EH series models, it only can be used in hardware high-speed counters C241~C254. Please input the setting value of each register before the command being executed. When the current value of C251 specified by is within the range between the upper- and lower-limit of (D1, D0), the setting value of (D3, D2) will be converted to pulse output frequency of DPLSY command. Then, the second groups in the comparison table will continue to execute. After the comparison operation of all groups are completed, M1153=On for one scan cycle and D1151 will be reset to 0, then jump back to the first groups to execute. If desiring to stop the at the last group, Please set the content of the last group as KO. When the drive contact X10 turns Off, the operation of the command will be interruptted and the content of table counting register D1151 will be reset to 0. DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-21
7 Application Commands API 50-99 X10 DHSZ D0 K5 C251 M1152 M0 PLS M0 DPLSY D1152 K0 Y0 Comparison table 32-bit comparison data Pulse output frequency Table counting High word Low word 0~250KHz register D1151 D1 (K0) D0 (K100) D3, D2 (K5,000) 0 D5 (K0) D4 (K200) D7, D6 (K10,000) 1 D9 (K0) D8 (K300) D11, D10 (K15,000) 2 D13 (K0) D12 (K400) D15, D14 (K6,000) 3 D17 (K0) D16 (K0) D19, D18 (K0) 4 0 1 2 3 4 Cyclic scan C251 current value 500 400 300 200 pulse output frequency 100 0 (Hz) 15000 10000 5000 0 M1153 D1051 0 1 2 Related flags and special register of high-speed counter: Flag Function Explanation M1152 Announce that DHSZ command is used as frequency control mode M1153 For DHSZ command, frequency control mode completed 3 4 0 Special register D1151 D1152 (low word) D1153 (high word) D1336 (low word) D1337 (high word) Function Explanation Table index changed by DHSZ D value DHSZ command saves table counting register value that read in sequence from pulse output frequency of each group in D1153 and D1152. Pulse numbers of DPLSY command output 7-22 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 The completed program is shown below: X10 DMOVP K5000 D2 DMOVP K10000 D6 DMOVP K15000 D10 DMOVP K6000 D14 DMOVP K0 D18 DMOVP K100 D0 DMOVP K200 D4 DMOVP K300 D8 DMOVP K400 D12 DMOVP K0 D16 DHSZ D0 K5 C251 M1152 PLS M0 M0 DPLSY D1152 K0 Y0 frequency pulse output number Please do not change the setting value in this comparison table during the of DHSZ command. When the program has been executed to END command, the specified data will be operated shown as the above example program. Therefore, DPLSY command should be executed after the of DHSZ command. DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-23
7 Application Commands API 50-99 API 56 SPD Speed Detection Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D Note: The usage of Operand S 1 : In ES and EP series models, operand S 1 only can be specified as X1~X2. In EH series models, operand S 1 only can be specified as ~X3. Operand D occupies 5 continuous devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (7 STEP) SPD Continuous - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1100. SPD command sampling one time flag Command Explanation : External pulse input : Pulse reveived time(ms) : Detection result : Specify the input of external pulse Pulse inputs of each series models Models ES series models (V5.7 and above) and EP series models EH series models Available inputs X1, X2 ~X3 Count the number of pulse received at the inputs specified by during the time specified by (unit is ms) and store te result in the register specified by. occupies 5 registers, +1, indicate the detection value of previous pulse, +3, +2 indicate the present accumulated count value of pulse and +4 indicates the remaining count time, the max. can be 32767ms. Measured pulse frequency: Models Max. measured frequency Pulse speed of each series models ES series models (V5.7 and above) and EP series models X1(30KHz), X2(10KHz) Total frequency is less than 30KHz EH series models /X1 (250KHz) X2/X3 (10KHz) When using this command in EH series models, the pulse frequency of external input ~X3 and the frequency of hardware high-speed counter are the same and both of them all can reach 250KHz. This command is mainly used to obtain a proportional value of rotation speed. The result and rotation speed are in proportion. The following equation can used to obtain the rotation speed of motor. 60( D0) N: Rotation speed 3 N= 10 ( rpm) The number of pulses per rotation of rotation nt n: equipment t: Detection time specified by (ms) If one of ~X3 is specified, the specified device can not be used as the pulse input of high-speed counter or external interrupt signal. 7-24 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 When SPD command has been executed and M1100 (SPD command sampling one time flag)=on, SPD command will execute sampling one time. SPD command will collect data one time when the movement of M1100 turning from Off to On, then stop. If desiring to continue the collection, be sure to turn M1100 Off and execute SPD command again. When X7=On, D2 will count the high-speed pulse input from X1. After 1,000ms, it will stop counting automatically and store the result in D0. After 1000ms counting completed, the content of D2 will be reset to 0. When X7 turns On again, D2 will recount. X7 SPD X1 K1000 D0 X7 X1 D2: current value D0: detection value D2: content value 1000ms 1000ms 1000 Footnote D4: content D4:remaining time (ms) value In ES series models (V5.7 and above), if X1 or X2 is used in SPD command, then the related high-speed counters or external interrupts I101, I201 can not be used. API 57 D PLSY Pulse Output Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D Note: For the usage range of operand S 1, S 2 and D, please refer to the command explanation for details. Refer to each model specification for usage range. In ES series models, PLSR command can be used twice but the output cannot be repeat. 16-bit command (7 STEPS) PLSY Continuous - - 32-bit command (13 STEPS) DPLSY Continuous - - Flag: M1010~M1345. Refer to the footnote. DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-25
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Command Explanation : Pulse output frequency : Pulse output number : Pulse output device (Please use the transistor output as output module) Models specified as the pulse output frequency Output frequency range of each series models Output frequency range ES series models EP series models EH series 1~10,000Hz 1~32,000Hz 1~200,000Hz specified as the pluse output number. 16-bit command: 1~32,767. 32-bit command: 2,147,483,647. Models Specified method of continuous pulses Numbers of continuous pulses of each series models ES series models and EP series models M1010(Y0) ON M1023(Y1) ON EH series models (TR models) Designated pulse output number is set to K0 If designated pulse output number is set to 0 (zero) in EH series models, it means that unlimit numbers of pulses will continuously output. M1010(Y0) or M1023(Y1) should be On when unlimt numbers of pulse continuously output. specified as the pulse output device. In EH series models, only Y0 and Y2 can be specified. In EP/ES series models, only Y0 and Y1 can be specified. When PLSY command has been executed, a specified quantity of pulses will be output through pulse output device at the specified pulse output frequency. When using PLSY command in progam, the outputs of PLSY command, API 58 PWM command and API 59 PLSR command cannot be the same. In EP/ES series models, after Y0 pulse output completed, M1029 will be turned On, after Y1 pulse output completed, M1030 will be turned On. When PLSY command is Off, M1029 or M1030 will be turned Off. In EH series models, Y0 and Y1 pulse output completed, M1029 will be turned On, after Y2, Y3 pulse output completed, M1030 will be turned On. When PLSY command is Off, M1029 or M1030 will be turned Off. The completed flag M1029, M1030 should be clear by user after the of the command has been completed. When command PLSY has been executed, Y start to output pulse. At this time, the output will not be affected if is changed. If desiring to change pulse output number, stop command PLSY, then change the pulse number. can be changed when command PLSY has been executed. It can change the effective time. is changed when the program is executed to the executed command PLSY. The ratio of Off TIME and On TIME of the pulse output is 1:1. 7-26 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 The actual output pulse numbers are stored in special registers D1336~D1339 when the program is executed to the command PLSY. Refer to the footnote for details. The special register D and M which are allowed to be changed during the of the command. Refer to the footnote for details. When =On, the pulse of 1KHz for 200 times is generated from output Y0, after the pulse has been completed, M1029=On trigger Y10=On. When =Off, pulse output Y0 immediately stop. When turns On again, the first pulse start to output. PLSY K1000 K200 Y0 M1029 Y100 0.5ms Output Y0 1 2 3 200 Footnote 1ms Flags description: M1010: In EH series MPU, when M1010= On, Y0, Y1 and Y2, Y3 will output pulse while END command is executed. When output starts, M1010 will automatically turn Off. In EP/ES series MPU, when M1010=On, Y0 can output limitless continuous pulses. When M1010=Off, the pulse output numbers of Y0 are decided by. M1023: In EP/ES series MPU, when M1023=On, Y1 can output limitless continuous pulses. When M1023=Off, the pulse output numbers of Y1 are decided by. M1029: In EH series MPU, M1029= On after Y0, Y1 pulse output complete. In EP/ES series MPU, M1029= On after Y0 pulse output complete. M1030: In EH series MPU, M1030= On after Y2, Y3 pulse output complete. In EP/ES series MPU, M1030= On after Y1 pulse output complete. M1078: In EP/ES series, Y0 pulse output stop. M1079: In EP/ES series, Y1 pulse output stop. M1258: In EH series MPU, (PWM command) Y0, Y1 pulse output signal exchange. M1259: In EH series MPU, (PWM command) Y2, Y3 pulse output signal exchange. M1334: In EH series MPU, CH0 pulse output stop. M1335: In EH series MPU, CH1 pulse output stop. M1336: In EH series MPU, CH0 pulse output indication flag. M1337: In EH series MPU, CH1 pulse output indication flag. M1338: In EH series MPU, CH0 offset pulse start flag. M1339: In EH series MPU, CH1 offset pulse start flag. M1340: In EH series MPU, the interrupt (I110) occur after CH0 pulse output complete. M1341: In EH series MPU, the interrupt (I120) occur after CH1 pulse output complete. M1342: In EH series MPU, the interrupt (I130) occur simultaneously when CH0 pulse transmit. M1343: In EH series MPU, the interrupt (I140) occur simultaneously when CH1 pulse transmit. M1344: In EH series MPU, CH0 compensation pulse start flag. M1345: In EH series MPU, CH1 compensation pulse start flag. DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-27
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Special registers description of EP series MPU: D1030: Present total pulse numbers of first output group Y0 (LOW WORD). D1031: Present total pulse numbers of first output group Y0 (HIGH WORD). D1032: Present total pulse numbers of second output group Y1 (LOW WORD). D1033: Present total pulse numbers of second output group Y1 (HIGH WORD). Special registers description of EH series MPU: D1220: The phase setting of the first output group Y0, Y1: determine by the last two bits of D1220, other bits are invalid. 1. K0: Y0 output 2. K1: Y0, Y1 AB phase output, A leads B 3. K2: Y0, Y1 AB phase output, B leads A 4. K3: Y1 output D1221: The phase setting of the second output group Y2, Y3: determine by the last two bits of D1221, other bits are invalid. 1. K0: Y2 output 2. K1: Y2, Y3 AB phase output, A leads B 3. K2: Y2, Y3 AB phase output, B leads A 4. K3: Y3 output D1328: CH0 offset pulse number (Low word) D1329: CH0 offset pulse number (High word) D1330: CH1 offset pulse number (Low word) D1331: CH1 offset pulse number (High word) D1332: CH0 remaining pulse number (Low word) D1333: CH0 remaining pulse number (High word) D1334: CH1 remaining pulse number (Low word) D1335: CH1 remaining pulse number (High word) D1336: Present total output pulse numbers of first output group (Y0, Y1) (LOW WORD). D1337: Present total output pulse numbers of first output group (Y0, Y1) (HIGH WORD). D1338: Present total output pulse numbers of second output group(y2,y3)(low WORD). D1339: Present total output pulse numbers of second output group(y2,y3)(high WORD). D1344: CH0 compensation pulse number (Low word) D1345: CH0 compensation pulse number (High word) D1346: CH1 compensation pulse number (Low word) D1347: CH1 compensation pulse number (High word) When several high-speed pulse output commands (PLSY, PWM, PLSR) use Y0 to output pulse in one program and simultaneously been executed in the same scanning cycle, PLC will perform the command which has fewest step numbers. The explanation of PLSY pulse output command and related devices of EH series MPU: Explanation of PLSY command Operand S1 S2 D Explanation Frequency setting Pulse quantity Output device 16-bit 0~32,767Hz 0~32,767 Range 32-bit 0~200KHz 0~2,147,483,647 Y0~Y3 Definition K0: No output Kn: Specified frequency output K0: Continuous pulse output Kn: Specified pulse output Refer to the setting of D1220, D1221 7-28 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Explanation of the related device of PLSY command (Special D) Data Device No. format Attribute Initial Content value The phase setting of the first output pulse D1220 16-bit R/W K0 group The phase setting of the second output D1221 16-bit R/W K0 pulse group D1328 Low word D1329 High word 32-bit R/W K0 The offset pulse number of the first pulse group D1330 Low word D1331 High word 32-bit R/W K0 The offset pulse number of the first pulse group D1332 Low word D1333 High word 32-bit R/W K0 The remaining pulse number of the first pulse group D1334 Low word D1335 High word 32-bit R/W K0 The remaining pulse number of the second pulse group D1336 Low word The current value of the first pulse group D1337 High word 32-bit R/W K0 (The accumulated value of pulse output numbers) D1338 Low word The current value of the second pulse D1339 High word 32-bit R/W K0 group (The accumulated value of pulse output numbers) D1341 Low word 32-bit R/W K200000 Max. output frequency D1342 High word D1344 Low word D1345 High word 32-bit R/W K0 The compensation pulse number of the first pulse group D1346 Low word D1347 High word 32-bit R/W K0 The compensation pulse number of the second pulse group Explanation of the related device of PLSY command (Special M) Device Related Attribute Content No. setting device M1010 R/W Two pulse output groups simultaneously M1029 R End indication flag of the first pulse group M1030 R End indication flag of the second pulse group M1334 R/W Pulse output stop of the first pulse group M1335 R/W Pulse output stop of the second pulse group M1336 R Output indication flag of the first pulse group M1337 R Output indication flag of the second pulse group M1338 R/W OFFSET start flag of the first pulse group D1328, D1329 M1339 R/W OFFSET start flag of the second pulse group D1330, D1331 M1340 R/W Interrupt occur after the first pulse group output I110 complete. M1341 R/W Interrupt occur after the first pulse group output complete. I120 M1342 R/W Interrupt occur after the first pulse group output complete. I130 M1343 R/W Interrupt occur after the first pulse group output complete. I140 M1344 R/W Compensation start flag of the first pulse group D1344, D1345 M1345 R/W Compensation start flag of the second pulse group D1346, D1347 M1347 R/W Auto interrupt reset flag of the first pulse group M1348 R/W Auto interrupt reset flag of the second pulse group DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-29
7 Application Commands API 50-99 API 58 PWM Pulse Width Modulation Output Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D Note: For the usage range of operand S 1, S 2 and D, please refer to the command explanation. The content value of operand S 1 should be smaller than the content value of S 2. Refer to each model specification for usage range. In ES / EP series models, command PWM only can be used ONCE in program. 16-bit command (7 STEPS) PWM Continuous - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1010~M1337. Refer to the footnote. Command Explanation : Pulse output width : Pulse output cycle : Pulse output device (Please use transistor output as the output module) is specified as pulse output width as t:0~32,767ms. is specified as pulse output cycle as T:1~32,767ms,. is specified as pulse output device. In EH series MPU, can be specified as Y0, Y2. In EP/ES series models, can be specified as Y1. Modulated pulse output of each series models Models ES/EX series models and EP series models EH series models PWM output Y1 Y0, Y2 PWM command can be used TWICE in the program of EH series models. PWM command can be used ONCE in the program of EP/ES series models. The output cannot be the same as the output of API 57 PLSY, API 59 PLSR command while PWM command is used in program. When PWM command has been executed, the pulse output width and pulse output cycle is output through pulse output device. If >, an operation error will occur, M1067 =On. When is 0, there is no pulse output from the pulse output device. When =, the pulse output device will be always On., can be changed during the of PWM command. When =On, Y1 output the following pulse. When =Off, output Y1 will also turn Off. PWM K1000 K200 Y1 t=1000ms Output Y1 T=2000ms 7-30 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Footnote Flags description: M1010: In EH series MPU, when M1010= On, Y0, Y1 and Y2, Y3 will output pulse while END command is executed. When output starts, M1010 will automatically turn Off. M1067: In EH series MPU, when operand is error, M1067=On. M1070: In EP/ES series MPU, When PWM command output Y1, the pulse unit will exchange. When M1070=On, the pulse unit is 100µs, when M1070=Off, the pulse unit is 1ms. In EH series MPU, when the first pulse output group of PWM command output Y0, the pulse unit will exchange. When M1070=On, the pulse unit is 100µs, when M1070=Off, the pulse unit is 1ms. M1071: In EH series MPU, when the first pulse output group of PWM command output Y2, the pulse unit will exchange. When M1071=On, the pulse unit is 100µs, when M1071=Off, the pulse unit is 1ms. M1258: In EH series MPU, (PWM command) Y0, Y1 pulse output signal exchange. M1259: In EH series MPU, (PWM command) Y2, Y3 pulse output signal exchange. M1334: In EH series MPU, CH0 pulse output stop. M1335: In EH series MPU, CH1 pulse output stop. M1336: In EH series MPU, CH0 pulse output indication flag. M1337: In EH series MPU, CH1 pulse output indication flag. When several high-speed pulse output commands (PLSY, PWM, PLSR) use Y0 to output pulse in one program and simultaneously been executed in the same scanning cycle, PLC will perform the command which has fewest step numbers. Functions of EH series MPU Explanation of PWM command and the related device of EH series models. Device Data Related setting Attribute No. Format device M1010 R/W Two pulse output groups simultaneously M1070 R/W Y0 and Y1 PWM pulse time unit exchange M1071 R/W Y2 and Y3 PWM pulse time unit exchange M1258 R/W Y0 and Y1 PWM pulse output signal exchange M1259 R/W Y2 and Y3 PWM pulse output signal exchange M1334 R/W Pulse output stop of the first pulse group M1335 R/W Pulse output stop of the second pulse group M1336 R Output indication flag of the first pulse group M1344 R/W Output indication flag of the second pulse group D1344, D1345 API 59 D PLSR Pulse Wave Output with Acceleration/Deceleration Speed Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 S 3 D Note: For the usage range of operand S1, S2 and D, please refer to the command explanation. Refer to each model specification for usage range. In ES series models, PLSR command can be used TWICE in program but the output can not be the same. 16-bit command (9 STEPS) PLSR Continuous - - 32-bit command (17 STEPS) DPLSR Continuous - - Flag: M1029, M1030. Execution Completed flag. DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-31
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Command Explanation : Maximum speed (HZ) : Content of the pulse output quantity (PLS) : Acceleration/Deceleration time (ms) : Pulse output device (Please use transistor output as output module) : the maximum frequency (Hz) of output pulse. Settings: In 16-bit command: 10 to 32,767 Hz. In 32-bit command: 10 to 200,000 Hz. The maximum speed is deemed to be the multiples of 10, if not, the first unit will be discarded automatically. 1/10 of the maximum speed is the one time variation of the accel/decel speed. Note that the condition meets the acceleration requirement of the step motor and would not result in the step motor crash.. : Content of the pulse output quantity (PLS). Settings: In 16-bit command: 110~32,767 (PLS). In 32-bit command: 110~2,147,483,647(PLS). If the setting is below 110, the pulse cannot output normally. : Acceleration/Deceleration time (ms). Settings: below 5,000ms. The accel time and the decel time have to be the same and cannot be set without one another. 1. The accel/decel time has to be over 10 times the maximum scan time (contents of D1012). If the setting is below 10 times, the slope of the accel/decel speed will be inaccurate. 2. Minimum setting of the accel/decel time could be obtained from the following equation. 90000 If the setting is smaller than the result of the above-mentioned equation, the acceleration/deceleration time will be greater, and if the setting is smaller than the 9000/, the result value of 9000/ will be treated as its regular setting. 3. Maximum setting of the accel/decel time could be obtained from the following equation. 818 4. Number of the accel/decel speed variation steps is fixed to be 10. If the input acceleration/deceleration time is greater than the maximum setting, the maximum setting will be treated as its regular setting. If the setting is smaller than the minimum setting, the minimum setting will be treated as its regular setting. 7-32 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 PLSR command is the pulse output command with the accel/decel speed function. The acceleration is conducted when the pulse wave goes from the static status to reaching its targeted speed, and getting faster when the targeted speed is to be reached. The pulse wave will stop its output once the targeted distance is reached. When PLSR command has been executed, after set the maximum frequency, a quantity of total pulse numbers and accel/decel time, then output them through pulse output device maximum frequency. The output frequency is first raised up in 1/10 of the /10 and the time of each output frequency is fixed as 1/9 of. Even user change, or when PLSR command has been executed, the output will not be affected. After the pulse numbers of the first output pulse group (Y0, Y1) set by has been completely output, M1029=On. After the pulse numbers of the second output pulse group (Y0, Y1) set by has been completely output,, M1030=On. When the command PLSR is activated again, M1029 or M1030 will turn to 0, then turn to 1 after the PLSR command has been completed. The output pulse of the first output group (Y0, Y1) and the cueent value of he second output group (Y2, Y3) are stored in the special regisers D1336~D1339. During the acceleration of each step, the pulse numbers (each frequency x time) may not all be integer, but the output operation of PLC is conducted in whole integer number. Therefore, the time of each interval may not be the same and has some deviation. The offset is determined by the frequency value and the discarding decimal point value. In order to ensure the output pulse numbers are correct, PLC will fill the insufficiency pulse numbers to the last interval. When =On, the maximum frequency of command PLSR is 1,000Hz. The quantity of total pulse numbers D10, accel/decel time is 3,000ms and pulses output from output Y0. The pulses are output and the output frequency is 1,000/10 Hz every time. The time of output pulse of each frequency is fixed as 3,000/9. When X10 is OFF, output will be interrupted, and when turned ON again, counting of the pulse will be counted from 0. PLSR K1000 D10 K3000 Y0 DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-33
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Outputs: Y0 or Y2 Pulse speed(hz) Footnote Functions of EH series MPU The time interval of the one time pulse output is 1/9 of Accel time below 5000ms Targeted speed: 10~200,000Hz 1010 9 9 8 8 7 Output pulses7 6 6 10-step 10-step 5 5 variations variations 4 4 3 3 16-bit command:110~32,767pls 2 2 32-bit command:110~2,147,483,647pls 1 1 Decel time below 5000ms The max. speed of the one time speed variation is 1/10 of Time(Sec) The output cannot be the same as the output of API 57 PLSY, API 58 PWM command while PLSR command is used in program. When several high-speed pulse output commands (PLSY, PWM, PLSR) use Y0 to output pulse in one program and simultaneously been executed in the same scanning cycle, PLC will perform the command which has fewest step numbers. Explanation of the command and related devices in EH series MPU PLSR K1000 D10 K3000 Y0 The speed range for the pulse of this command is 10~200,000Hz. And if the settings for the high speed and the accel/decel time exceed this range, use the allowable setting within this range for operation. Command Explanation Operand S1 S2 S3 D Explanation Max. frequency Total pulse quantity Accel/Decel Time Output device 16-bit 10~32,767Hz 110~32,767 Range 32-bit 10~200KHz 110~2,147,483,647 1~5000ms Y0~Y3 Definition Frequency F K0: No output Kn: Specified frequency output K0: Continuous pulse output Kn: Specified pulse output Flag: M1067 M1068 Refer to the setting of D1220, D1221 Maximum speed: 10~200,000Hz Total output pulses F0 Start frequency 16-bit command: 110~32,767PLS 16-bit command: 110~2,147,483,647PLS Accel time 1~5000ms Decel time 1~5000ms 7-34 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Explanation of the related device of PLSR command (Special D) Device No. Data Initial forma Attribute value t Content D1220 16-bit R/W K0 The phase setting of the first output pulse group D1221 16-bit R/W K0 The phase setting of the second output pulse group D1336 Low word The current value of the first pulse 32-bit R/W K0 group (The accumulated value of D1337 High word pulse output numbers) D1338 Low word The current value of the second 32-bit R/W K0 pulse group (The accumulated value D1339 High word of pulse output numbers) D1340 16-bit R/W K200 Start frequency D1341 Low word 32-bit D1342 High word R/W K200000 Max. output frequency Explanation of the related device of PLSR command (Special M) Device Attribute No. Content M1010 R/W Two pulse output groups simultaneously M1029 R End indication flag of the first pulse group M1030 R End indication flag of the second pulse group M1334 R/W Pulse output stop of the first pulse group M1335 R/W Pulse output stop of the second pulse group M1336 R Output indication flag of the first pulse group M1337 R Output indication flag of the second pulse group M1067 R/W error flag M1068 R Execution error latch D1068 Related setting device In EH series models, if the acceleration/deceleration time cannot reach the maximum acceleration frequency, the acceleration/deceleration time and maximum frequency will be adjusted automatically. The related functions are listed as follows: Step 1: First, use the following equations to obtain the result of (1), (2) and (3) to adjust acceleration time. S F 0 = D1340 if F 0 + 60 > S1 or F 0 = 0 F 1 0 =..(1) 60 ( 30 S2 ) S3 <..(2) ( 30 F0 + 29 S1) 600000 S3..(3) F0 Step 2: Calculates the interval of the acceleration of each step, F G by using the following equation. The interval of each step are the same: F G =..(4) 59 S 1 DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-35
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Step 3: Calculates the max. output pulse numbers of acceleration/ deceleration time: P = S 2 G 2 (5) 2 Step 4: Set the following variables. Fi: The frequency of each acceleration/deceleration interval, i = 1~59, F 1 = F 0 + F G, F i = Fi 1 + FG (6) T G : The acceleration/deceleration time of each acceleration/deceleration S 3 interval T G = (7) 59 Step 5: Entering the result of (5), (6), (7) to the following equation can get the result as 59 follows: F i TG PG.. (8) i= 0 Step 6: In the equation of (8), if the value of the calculation result has been greater than the P G value before item 59 has been calculated. In EH series models, the commands that are related to acceleration and deceleration all can use the above equations. The parameters of command PLSR must be input before the command has been executed. All acceleration and deceleration commands are with brake function. When the PLC acceleration is executed but the switch contact is Off suddenly, the brake function is activated and PLC will decelerate in the same slope of acceleration speed. Frequency F S1 Origin acceleration path Brake path F 0 Time T API 60 IST Manual/Auto Control Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D 1 D 2 Note: Operand S will occupy 8 continuous devices. The usage range of operand D 1 and D 2 is S20~S899 and D 2 >D 1. IST command only can be used one time in program. Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (7 STEPS) IST Continuous - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1040~M1047. Refer to following for detail. 7-36 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Command Explanation 1 : The starting input number of the designated operation mode. : The smallest number for the designated-status step point under the auto mode. : The greatest number for the designated-status step point under the auto mode. The IST is a convenient command made specifically for the initial state of the step ladder control procedure to accommodate the special auxiliary relay to the convenient auto control command. M1000 IST X10 S20 S60 X10: Individual operation (Manual operation) X11: Zero point return X12: Step operation X13: One cycle operation X14: Continuous operation X15: Zero point return start switch X16: Start switch X17: Stop switch When the IST command is executed, the following special auxiliary relay will switch automatically. M1040: Movement inhibited S0: Manual operation/initial state step point M1041: Movement start S1: Zero point return/initial state step point M1042: Status pulse S2: Auto operation/initial state step point M1047: STL monitor enable When IST command is used, S10~S19 are for zero point return operation and the step point of this state can t be used as general step point. However, when using S0~S9 step points, S0 initiates manual operation, S1 initiates zero point return operation and S2 initiates auto operation. Thus, there should be three circuits of these three initial state step points first written in program. When switching to S1 (zero point return mode), zero point return won t have any actions once one of S10~S19 is On. When switching to S2 (auto operation mode), auto operation won t have any actions 2 once one of between to is On or M1043=On : the Robot arm control (use IST command): Motion request: In the example, two kinds of balls (big and small) are separated and moved to different boxes. Distribute the control panel for the control. Motion of the Robot arm: lower robot arm, collect balls, raise robot arm, shift to right, lower robot arm, release balls, raise robot arm, shift to left to finish motion in order. I/O Device: Right-limit X2 Right-limit X3 Left-limit X1 (big balls) (small balls) Y0 Upper-limit X4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Upper-limit X5 Big/small Big Small sensor DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-37
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Control panel Collect balls X20 Release balls X21 Power start Power stop Raise Shift robot arm to right X22 Lower robot arm X23 X24 Shift to left X25 Zero return X15 Zero return X11 Manual operation X10 Step X12 Auto start X16 Auto stop X17 One cycle operation X13 Continuous operation X14 Big/small sensor. The left-limit of the robot arm X1, the right-limit X2 (big balls), the right-limit X3 (small balls), the upper-limit X4, and the lower-limit X5. Raise robot arm Y0, lower robot arm Y1, shift to right Y2, shift to left Y3, and collect balls Y4. START circuit: M1000 X1 Y4 M1044 IST X10 S20 S80 Manual operation mode: S0 X20 S X21 X22 Y1 X23 Y0 X24 X4 Y3 X25 X4 Y2 SET RST Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y4 Collect balls Raise robot arm Release balls Lower robot arm Shift to right Shift to left Condition interlock Condition interlock Raise robot arm to the upper-limit (X4 is ON) Zero point return mode: SFC figure: S1 X15 S10 RST Y4 Release balls RST Y1 Stop lowering robot arm X4 Y0 Raise robot arm to the upper-limit (X4 is ON) S11 RST Y2 Stop shifting to right X1 Y3 Shift to left and shift to the left-limit (X1 is On) S12 SET M1043 Start zero return completed flag RST S12 Zero return operation completed 7-38 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Ladder Diagram: S1 X15 S S10 S SET RST S10 Y4 Enter zero return operation mode Release balls RST Y1 Stop lowering robot arm S11 S X4 Y0 SET RST S11 Y2 Raise robot arm to the upper-limit (X4 is ON) Stop shifting to right S12 S X1 Y3 SET SET S12 M1043 Shift to left and shift to the left-limit (X1 is On) Start zero return completed flag RST S12 Zero return operation completed Auto operation (step/one-cycle/continuous operation modes): SFC figure: S2 M1041 M1044 S20 Y1 X5 S30 SET Y4 X5 S40 SET Y4 T0 TMR T0 K30 T1 TMR T1 K30 S31 Y0 S41 Y0 X4 S32 X2 Y2 X4 S42 X3 Y2 X2 X3 X5 S50 S60 Y1 RST Y4 T2 S70 X4 S80 X1 S2 X1 TMR T2 K30 Y0 Y3 DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-39
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Ladder Diagram: S2 M1041 M1044 S S20 S S30 S X5 X5 SET Y1 SET SET SET S20 S30 S40 Y4 Enter auto operation mode Lower robot arm Collect balls S31 S S32 S S40 S T0 X4 X2 X2 TMR SET Y0 SET Y2 SET SET T0 S31 S32 S50 Y4 K30 Raise robot arm to the upper-limit (X4 is ON) Shift to right Collect balls S41 S S42 S S50 S S60 S T1 X4 X3 X3 X5 TMR SET Y0 SET Y2 SET Y1 SET RST T1 S41 S42 S50 S60 Y4 K30 Raise robot arm to the upper-limit (X4 is ON) Shift to right Lower robot arm Release balls S70 S S80 S T2 X4 X1 X1 TMR SET Y0 SET Y3 S2 T2 S70 S80 K30 Raise robot arm to the upper-limit (X4 is ON) Shift to left and shift to the left-limit (X1 is On) RET END 7-40 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Footnote Flag explanation: M1040: step point movement inhibited. When M1040=ON, all movements of the step point are inhibited. 1. Manual operation mode: M1040 keeps being ON. 2. Zero point return mode/one cycle operation mode: During the time of pressing STOP button and pressing START button again, M1040 will keep being ON. 3. Step operation mode: M1040 keeps being ON, and will only be OFF when the START button is pressed. 4. Continuous operation mode: When PLC goes from STOP RUN, M1040 keeps being ON, and will be OFF when the START button is pressed. M1041: Step point movement start: the special auxiliary relay that reflects the movement of the primary step point (S2) to the next step point. 1. Manual operation mode/zero point return mode: M1041 keeps being OFF. 2. Step operation mode/one cycle operation mode: M1041 will only be OFF when the START button is pressed. 3. Continuous operation mode: Keeps being ON when the START button is pressed, and keeps being OFF when the STOP button is pressed. M1042: START pulse: Only one pulse will be sent out when the button is pressed. M1043: Zero point return complete: Once M1043 =ON is driven, it means that the RESET motion has been executed. M1044: Conditions of the origin: Under the continuous operation mode, conditions of the origin, M1044, have to be driven to ON to execute the motion of initial step point (S2) moving to the next step point. M1045: All output reset inhibit. If executing conditions: A. from manual control S0 to zero point return S1 B. from auto operation S2 to manual operation S0 C. from auto operation S2 to zero point return S1 1. When M1045=Off and one of S of D1~D2 is ON, step point of SET Y output and actions will be cleared to Off. 2. When M1045 =On, SET Y output will be reserved and step point during action will be cleared to Off. 3. If executing from zero point return S1 to manual operation S0, no matter M1045=On or M1045=Off, SET Y output will be reserved and step point action will be cleared to Off. M1046: Setting STL state to On: If one of step point S is On, M1046=On. After M1047 forces to be On, M1046 will be On once one of S is On. Besides, 8 points numbers before S is on will be recorded in D1040~D1047. M1047: STL monitor enabled. When IST command starts executing, M1047 will be forced to be On and it will be forced to On for each scan time once IST command is still On. This flag is used to monitor all S. D1040~D1047: ON state number 1-8 of step point S. DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-41
7 Application Commands API 50-99 API 61 D SER P Search a Data Stack Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D N Note: If operand S 2 uses with device F, it is only available in 16-bit command. Operand D occupies 5 continuous devices. The usage of operand n: n=1~256 (16-bit command), n=1~128 (32-bit command) Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (9 STEPS) Continuous SER - 32-bit command (17 STEPS) DSER Continuous - Flag: None - - Command Explanation : Starting device of data stack for multiple devices comparison : Value data for comparison : Starting device for storing compared result : Data stack length for comparison specify the numbers of compared registers and specify the compared numbers. The specified data is compared against the data specified by and the compared result is stored in several registers specified by. When using 32-bit command to designate registers,,, and specify 32-bit register. When =On, the data stack consist of D10~D19 are compared against D0 and the result is stored in D50~D54. If the equal value does not exist, the content of D50~D52 will all be 0. The data is compared in algebra formate. (-10<2) The largest value of all compared data will be record in D53 and the samllest value of all compared data will be record in D54. When the numbers of largest value and smallest are more than one, only the numbers of largest value will be recorded. SER D10 D0 D50 K10 n Content value Compared data Data number Result D10 88 0 D11 100 1 Equal D12 110 2 D13 150 3 D14 100 D0=K100 4 Equal D15 300 5 D16 100 6 Equal D17 5 7 Smallest D18 100 8 Equal D19 500 9 Largest 7-42 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Content value Explanation D50 4 The total data numbers of equal value D51 1 The number of the first equal value D52 8 The number of the last equal value D53 7 The number of the smallest value D54 9 The number of the largest value API Applicable models 62 D ABSD Absolute Drum Sequencer ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D n Note: When operand S 1 is specified as KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, K4 should be specified in 16-bit command and K8 should be specified in 32-bit command. The usage range of n: n=1~64 Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (9 STEPS) ABSD Continuous - 32-bit command (17 STEPS) DABSD Continuous - Flag: None - - Command Explanation : Starting device of the compared data table : Number of counter : Starting number of compared result : Groups of multi-step comparison The ABSD command is a multi-step comparison command and usually used in absolute cam control. of DABSD command can specify high-speed counter. However, when the current value of high-speed counter is compared against the setting value, the result can not output immediately because it is influenced by the scan time. If immediate output is desired, please use the DHSZ command, the specific comparison command for high-speed counter. Before executing the ABSD command, use MOV command to write each setting value into D100~D107 in advance. The content of the even number D is the lower-limit value and the content of the odd number D is the upper-limt value. When =On, the current value of counter C10 is compared against the upper- and lower-limit value of D100~D107 four groups. The compared result is showed in M10~M13. When X10=Off, the origin On/Off state of M10~M13 will not be changed. X10 ABSD D100 C10 M10 K4 C10 X11 RST C10 X11 CNT C10 K400 DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-43
7 Application Commands API 50-99 M10~ M13 will be On when the current value of C10 is equal to or higher than the lower-limit value and equal to or lower than the upper-limit value. Lower-limit value Upper-limit value Current value of C10 Output D100= 40 D101=100 50 C10 100 M10=On D102=120 D103=210 120 C10 210 M11=On D104=140 D105= 170 140 C10 170 M12=On D106=150 D107=390 150 C10 390 M13=On When the lower-limit value is higher than the upper-limit value, if the current value of C10 is higher than the lower-limit value and lower than the upper-limit value (C10>140), M12=On. Lower-limit value Upper-limit value Current value of C10 Output D100= 40 D101=100 50 C10 100 M10=On D102=120 D103=210 120 C10 210 M11=On D104=140 D105= 60 60 C10 140 M12=Off D106=150 D107=390 150 C10 390 M13=On M0 M1 40 100 120 210 M2 M3 60 140 150 390 0 200 400 API 63 INCD Increment Drum Sequencer Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D N Note: When operand S 1 is specified as KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, K4 should be specified. In 16-bit command, operand S 2 should be C0~C198 and will occupy 2 continuous counters. The usage range of operand n: n=1~64 Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command ( 9 STEPS) INCD Continuous - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1029 completed flag 7-44 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Command Explanation : Starting device of the compared data table : Number of counter : Starting number of compared result : Groups of multi-step comparison The INCD command is a multi-step comparison command and usually used in relative cam control. The current value of is compared against the setting value of. Once the current value is equal to the setting value, the current value of will be reset to 0 and be compared again. The return times will be stored in +1. When the comparison of groups data has been completed, the completed falg M1029 will On one scan cycle. Before executing the INCD command, use MOV command to write each setting value into D100~D104 in advance. D100=15,,D101=30, D102=10, D103=40, D104=25. The current value of counter C10 is compared against the setting value of D100~D104. Once the current value is equal to the setting value, the current value of C10 will be reset to 0 and be compared again. The return times will be stored in C11. When the content of C11 increase 1, M10~M14 will also change in response. Please refer to the following timing diagram. When the comparison of 5 groups data has been completed, the completed falg M1029 will On one scan cycle. When turns from On to Off, C10 and C11 will all bereset to 0 and M10~M14 all turn Off. When turns On again, this command will be executed again from the beginning. M1013 CNT C10 K100 INCD D100 C10 M10 K5 40 30 25 C10 15 10 15 15 Current value 4 C11 3 2 Current value 0 1 0 1 0 1 30 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M1029 DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-45
7 Application Commands API 50-99 API 64 TTMR Teaching Timer Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F D n Note: Operand D will occupy 2 continuous devices. The usage range of operand n: n=0~2 Refer to each model specification for usage range. It only can use TTMR command eight times in program. 16-bit command (5 STEPS) TTMR Continuous - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: None Command Explanation 1 : Device number for storing the On duration of the button switch : Multiple setting The On duration of external button switch is measured and stored in the number of +1, the measured unit is 100ms periods. The content of +1 in seconds is multiplied by and stored in. When multiple setting n=0, the measured unit of is in seconds. When n=1, the measured unit of is 100ms periods (is multiplied by 10). When n=2, the measured unit of is 10ms periods (is multiplied by 100). The time that the button switch is pushed (On duration of ) will be stored in D1, n is used to specify the multiple of the time and the total bit time is stored in D0. Then the button switch can be used to adjust the setting value of timer. When turns Off, the content of D1 will be reset to 0 but the content of D0 is unchanged. TTMR D0 K0 D1 D0 D1 D0 T T pushed time (sec) pushed time (sec) If On duration of is T seconds, the relation between D0, D1 and n are shown as the table below. n D0 D1(unit: 100 ms) K0 (unit: s) 1 T D1=D0 10 K1 (unit: 100 ms) 10 T D1=D0 K2 (unit: 10 ms) 100 T D1=D0/10 7-46 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 2 Using TTMR command to write 10 groups setting time. Write the setting value into D100~D109 in advance. The measured unit of the following timers T0~T9 is 0.1 second and the measured unit of the alternate is 1 second. Connect one bit digital switch to ~X3 and use BIN command to convert the setting value of digital switch to BIN value and store in E. The On duration (in sec) of X10 is stored in D100. M0 is the pulse of one time scan cycle generated when the alternate timer button is released. Use the setting number of digital switch as the pointers of index register, and then transmit the content of D100 to D200E (D200~D209). M10 TMR T0 D100 M11 TMR T1 D101 M19 M1000 X10 X10 M0 TMR T9 D109 BIN K1 E TTMR D200 K0 PLF M0 MOV D100 D200E Footnote For EP series models, it can only use TTMR command eight times in program. If used in subroutine or interrupt subroutine, it only can use ONCE. For EH series models, the maximum TTMR command groups it can only use at the same time is eight groups. DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-47
7 Application Commands API 50-99 API 65 STMR Special Timer Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S M D Note: The operand S: EP series models can use T0~T191, EH series models can use T0~T199 The usage range of operand m: m=1~32767 Operand D occupies 4 continuous devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (7 STEP) STMR Continuous - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: None Command Explanation : Number of timer : Setting value of timer, unit is 100ms : Starting device of output device STMR command is a command which provides Off-delay, one shot and flash loop. The number of timer specified by STMR command can not be reapeat. When X10=On, the settting value of the timer T0 specified by STMR command is 5 seconds. Y0 is the contact of Off-delay: When X10 turns from Off to On, Y0= On. When X10 turns On to Off and delay 5 seconds, Y0=Off. When X10 turns from On to Off, Y1= On output one time for 5 seconds. When X10 turns from Off to On, Y2=On output one time for 5 seconds. When X10 turns from Off to On, Y3= On after delay 5 seconds. When X10 turns from On to Off, Y3=Off after delay 5 seconds. X10 STMR T0 K50 Y0 X10 Y0 5 sec 5 sec Y1 5 sec 5 sec Y2 5 sec Y3 5 sec 7-48 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Add a b contact of Y3 after the drive contact X10, ans then Y1, Y2 can be used as the output of flash loop. When X10 turns Off, Y0, Y1 and Y3 will be Off and the content of T10 will be reset to 0. X10 Y3 STMR T10 K50 Y0 X10 Y1 Y2 5 sec 5 sec API Applicable models ALT ON/OFF Alternate ES EP EH 66 P Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse command (ALTP). 16-bit command (3 STEP) ALT Continuous ALTP Pulse 32-bit command - - - - Flag: None Command Explanation : Dentisation device This command is usually pulse command (ALTP). 1 When turns from Off to On for the first time, Y0=ON. When turns from Off to On for the second time, Y0=OFF. ALTP Y0 Y0 DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-49
7 Application Commands API 50-99 2 3 The ALT command is a command, which use one switch to control start and stop mode. In the beginning, M0=Off, so Y0=On, Y1=Off. When X10 is activated for the first time, M0=ON, Y1=ON and Y0=OFF. When X10 is activated for the second time, M0=OFF, Y0=ON, Y1=OFF. X10 ALT M0 M0 Y0 M0 Y1 Output Y will flash. When X10= On, T0 will generate a pulse every two seconds and output Y0 will be switching between On and Off mode depending on the pulse of T0. X10 T0 TMR T0 K20 T0 ALTP Y0 API 67 RAMP Ramp Signal Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D N Note: The usage range of operand n: n=1~32767 Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command ( 9 STEPS) RAMP Continuous - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1026 Starting mode (Please refer to the footnote) M1029 Execution completed flag Command Explanation : Start setting of ramp signal : End setting of ramp signal : Current value of ramp signal : Scan times This command is used to get a ramp signal. A ramp signal has a strong connection with linear and scan time. Therefore, must fix the scan time before using this RAMP command. Write the start setting value of ramp signal to D10 and end setting value of ramp signal to D11 in advance. When is On, the setting value is forwarding from D10 to D11 (setting value in D10 will be increased) and the proceeding time (n= 100 times scans) is stored in D12. 7-50 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 The scan time can be fixed if set M1039=On in the program previously. Then, using MOV command to write the setting value of the fixed scan time into special register D1039. Take the above program as an example, if the setting value is 30ms and n=k100, the time between D10 and D11 is 3 second (D3: 30ms 100). During the of this command, when starting signal X10 turns Off, this command will stop the operation. When X10 turns On again, the content value of D12 will be reset to 0(zero) and calculated again. After the of this command has been completed, M1029= On and the content value of D12 will be reset to the setting value of D10. Using this command with analog signal output can execute the operation of Sort Start/Stop. If start PLC from STOP to RUN when X10= On, please reset the content value of D12 to 0(zero) in the beginning of the program. (If D12 is a latched area.) X10 RAMP D10 D11 D12 K100 D12 D11 D10 D12 D11 D10 Footnote?times scans?times scans D10<D11 D10> D11 The scan times is stored in D13 On/Off condition of starting mode flag M1026 and the change of the content value in D12 are shown below: M1026=ON M1026=OFF X10 Starting signal X10 Starting signal D11 D11 D10 D12 D10 D12 M1029 M1029 DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-51
7 Application Commands API 50-99 API 69 SORT Data Sort Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S m 1 m 2 D n Note: The usage range of operand m 1 : m 1 =1~32 The usage range of operand m 2 : m 2 =1~6 The usage range of operand n: n=1~ m2 Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command ( 11 STEPS) SORT Continuous - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1029 Execution completed flag Command Explanation : Starting device of source data table : Sort data grops : Column numbers of each data : Starting device for storing sort data : Reference value of sort data The resulting sorted data is stored in the m1 m2 registers counted from the starting device specified by. Therefore, if the device and specify the same register, the resulting sorted data will be the same as the content of source device. An ideal most right number of the head number specified by is 0. The data sort will be completed after the SORT command being processed m1 times. Once the SORT command has been completed, the Flag M1029= On. When is On, it starts to sort specified data. After the data sort is completed, M1029= On. During the of the SORT command, do not change the sort data. If user want to re-sort the data, be sure to turn from Off to On again. SORT D0 K5 K5 D50 D100 7-52 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 table of data sort Data numbers: m 2 Row Column Data Column 1 2 3 4 5 Students No. Chinese English Mathematics Physis and Chemistry 1 (D0)1 (D5)90 (D10)75 (D15)66 (D20)79 Data numbers: m1 2 (D1)2 (D6)55 (D11)65 (D16)54 (D21)63 3 (D2)3 (D7)80 (D12)98 (D17)89 (D22)90 4 (D3)4 (D8)70 (D13)60 (D18)99 (D23)50 5 (D4)5 (D9)95 (D14)79 (D19)75 (D24)69 Sort data table when D100=K3. Row Column Data numbers: m 2 Data Column 1 2 3 4 5 Students No. Chinese English Mathematics Physis and Chemistry 1 (D50)4 (D55)70 (D60)60 (D65)99 (D70)50 Data numbers: m1 2 (D51)2 (D56)55 (D61)65 (D66)54 (D71)63 3 (D52)1 (D57)90 (D62)75 (D67)66 (D72)79 4 (D53)5 (D58)95 (D63)79 (D68)75 (D73)69 5 (D54)3 (D59)80 (D64)98 (D69)89 (D74)90 Sort data table when D100=K5. Data numbers: m 2 Row Column Data Column 1 2 3 4 5 Students No. Chinese English Mathematics Physis and Chemistry 1 (D50)4 (D55)70 (D60)60 (D65)99 (D70)50 Data numbers: m1 2 (D51)2 (D56)55 (D61)65 (D66)54 (D71)63 3 (D52)5 (D57)95 (D62)79 (D67)75 (D72)69 4 (D53)1 (D58)90 (D63)75 (D68)66 (D73)79 5 (D54)3 (D59)80 (D64)98 (D69)89 (D74)90 DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-53
7 Application Commands API 50-99 API 70 D TKY 10-Key Keyboard Input Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D 1 D 2 Note: Operand S occupies 10 continuous devices Operand D 2 occupies 10 continuous devices Refer to following for detail. 16-bit command (7 STEPS) TKY Continuous - 32-bit command (13 STEPS) DTKY Continuous - Flag: None - - Command Explanation : Head input device : Destination device for storing key input value : Key input signal This command can specify ten external input devices from and these ten external input devices is identified as decimal value of 0 to 9. These ten external input devices are connected to ten keys respectively. When one of the ten keys is pressed, the value of decimal numbers from 0 to 9,999 (max. 4 digits in 16-bit command) or from 0 to 99,999,999 (max. 8 digits in 32-bit command) can be inputted and stored in destination device. The device is used to store the condition of that key has been pressed. Using this command can specify ten input terminals from to connect to ten keys which number is from 0 to 9. When X20=On, the command is executed and it will store the BIN value which is inputted by keys into D0 and M10~M19 is used to store the condition of that key has been pressed. X20 TKY D0 M10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0V +24V S/S X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 X11 PLC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 number key BCD value one digit number BCD code overflow 10 3 10 2 10 1 10 0 BCD value BIN value D0 7-54 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 As the time chart shown below, the four keys are connected to X5, X3,, X1 of number keyboard. After pressing the four keys in that order of 1234 and the number 5,301 will be entered into D0. The max. number which can be entered in D0 is 9,999 i.e. 4 digits. If the entered number exceeds the above allowable range, the highest digits will overflow. After X2 is pressed, M12=On untill other keys are pressed. The situation of other press keys are the same. When any key of ~X11 is pressed, one device of M10~M19 will be On. If any key is pressed, M20=On. When the drive contact X20 turns Off, the previous value do not change but M10~M20 all turns Off. l X1 m X3 k X5 j M10 M11 M13 M15 Key output signal M20 j k l m DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-55
7 Application Commands API 50-99 API 71 D HKY 16-Key Keyboard Input Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D 1 D 2 D 3 Note: Operand S occupies 4 continuous devices Operand D 1 occupies 4 continuous devices Operand D3 occupies 8 continuous devices Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (9 STEPS) HKY Continuous - - 32-bit command (17 STEPS) DHKY Continuous - - Flag: M1029 completed flag M1167 HKY input mode switch Please refer to the footnote Command Explanation : Head scan input device : Head scan output device : Destination device for storing key input value : Key input signal This command can create a 16-key keyboard which is a multiplex of 4 continuous external input devices from and 4 continuous external output devices from by matrix scan. The key input value will be stored in and is used to store the condition of that key has been pressed. When this command is executed every time, the completed flag M1029 will be On for the duration of that key pressed (one scan cycle). If two or more keys are pressed at the same time, only the key activated first is effective. When HKY command is used in 16-bit command, can store numbers from 0 to 9,999 (max. 4 digits). When DHKY command is used in 32-bit command, can store numbers from 0 to 99,999,999 (max. 8 digits). If the entered number exceeds the above allowable range, the highest digits will overflow. Using this command to create a 16-key keyboard which is a multiplex of 4 continuous external input devices X10~X13 and 4 continuous external output devices Y10~Y13. When X4=On, the command is executed and it will store the BIN value which is inputted by keys into D0 and M0~M7 is used to store the condition of that key has been pressed. X4 HKY X10 Y10 D0 M0 7-56 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Number input: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 number key BCD value one digit number BCD code overflow 10 3 10 2 10 1 10 0 BCD value BIN value D0 Function key input: When press A key, M0=On and latch. Next, press D key and then M0=Off, M3=On and latch. If two or more keys are pressed at the same time, only the key activated first is effective. F E D C B A M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0 Key output signal: When any key of A to Fis pressed, M6=On one time. When any key of 0 to 9 is pressed, M7=Onone time. When the drive contact X4 turns Off, the previous value do not change but M0~M7 all turns Off. External wiring: C D E F 8 9 A B 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 COM X10 X11 X12 X13 COM Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 PLC( Transistor output) DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-57
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Footnote When this command is executed, 8 times scan cycles is required to read the input value of keys sucessfully. If the scan cycle is too long or too short, it may cause the key to input incorrectly. Therefore, user can use the following command to avoid it. When the scan cycle is too short, the I/O may not response in time and can not read the key input correctly. At this time, user can fix the scan time to avoid it. When the cycle is too long, the response of key may become slow. User can avoid this by writing this command in a time interrupt subroutine and executing this command in the fix time. The function of flag M1167: When M1167=On, HKY command can input hexadecimal value of 0~F. When M1167=Off, A~F of HKY command are used as function keys. API 72 DSW Digital Switch Input Applicable models ES EP EH - S D 1 D 2 n Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F Note: The usage range of operand n: n=1~2 Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (9 STEPS) DSW Continuous - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1029 Execution completed flag Command Explanation : Head input device : Head output device : Destination device for storing the setting value : Number of digits This command is used to read one or two groups of 4 digits switch through 4 or 8 continuous external input devices from and 4 continuous external devices from and store the setting value in destination device. When is 1, only one group of digital switches is read. When is 2, two groups of digital switches are read. The first group of switches consists of X20~X23 and Y20~Y23. The second group of switches consists of X24~X27 and Y20~Y23. When X10=On, the command starts to execute. The setting value of the first group of switches are read and converted to BIN value and stored in D20. The setting value of the second group of switches are read and converted to BIN value and stored in D21. X10 DSW X20 Y20 D20 K2 7-58 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 When X10=On, Y20~Y23 will be On and scan in circles automatically. After the completion of each circle scan, completed falg M1029=ON is a scan period after a circle scan. Outputs Y20~Y23 please use transistor output. Besides, please make sure that every 1, 2, 4, 8 terminal should connect a diode (0.1A/50V) to the inputs of PLC in serial as shown in the example below. X10 operation start Y20 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s Y21 0.1s Y22 0.1s interrupt Y23 0.1s M1029 completed Wiring diagram of digital switch BCD digital switches 10 0 10 1 10 2 10 3 should connect a diode (1N4148) in serial 0V +24V 1 2 4 8 1 2 4 8 S/S X20 X21 X22 X23 X24 X25 X26 X27 The first group The second group C Y20 Y21 Y22 Y23 PLC 0 1 2 3 10 10 10 10 DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-59
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Footnote When the scan terminals are relay outputs, the following program technique is used with this command to operate successfully: When X10=On, DSW command is executed. When X10 turns Off, M10 will be On until the scan terminals of DSW command complete one output scan cycle. Then, M10 will turn Off. If the drive contact X10 use button switch, every time when X10 is pushed, M10, the scan terminals specified by DSW command, will be reset to Off after the completion of one output scan cycle. Then, the command will stop executing, the data of digital switch will be read completely and the scan terminals will be activated while the button switch is pushed. Therefore, even relay output is used in this situation, the relay can be used for long because the operation of relay is not frequent. X10 SET M10 M10 M1029 DSW X20 Y20 D20 K2 RST M10 API 73 SEGD P Decode the 7-segment Display Panel Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse command (SEGDP) 16-bit command (5 STEPS) SEGD Continuous SEGDP Pulse 32-bit command - - - - Flag: None Command Explanation : Source device for decoding : Output device after decoding When X10=On, contents (0~F: 16 bits) of the lower 4 bits (b0~b3) of D10 will be decoded as readable in the 7-segment display panel for output. The decoding results will be stored in Y10~Y17. X10 SEGD D10 K2Y10 7-60 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Decoding Chart of the 7-segment Display Panel: 16 bits Bit Combination Composition of the 7-Step Display Panel Status of Every Step Data Displayed 0 0000 ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF 1 2 3 0001 0010 0011 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON 4 0100 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 5 0101 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 6 0110 a ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON 7 0111 g b ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF 8 1000 c ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 9 1001 d ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON A 1010 ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON B C D 1011 1100 1101 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON E 1110 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON F 1111 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON API 74 SEGL 7-segment Display Scan Output Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D n Note: The usage range of operand n: n=0~7. Please refer to the footnote. In EH series models, SEGL command can only be used twice. Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (7 STEPS) SEGL Continuous - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1029 completed flag Command Explanation : Display source device of 7-segment display : Start device of 7-segment display scan output : Polarity setting of output signal and scan signal 8 or 12 continuous external output points that start from this command can be regarded as display and scan signal output of 1 or 2 groups of 4 digits of 7-segment display. 7-segment display module has function to convert input BCD code to 7-segment display and has control signal to latch or not. DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-61
7 Application Commands API 50-99 will decide the numbers of groups of 4 digits of 7-segment display and also indicate the polaritys of PLC output terminal and 7-segment display input terminal. The points number of 7-segment display output command that a group of 4 digits use is 8 points and 2 groups of 4 digits use are 12 points. Scan output terminal will circulate in sequence when this command executes. The drive contact will be changed from Off to On and scan output execute again. When X10=ON, command will start to execute. 7-segment display scan loop is composed of Y10~Y17. The value of D10 will be converted to BCD code and send to the first group of 7-segment display to display. The value of D11 will be converted to BCD code and send to the second group of 7-segment display to display. If any value of D10 or D11 is greater than 9999, operation error will occur. X10 SEGL D10 Y10 K4 When X10=ON, Y14~Y17 will scan in circles automatically. Each circle scan needs 12 scan time. M1029=ON is a scan period after a circle scan. 4 digits of a group, n=0~3. After the terminal of 1, 2, 4, 8 of decoded 7-segment display connects itself in parallet, they should connect to Y10~Y13 of PLC. Latch terminal of each number connects to Y14~Y17 of PLC individually. When X10=ON, the content of D10 will be transmitted to 7-segment display to display in sequently according to Y14~Y17 circulates in sequence 4 digits of 2 groups, n=4~7. After the terminal of 1, 2, 4, 8 of decoded 7-segment display connects itself in parallet, they should connect to Y20~Y23 of PLC. Latch terminal of each number and the first group share Y14~Y17 of PLC. The content of D10 will be transmitted to the first group of 7-segment display and the content of D11 will be transmitted to the second group of 7-segment display to display. If D10=K1234 and D11=K4321, the first group will display 1234 and the second group will display will display 4321. 7-segment display scan output wiring COM Y10 Y11 Y12 Y13 COM Y14 Y15 Y16 Y17 COM Y20 Y21 Y22 Y23 1 2 4 8 10 0 10 1 10 2 10 3 1 2 4 8 10 3 10 2 10 1 10 0 V+ The first group 1 2 4 8 10 3 10 2 10 1 10 0 V+ The second group 7-62 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Footnote The V4.9 and above of ES series provide this command (SEGL). Version 4.9 of ES series only provide a group of 4 digits of 7-segment display and use 8 points to output. SEGL command only can be used once in the program and the usage range of operand n is 0 to 3. Scan time must be longer than 10ms while this command is executed. If scan time is shorter than 10ms, please use fixed scan time function to fix scan time on 10ms. Please use suitable 7-segment display for the transistor that PLC uses to output. Settings of n: it is used to set the polarity of transistor output loop. It can be set to positive polarity or negative polarity. What 7-segment display it connects is a group of 4 digits or two groups of 4 digits. PLC transistor output is NPN type and it is open collect output. When wiring, output should connect a step up resistor to VCC (less than 30VDC). Therefore, when output point Y is On, output will be low potential. VCC step up resistor Y drive On Y signal output PLC Output loop of PNP transistor: when inner signal is 1, it will output high potential. This logic is called positive polarity. +24V positive On HIGH Logic 1 Step down resistor PLC DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-63
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Positive logic (Negative polarity) output of BCD code BCD value Y output (BCDcode) Signal output b 3 b 2 b 1 b 0 8 4 2 1 A B C D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 Negative logic (Positive polarity) output of BCD code BCD value Y output (BCDcode) Signal output b 3 b 2 b 1 b 0 8 4 2 1 A B C D 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 Display scan (latch) signal Positive logic (Negative polarity) output Negative logic (Positive polarity) output Y output (Latch) Output control Output control Y output (Latch) signal signal 1 0 0 1 Parameter n settings: groups number of 7-segment display A group Two groups Y of BCD code outputs + - + - Display scan latch signal + - + - + - + - n 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 + : Positive logic (Negative polarity) output - : Negative logic (Positive polarity) output The combination of output polarity of PLC transistor and input polaity of 7-segment display can be set by settings of n. 7-64 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 API 75 ARWS Arrow Keyboard Input Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D 1 D 2 n Note: Operand S occupies 4 continuous devices The usage range of operand n: n=0~3 (Refer to API 74 SEGL footnote). ARWS command only can be used once in the program. In EP series models, operand D 2 do not provide index register E, F to modify and it only can be specified as a multiple of 10, e.g. Y0, Y10 etc. 16-bit command (9 STEPS) ARWS Continuous - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: None Refer to each model specification for usage range. Output point that designated by this command should use transistor to output. When using this command, please fix scan time or put this command into time interrupt subroutine (I6 ~I8 ) to execute. Command Explanation : Start device of key input : Display device on 7-segment display : Scan output start device of 7-segment display : Polarity setting of output signal and scan signal When the command is executed, X20 is defined as the down key, X21 is defined as the up key, X22 is defined as the right key and X23 is defined as the left key. These keys are used to edit and display the external setting value. The setting value is stored in D20 and its setting range is from 0 to 9,999. When X10=On, 103 is a effective setting digit number. If pressing left key, the effective setting digit number will be displayed and jump by the direction from 103 100 101 102 103 100. If pressing the right key, the effective setting digit number will be displayed and jump by the direction from 103 102 101 100 103 102. Meanwhile, the digit position LED connected from Y24 to Y27 will also be Onto indicate the effective setting digit number. If pressing the up key to increase, the effective number will change from 0 1 2 8 9 0 1. If pressing the down key, the effective number will change from 0 9 8 1 0 9, meanwhile, the changed value will be displayed on the 7-segment display. X10 ARWS X20 D20 Y20 K0 DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-65
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Y24 Y25 Y26 Y27 Y20 Y21 Y22 Y23 1 2 4 8 3 2 1 0 10 10 10 10 Digit position LED 7-step display which displays setting value (4 digits data) move to the left Increase digit value X23 X21 X20 X22 move to the right decrease digit value The 4 switches is used to move digit position to the left or to the right and increase or decrease the setting value of the digits API 76 ASC ASCII Code Conversion Applicable models ES EP EH - S D Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F Note: Operand S is 8 alphanumeric character string inputted by WPLSoft software from PC, or ASC II code inputted by HPP02. Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (11 STEPS) ASC Continuous - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1161 8/16 mode exchange Command Explanation : The alphanumeric character which can be converted to its ASC II code : The destination device for storing ASC II code. The alphanumeric character can be used to display error message directly if connect 7-segment display when using this command. When =On, A~H is converted to ASCII code and stored in D0~D3. ASC A B C D E F G H D0 D0 b15 42H (B) b0 41H (A) D1 44H (D) 43H (C) D2 46H (F) 45H (E) D3 48H (H) 47H (G) high byte low byte When M1161=On, the ASCII code converted from every character will occupy lower 8-bit (b7~b0) of one register. The high byte will be invalid and its content is filled as 0. This also means that one register only can be used to store one character. 7-66 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 b15 00 H 00 H 00 H 00 H 00 H 00 H 00 H 00 H b0 41H (A) 42H (B) 43H (C) 44H (D) 45H (E) 46H (F) 47H (G) 48H (H) high byte low byte API 77 PR Print Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D Note: Operand S occupies 4 continuous devices. Operand D occupies 10 continuous devices. PR command only can be used twice in the program. Refer to each model specification for usage range. In EP series models, operand D does not provide index register E, F to modify. 16-bit command (5 STEPS) PR Continuous - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1029 completed flag M1027 Command Explanation 1 : The device for storing ASCII code : The external output device which outputs ASC II code. This command will output ASCII codes stored in 4 registers from device in order of the output devices specified by. First, using API 76 ASC command convert A~H to ASCII code and store them in D0~D3. Then, using this command output them in the order of A~H. When M1027=Off, X10 turns from Off to On, the command is executed, Y10(low byte) to Y17(high byte) is specified as the data output devices, Y20 is specified as scan signal and Y21 is specified as the monitor signal while the command being executed. This mode can execute 8 character string output operation. If X10 turns from Off to On while the command being executed, the data output will be interrupt. When X10 is On once more, the data will be sent again. X10 PR D0 Y10 DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-67
7 Application Commands API 50-99 X10 start signal Y10~Y17 data T A B C D H T T T : scan time(ms) Y20 scan singal Y21 being executed 2 PR command provide 8 serial string output operation. When M1027=Off, maximum 8 character string can be outputted in serial. When M1027=On, 1 to 16 character string output operation can be executed. When M1027=On, X10 turns from Off to On, Y10(low byte) to Y17(high byte) is specified as the data output devices, Y20 is specified as scan signal and Y21 is specified as the monitor signal while the command being executed. This mode can execute 16 character string output operation. If the character string 00H (NUL) has been sent, it means the end of the character string and the operation of PR command won t be continous. The drive contact X10 is always On but it will automatically stop after one time operation of data output. However, if is always On, M1029 won t be activated. M1002 SET M1027 X10 PR D0 Y10 X10 start signal Y10~Y17 data first character T T T last character T : scan time or interrupt time Y20 scan singal Y21 being executed Footnote M1029 is completed This command should only use transistor output. When using this command, please fix the scan time or execute this command in a time interrupt subroutine. 7-68 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 API 78 D FROM P Read Special Module CR Data Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F m 1 m 2 D n Note: The usage range of operand m 1 : m 1 =0~7 The usage range of operand m 2 : m2=0~48 The usage range of operand n: n =1~(49- m2) Refer to each model specification for usage range. For ES series, it doesn t support pulse command (FROMP, DFROMP). 16-bit command (9 STEPS) FROM Continuous FROMP Pulse 32-bit command (17 STEPS) DFROM Continuous Flag: When M1083=On, it allows to insert interrupt during command FROM/TO. Refer to following explanation for detail. DFROMP Pulse Command Explanation : Number for special module : Number of CR (Control Register) of special module that will be read : Location to save reading data : Data number of reading one time DVP PLC uses this command to read CR data of special module. When indicates bit operand, you can use K1~K4 for 16-bit command and K5~K8 for 32-bit command. Please refer to the following footnote to see the detail of the numbering rule of special module. To read the content of CR#29 of special module#0 to D0 of PLC and to read the content of CR#30 of special module#0 to D1 of PLC. It can read 2 data at one time (n=2). The command will be executed when =ON. The command won t be executed when =OFF and the content of previous reading data won t change. FROM K0 K29 D0 K2 API 79 D TO P Special Module CR Data Write in Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F m 1 m 2 S n Note: The usage range of operand m 1 : m 1 =0~7 The usage range of operand m 2 : m 2 =0~48 The usage range of operand n: n =1~(49- m2) Refer to each model specification for usage range. For ES series, it doesn t support pulse command (TOP, DTOP) 16-bit command (9 STEPS) TO Continuous TOP Pulse 32-bit command (17 STEPS) DTO Continuous Pulse DTOP Flag: M1083 FROM/TO mode exchange Refer to following for detail. DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-69
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Command Explanation : Number of special module : Number of CR (Control Register) of special module that will be wrote in : Data to write in CR : data number to write in one time. When assigns bit operand, K1~K4 can be used for 16-bit command and K1~K8 can be used for 32-bit command. DVP-series PLC uses this command to write data into CR of special module. Using 32-bit command DTO, program will write D11 and D10 into CR#13 and CR#12 of special module#0. It only writes a group of data at one time (n=1) The command will be executed when =ON and it won t be executed when =OFF. The data that wrote in previous won t have any change. DTO K0 K12 D10 K1 Footnote The rule of command operand: m1: arrangement number of special module. The number of special module that connects to PLC MPU. The numbering rule of special module from the near to the distant of MPU is from 0 to 7. The maximum is 8 special modules and won t occupy I/O point. m2: the number of CR. Built-in 16-bit of 36 groups memory of special module is called CR (Control Register). The number of CR uses decimal digits (#0~#35). All running status and setting values of special module have included. If using FROM/TO command, the unit of read/write of CR is one number for one time. If using DFROM/DTO command, the unit of read/write of CR is two numbers in one time. Upper 16-bit Lower 16-bit CR #10 CR #9 Specified CR number The number of transmission groups n. The meaning of n=2 of 16-bit command and n=1 of 32-bit are the same. Specified device Specified CR Specified device Specified CR D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 CR #5 CR #6 CR #7 CR #8 CR #9 CR #10 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 CR #5 CR #6 CR #7 CR #8 CR #9 CR #10 16-bit command when n=6 32-bit command when n=3 In ES series models, flag M1083 is not provided. When FROM/TO command is executed, all interrupts (including external or internal interrupt subroutines) will be disabled. All interrupts will be executed after FROM/TO command is completed. Besides, FROM/TO command also can be executed in the interrupt subroutine. 7-70 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 The function of the flag M1083 (FROM/TO mode exchange) provided in EP/EH series models: 1. When M1083=Off, FROM/TO command is executed, all interrupts (including external or internal interrupt subroutines) will be disabled. All interrupts will be executed after FROM/TO command is completed. Besides, FROM/TO command also can be executed in the interrupt subroutine. 2. When M1083=On, if a interrupt occurs while FROM/TO command has been programmed, FROM/TO command will be interruptted to execute the interrupt. However, FROM/TO command cannot be executed in the interrupt subroutine Application program example of FROM/TO command: 1: Adjust A/D conversion characteristic curve of DVP-04AD by setting OFFSET value of CH1 to 0V(=K0 LSB ) and GAIN value of CH1 to 2.5V(=K2000 LSB ). M1002 TO K0 K1 H0 K1 TO K0 K33 H0 K1 TO K0 K18 K0 K1 TO K0 K24 K2000 K1 1. Write H0 to CR#1 of analog input mode No. 0 and set CH1 to mode 0 (voltage input : -10V to +10V). 2. Write H0 to CR#33 and allow to adjust characteristics of CH1 to CH4. 3. When turns from OFF to ON, K0 LSB of OFFSET value will be wrote in CR#18 and K2000 LSB of GAIN value will be wrote in CR#24. 2: Adjust A/D conversion characteristic curve of DVP-04AD by setting OFFSET value of CH2 to 2mA(=K400 LSB) and GAIN value of CH2 to 18 ma(=k3600lsb). M1002 TO K0 K1 H18 K1 TO K0 K33 H0 K1 TO K0 K19 K400 K1 TO K0 K25 K3600 K1 DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-71
7 Application Commands API 50-99 1. Write H18 to CR#1 of analog input mode No. 0 and set CH2 to mode 3 (current input : -20mA to +20mA). 2. Write H0 to CR#33 and allow to adjust characteristics of CH1 to CH4. 3. When turns from OFF to ON, K400 LSB of OFFSET value will be wrote in CR#19 and K3600 LSB of GAIN value will be wrote in CR#25. 3: Adjust D/A conversion characteristic curve of DVP-02DA by setting OFFSET value of CH2 to 0mA(=K0LSB) and GAIN value of CH2 to 10mA(=K1000LSB). M1002 TO K1 K1 H18 K1 TO K1 K33 H0 K1 TO K1 K22 K0 K1 TO K1 K28 K1000 K1 1. Write H18 to CR#1 of analog input mode No. 1 and set CH2 to mode 3 (current input : 0mA to +20mA). 2. Write H0 to CR#33 and allow to adjust characteristics of CH1 and CH2. 3. When turns from OFF to ON, K0 LSB of OFFSET value will be wrote in CR#22 and K1000 LSB of GAIN value will be wrote in CR#28. 4: Adjust D/A conversion characteristic curve of DVP-02DA by setting OFFSET value of CH2 to 2mA(=K400 LSB ) and GAIN value of CH2 to 18mA(=K3600 LSB ). M1002 TO K1 K1 H10 K1 TO K1 K33 H0 K1 TO K1 K23 K400 K1 TO K1 K29 K3600 K1 1. Write H10 to CR#1 of analog input mode No. 1 and set CH2 to mode 2 (current input : +4mA to +20mA). 2. Write H0 to CR#33 and allow to adjust characteristics of CH1 and CH2. 3. When turns from OFF to ON, K400 LSB of OFFSET value will be wrote in CR#23 and K3600 LSB of GAIN value will be wrote in CR#29. 7-72 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 5: example when DVP-04AD and DVP-02DA module are used together M1000 FROM K0 K0 D0 K1 LD= H88 D0 TO K0 K1 H3030 K1 TO K0 K2 K32 K2 M1000 FROM K0 K6 D20 K4 FROM K1 K0 D0 K1 M1013 CMP H49 D0 M0 INC D100 ADD D101 K5 D101 LD= K4000 D100 RST D100 LD= K4000 D101 M1 M1 RST D101 TO K1 K1 H10 K1 TO K1 K10 D100 K2 END 1. Read the data of model type from expansion module K0 and distinguish if the data is H88 (DVP-04AD model type). 2. If the model type is DVP-04AD, the drive contact M1 is on and set input mode CR#1: (CH1, CH3)= mode 0, (CH2, CH4)= mode 3. 3. Set the mode of CR#2 and CR#3. The average times of CH1 and CH2 is K32. 4. Read the input signal average value of CH1~CH4 (4 data) from CR#6~CR#9 and store them in D20 to D23. 5. Read the data of model type from expansion module K1 and distinguish if the data is H49 (DVP-02DA model type). 6. D100 will increase K1 and D101 will increase K5 every second. 7. When value of D100 and D101 attain to K4000, they will be reset to 0. 8. If the model type is DVP-04AD, the drive contact M1 is on and set input mode CR#1: CH1 mode to 0, CH2 mode to 2. 9. Write output setting CR#10 and CR#11 to D100 and D101. Analog output will change with D100 and D101 value. DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-73
7 Application Commands API 50-99 API 80 RS Serial Data Communication Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S m D n Note: Operand m available range: m=0~256 Operand n available range: n=0~256 Refer to following for detail. 16-bit command (9 STEPS) Continuous RS - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143, M1161 Please refer to the footnote. Command Explanation 1 : Start device of transmitting data : Transmitting data group number : Start device of receiving data : receiving data group number This command is a convenience command for MPU to use RS-485 to connect communication interface in series. It stores words data in source data register and sets length. It also can set to receive data register and length. If it doesn t need to transmit data, can be indicated to K0 and if it doesn t need to receive data, can be indicated to K0. RS command can be used in the program unlimitedly, but you can t execute two or more RS commands at the same time. It is invalid to change transmitting data during executing RS command. Use this RS command to transmit and receive data of PLC and external/peripheral equipment (AC drive, etc.) when external/peripheral equipment has RS-485 serial communication and communication format of this equipment is public. If communication format of external/peripheral equipment corresponds with communication format of MODBUS, DVP series PLC provides several convenience communication commands, API 100 MODRD, API 101 MODWR and API 150 MODRW, for user to use. Please refer to individual command explanation for detail. Please refer to following footnote for more information of special auxiliary relay M1120~M1161 and special data register D1120~D1131 related to RS-485 communication command. Writing data into the register that starts from D100 and set M1122 (send request flag) to ON. If RS command is executed when X10=ON, PLC will in the state of waiting for transmitting and receiving data. It will start to transmit 10 continuous data that start from D100. M1122 will be set to OFF at the end of transmitting (Please do not use program to execute RST M1122). After 1ms, it will start to receive external 10 data and store them into continuous registers that start from D120. 7-74 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 When receiving data complete, M1123 will be set to ON. ( will set M1123 to OFF when receiving data complete and in the state of waiting for transmitting and receiving data. Please do use not PLC program to execute RST M1123 continuously. M1002 MOV H86 D1120 Setting communication protocol 9600, 7, E, 1 transmission request pulse SET MOV SET M1120 K100 write transmitting data in advance M1122 Communication protocol latched Setting communication D1129 time out 100ms sending request 2 X10 receiving completed M1123 RS D100 K10 D120 K10 Process of receiving data RST M1123 receiving completed and flag reset 8-bit mode (M1161=ON) / 16-bit mode (M1161=OFF) switch: 8-bit mode : Head code and tail code of PLC transmission data will be set by using M1126 and M1130 according to D1124~D1126. After setting, PLC will send head code and tail code that set by user automatically when executing RS command. When M1161=ON, the conversion mode will be 8-bit. 16-bit data will be divided into high byte and low byte. High byte will be ignored and low byte will be received and transmitted. M1000 M1161 RS D100 K4 D120 K7 Transmit data: (PLC external equipment) STX D100L D101L D102L D103L EXT1 EXT2 Head code source data register will start from low byte of D100 Tail code 1 Tail code 2 length = 4 Receive data: (external equipment PLC) DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-75
7 Application Commands API 50-99 D120L D121L D122L D123L D124L D125L D126L Head code receive data register will start from low byte of D120 Tail code 1 Tail code 2 length = 7 PLC will receive all data that transmitted from external equipment, including head code and tail code. Please pay attention on setting length. 16-bit mode : Head code and tail code of PLC transmitting data is set by using M1126 and M1130 with D1124~D1126. After complete the setting, PLC will send head code and tail code set by user automatically when executing RS command. When M1161=OFF, the conversion mode will be 16-bit. 16-bit data will be divided into high byte and low byte for data transmitting and receiving. M1001 M1161 RS D100 K4 D120 K7 Transmit data: (PLC external equipment) STX D100L D100L D101L D101L EXT1 EXT2 Head code source data register will start from low byte of D100 Tail code 1 Tail code 2 length = 4 Receive data: (external equipment PLC) D120L D120H D121L D121H D122L D122H D123L Head code receive data register will start from low byte of D120 Tail code 1 Tail code 2 length = 7 PLC will receive all data that transmitted from external equipment, including head code and tail code. Please pay attention on setting length. 7-76 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 3 When PLC connects to VFD-B series AC drives (ASCII Mode, M1143=OFF), (16-bit Mode, M1161=OFF), it will transmit data to read 6 continuous data that start from VFD-B parameter address H2101. M1002 Setting communication MOV H86 D1120 protocol 9600, 7, E, 1 transmission request pulse X10 receiving completed SET MOV SET M1120 K100 write transmitting data in advance M1122 Communication protocol latched Setting communication D1129 time out 100ms sending request RS D100 K17 D120 K35 Process of receiving data M1123 receiving completed RST M1123 and flag reset PLC VFD-B, PLC transmitting: : 01 03 2101 0006 D4 CR LF VFD-B PLC, PLC receiving: : 01 03 0C 0100 1766 0000 0000 0136 3B CR LF PLC transmitting data register (PLC transmitting messages) Register DATA D100 low byte : 3A H STX D100 high byte 0 30 H ADR 1 D101 low byte 1 31 H ADR 0 ADR (1,0) is AC drive address D101 high byte 0 30 H CMD 1 D102 low byte 3 33 H CMD 0 CMD (1,0) is command code D102 high byte 2 32 H D103 low byte 1 31 H D103 high byte 0 30 H Start data address D104 low byte 1 31 H D104 high byte 0 30 H D105 low byte 0 30 H D105 high byte 0 30 H Number of data (count by word) D106 low byte 6 36 H D106 high byte D 44 H LRC CHK 1 LRC CHK (0,1) is error check D107 low byte 4 34 H LRC CHK 0 code D107 high byte CR A H D108 low byte LF D H END PLC receiving data register (VFD-B response messages) Register DATA D120 low byte : 3A H STX D120 high byte 0 30 H ADR 1 D121 low byte 1 31 H ADR 0 D121 high byte 0 30 H CMD 1 D122 low byte 3 33 H CMD 0 D122 high byte 0 30 H D123 low byte C 43 H Number of data (count by byte) D123 high byte 0 30 H D124 low byte 1 31 H Content of address 2101 H D124 high byte 0 30 H DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-77
7 Application Commands API 50-99 4 Register DATA D125 low byte 0 30 H D125 high byte 1 31 H D126 low byte 7 37 H D126 high byte 6 36 H Content of address 2102 H D127 low byte 6 36 H D127 high byte 0 30 H D128 low byte 0 30 H D128 high byte 0 30 H Content of address 2103 H D129 low byte 0 30 H D129 high byte 0 30 H D130 low byte 0 30 H D130 high byte 0 30 H Content of address 2104 H D131 low byte 0 30 H D131 high byte 0 30 H D132 low byte 1 31 H D132 high byte 3 33 H Content of address 2105 H D133 low byte 6 36 H D133 high byte 0 30 H D134 low byte 0 30 H D134 high byte 0 30 H Content of address 2106 H D135 low byte 0 30 H D135 high byte 3 33 H LRC CHK 1 D136 low byte B 42 H LRC CHK 0 D136 high byte CR A H D137 low byte LF D H END When PLC connects to VFD-B AC drive (RTU Mode, M1143=ON), (16-bit Mode, M1161=ON), writing transmitting data, H12, in advance into VFD-B parameter address H2000. M1002 MOV SET MOV H86 M1120 K100 D1120 D1129 Setting communication protocol 9600, 7, E, 1 Communication protocol latched Setting communication time out 100ms SET M1143 RTU Mode transmission request pulse X10 receiving completed M1123 SET SET RST M1161 write transmitting data in advance M1122 RS D100 K8 D120 K8 Process of receiving data M1123 8 bits Mode sending request receiving completed and flag reset 7-78 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 PLC VFD-B, PLC transmitting: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07 VFD-B PLC, PLC receiving: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07 PLC transmitting data register (PLC transmitting messages) Register DATA D100 low byte 01 H Address D101 low byte 06 H Function D102 low byte 20 H D103 low byte 00 H Data address D104 low byte 00 H D105 low byte 12 H Data content D106 low byte 02 H CRC CHK Low D107 low byte 07 H CRC CHK High PLC receiving data register (response messages of VFD-B) Register DATA D120 low byte 01 H Address D121 low byte 06 H Function D122 low byte 20 H D123 low byte 00 H Data address D124 low byte 00 H D125 low byte 12 H Data content D126 low byte 02 H CRC CHK Low D127 low byte 07 H CRC CHK High DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-79
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Footnote RS-485 communication RS / MODRD / MODWR / FWD / REV / STOP / RDST / RSTEF / MODRW commands relation flags: Flag Function Explanation Action M1120 M1121 M1122 M1123 M1124 M1125 M1126 M1130 M1127 Communication protocol holding. It is used to hold communication setting. PLC will reset communication protocol setting according to special data register D1120 after first program scan. When second program scan starts and RS command is executed, it will reset communication protocol setting according to special data register D1120. If communication protocol is fixed, M1120 can be set to ON. At this time, communication protocol setting won t be reset as RS / MODRD / MODWR / FWD / REV / STOP / RDST / RSTEF / MODRW is executed even if D1120 setting is changed. When it is off, RS-485 of PLC is sending communication information. Sending request. Users need to set M1122 to ON by pulse command when using RS / MODRD / MODWR / FWD / REV / STOP / RDST / RSTEF / MODRW command to transmit and receive data. If above command starts to execute, PLC will transmit and receive data. M1122 will be reset after above commands complete transmitting. Receiving completed. M1123 will be set to ON after RS / MODRD / MODWR / FWD / REV / STOP / RDST / RSTEF / MODRW commands complete executing. User can process receiving data when M1123 is set to ON and reset M1123 to OFF when the process of receiving data is completed. Receiving wait. When M1124 is set to ON, it means PLC is waiting for receiving data. Communication reset. When M1125 is set to ON, the communication of PLC will be reset. After resetting, M1125 must be reset to Off. STX/ETX selection. Please refer to the following table for selecting user/system definition and STX/ETX. STX/ETX selection. Please refer to the following table for selecting user/system definition and STX/ETX. Communication command finishes transmitting and receiving. RS command is not included. Receiving time out. This flag will be activated if D1129 is set and M1129 the process of receiving data is not completed within the setting time. After resetting, M1129 should be reset to OFF. M1128 Transmitting/receiving indication M1131 M1131=ON during MODRD / RDST / MODRW convert to HEX. Otherwise M1131 will be OFF. M1140 MODRD / MODWR / MODRW data received error User setting and clear System acts User setting and system clears auto System auto setting and user clear System acts User setting and clear System auto setting and user clear System acts M1141 MODRD / MODWR / MODRW command error M1142 VFD-A command data received error ASCII / RTU mode selection, ON is RTU mode and OFF is ASCII M1143 mode. (use with MODRD / MODWR / MODRW commands) M1161 8/16-bit mode setting. ON is 8-bit mode and OFF is 16-bit mode User setting and clear 7-80 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Special register related to RS-485 communication RS / MODRD / MODWR / FWD / REV / STOP / RDST / RSTEF / MODRW command: Special register D1038 D1050~D1055 D1070~D1085 D1089~D1099 D1120 D1121 D1122 D1123 D1124 D1125 D1126 D1129 D1130 D1256~D1295 D1296~D1311 Function Explanation For ES/EP models, data response delay time setting when PLC MPU is slave. Time unit (0.1ms). After executing MODRD/RDST command, PLC will convert ASCII data of D1070~D1085 to HEX and store hexadecimal data to D1050~D1055. PLC built-in RS-485 communication convenience command. Executing this command will receive feedback (return) messages from receiver. The messages will be stored at D1070~D1085. User can check return data by viewing the content of the register. PLC built-in RS-485 communication convenience command. The transmitting message will be stored in D1089~D1099 when this command is executed. Users can check if the command is correct by the content of the register. Please refer to the following table for RS-485 communication protocol. Communication address of PLC MPU when PLC MPU is slave. Residual words of transmitting data. Residual words of receiving data. Start word definition (STX). Please refer to the table above. First end word definition (ETX1). Please refer to the table above. Second end word definition (ETX2). Please refer to the table above. Communication time out is abnormal. Time unit (ms). It is used to set time of time out. If the value of the time is 0, it means there is no time out. PLC will set M1129 to be ON if receiving time of the first word or between any two words is more than setting after executing RS / MODRD / MODWR / FWD / REV / STOP / RDST / RSTEF / MODRW commands to enter received mode when the value of the time is more than 0. User can use M1129 to handle communication time out but be sure to remember to reset M1129 after handling. MODBUS return error code record. PLC built-in RS-485 communication convenience command MODRW. The characters transmitted by this command will be stored in D1256~D1295 when this command is executed. User can check if the command is correct by the content of the registers. PLC will automatically convert ASCII data in the receiving register specified by user to HEX, hexadecimal value. DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-81
7 Application Commands API 50-99 D1120: RS-485 communication protocol. For the settings, please refer to following table: Content 0 1 b0 Data length 7 8 00 : None b1 Parity bits 01 : Odd b2 11 : Even b3 Stop bits 1 bit 2 bit b4 0001 (H1) : 110 b5 0010 (H2) : 150 b6 0011 (H3) : 300 b7 0100 (H4) : 600 0101 (H5) : 1200 0110 (H6) : 2400 0111 (H7) : 4800 1000 (H8) : 9600 1001 (H9) : 19200 1010 (HA) : 38400 1011 (HB) : 57600 (only in EH/EP series models) 1100 (HC) : 115200 (only in EH/EP series models) b8 Start word selection None D1124 b9 First end word selection None D1125 b10 Second end word selection None D1126 b15~b11 No definition Start word and end word of control characters will be defined in the communication format of peripheral equipment when using RS command. Start word and end word can be set in D1124~D1125 by user or defined by machine/equipment. When using M1126, M1130, D1124~D1125 to set start and end word, b8~b9 of D1120 of RS485 communication protocol should be set to 1. For the settings, please refer to the following table: M1130 0 1 M1126 0 1 D1124: user define D1125: user define D1126: user define D1124: user define D1125: user define D1126: user define D1124: H 0002 D1125: H 0003 D1126: H 0000(no setting) D1124: H 003A( : ) D1125: H 000D(CR) D1126: H 000A(LF) for communication format setting: Communication format: Baud rate 9600 7, N, 2 STX : : ETX1 : CR EXT2 : LF You can get the communication format H788 via check with table and write into D1120. 7-82 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 D1120 b15 b0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Don t care 7 8 8 M1002 MOV H788 D1120 When using STX, EXT1 and EXT2 should pay attention to the On/Off relationship between special auxiliary relay M1126 and M1130. M1143: ASCII / RTU mode selection. ON is RTU mode and OFF is ASCII mode. Take standard MODBUS format to explanation: ASCII mode (M1143=Off): STX Start word = : (3AH) Address Hi Communication address: Address Lo 8-bit address consists of 2 ASCII codes Function Hi Function code: Function Lo 8-bit function code consists of 2 ASCII codes DATA (n-1) Data content: n 8-bit data content consists of 2n ASCll codes. DATA 0 LRC CHK Hi LRC CHK Lo END Hi LRC check sum: 8-bit check sum consists of 2 ASCll code End word: END Hi = CR (0DH), END Lo = LF(0AH) END Lo Communication protocol is made of MODBUS ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange). Each byte consists of 2 ASCII characters. For example: a 1-byte data 64 Hex shown as 64 in ASCII, consists of 6 (36Hex) and 4 (34Hex). The table below identifies the usable hexadecimal characters and their associated ASCII codes. Character 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ASCII code 30H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H Character 8 9 A B C D E F ASCII code 38H 39H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 46H Start word (STX): : (3AH) Communication address (Address): 0 0 : broadcast for all driver (Broadcast) 0 1 : toward the drive at the 01 address 0 F : toward the drive at the 15 address 1 0 : toward the drive at the 16 address... and consequently, the Max. address can be reached is 255 ( F F ). Function code (Function): 0 3 : read contents of many registers 0 6 : write one WORD into the register 1 0 : write contents of many registers DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-83
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Data content: The content of transmitting data send by user LRC check: LRC check is the added sum from Address to Data contents. For example, the 01H + 03H + 21H + 02H + 00H + 02H = 29H, then take the complementary of 2, D7H. End word: END Hi = CR (0DH), END Lo = LF(0AH) For example: when the address of the drive is set as 01H, read 2 data contents that exist successively within the register, as shown follows: the address of the start register is 2102H. Inquiry message: Response message: STX : STX : Address 0 0 Address 1 1 Function 0 0 Function 3 3 2 Number of data 0 1 (count by byte) 4 Start address 0 1 2 Content of start address 7 0 2102H 7 Number of data 0 0 (count by word) 0 0 2 Content of address 0 LRC Check D 2103H 0 7 0 END CR 7 LRC Check LF 1 END CR LF RTU mode (M1143=On): START Address Function DATA (n-1). DATA 0 CRC CHK Low CRC CHK High END Please refer to following explanation Communication address: 8-bit binary Function code: 8-bit binary Data content: n 8-bit data CRC check: 16-bit CRC consists of 2 8-bit binary Please refer to following explanation START: ES / EP series: keep none input signal to be greater or equal to 10 ms EH series: Baud Rate(bps) RTU Timeout Timer(ms) Baud Rate(bps) RTU Timeout Timer(ms) 300 40 9600 2 600 21 19200 1 1200 10 38400 1 2400 5 57600 1 4800 3 115200 1 7-84 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Communication Address (Address): 00 H: broadcast for all driver (Broadcast) 01 H: toward the drive at the 01 address 0F H: toward the drive at the 15 address 10 H: toward the drive at the 16 address... and consequently, the Max. address can be reached is 255 ( F F ) Function code (Function): 03 H: read contents of many registers 06 H: write one WORD into the register 01 H: write contents of many registers Data content: The content of transmitting data send by user CRC check: CRC check starts from Address and ends in Data content. Its calculation is as follows: Step 1: Load the 16-bit register (the CRC register) with FFFFH. Step 2: Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte message command with the 16-bit CRC register of the low byte, then store the result into the CRC register. Step 3: Shift the CRC register one bit to the right and fill 0 in the higher bit. Step 4: Check the value that shifts to the right. If it is 0, store the new value from step 3 into the CRC register, otherwise, Exclusive OR A001H and the CRC register, then store the result into the CRC register. Step 5: Repeat step 3 and 4 and calculates the 8-bit. Step 6: Repeat Steps 2~5 for the next 8-bit message command, till all the message commands are processed. And finally, the obtained CRC register value is the CRC check value. What should be noticed is that the CRC check must be placed interchangeably in the check sum of the message command. END: ES / EP series: keep none input signal to be greater or equal to 10 ms EH series: Baud Rate(bps) RTU Timeout Timer(ms) Baud Rate(bps) RTU Timeout Timer(ms) 300 40 9600 2 600 21 19200 1 1200 10 38400 1 2400 5 57600 1 4800 3 115200 1 DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-85
7 Application Commands API 50-99 For example: when the address of the drive is set as 01H, read 2 continuous data of the register shown follows: the address of the start register is 2102H Inquiry message: Response message: Address 01 H Address 01 H Function 03 H Function 03 H Start data address 21 H Number of data 04 H 02 H (count by byte) Number of data 00 H Content of data address 17 H (count by word) 02 H 8102H 70 H CRC CHK Low 6F H Content of data address 00 H CRC CHK High F7 H 8103H 00 H CRC CHK Low FE H CRC CHK High 5C H Timing chart of RS-485 communication program flag: M1002 transmission request pulse X10 receiving completed M1123 MOV SET MOV SET RST H86 M1120 K100 M1122 M1123 D1120 D1129 write transmitting data in advance Setting communication protocol 9600, 7, E, 1 Communication protocol latched Setting communication time out 100ms RS D100 K2 D120 K8 Process of receiving data sending request receiving completed and flag reset 7-86 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Timing chart: SET M1122 RS command executes X10 Transmission ready M1121 Sending request M1122 Receiving completed M1123 Auto reset after transmitting data completed User must reset in program Receiving wait M1124 Communication reset M1125 MODRD/RDST/MODRW data receiving and conversion M1127 completed Transmitting and receiving M1128 Receiving time out M1129 Receive time out timer set by D1129 Covert MODRD/RDST M1131 /MODRW to hexadecimal Residual words of transmitting data D1122 Residual words of receiving data D1123 Change direction immediately 123 1 2 345678 User will reset to the transmit standby status in program ASCII data converted to hexadecimal, less than a scan period It will be activated when receiving time out message Stop to count time after receiving data completed Conversion data 3 2 1 0 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 API 81 D PRUN P Octal Number System Transmission Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D Note: X, Y, M of word device KnX, KnY, KnM should be a multiple of 10, e.g. X10, M10, Y10. When operand S is specified as KnX, operand D should be specified as KnM. When operand S is specified as KnM, operand D should be specified as KnY. Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (5 STEPS) PRUN Continuous PRUNP Pulse 32-bit command (9 STEPS) DPRUN Continuous DPRUNP Pulse Flag: None Command Explanation : Transmission source device : Transmission destination device Transmit the the content of to in octal number system format. DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-87
7 Application Commands API 50-99 1 When X3=On, transmit the content of K4X10 to K4M10 in octal number system format. X3 PRUN K4X10 K4M10 X27 X26 X25 X24 X23 X22 X21 X20 X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 M27 M26 M25 M24 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 2 NO CHANGE When X2=On, transmit the content of K4M10 to K4Y10 in octal number system format. X2 PRUN K4M10 K4Y10 These two devices won be transmitted M27 M26 M25 M24 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 X27 X26 X25 X24 X23 X22 X21 X20 X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 API 82 ASCI P Convert HEX into ASCII Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D n Note: Operand n available range: n=1~256 Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse command (ASCIP) 16-bit command (7 STEPS) Continuous ASCI ASCIP Pulse 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1161 8/16-bit mode setting Command Explanation : Start device of source data : Start device for storing converted result : Converted digits 16-bit conversion mode: When M1161=Off, read hexadecimal data characters from the source devcie and convert the data into the ASCII code. Then, store the result into high and low byte of device. 8-bit conversion mode: When M1161=On, read hexadecimal data characters from the source devcie and convert the data into the ASCII code. Then, store the result into low byte of device (high byte of device are all set to 0). 7-88 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 1 When M1161=Off, it is 16-bit conversion mode. When =On, read four hexadecimal data characters from D10 and convert them into ASCII codes. Then, store the converted data to the register started from D20. M1001 M1161 ASCI D10 D20 K4 Supposed condition: (D10) = 0123 H 0 = 30H 4 = 34H 8 = 38H (D11) = 4567 H 1 = 31H 5 = 35H 9 = 39H (D12) = 89AB H 2 = 32H 6 = 36H A = 41H (D13) = CDEFH 3 = 33H 7 = 37H B = 42H When n is 4, the bit structure is: D10=0123 H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 2 3 D20 high byte low byte 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 31H 0 30H D21 high byte low byte 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 3 33H 2 32H When n is 6, the bit structure is: b15 D10 = H 0123 b0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 2 3 b15 D11 = H 4567 b0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 4 5 6 7 Convert to b15 D20 b0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 7 H 37 6 H 36 b15 D21 b0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 H 31 0 H 30 b15 D22 b0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 3 H 33 2 H 32 DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-89
7 Application Commands API 50-99 When n = 1 to 16: n D K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 D20 low byte 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 D20 high byte 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 D21 low byte 3 2 1 0 7 6 D21 high byte 3 2 1 0 7 D22 low byte 3 2 1 0 D22 high byte 3 2 1 D23 low byte 3 2 D23 high byte 3 D24 low byte D24 high byte D25 low byte D25 high byte D26 low byte D26 high byte D27 low byte D27 high byte no change n D K9 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 D20 low byte B A 9 8 F E D C D20 high byte 4 B A 9 8 F E D D21 low byte 5 4 B A 9 8 F E D21 high byte 6 5 4 B A 9 8 F D22 low byte 7 6 5 4 B A 9 8 D22 high byte 0 7 6 5 4 B A 9 D23 low byte 1 0 7 6 5 4 B A D23 high byte 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 B D24 low byte 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 D24 high byte 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 D25 low byte 3 2 1 0 7 6 D25 high byte 3 2 1 0 7 D26 low byte 3 2 1 0 no D26 high byte 3 2 1 change D27 low byte 3 2 D27 high byte 3 2 When M 1161=On, it is 8-bit conversion mode. When =On, read four hexadecimal data characters from D10 and convert them into ASCII codes. Then, store the converted data to the register started from D20. M1000 M1161 ASCI D10 D20 K4 7-90 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Supposed condition: (D10) = 0123 H 0 = 30H 4 = 34H 8 = 38H (D11) = 4567 H 1 = 31H 5 = 35H 9 = 39H (D12) = 89AB H 2 = 32H 6 = 36H A = 41H (D13) = CDEFH 3 = 33H 7 = 37H B = 42H When n is 2, the bit structure is: D10=0123 H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 2 3 ASCII code of D20=2 is 32H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 3 2 ASCII code of D21=3 is 33H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 3 3 When n is 4, the bit structure is: b15 D10 = H 0123 b0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 2 3 Convert to b15 D20 b0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 H 30 b15 0 0 D21 b0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 H 31 b15 D22 b0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 2 H 32 b15 D23 b0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 3 H 33 DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-91
7 Application Commands API 50-99 When n = 1 to 16: n D K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 D20 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 D21 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 D22 3 2 1 0 7 6 D23 3 2 1 0 7 D24 3 2 1 0 D25 3 2 1 D26 3 2 D27 3 D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 no change D n K9 K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 D20 B A 9 8 F E D C D21 4 B A 9 8 F E D D22 5 4 B A 9 8 F E D23 6 5 4 B A 9 8 F D24 7 6 5 4 B A 9 8 D25 0 7 6 5 4 B A 9 D26 1 0 7 6 5 4 B A D27 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 B D28 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 D29 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 D30 3 2 1 0 7 6 D31 3 2 1 0 7 D32 3 2 1 0 no D33 3 2 1 change D34 3 2 D35 3 API 83 HEX P Convert ASCII to HEX Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D n Note: Operand n available range: n=1~256 Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support pulse command (HEXP). Command Explanation 16-bit command (7 STEPS) HEX Continuous HEXP Pulse 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1161 8/16-bit mode exchange : Start device of source data : Start device for storing converted result n : number of converted ASCII codes. 7-92 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 1 16-bit conversion mode: When M1161=Off, it is 16-bit conversion mode. Convert 16-bit ASCII code of (high and low byte) to hexadecimal data characters and then transmit to per 4-bit for one time. Number of converted ASCII codes is set by. 8-bit conversion mode: When M1161=On, it is 16-bit conversion mode Convert 16-bit ASCII code of (high and low byte) to hexadecimal data characters and then transmit to low byte of. Number of converted ASCII codes is set by. (high byte of are all 0) When M1161=Off, it is 16-bit conversion mode. When =On, read ASCII bytes of the register started from D20 and convert them to hexadecimal characters. Then, store the converted data to four registers started from D10. (The converted data is four characters converted as one segment of data) M1001 M1161 HEX D20 D10 K4 Supposed condition: S HEX ASCII code S HEX ASCII code conversion conversion D20 low byte H 43 C D24 low byte H 34 4 D20 high byte H 44 D D24 high byte H 35 5 D21 low byte H 45 E D25 low byte H 36 6 D21 high byte H 46 F D25 high byte H 37 7 D22 low byte H 38 8 D26 low byte H 30 0 D22 high byte H 39 9 D26 high byte H 31 1 D23 low byte H 41 A D27 low byte H 32 2 D23 high byte H 42 B D27 high byte H 33 3 When n is 4, the bit structure is: D20 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 41H A 30H 0 D21 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 43H C 42H B D10 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 A B C DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-93
7 Application Commands API 50-99 When n = 1 to 16: n D D13 D12 D11 D10 1 ***C H 2 **CD H 3 *CDE H 4 CDEF H 5 The used ***C H DEF8 H 6 registers which **CD H EF89 H 7 are not *CDE H F89A H specified are all 8 0 CDEF H 89AB H 9 ***C H DEF8 H 9AB4 H 10 **CD H EF89 H AB45 H 11 *CDE H F89A H B456 H 12 CDEF H 89AB H 4567 H 13 ***C H DEF8 H 9AB4 H 5670 H 14 **CD H EF89 H AB45 H 6701 H 15 *CDE H F89A H B456 H 7012 H 16 CDEF H 89AB H 4567 H 0123 H 2 When M1161=On, it is 16-bit conversion mode. M1000 M1161 HEX D20 D10 K4 Supposed condition: ASCII code HEX HEX ASCII code conversion conversion D20 H 43 C D28 H 34 4 D21 H 44 D D29 H 35 5 D22 H 45 E D30 H 36 6 D23 H 46 F D31 H 37 7 D24 H 38 8 D32 H 30 0 D25 H 39 9 D33 H 31 1 D26 H 41 A D34 H 32 2 D27 H 42 B D35 H 33 3 When n is 2, the bit structure is D20 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 3 0 D21 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 4 1 D10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 A 7-94 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 When n = 1 to 16: n D D13 D12 D11 D10 1 ***C H 2 **CD H 3 *CDE H 4 CDEF H 5 The used ***C H DEF8 H 6 registers which **CD H EF89 H 7 are not *CDE H F89A H specified are all 8 0 CDEF H 89AB H 9 ***C H DEF8 H 9AB4 H 10 **CD H EF89 H AB45 H 11 *CDE H F89A H B456 H 12 CDEF H 89AB H 4567 H 13 ***C H DEF8 H 9AB4 H 5670 H 14 **CD H EF89 H AB45 H 6701 H 15 *CDE H F89A H B456 H 7012 H 16 CDEF H 89AB H 4567 H 0123 H API 84 CCD P Check Code Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D n Note: Operand n available range: n=1~256 Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support this command (CCD, CCDP) 16-bit command (7 STEPS) CCD Continuous CCDP Pulse 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1161 8/16-bit mode exchange Command Explanation : Start device of source data : Result device for storing check sum : Number of data This command is used to check sum of words to ensure the truth of transmission data during communication. 16-bit conversion mode: When M1161=Off, it is 16-bit conversion mode. Check the sum of words (8-bit in one byte) from the register specified by source devcie and store the sum to the register specified by device while the parity bits are stored in +1. 8-bit conversion mode : When M1161=On, it is 8-bit conversion mode. Check the sum of words (8-bit in one byte, only low byte are available) from the register specified by source devcie and store the sum to the register specified by device while the parity bits are stored in +1. DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-95
7 Application Commands API 50-99 1 When M1161=Off, it is 16-bit conversion mode. When =On, check sum of 6 words from the register specified by D0 (8-bit in one byte, n=6 means to specify D0~D2) and store the sum in the register specified by D100 while the parity bits are stored in D101. M1000 M1161 CCD D0 D100 K6 (S) D0 low byte Content of data(words) K100 = 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 D0 high byte K111 = 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 D1 low byte K120 = 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 D1 high byte K202 = 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 D2 low byte K123 = 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 D2 high byte K211 = 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 D100 K867 Total D101 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 An even result is indicated by the use of 0(zero) An odd result is indicated by the use of 1(one) D100 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 2 D101 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 When M1161=Off, it is 16-bit conversion mode. Parity When =On, check sum of 6 words from the register specified by D0 (8-bit in one byte, n=10 means to specify D0~D4) and store the sum in the register specified by D100 while the parity bits are stored in D101. M1000 M1161 CCD D0 D100 K6 (S) Content of data(words) D0 low byte K100 = 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 D1 low byte K111 = 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 D2 low byte K120 = 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 D3 low byte K202 = 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 D4 low byte K123 = 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 D5 low byte K211 = 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 D100 K867 Total D101 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 D100 D101 An even result is indicated by the use of 0(zero) An odd result is indicated by the use of 1(one) 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 Parity 7-96 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 API 85 VRRD P Potentiometer Read Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D Note: Operand S available range: n=0~7 Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support this command (VRRD, VRRDP) 16-bit command (5 STEPS) VRRD Continuous VRRDP Pulse 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1178 and M1179. Please refer to following footnote. Command Explanation : Potentiometer number : Destination device for storing read potentiometer VRRD command is used to read the two potentiometers of PLC main processing unit and the number is No.0 and No.1., or it is used to read the six potentiometers of function card and the number is No.2 to No.7. The read data will be converted as value 1 2 from 0 to 255 and stored in destination device. If regarding the potentiometer as the setting value of timer, the setting time of timer can be changed by truning VR. If desiring to get the value more than 255, please multiply by some constant. When =On, the potentiometer of No.0 of VR specified by VRRD command will be converted to BIN value (0~255) in an 8-bit format and stored in D0 temporarily. When X1=On, timer T0 regards the content of D0 as the setting value of timer and starts to count time. VRRD K0 D0 X1 TMR T0 D0 Potentiometer read in order: S=K0 to K7 corresponding to the 8 potentiometers, No.0 to No.7. The following program example use E (E=0~7) to modify, K0E=K0 to K7. The loop of timer convert the potentiometer scale 0~10 to 0~255. The time unit of T0 to T7 is 0.1 second, therefore, the setting value is 0 to 25.5 seconds. DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-97
7 Application Commands API 50-99 M1000 RST E FOR K8 M1000 VRRD K 0E D100E INC E NEXT X10 TMR T0 D100 T0 Y000 X11 TMR T1 D101 T7 Y007 END Operation of FOR~NEXT command: Footnote 1. In FOR~NEXT command area, FOR command specify K8 indicates the loop between FOR~NEXT command is executed 8 times repeatly. After 8 times of, it will continue to execute. 2. Between FOR~NEXT command (INC E), the content of E will be 0, 1, 2 7 and increased by 1(one). Therefore, 8 potentiometer scales will also show as VR0 D100, VR1 D101, VR2 D102 VR7 D107 in order and be read into the specified register. VR means VARIABLE RESISTOR SCALE. For EP/EH models, built-in 2 points VR potentiometer can be used with special D and special M. Device Function M1178 Start potentiometer VR0 M1179 Start potentiometer VR1 D1178 VR0 value D1179 VR1value 7-98 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 API 86 VRSC P Potentiometer Scale Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D Note: S operand available range: n=0~7 Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support this command (VRSC, VRSCP). 16-bit command (5 STEPS) VRSC Continuous VRSCP Pulse 32-bit command - - - - Flag: None Command Explanation : Potentiometer number : Destination device for storing potentiometer scale VRRD command is used to read the potentiometer scale value of two potentiometers on PLC main processing unit and the number is No.0 and No.1., or it is used to read the potentiometer scale value of six potentiometers on function card and the number is No.2 to No.7 (potentiometer scale value is from 0 to 10). The read data will be stored 1 in destination device as an integer from the range 0 to 10. When =On, the potentiometer scale value (0 to10) of No. 0 specified by VRSC command is stored in device D10. VRSC K0 D10 2 Regrad as digital switch: Correspond potentiometer scale 0 to 10. Only one contact is On between M10 to M20. Using DECO command (API 41) can decode the potentiometer scale into M0~M15. When =On, store the potentiometer scale value (0 to 10) of specified No. 1 potentiometer to D1. When X1=On, use DECO command (API 41) to decode the potentiometer scale into M10~M25. VRSC K1 D1 X1 M10 M11 DECO D1 M10 K4 On when volume scale is 0 On when volume scale is 1 M20 On when volume scale is 10 DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-99
7 Application Commands API 50-99 API Applicable models ABS Absolute Value ES EP EH 87 D P Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support this command (ABSP, DABSP). 16-bit command (3 STEPS) Continuous ABS ABSP Pulse 32-bit command (5 STEPS) DABS Continuous DABSP Pulse Flag: None Command Explanation : Specified device for taking absolute value When the command is executed, take the absolute value of the specified device,. This command is usually pulse (ABSP). When goes from OFF ON, take the absolute value of the D0 contents. ABS D0 API 88 D PID PID Calculation Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 S 3 D Note: Operand S 3 uses 14 continuous devices Refer to each model specification for usage range. For the information of the PID usage times during the program, please refer to the footnote. 16-bit command (9 STEPS) Continuous PID - 32-bit command DPID Continuous Flag: None - - - Command Explanation : Target value (SV) : Present measured value (PV) : Parameter : Output value (MV) Specific command for PID calculation control. This scan will execute PID operation when sampling time reaches. PID means Proportion, Integration and Differential. PID control is widely applied on many applications of machine equipments, pneumatic equipments and electric equipments. 7-100 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 : Target value (SV), : Present measured value (PV), for 16-bit command: ~ +14, for 32-bit command: ~ +20: PID command will start to execute after completing all parameters setting and the result will be stored in. Please give no latch register area for content. (if you want to give content a latch register, please reset latch to 0 when program runs.) Please complete the parameter settings before executing PID command. This command will be executed when =ON and the result will be stored in D150. The command will not be executed when =OFF and the previous data won t have any change. PID D0 D1 D100 D150 Footnote PID command is only available in V5.7 and above of ES series models and it is not available for other version. There is no time limit for using PID command but the register number specified by cannot be repeated. For 16-bit commands, uses 15 registers. In above program, the parameter setting area of PID command that indicates are D100~D114. You should use MOV command to transmit settings to the indication register to set before PID command executes. If the registers that parameters indicate are latch area, please use MOVP to execute transmitting. Parameter table of 16-bit : Device No. Function Setting range Explanation : Sampling time (T S ) (unit: 10ms) 1~2,000 (unit: 10ms) +1: Propotional gain (K P) 0~30,000(%) +2: Integral gain (K I) 0~30,000(%) If T S is less than one program scan time, PID command will execute one program scan time. If T S =0, PID command won t be activated. When setting exceeds 30,000, setting will be regarded as 30,000. +3: Differential gain (K D) 0~30,000(%) +4: Control method (Dir) 0: normal control 1: Forward control (E=SV-PV) 2: Inverse control (E=PV-SV) +5: The range that Error value (E) doesn t 0~32,767 work between 5~5 is 0. +6: Upper bound of saturated output (MV) +7: Lower bound of saturated output (MV) -32,768~32,767-32,768~32,767 For example: if the range of error value (E) is 5, output value MV of E For example: if upper bound is set to 1000 and once output (MV) is larger than 1000, it will output 1000. (upper bound should larger than lower bound, i.e. S 3 +6 > S 3 +7.) For example: if lower bound is set to 1000, once output (MV) is less than 1000, it will output 1000. DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-101
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Device No. Function Setting range Explanation +8: +9: Upper bound of saturated integration -32,768~32,767 Lower bound of saturated integration -32,768~32,767 +10, 11: Save accumulation integral value temporality +12: ~ Save previous PV value temporality 32-bit floating point range - For example: if upper bound is set to 1000 and once output is larger than 1000, it will output 1000 and doesn t integrate. (upper bound should larger than lower bound, i.e. S 3 +8 > S 3 +9.) For example: if lower bound is set to 1000, once output is less than 1000, it will output 1000 and doesn t integrate. For example: It is accumulated integration. It is usually for reference but user can clear or modify by requirement. (needs to modify by 32-bit floating point) For example: It is present measured value and usually for reference. But user can modify by requirement. +13: For system use, please don t use it. +14: When parameter setting is out of setting range, it will be set to upper bound or lower bound. But if operation method is out of range, it will be set to 0. PID commands can be used in interrupt subroutine, step point and CJ command. Max. range of sampling error time T S is -(a scan time+1ms)~+(a scan time). If error value has influence on output, please keep the scan time fixable or execute PID command in interrupt subroutine of timer. If the settings of sampling time T S a scan time, CPU will have error code K6740 (PID operation error). At this time, CPU will reset T S = a scan time to execute PID operand. In this situation, please execute PID command in time interrupt subroutine (I6 ~I8 ). The present measured value (PV) must be a stable value before the of PID command. If using input value of DVP-04AD / DVP-04XA / DVP-04PT / DVP-04TC these modules to perform the PID calculation, please pay attention to the A/D conversion time of the above-mentioned modules. 32-bit command occupies 21 registers. If parameter setting area of PID command that designated by is D100~D120, it needs to use MOV command to send setting to designated registers before executing PID command. 7-102 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Parameter table of 32-bit : Device No. Function Setting range Explanation : Sampling time (T S ) (unit: 10ms) 1~2,000 (unit: 10ms) +1: Propotion gain (K P ) 0~30,000(%) +2: Integration gain (K I ) 0~30,000(%) +3: Differential gain (K D ) 0~30,000(%) +4: Control method (Dir) 0: normal control 1: Forward control (SV PV) 2: Inverse control (PV SV) +5, 6: The range that 32-bit Error value (E) 0~2,147,483,647 doesn t work +7, 8: Upper bound of 32-bit saturated output (MV) +9, 10: Lower bound of 32-bit saturated output (MV) +11, 12: Upper bound of 32-bit saturated integrator +13, 14: Lower bound of 32-bit saturated integrator +15, 16: 32-bit temporary accumulation integral value +17, 18: 32-bit save previous PV temporality ~ -2,147,483,648~ 2,147,483,647-2,147,483,648~ 2,147,483,647-2,147,483,648~ 2,147,483,647-2,147,483,648~ 2,147,483,647 32-bit floating point range - If T S is less than one program scan time, PID command will execute one program scan time. If T S =0, PID command won t be activated. When setting exceeds 30,000, setting will be regarded as 30,000. For example: if the range of error value (E) is 5, output value MV of E between 5~5 is 0. For example: if upper bound is set to 1000 and once output (MV) is larger than 1000, it will output 1000. (upper bound should larger than lower bound, i.e. S 3 +7, 8 > S 3 +9, 10.) For example: if lower bound is set to 1000, once output (MV) is less than 1000, it will output 1000. For example: if upper bound is set to 1000 and once output is larger than 1000, it will output 1000 and doesn t integrate. (upper bound should larger than lower bound, i.e. S 3 +11, 12 > S 3 +13, 14.) For example: if lower bound is set to 1000, once output is less than 1000, it will output 1000 and doesn t integrate. For example: It is accumulated integration. It is usually for reference but user can clear or modify by requirement. (needs to modify by 32-bit floating point) For example: It is previous test value and usually for reference. But user can modify by requirement. +19: For system uses, please don t use it. +20: Explanation of 32-bit and 16-bit are almost the same. The different is that capacity of +5 ~ +20. DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-103
7 Application Commands API 50-99 PID Equations This command executes PID calculation according to speed and differential type of measured value. PID operation has three control methods: normal, forward and inverse controls. The control method is set by +4. Besides, the settings that have relation to PID operation is set by ~ +5. PID equations: MV = K * E 1 I + S () t + K * E() t K PV ()S t P D * Control Method PID Equations Forward control, normal control E( t) = SV PV Inverse control E( t) = PV SV Besides, ( t)s integral value of E ( t). PV means the differential value of PV ( t) and E() t S 1 means the You can know that this command is different from general PID command from above equation. The difference is the change on differential usage. To avoid transient differential value is too large when executing general PID command at the first time, this command willl lower output (MV) value once the change of present measured value (PV) is too large by monitoring differential value of present measured value (PV). Symbols explanation: MV : Output value K P : Porprotional gain E () t : PV SV K D Error value. Forward control E( t) SV PV E() t = PV SV : Present measured value : Target value : Differential gain PV ()S t : ( ) Differential value of PV t K I () t S : Integral gain E 1 : Integral value of E ( t) =, Inverse control 7-104 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Control diagram: In dotted-line is PID command 1/S K I + + K P + + G(s) K D S Note and suggestion: 1. When adjusting three major parameters, KP, KI and KD, please adjust KP first (set by experience) and set 0 to KI and KD. When adjusting to control, adjust KI (order from small to big) and KD (order from small to big). Refer to example 4 for adjusting. If KP=100, it means 100%. When KP is less than 100%, error value will attenuate and when KP is more than 100%, error value will amplify. 2. This command should be controlled with many parameters. Please follow setting rule to avoid error occurs. 1: block diagram for using PID command to control position (control method S 3 +4 should be set to 0) Position command (SV) PID MV Plant Encoder 2: block diagram for using PID command to control speed (control method S 3 +4 should be set to 0) PV DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-105
7 Application Commands API 50-99 speed command (S) S+MV AC drive Accel/Decel command (SV) PID Accel/Decel output (MV) speed detection equipment (P) actual accel/decel speed (PV=S-P) 3: block diagram for using PID command to control temperature (action direction S 3 +4 should be set to 1) temperature command (SV) PID add temperature (MV) heater equipment actual temperature(pv) temperature detection equipment 4: suggested steps of PID adjustment b Consider that transfer function of plant G() s = (most general AC drive model is this s + a function) in control system, command value SV is 1 and sampling time Ts is 10ms. Suggested steps are in the following: Step1: set K I and K D to 0 first, then set K P to 5, 10, 20 and 40 in order and record (SV) and (PV) state. The result will be shown as following figure. 1.5 K P=40 K P=20 K P=10 SV=1 1 0.5 K =5 P 0 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 Time (sec) 7-106 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Step 2: In above figure, we will choose the situation when K P is 10. The reason is in the following: When K P is 40, response has overshoot situation. So we won t use it. When K P is 20, PV response is close to SV and won t have overshoot but transient MV will be great due to start-up too fast. We also won t use it. When K P is 10, PV response is close to SV and is smooth. So we consider to use it. When K P is 5, the response is too slow. So we won t use it. 3: When deciding to use the curve K P =10, arrange K I in order from small to big (such as 1, 2, 4, 8) and not to large than K P. Then arrange K D in order from small to big (such as 0.01, 0.05, 0.1 and 0.2) and not to exceed 10% K P. Finally, you can get following PV and SV relation figure. 1.5 PV=SV 1 0.5 K =10,K =8,K =0.2 P I D 0 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 Time (sec) Note: This example is only for reference. Therefore, user should adjust suitable control parameters by himself according to real control system. Application 1: using PID command in pressure control system. (use block diagram of Applications example 1) Control destination: make control system reach pressure target value. Control characteristics: this system should reach to control destination step by step, therefore, it may cause system out of control or overload if reaching control destination too fast. Recommend solve method: Method 1: reach by using long sampling time. Method 2: reach by using delay command and its control block diagram is shown in the following. DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-107
7 Application Commands API 50-99 command value pressure command value (D0) 0 511 A wave pressure command delay SV D1 B wave PID PV command value MV D5 D1110 MV convert to speed voltage convert to command value 0 511 0rpm 3000 rpm 0V 10V 0 255 speed convert to voltage D1116 pressure meter 0V 5V AC Drive 280 0 A wave t 280 250 200 150 100 50 0 B wave application of command delay is in the following: D2 is command interval value D3 is command interval time user can adjust by require t M1002 M0 MOV K10 D3 TMR T0 D3 T0 RST T0 > D0 D1 MOV K50 D2 < D0 D1 MOV K-50 D2 = D0 D1 MOV K0 D2 ADD D2 D1 D1 CMP D2 K0 M10 M10 M12 < D1 D0 MOV D0 D1 > D1 D0 MOV D0 D1 M0 PID D1 D1116 D10 D5 7-108 DVP-PLC Application Manual
7 Application Commands API 50-99 Application 2: speed control and pressure control system is controlled separately. (use block diagram of example 2) Control destination: Adding pressure control system (PID command) after using open loop to control speed for a period time to reach pressure control. Control characteristics: This architecture should use open loop to reach speed control and then reach control target by close loop pressure control due to there is no relation between speed and pressure of these two systems. Besides, you can add command delay function of application 1 to avoid control command of pressure control system changes too fast. Control block diagram is shown in the following. 0 M3 M2=ON 255 0rpm 3000rpm D40 Speed command + D30 D31 + D32 MV convert to accel/decel speed convert to voltage D1116 AC drive D0 pressure command M0=ON D5 MV delay D1 SV PID PV function (optional) D1110 pressure meter M1=ON Partial program application is in the following: DVP-PLC Application Manual 7-109
7 Application Commands API 50-99 M1002 M0 M1 M3 M2 MOV K1000 D40 MOV D0 D1 MOV K0 D5 MOV D40 D30 ADD D30 D31 D32 > D32 K3000 MOV K3000 D32 < D32 K0 MOV K0 D32 DIV D32 K11 D32 > D32 K255 MOV K255 D32 MOV D32 D1116 M1 PID D1 D1110 D10 D5 7-110 DVP-PLC Application Manual
8 Application Commands API 100-149 API 100 MODRD MODBUS Data Read Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 n Note: Operand S 1 available range: K0~K255 Operand n available range: K1<n K6 Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (7 STEPS) MODRD Continuous - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143 Please refer to the footnote of API 80 RS command Command Explanation 1 : Communication address. : Address for reading data : Read data length. MODRD is a specific command for the MODBUS ASCII mode and RTU mode communication. The RS-485 communication build-in Delta VFD series drives (except VFD-A series) all have MODBUS communication. Therefore, MODRD command can be used to read communication data from Delta VFD series AC drives. Please refer to the Delta VFD series manual for more details. is the address for reading data. If the address setting is illegal, the user will be informed by an error message. The error code will be stored in D1130, while M1141 turn to be ON. The feedback (return) data from peripheral equipment will be stored in D1070 to D1085. After receiving the feedback (return) data completed, PLC will check if all feedback (return) data are correct. If there is an error, then M1140 will be ON. If using ASCII mode, PLC will convert the data to value and store them in D1050 to D1055 because the feedback (return) data are all ASCII characters. D1050 to D1055 will be invalid if using RTU mode. After M1140 or M1141 is On, a correct data will be transmit to peripheral equipment again. If the feedback (return) data are all correct, then the flag M1140, M1141 will be clear. Communication between PLC and VFD-S series AC drives (ASCII Mode, M1143=Off) M1002 X1 MOV H87 D1120 Setting communication protocol 9600, 8, E, 1 SET M1120 Communication protocol latched MOV K100 D1129 Setting communication time out 100ms Setting communication command: MODRD K1 H2101 K6 device address 01 data address H2101 data length 6 words SET M1122 Setting transmission flag M1127 receiving completed Process of receiving data RST M1127 PLC will convert the receiving data stored in D1070~D1085 from ASCII character to value and store the value in D1050~D1055. receiving completed and flag reset DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-1
8 Application Commands API 100-149 PLC VFD-S, PLC transmitting: 01 03 2101 0006 D4 VFD-S PLC, PLC receiving: 01 03 0C 0100 1766 0000 0000 0136 0000 3B PLC transmitting data register (transmitting messages) Register DATA D1089 low 0 30 H ADR 1 ADR (1,0) is AC drive D1089 high 1 31 H ADR 0 address D1090 low 0 30 H CMD 1 CMD (1,0) is command D1090 high 3 33 H CMD 0 code D1091 low 2 32 H D1091 high 1 31 H D1092 low 0 30 H Starting data address D1092 high 1 31 H D1093 low 0 30 H D1093 high 0 30 H D1094 low 0 30 H Number of data (count by word) D1094 high 6 36 H D1095 low D 44 H LRC CHK 1 LRC CHK (0,1) is error D1095 high 4 34 H LRC CHK 0 check code PLC receiving data register (response messages) Register DATA D1070 low 0 30 H ADR 1 D1070 high 1 31 H ADR 0 D1071 low 0 30 H CMD 1 D1071 high 3 33 H CMD 0 D1072 low 0 30 H D1072 high C 43 H Number of data (count by byte) D1073 low 0 30 H D1073 high 1 31 H Content of D1074 low 0 30 H address 2101 H D1074 high 0 30 H D1050 = 0100 H D1075 low 1 31 H D1075 high 7 37 H D1076 low 6 36 H D1076 high 6 36 H D1077 low 0 30 H D1077 high 0 30 H D1078 low 0 30 H D1078 high 0 30 H D1079 low 0 30 H D1079 high 0 30 H D1080 low 0 30 H D1080 high 0 30 H D1081 low 0 30 H D1081 high 1 31 H D1082 low 3 33 H D1082 high 6 36 H D1083 low 0 30 H D1083 high 0 30 H D1084 low 0 30 H D1084 high 0 30 H Content of address 2102 H Content of address 2103 H Content of address 2104 H Content of address 2105 H Content of address 2106 H D1085 low 3 33 H LRC CHK 1 D1085 high B 42 H LRC CHK 0 PLC automatically convert ASCII codes to value and store the converted value in PLC automatically convert ASCII codes to value and store the converted value in D1051 = 1766 H PLC automatically convert ASCII codes to value and store the converted value in D1052 = 0000 H PLC automatically convert ASCII codes to value and store the converted value in D1053 = 0000 H PLC automatically convert ASCII codes to value and store the converted value in D1054 = 0136 H PLC automatically convert ASCII codes to value and store the converted value in D1055 = 0000 H 8-2 DVP-PLC Application Manual
8 Application Commands API 100-149 2 Communication between PLC and VFD-S series AC drives (RTU Mode, M1143=On) M1002 MOV SET MOV H83 M1120 K100 D1120 Setting communication protocol 9600, 8, E, 1 Communication protocol latched Setting communication D1129 time out 100ms X1 M1127 receiving completed SET M1143 Setting as RTU mode Setting communication command: MODRD K1 H2102 K2 device address 01 data address H2102 data length 2 words SET M1122 Setting transmission flag Process of receiving data The receiving data in HEX value format is stored in D1070~D1085. receiving completed RST M1127 and flag reset PLC VFD-S, PLC transmitting: 01 03 2102 0002 6F F7 VFD-S PLC, PLC receiving: 01 03 04 1700 0000 FE 5C PLC transmitting data register (transmitting messages) Register DATA D1089 low 01 H Address D1090 low 03 H Function D1091 low 21 H D1092 low 02 H Starting data address D1093 low 00 H D1094 low 02 H Number of data (count by word) D1095 low 6F H CRC CHK Low D1096 low F7 H CRC CHK High PLC receiving data register (response messages) Register DATA D1070 low 01 H Address D1071 low 03 H Function D1072 low 04 H Number of data (count by byte) D1073 low 17 H D1074 low 70 H Content of address 2102 H D1075 low 00 H D1076 low 00 H Content of address 2103 H D1077 low FE H CRC CHK Low D1078 low 5C H CRC CHK High 3 PLC connects to VFD-S series AC drive (ASCII Mode, M1143=Off). When communication is time-out, retry when error occurs during receiving data or sending address. When =On, read data from address H2100 of device 01 (VFD-S) and save in D1070~D1085 with ASCII format. PLC will auto convert its content to numeral to save in D1050~D1055. DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-3
8 Application Commands API 100-149 Flag M1129 will be On when communication is time-out and program will send request from M1129 and ask M1122 to read again. Flag M1140 will be On when receive error and program will send request from M1140 and ask M1122 to read again. Flag M1141 will be On when received address error and program will send request from M1141 and ask M1122 to read again. M1002 MOV H87 D1120 Setting communication protocol to 9600, 8, E, 1 SET M1120 Communication protocol latched M1129 M1140 M1141 M1127 MOV K100 D1129 Setting communication time-out to 100ms Setting communication command: MODRW K1 H2100 K 6 device address 01, data address H2101 data length 6 words SET M1122 Setting transmission request Communication time-out Retry data receive error Retry sending address error Retry The receiving data in ASCII receiving completed format stored in D1070-D1085. PLC will convert to numeral handle received data and save into D1050-D1055 automatically. RST M1127 receiving completed and flag reset RST M1129 communication time-out and flag reset Footnote Rising-edge contact (LDP, ANDP, ORP) and falling-edge contact (LDF, ANDF, ORF) can t be used before API 100 MODRD, API 105 RDST, API 150 MODRW (FUNCTION CODE H03) these three commands. Otherwise, the data stored in received register will be incorrect. 8-4 DVP-PLC Application Manual
8 Application Commands API 100-149 API 101 MODWR MODBUS Data Write In Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 n Note: Operand S 1 available range: K0~K255 Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (7 STEPS) MODWR Continuous - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143 Please refer to the footnote of API 80 RS command Command Explanation 1 : Communication address, K0~K255 : Address for writing data : Write data MODWR is a specific command for the MODBUS ASCII mode and RTU mode communication. The RS-485 communication build-in Delta VFD series drives (except VFD-A series) all have MODBUS communication. Therefore, MODWR command can be used to read communication data from Delta VFD series AC drives. Please refer to the Delta VFD series manual for more details. is the address for reading data. If the address setting is illegal, the user will be informed by an error message. The error code will be stored in D1130, while M1141 turn to be ON. For example, 4000H is an illegal address to VFD-S, then M1141 will turn ON, D1130=2. For the information of error codes, please refer to VFD-S series user manual. The feedback (return) data from peripheral equipment will be stored in D1070 to D1076. After receiving the feedback (return) data completed, PLC will check if all feedback (return) data are correct. If there is an error, then M1140 will be ON. After M1140 or M1141 is On, a correct data will be transmit to peripheral equipment again. If the feedback (return) data are all correct, then the flag M1140, M1141 will be clear. Communication between PLC and VFD-S series AC drives (ASCII Mode, M1143= Off) M1002 X1 receiving completed M1123 MOV SET H87 M1122 D1120 Setting communication protocol 9600, 8, E, 1 SET M1120 Communication protocol latched MOV K100 D1129 Setting communication time out 100ms Setting communication command: MODRW K1 H0100 H1770 device address 01 data address H0100 data H1770 Setting transmission flag The receiving data in ASCII character Process of receiving data format is stored in D1070~D1085 receiving completed RST M1123 and flag reset DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-5
8 Application Commands API 100-149 PLC VFD-B, PLC transmitting: 01 06 0100 1770 71 VFD-B PLC, PLC receiving: 01 06 0100 1770 71 PLC transmitting data register (transmitting messages) Register DATA D1089 low 0 30 H ADR 1 D1089 high 1 31 H ADR 0 D1090 low 0 30 H CMD 1 D1090 high 6 36 H CMD 0 D1091 low 0 30 H D1091 high 1 31 H D1092 low 0 30 H Data address D1092 high 0 30 H D1093 low 1 31 H D1093 high 7 37 H D1094 low 7 37 H Data contents D1094 high 0 30 H D1095 low 7 37 H LRC CHK 1 D1095 high 1 31 H LRC CHK 0 ADR (1,0) is AC drive address CMD (1,0) is command code LRC CHK (0,1) is error check code PLC receiving data register (response messages) 2 Register DATA D1070 low 0 30 H ADR 1 D1070 high 1 31 H ADR 0 D1071 low 0 30 H CMD 1 D1071 high 6 36 H CMD 0 D1072 low 0 30 H D1072 high 1 31 H D1073 low 0 30 H Data address D1073 high 0 30 H D1074 low 1 31 H D1074 high 7 37 H D1075 low 7 37 H Data content D1075 high 0 30 H D1076 low 7 37 H LRC CHK 1 D1076 high 1 31 H LRC CHK 0 Communication between PLC and VFD-S series AC drives (RTU Mode, M1143=On) M1002 MOV SET MOV H87 M1120 K100 D1120 Setting communication protocol 9600, 8, E, 1 Communication protocol latched Setting communication D1129 time out 100ms X1 receiving completed M1123 SET M1143 Setting as RTU mode MODRW K1 H2000 SET M1122 H12 Setting transmission flag Setting communication command: device address 01 data address H2000 write in data H12 The receiving data in HEX value Process of receiving data format is stored in D1070~D1085. receiving completed RST M1123 and flag reset 8-6 DVP-PLC Application Manual
8 Application Commands API 100-149 PLC VFD-S, PLC transmitting: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07 VFD-S PLC, PLC receiving: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07 PLC transmitting data register (transmitting messages) Register DATA D1089 low 01 H Address D1090 low 06 H Function D1091 low 20 H D1092 low 00 H Data address D1093 low 00 H D1094 low 12 H Data content D1095 low 02 H CRC CHK Low D1096 low 07 H CRC CHK High PLC receiving data register (response messages) Register DATA D1070 low 01 H Address D1071 low 06 H Function D1072 low 20 H D1073 low 00 H Data address D1074 low 00 H D1075 low 12 H Data content D1076 low 02 H CRC CHK Low D1077 low 07 H CRC CHK High 3 PLC connects to VFD-S series AC drive (ASCII Mode, M1143=Off). When communication is time-out, retry when error occurs during receiving data or sending address. When =On, PLC will write data H1770(K6000) into address H0100 of device 01 (VFD-S). Flag M1129 will be On when communication is time-out and program will send request from M1129 and ask M1122 to read again. Flag M1140 will be On when receive error and program will send request from M1140 and ask M1122 to read again. Flag M1141 will be On when received address error and program will send request from M1141 and ask M1122 to read again. DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-7
8 Application Commands API 100-149 M1002 MOV H87 D1120 Setting communication protocol to 9600, 8, E, 1 SET M1120 Communication protocol latched M1129 M1140 M1141 M1123 MOV K100 D1129 Setting communication time-out to 100ms Setting communication command: MODRW K1 H0100 H1770 device address 01, data address H0100 data H1770 SET M1122 Setting transmission request Communication time-out Retry data receive error Retry sending address error Retry receiving completed handle received data The receiving data in ASCII format stored in D1070-D1085. RST RST M1123 M1129 receiving completed and flag reset communication time-out and flag reset Footnote For detail information of the related flags and special registers, please refer to the footnote of API 80 RS command. If using rising-edge (LDP, ANDP, ORP)/falling-edge (LDF, ANDF, ORF) before API 101 MODWR and API 150 MODRW (Function Code H06 and H10), it needs to start transmission request M1122 to act correct. API 102 FWD VFD-A Series Drive Forward Command Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 n Note: Operand S 1 available range: K0~K31 Operand n available range: n=k1or K2 Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (7 STEPS) FWD Continuous - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143 Please refer to the footnote of API 80 RS command 8-8 DVP-PLC Application Manual
8 Application Commands API 100-149 API 103 REV VFD-A Series Drive Reverse Command Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 n Note: Operand S 1 available range: K0~K31 Operand n available range: n=k1or K2 Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (7 STEPS) REV Continuous - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143 Please refer to the footnote of API 80 RS command API 104 STOP VFD-A Series Drive Stop Command Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 n Note: Operand S 1 available range: K0~K31 Operand n available range: n=k1or K2 Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (7 STEPS) STOP Continuous - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143 Please refer to the footnote of API 80 RS command. Command Explanation : Communication address. : AC drive master frequency. : Command object. FWD/REV/STOP are communication commands for Delta A/H series drive, make sure to use the communication overtime setting (D1129) when applying these commands. indicates AC drive master frequency. AC drive master frequency setting for VFD-A series, K0000 to K4000, represents 0.0Hz to 400.0Hz. For H series AC drive, the setting of K0000 to K1500 represent 0Hz to 1500Hz. command object, n=1 is for one drive. n=2 communicates to all drives connected. The feedback (return) data from perpherial equipment will be stored in D1070 to D1080. After receiving the feedback (return) data completed, PLC will check if all feedback (return) data are correct. If there is an error, then M1142 will be ON. If n = 2, PLC will not receive the data. DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-9
8 Application Commands API 100-149 Communication between PLC and VFD-A series AC drives, retry for communication time-out and received data error. M1002 Setting communication MOV H0073 D1120 protocol 4800, 8, O, 1 SET M1120 Communication protocol latched M1129 M1142 MOV K100 D1129 Setting communication time-out 100ms Setting communication command: FWD K0 K500 K1 device address 0 frequency setting is 500Hz K1 is the AC drive for SET M1122 designated address Setting transmission flag communication time-out Retry received data error Retry M1123 receiving completed Process of receiving data The receiving data in ASCII character format is stored in D1070~D1085 RST M1123 receiving completed and flag reset PLC VFD-A, PLC transmitting: C 0001 0500 VFD-A PLC, PLC receiving: C 0001 0500 PLC transmitting data register (transmitting messages) Register DATA D1089 low C 43 H Command starting word D1090 low 03 H Check sum D1091 low 01 H Command object D1092 low 0 30 H D1093 low 0 30 H D1094 low 0 30 H Communication address D1095 low 1 31 H D1096 low 0 30 H D1097 low 5 35 H D1098 low 0 30 H Operation command D1099 low 0 30 H PLC receiving data register (response messages) Register DATA D1070 low C 43 H Command starting word D1071 low 03 H Check sum D1072 low 06 H D1073 low 0 30 H D1074 low 0 30 H D1075 low 0 30 H D1076 low 1 31 H D1077 low 0 30 H D1078 low 5 35 H D1079 low 0 30 H D1080 low 0 30 H Reply authorization (correct: 06H, error: 07 H) Communication address Operation command 8-10 DVP-PLC Application Manual
8 Application Commands API 100-149 API 105 RDST VFD-A Series Drive Status Read Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 n Note: Operand S 1 available range: K0~K31 Operand n available range: n=k0~ K3 Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (5 STEPS) RDST Continuous - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143 Please refer to the footnote of API 80 RS command Command Explanation : Communication address, K0~K31 : Status object RDST is a specific communication convenience command for Delta VFD-A series AC drives and used to read the status of AC drive. : Status object n = 0 Frequency command n = 2 Output current n = 1 Output frequency n = 3 Operation command The feedback (return) data stored in the low byte of address D1070 to D1080 are total 11 words (please refer to VFD-A series manual). Q, S, B, Uu, Nn, ABCD feedback (return) Explanation Data storage Q Starting word: Q (51H). D1070 low S Checksum code: 03H. D0171 low B Command authorization. correct: 06H, error: 07H. D1072 low U Communication address (address: 00~31). Uu = D1073 low u ( 00 ~ 31 ) indicated by ASCII. D1074 low N D1075 low Status object (00~03). Nn = ( 00~03 ) indicated by ASCII. n D1076 low A Status data. The content of ABCD will be different D1077 low B according to the status objects (00~03). 00~03 indicate D1078 low C frequency, current and operation mode respectively. D1079 low D Please refer to the explanation shown below for details. D1080 low Nn = 00 Frequency command = ABC.D(Hz) Nn = 01 Output command = ABC.D(Hz) Nn = 02 Output current = ABC.D(A) PLC will automatically convert ASCII word of ABCD to value and store the value in D1050. For example, if ABCD = 0600, PLC will automatically convert ASCII word to the value of K0600 (0258 H) and store it in the special register in D1050. Nn = 03 Operation command DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-11
8 Application Commands API 100-149 Footnote A = 0 Stop, 5 JOG(FWD) 1 FWD operation, 6 JOG(REV) 2 Stop, 7 JOG(REV) 3 REV operation, 8 Abnormal 4 JOG(FWD), PLC will automatically convert ASCII word of A to value and store the value in D1051. For example, if A = 3, PLC will automatically convert ASCII word to the value of K0003 (03 H) and store it in the special register in D1051. B = b7 b6 b5 b4 Operation command source 0 0 0 0 Digital keypad 0 0 0 1 1 st Step Speed 0 0 1 0 2 nd Step Speed 0 0 1 1 3 rd Step Speed 0 1 0 0 4 th Step Speed 0 1 0 1 5 th Step Speed 0 1 1 0 6 th Step Speed 0 1 1 1 7 th Step Speed 1 0 0 0 JOG frequency 1 0 0 1 Analog signal frequency command 1 0 1 0 RS-485 communication interface 1 0 1 1 Up/Down control b3 = 0 No DC braking stop 1 DC braking stop b2 = 0 No braking startup 1 DC braking startup b1 = 0 FWD, 1 REV b0 = 0 Stop, 1 Operation PLC will store the value of B in special auxiliary relays M1168(b0)~M1175(b7) CD = 00 No abnormal record 10 OcA 01 oc 11 Ocd 02 ov 12 Ocn 03 oh 13 GFF 04 ol 14 Lv 05 ol1 15 Lv1 06 EF 16 cf2 07 cf1 17 bb 08 cf3 18 ol2 09 HPF 19 PLC will automatically convert ASCII word of CD to value and store the value in D1052. For example, if CD = 06, PLC will automatically convert ASCII word to the value of 0006 H and store it in the special register in D1052. Rising-edge contact (LDP, ANDP, ORP) and falling-edge contact (LDF, ANDF, ORF) before API 100 MODRD, API 105 RDST, API 150 MODRW (FUNCTION CODE 03) these three commands. Otherwise, the data stored in received register will be incorrect. 8-12 DVP-PLC Application Manual
8 Application Commands API 100-149 API 106 RSTEF VFD-A Series Drive Abnormal Reset Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 n Note: Operand S 1 available range: K0~K31 Operand n available range: n=k1 or K2 Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (5 STEPS) RSTEF Continuous - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143 Please refer to the footnote of API 80 RS command. Command Explanation : Communication address. : Command object. RSTEF is a specific communication convenience command for Delta VFD-A series AC drives and used to reset the AC drive after an abnormal. Footnote : Command object, n=1 is for one drive. n=2 communicates to all drives connected. The feedback (return) data from peripheral equipment will be stored in D1070 to D1089. If n = 2, there is no feedback (return) data. Rising-edge contact (LDP, ANDP, ORP) and falling-edge contact (LDF, ANDF, ORF)before API 100 MODRD, API 105 RDST, API 150 MODRW (FUNCTION CODE H03) these three commands. Otherwise, the data stored in received register will be incorrect. For detail information of the related flags and special registers, please refer to the footnote of API 80 RS command. API 107 LRC P LRC Error Check Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S n D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support this command (LRC, LRCP) 16-bit command (7 STEPS) LRC Continuous LRCP Pulse 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1161 8/16-bit mode setting DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-13
8 Application Commands API 100-149 Command Explanation : Starting device for the operation of sum check (ASCII mode) : Operand numbers : Starting device for storing the operation result. LRC check: please refer to the footnote. : operand numbers should be even and range is from K1~K256. If it is out of range, error will be occurred and commond won t be executed. At this time, M1067 and M1068 will be On and error code 0E1A will be record in D1067. 16-bit conversion mode: When M1161=Off, hexadecimal data that start from the source devcie will be divided into upper 8-bit and lower 8-bit and perform the operation of LRC command on numbers. Then, store the result into upper and lower 8-bit of device. 8-bit conversion mode: When M1161=On, divide hexadecimal data that start from the source devcie into upper 8-bit (invalid data) and lower 8-bit and perform the operation of LRC command on numbers. Then, store the result into lower 8-bit of device and it will use two resisters (upper 8-bit of all be zero (0)). Communication between PLC and VFD-B series AC drives (ASCII Mode, M1143= Off), (8-bit Mode, M1161=On), writing transmitting data in advance to read six data from VFD-B parameter address H2101. M1002 MOV H86 D1120 Setting communication protocol 9600, 7, E, 1 SET M1120 Communication protocol latched transmission request pulse X10 receiving completed M1123 MOV SET K100 D1129 write transmitting data in advance M1122 sending request RS D100 K17 D120 K35 Process of receiving data RST M1123 Setting communication time out 100ms receiving completed and flag reset PLC VFD-B, PLC transmitting: : 01 03 2101 0006 D4 CR LF PLC transmitting data register (transmitting messages) Register DATA D100 low : 3A H STX D101 low 0 30 H ADR 1 ADR (1,0) is AC drive D102 low 1 31 H ADR 0 address D103 low 0 30 H CMD 1 CMD (1,0) is command D104 low 3 33 H CMD 0 code D105 low 2 32 H D106 low 1 31 H D107 high 0 30 H Starting data address D108 low 1 31 H D109 low 0 30 H D110 low 0 30 H D111 low 0 30 H Number of data (count by word) D112 low 6 36 H 8-14 DVP-PLC Application Manual
8 Application Commands API 100-149 Register DATA D113 low D 44 H LRC CHK 1 D114 low 4 34 H LRC CHK 0 D115 low CR A H D116 low LF D H END LRC CHK (0,1) is error check code The LRC CHK (0,1) above is error check code and it can be calculated by LRC command (8-bit Mode, M1161=On). M1000 LRC D101 K12 D113 LRC check: 01 H + 03 H + 21 H + 01 H + 00 H + 06 H = 2C H, then take the complementary of 2, D4H. At the time, D (44 H) is stored in the lower 8-bit of D113 and 4 (34 H) is stored in the lower 8-bit of D114. Footnote ASCII mode of communication data, the format is listed below: STX : Start word = : (3AH) Address Hi 0 Communication: Address Lo 1 8-bit address consists of 2 ASCll codes Function Hi 0 Function code: Function Lo 3 8-bit function consists of 2 ASCll codes DATA (n-1). DATA 0 2 1 0 Data content: n 8-bit data content consists of 2n ASCll codes 2 0 0 0 2 LRC CHK Hi D LRC check: LRC CHK Lo 7 8-bit check sum consists of 2 ASCll codes END Hi CR End word: END Lo LF END Hi = CR (0DH), END Lo = LF(0AH) Communication protocol is made of MODBUS ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange). Each byte consists of 2 ASCII characters. LRC check is the added sum from Address to Data contents. For example, 01H + 03H + 21H + 02H + 00H + 02H = 29H, then take the complementary of 2, D7H. API 108 CRC P CRC Error Check Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S n D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support this command (CRC, CRCP) 16-bit command (7 STEPS) CRC Continuous CRCP Pulse 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1161 8/16-bit mode setting DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-15
8 Application Commands API 100-149 Command Explanation : Starting device for the operation of sum check (RTU mode) : Operand numbers : Starting device for storing the operation result. CRC check: please refer to the footnote. : range is from K1~K256. If it is out of range, error will be occurred and commond won t be executed. At this time, M1067 and M1068 will be On and error code 0E1A will be record in D1067. 16-bit conversion mode: When M1161=Off, hexadecimal data that start from the source devcie will be divided into high byte and low byte. To perform the operation of CRC command on numbers and store the result into upper and lower 8-bit of device. 8-bit conversion mode: When M1161=On, divide hexadecimal data that start from the source devcie into high byte (invalid data) and low byte. To perform the operation of CRC command on numbers and store the result into low byte of device and it will use two resisters (upper 8-bit of all be zero (0)). When PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive (RTU Mode, M1143=ON), (16-bit Mode, M1161=ON), writing transmitting data, H12, in advance into VFD-S parameter address H2000 M1002 MOV H87 D1120 Setting communication protocol 9600, 8, E, 1 SET M1120 Communication protocol latched MOV K100 D1129 Setting communication time out 100ms SET M1143 RTU Mode transmission request pulse SET M1161 8-bit Mode write transmitting data in advance SET M1122 sending request X10 receiving completed RS D100 K8 D120 K8 Process of receiving data M1123 RST M1123 receiving completed and flag reset PLC VFD-S, PLC transmitting: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07 8-16 DVP-PLC Application Manual
8 Application Commands API 100-149 PLC transmitting data register (PLC transmitting messages) Register DATA D100 low 01 H Address D101 low 06 H Function D102 low 20 H D103 low 00 H Data address D104 low 00 H D105 low 12 H Data content D106 low 02 H CRC CHK 0 D107 low 07 H CRC CHK 1 The CRC CHK (0,1) above is error check code and it can be calculated by CRC command (8-bit Mode, M1161=On). M1000 CRC D100 K6 D106 Footnote CRC check: At the time, 02 H is stored in the lower 8-bit of D106 and 07 H is stored in the lower 8-bit of D107. RTU mode of communication data, the format is listed below: START Please refer to the following explanation Address Communication address: 8-bit binary CRC check: Function DATA (n-1). DATA 0 CRC CHK Low CRC CHK High END Function code: 8-bit binary Data content: n 8-bit data CRC check: 16-bit CRC check sum consists of 2 8-bit binary Please refer to the following explanation CRC check starts from Address and ends in Data content. CRC check starts from Address and ends in Data content. Its calculation is as follows: Step 1: Load the 16-bit register (the CRC register) with FFFFH. Step 2: Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte message command with the 16-bit CRC register of the low byte, then store the result into the CRC register. Step 3: Shift the CRC register one bit to the right and fill 0 in the higher bit. Step 4: Check the value that shifts to the right. If it is 0, store the new value from step 3 into the CRC register, otherwise, Exclusive OR A001H and the CRC register, then store the result into the CRC register. Step 5: Repeat step 3 and 4 and calculates the 8-bit. Step 6: Repeat Steps 2~5 for the next 8-bit message command, till all the message commands are processed. And finally, the obtained CRC register value is the CRC check value. What should be noticed is that the CRC check must be placed interchangeably in the check sum of the message command. DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-17
8 Application Commands API 100-149 API 109 SWRD P Digital Switch Read Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support this command (SWRD, SWRDP) 16-bit command (2 STEPS) SWRD Continuous SWRDP Pulse 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1104~M1111 Digital switch status Command Explanation : Device for storing read value Store the value that read from digital switch function card into the low byte of. Every digital switch has an associated BIT. If executing this command without digital switch function card, there is no result and no error message. There are total 8 DIP switchs on the digital switch function card. After using SWRD command to read value, these 8 switchs are in association with the contact M0 to M7. M1000 SWRD K2M0 M0 Y0 M1 MOV K2M0 D0 M2 CNT C0 K10 M3 RST C0 M4 TMR T0 K100 Footnote M0 to M7 can be executed by using each contact command. When END command is executed, the process of input will complete. REF (I/O) refresh)command will be invalid. The min. read one time bits are 4 bits when SWRD command use the input data of digital switch function card (i.e. K1Y* or K1M* or K1S*). When digital switch function card is inserted, 8 DIP switches correspond to M1104~M1111 individually. 8-18 DVP-PLC Application Manual
8 Application Commands API 100-149 API 110 D ECMP P Binary Floating Point Comparison Applicable models ES EP EH - - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D Note: Operand D occupies 3 continuous devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DECMP, DECMPP are available. ES series models do not support pulse command (DECMPP) 16-bit command - - - - 32-bit command (13 STEPS) DECMP Continuous DECMPP Pulse Flag: None Command Explanation : Comparison value 1 of binary floating point : Comparison value 2 of binary floating point : Comparison result, 3 continuous devices used. The data of is compared to the data of and the result (>, =, <) is showed by three bit devices in. If the source operand or is indicated as constant K or H, the integer value will automatically be converted to binary floating point to compare. If the specified device is M10, M10~M12 will automatically be used. When =On and execute DECMP command, one of M10~M12 will be On. When =Off and not to execute DECMP command, M10~M12 will retain the state before = Off. Connect M10~M12 in series or in parallel and then the result of,, are given. Please use RST or ZRST command to reset the result. DECMP D0 D100 M10 M10 M11 M12 It is On when (D1A D0)>(D101A D100) It is On when (D1A D0)=(D101A D100) It is On when (D1A D0)<(D101A D100) Footnote As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric Values for detail. DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-19
8 Application Commands API 100-149 API 111 D EZCP P Binary Floating Point Zone Comparison Applicable models ES EP EH - - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 S D Note: Operand D occupies 3 continuous devices. Operand S 1 should be smaller than operand S 2. Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DEZCP, DEZCPP are available. ES series models do not support pulse command (DEZCPP). 16-bit command - - - - 32-bit command (17 STEPS) DEZCP Continuous DEZCPP Pulse Flag: None Command Explanation : Lower limit of binary floating point zone comparison : Upper limit of binary floating point zone comparison : Comparison value of binary floating point : Comparison result, 3 continuous devices used. The data of is compared to the data range of ~ and the result (>, =, <) is showed by three bit devices in. If the source operand or is indicated as constant K or H, the integer value will automatically be converted to binary floating point to compare. When >, will be used as upper and lower limit for the comarison. If the specified device is M10, M10~M12 will automatically be used. When X1=On and execute DEZCP command, one of M0~M2 will be On. When X1=Off and not to execute EZCP command, M0~M2 will retain the state before X1= Off. Please use RST or ZRST command to reset the result. M10 M11 M12 DEZCP D0 D10 D20 M0 It is On when (D1A D0)>(D21A D20) it is On when (D1A D0) < (D21A D20)<(D11A D10) It is On when (D21A D20)>(D11A D10) Footnote As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric Values for detail. 8-20 DVP-PLC Application Manual
8 Application Commands API 100-149 API 116 D RAD P Degree Radian Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command is only valid for 32-bit commands DRAD and DRADP. 16-bit command - - - - 32 -bit command (9 STEPS) DRAD Continuous Pulse DRADP Flag: M1020 Zero flag, M1021 Borrow flag, M1022 Carry flag Command Explanation : data source (degree) : Coverted result (radian). Using following function to convert degree to radian: Radian = degree (π/180) If absolut of conversion result is larger than max. floating point, carry flag M1022=On. If absolut of conversion result is less than min. floating point, borrow flag M1021=On. If conversion result is 0, zero flag M1020=On. When =On, convert degree value of specific binary floating point (D1, D0) to radian to save in (D11, D10) and the content is binary floating point. DRAD D0 D10 D 1 D 0 degree value binary floating point D 11 D 10 RAD value ( degree X π/ 180) binary floating point Footnote As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric Values for detail. API 117 D DEG P Radian Degree Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command is only valid for 32-bit commands DDEG and DDEGP. 16-bit command - - - - 32 -bit command (9 STEPS) DDEG Continuous DDEGP Pulse Flag: M1020 Zero flag, M1021 Borrow flag and M1022 Carry flag DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-21
8 Application Commands API 100-149 Command Explanation : data source (radian). : Coverted result (degree). Using following function to convert radian to degree: degree = radian (180/π) If absolut of conversion result is larger than max. floating point, carry flag M1022=On. If absolut of conversion result is less than min. floating point, borrow flag M1021=On. If conversion result is 0, zero flag M1020=On. When =On, convert degree value of specific binary floating point (D1, D0) to radian to save in (D11, D10) and the content is binary floating point. DDEG D0 D10 D 1 D 0 radian value binary floating point D 11 D 10 degree value (radian X 180/ π) binary floating point Footnote As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric Values for detail. API 118 D EBCD P Convert Binary Floating Point to Decimal Floating Point Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DEBCD, DEBCDP are available. ES series models do not support pulse commands (DEBCDP) 16-bit command - - - - 32 -bit command (9 STEPS) DEBCD Continuous DEBCDP Pulse Flag: None Command Explanation : Data source : Coverted result Convert binary floating point value at the register specified by to decimal floating point value stored in the register specified by. PLC floating point is operated by the binary floating point format. DEBCD command is the specific command used to convert binary floating point to decimal floating point. If absolut of conversion result is larger than max. floating point, carry flag M1022=On. If absolut of conversion result is less than min. floating point, borrow flag M1021=On. If conversion result is 0, zero flag M1020=On. 8-22 DVP-PLC Application Manual
8 Application Commands API 100-149 When =On, the binary floating point value in D1, D0 will be converted to decimal floating point stored in D3, D2. DEBCD D0 D2 Binary Floating Point D1 D0 32 bits for real number, 8 bits for exponent 1 bit for symbol bit Exponent Real number Exponent Decimal Real number Floating Point D3 D2 [D2] * 10 [D3] Footnote As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric Values for detail. API 119 D EBIN P Convert Decimal Floating Point to Binary Floating Point Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DEBIN, DEBINP are available. ES series models do not support pulse commands (DEBINP). 16-bit command - - - - 32 -bit command (9 STEPS) DEBIN Continuous DEBINP Pulse Flag: None Command Explanation : Data source : Coverted result Convert decimal floating point value at the register specified by to binary floating point value stored in the register specified by. For example, =1234, +1= 8 will become =1.2345 x 10 5 must be a binary floating point format. and +1 represent the real number and exponent of the floating point number respectively. DEBIN command is the specific command used to convert decimal floating point to binary floating point. DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-23
8 Application Commands API 100-149 1 When X1=On, the decimal floating point value in D1, D0 will be converted to binary floating point stored in D3, D2. X1 DEBIN D0 D2 Exponent Real number Decimal Exponent D1 D0 [D1] * 10 [D0] Floating Point Real number 2 Footnote Binary Floating Point D3 DEBIN D2 D0 23 bits for real number, 8 bits for exponent 1 bit for symbol bit Before perform floating point operation, must use FLT (API 49) command to convert BIN integer to binary floating point. The source data (the value which will be converted) should be a BIN integer. However, DEBIN command can be used to convert floating point value to binary floating point value. When =On, move K314 to D0 and move K-2 to D1 to generate decimal floating point format (3.14 = 314 10-2 ). MOVP K314 D0 K314 D0 [D1] -2 314 x10 MOVP K-2 D1 K-2 D1 [D0] D2 (D1, D0) (D3, D2) 314 x10 Binary Floating Point As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric Values for detail. API 120 D EADD P Binary Floating Point Addition Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DEADD, DEADDP are available. ES series models do not support pulse command (DEADDP). 16-bit command - - - - 32-bit command (13 STEPS) DEADD Continuous DEADDP Pulse Flag: M1020 (Zero flag), M1021 (Borrow flag) and M1022 (Carry flag) 8-24 DVP-PLC Application Manual
8 Application Commands API 100-149 Command Explanation : Augend : Addend : Addition result + =. The floating point value in the register specified by and are added and the result is stored in the register specified by. All source data will be operated in floating point format and the result will be also stored in floating point format. If the source operand or is indicated as constant K or H, the integer value will automatically be converted to binary floating point to perform the addition operation. and can specify the same register number (the same device can be used as and ). If in this case and on the continuous of the DEADD command, the data in the register will be added one time in every scan program during the cycle when the condition contact is On. Therefore, the pulse command (DEADDP) is generally used. If absolut of conversion result is larger than max. floating point, carry flag M1022=On. If absolut of conversion result is less than min. floating point, borrow flag M1021=On. If conversion result is 0, zero flag M1020=On. 1 2 Footnote When =On, add binary floating point value of (D1, D0) and binary floating point value of (D3, D2) and store the result in (D11, D10). DEADD D0 D2 D10 When X2=On, add binary floating point value of (D11, D10) and K1234 (automatically converted to binary floating point) and store the result in (D21, D20). X2 DEADD D10 K1234 D20 As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric Values for detail. API 121 D ESUB P Binary Floating Point Subtraction Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DESUB, DESUBP are available. ES series models do not support pulse command (DESUBP). 16-bit command - - - - 32-bit command (13 STEPS) DESUB Continuous DESUBP Pulse Flag: M1020 (Zero flag), M1021 (Borrow flag) and M1022 (Carry flag) DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-25
8 Application Commands API 100-149 Command Explanation : Minuend : Subtrahend : Subtraction result =. The floating point value in the register specified by is subtracted from the floating point value in the register specified by and the result is stored in the register specified by. All data will be operated in floating point format and the result will be also stored in floating point format. If the source operand or is indicated as constant K or H, the integer value will automatically be converted to binary floating point to perform the subtraction operation. 1 and can specify the same register number (the same device can be used as and ). If in this case and on the continuous of the DESUB command, the data in the register will be subtracted one time in every scan program during the cycle when the condition contact is On. Therefore, the pulse command (DESUBP) is generally used. If absolut of conversion result is larger than max. floating point, carry flag M1022=On. If absolut of conversion result is less than min. floating point, borrow flag M1021=On. If conversion result is 0, zero flag M1020=On. When =On, binary floating point value of (D3, D2) is subtracted from binary floating point value of (D1, D0) and the result is stored in (D11, D10). DESUB D0 D2 D10 2 When X2=On, binary floating point value of (D1, D0) is subtracted from K1234 (automatically converted to binary floating point) and the result is stored in (D11, D10). X2 DESUB K1234 D0 D10 Footnote As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric Values for detail. API 122 D EMUL P Binary Floating Point Multiplication Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DEMUL, DEMULP are available. ES series models do not support pulse command (DEMULP). 16-bit command - - - - 32-bit command (13 STEPS) DEMUL Continuous DEMULP Pulse Flag: M1020 Zero flag, M1021 Borrow flag and M1022 Carry flag 8-26 DVP-PLC Application Manual
8 Application Commands API 100-149 Command Explanation : Multiplicand : Multiplier : Multiplication result =. The floating point value in the register specified by is multiplied with the floating point value in the register specified by and the result is stored in the register specified by. All data will be operated in floating point format and the result will be also stored in floating point format. If the source operand or is indicated as constant K or H, the integer value will automatically be converted to binary floating point to perform the multiplication operation. 1 and can specify the same register number (the same device can be used as and ). If in this case and on the continuous of the DEMUL command, the data in the register will be multiplied one time in every scan program during the cycle when the condition contact is On. Therefore, the pulse command (DEMULP) is generally used. If absolut of conversion result is larger than max. floating point, carry flag M1022=On. If absolut of conversion result is less than min. floating point, borrow flag M1021=On. If conversion result is 0, zero flag M1020=On. When X1=On, binary floating point value of (D1, D0) is multiplied with binary floating point (D11, D10) and the result is stored in (D21, D20). X1 DEMUL D0 D10 D20 2 Footnote When X2=On, binary floating point value of (D1, D0) is multiplied with K1234 (automatically converted to binary floating point) and the result is stored in (D11, D10). X2 DEMUL K1234 D0 D10 As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric Values for detail. API 123 D EDIV P Binary Floating Point Division Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DEDIV, DEDIVP are available. ES series models do not support pulse command (DEDIVP). 16-bit command - - - - 32-bit command (13 STEPS) DEDIV Continuous DEDIVP Pulse Flag: M1020 Zero flag, M1021 Borrow flag and M1022 Carry flag DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-27
8 Application Commands API 100-149 Command Explanation : Dividend : Divisor : Quotient and Remainder =. The floating point value in the register specified by is divided by the floating point value in the register specified by and the result is stored in the register specified by. All data will be operated in floating point format and the result will be also stored in floating point format. If the source operand or is indicated as constant K or H, the integer value will automatically be converted to binary floating point to perform the division operation. 1 If is 0 (zero), the operation will fail and will result in an operand error, then this command will not be executed. If absolut of conversion result is larger than max. floating point, carry flag M1022=On. If absolut of conversion result is less than min. floating point, borrow flag M1021=On. If conversion result is 0, zero flag M1020=On. When X1=On, binary floating point value of (D1, D0) is divided by binary floating point (D11, D10) and the remainder is stored in (D21, D20). X1 DEDIV D0 D10 D20 2 When X2=On, binary floating point value of (D1, D0) is divided by K1234 (automatically converted to binary floating point) and the result is stored in (D11, D10). X2 DEDIV D0 K10 D10 Footnote As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric Values for detail. API 124 D EXP P Perform Exponent Operation of Binary Floating Point Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DEXP, DEXPP are available. ES series models do not support pulse command (DEXPP). 16-bit command - - - - 32-bit command (13 STEPS) DEXP Continuous Pulse DEXPP Flag: M1020 Zero flag, M1021 Borrow flag and M1022 Carry flag 8-28 DVP-PLC Application Manual
8 Application Commands API 100-149 Command Explanation : operand source device. : operand result device. For example, the base e =2.71828 and exponent is : EXP[ +1, ]=[ +1, ] No matter positive or negative value are valid for S. Specific register D needs to use 32-bit format and floating point for operating. Therefore, S needs to convert to floating point. When operand D= e S, e=2.71828 and S is specific source data. Error flag M1067 and M1068 read D1067 and D1068. If absolut of conversion result is larger than max. floating point, carry flag M1022=On. If absolut of conversion result is less than min. floating point, borrow flag M1021=On. If conversion result is 0, zero flag M1020=On. When M0=On, convert (D0, D1) to binary floating point and save in register (D10, D11). When M1=On, use (D10, D11) to be exponent to perform exponent operation. The value is binary floating point and save in register (D20, D21). When M2=On, convert (D20, D21) binary floating point to decimal floating point and save in register (D30, D31). (at this time, D31 means D30 to the power of 10) M0 RST M1081 M1 M2 DEXP D10 D20 DEBCD D20 D30 Footnote As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric Values for detail. API 125 D LN P Perform Natural Logarithm Operation of Binary Floating Point Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DLN, DLNP are available. ES series models do not support pulse command (DLNP). 16-bit command - - - - 32-bit command (13 STEPS) DLN Continuous Pulse DLNP Flag: M1020 Zero flag, M1021 Borrow flag and M1022 Carry flag DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-29
8 Application Commands API 100-149 Command Explanation : operand source device. : operand result device. For example, perform natural logarithm operation ln to operand : LN[ +1, ]=[ +1, ] Only positive number is valid for S. Specific register D needs to use 32-bit format and floating point for operating. Therefore, S needs to convert to floating point. When operand ed=s, operand D=lnS and S is specific source data. If absolut of conversion result is larger than max. floating point, carry flag M1022=On. If absolut of conversion result is less than min. floating point, borrow flag M1021=On. If conversion result is 0, zero flag M1020=On. When M0=On, convert (D0, D1) to binary floating point and save in register (D10, D11). When M1=On, use (D10, D11) to be real number to perform natural logarithm operation. The value is binary floating point and save in register (D20, D21). When M2=On, convert (D20, D21) binary floating point to decimal floating point and save in register (D30, D31). (at this time, D31 means D30 to the power of 10) M0 RST M1081 M1 M2 DLN D10 D20 DEBCD D20 D30 Footnote As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric Values for detail. API 126 D LOG P Perform Logarithm Operation of Binary Floating Point Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DLOG, DLOGP are available. ES series models do not support pulse command (DLOGP). 16-bit command - - - - 32-bit command (13 STEPS) DLOG Continuous Pulse DLOGP Flag: M1020 Zero flag, M1021 Borrow flag and M1022 Carry flag 8-30 DVP-PLC Application Manual
8 Application Commands API 100-149 Command Explanation : operand base device. : operand source device. : operand result device. Perform logarithm operation to and and save the result to. Only positive number is valid for S2 (positive and negative number are valid for S1). Specific register D needs to use 32-bit format and floating point for operating. Therefore, S1 and S2 need to convert to floating point. Consider S1 D =S2, D=? Log S2 S1 =D Consider S1=5,S2=125, D=log 125 5 =? S1 D =S2 5 D =125 D=log 5125 =3 If absolut of conversion result is larger than max. floating point, carry flag M1022=On. If absolut of conversion result is less than min. floating point, borrow flag M1021=On. If conversion result is 0, zero flag M1020=On. When M0=On, convert (D0, D1) and (D2, D3) to binary floating point and save in register (D10, D11) and (D12, D13) individually. When M1=On, use (D10, D11) and (D12, D13) binary floating point of 32-bit registers to perform logarithm operation and save the result in 32-bit register (D20, D21). When M2=On, convert (D20, D21) binary floating point of 32-bit registers to decimal floating point and save in register (D30, D31). (at this time, D31 means D30 to the power of 10) M0 RST M1081 M1 M2 D2 D12 D10 D12 DEBCD D20 D30 D20 Footnote As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric Values for detail. API 127 D ESQR P Square Root of Binary Floating Point Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D Note: Essential condition: S only can be a positive value. (S 0) Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DESQR, DESQRP are available. ES series models do not support pulse command (DESQRP). 16-bit command - - - - 32-bit command (9 STEPS) DESQR Continuous DESQRP Pulse Flag: M1020 (Zero flag), M1067 ( error) DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-31
8 Application Commands API 100-149 Command Explanation : Source device : Destination device which store the result This command performs a square root operation on the floating point value of source device and stores the result at the destination device. All data will be operated in floating point format and the result will be also stored in floating point format. If the source operand or is indicated as constant K or H, the integer value will automatically be converted to binary floating point to perform the addition operation. 1 If operation result of is 0 (zero), the Zero flag M1020=On. only can be a positive value. Performing any square root operation on a negative value will result in an operation error and this command will not be executed. M1067 and M1068 will be On and error code 0E1B will be record in D1067. When =On, the square root of binary floating point (D1, D0) is stored in the register specified by (D11, D10) after the operation of square root. DESQR D0 D10 2 Footnote (D1, D0) (D11, D10) binary floating point binary floating point When X2=On, the square root of K1234 (automatically converted to binary floating point) is stored in (D11, D10). X2 DESQR K1234 D10 As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric Values for detail. API 128 D POW P Perform Power Operation of Binary Floating Point Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DPOW, DPOWP are available. ES series models do not support pulse command (DPOWP). 16-bit command - - - - 32-bit command (13 STEPS) DPOW Continuous DPOWP Pulse Flag: no. 8-32 DVP-PLC Application Manual
8 Application Commands API 100-149 Command Explanation : base device. : exponent device. : operand result device. Perform power operation to binary floating point and and save the result to. POW [ +1, ]^[ +1, ]= Only positive number is valid for S1 and S2. Specific register D needs to use 32-bit format and floating point for operating. Therefore, S1 and S2 need to convert to floating point. When S1 S2 =D, D=? If S1=5,S2=3, D=53=? D=53=125 Error flag M1067 and M1068 read D1067 and D1068. If absolut of conversion result is larger than max. floating point, carry flag M1022=On. If absolut of conversion result is less than min. floating point, borrow flag M1021=On. If conversion result is 0, zero flag M1020=On. When M0=On, convert (D0, D1) and (D2, D3) to binary floating point and save in register (D10, D11) and (D12, D13) individually. When M1=On, use (D10, D11) and (D12, D13) binary floating point of 32-bit registers to perform power operation and save the result in 32-bit register (D20, D21). When M2=On, convert (D20, D21) binary floating point of 32-bit registers to decimal floating point and save in register (D30, D31). (at this time, D31 means D30 to the power of 10) M0 RST M1081 M1 M2 D2 D12 D10 D12 DEBCD D20 D30 D20 Footnote As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric Values for detail. API 129 D INT P Convert Binary Floating Point to BIN Integer Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support this command (INTP, DINTP). 16-bit command (5 STEPS) INT Continuous INTP Pulse 32-bit command (9 STEPS) DINT Continuous Pulse DINTP Flag: M1020 (Zero flag), M1021 (Borrow flag), M1022 (Carry flag) DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-33
8 Application Commands API 100-149 Command Explanation : Source device : Destination device which store the result The binary floating point value of the register specified by is converted to BIN integer and stored in the register specified. The decimal of Bin integer will be discarded. This command is the inverse of the API 49 (FLT) command. If operation result of is 0 (zero), the Zero flag M1020=On. If there is any decimal discarded, the Borrow flag M1021=On. If the result exceeds the following setting range (an overflow occurs), the Carry flag M1022=On. 16-bit command : -32,768~32,767 32-bit command : -2,147,483,648~2,147,483,647 When =On, the binary floating point value of (D1, D0) will be converted to BIN integer and the result is stored in (D10). The decimal of BIN integer will be discarded. When X1=On, the binary floating point value of (D21, D20) will be converted to BIN integer and the result is stored in (D31, D30). The decimal of BIN integer will be discarded. INT D0 D10 X1 DINT D20 D30 Footnote As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric Values for detail. API 130 D SIN P Sine Operation of Binary Floating Point Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D Note: The data specified in S must be within the range 0 to 360 ; i.e., 0 S<360 Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DSIN, DSINP are available. ES series models do not support pulse command (DSINP). 16-bit command - - - - 32-bit command (9 STEPS) DSIN Continuous Pulse DSINP Flag: M1018 flag for radian/angle. 8-34 DVP-PLC Application Manual
8 Application Commands API 100-149 Command Explanation : Specified RAD value : Area where calculated result is stored. Source desgnated by can be radian or angle by flag M1018. When M1018=Off, it is set to radian mode. RAD=angle π/180. When M1018=On, it is set to angle mode. Angle range: 0 angle<360. The SIN value of an angle data specified by is calculated and the calculated result is stored in the register specified by. Following shows the relation between radian and result: R S: Radian R: Result 1-2 - 3 2 - -2 0 3 2 2 2 2 S -1 1 When M1018=Off, it is radian mode. When =On, specify RAD value (D1, D0). Calculate SIN value of angle and store the result in (D11, D10). The result stored in (D11, D10) are all in binary floating point format. M1002 RST M1018 DSIN D0 D10 D1 D0 RAD value (degree x / 180) binary floating point 2 3 D1 D10 COS value binary floating point When M1018=Off, it is radian mode. Select angle from inputs and X1 and convert it to RAD value to calculate SIN value. MOVP K30 K6 (K30 D10) X1 MOVP K60 K6 (K60 D10) M1000 FLT D10 D1120 (D10 D15, D14) binary floating point ( /180) (D21, D20) DEDIV K31415926 K1800000000 D20 binary binary floating point floating point DEMUL D14 D20 D40 (D15, D14) degree x /180 (D41, D40) RAD binary floating point DSIN D40 D50 (D41, D40) RAD (D51, D50) SIN binary floating point When M1018=On, it is anlge mode. When =On, it designates angle value of (D1, D0). Angle range is: 0 angle value<360. After converting to SIN value to save in (D11, D10) with binary floating point number. DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-35
8 Application Commands API 100-149 M1002 SET M1018 DSIN D0 D10 D 1 D 0 angle value D 11 D 10 SIN value (binary floating point) Footnote As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric Values for detail. API 131 D COS P Cosine Operation of Binary Floating Point Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D Note: The data specified in S must be within the range 0 to 360 ; i.e., 0 S<360 Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DCOS, DCOSP are available. ES/EP series models do not support this command (DCOS, DCOSP). 16-bit command - - - - 32-bit command (9 STEPS) DCOS Continuous DCOSP Pulse Flag: None Command Explanation : Specified RAD value. : Area where calculated result is stored. Source desgnated by can be radian or angle by flag M1018. When M1018=Off, it is set to radian mode. RAD=angle π/180. When M1018=On, it is set to angle mode. Angle range: 0 angle<360. The COS value of an angle data specified by is calculated and the calculated result is stored in the register specified by. Following shows the relation between radian and result: R S: Radian R: Result 1-2 3-2 - -2 0 3 2 2 2 2-1 S Flag M1018 radian/angle switch: when M1018=Off, is RAD value. When M1018=On, is angle value (0-360). 8-36 DVP-PLC Application Manual
8 Application Commands API 100-149 1 When M1018=Off, it is radian mode. When =On, specify RAD value (D1, D0). Calculate COS value of angle and store the result in (D11, D10). The value in (D1, D0) and the result stored in (D11, D10) are all in binary floating point format. M1002 RST M1018 DCOS D0 D10 D1 D0 RAD value (degree x / 180) binary floating point 2 COS value D1 D10 binary floating point When M1018=On, it is angle mode. When =On, it is angle of specific (D1, D0). Angle range: 0 angle<360. After converting to COS value, save in (D11, D10) with binary floating point. M1002 SET M1018 DCOS D0 D10 D 1 D 0 angle value D 1 D 10 COS value (binary floating point) Footnote As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric Values for detail. API 132 D TAN P Tangent Operation of Binary Floating Point Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D Note: The data specified in S must be within the range 0 to 360 ; i.e., 0 S<360 Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DTAN, DTANP are available. ES series models do not support pulse command (DTANP). 16-bit command - - - - 32-bit command (9 STEPS) DTAN Continuous DTANP Flag: None Pulse DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-37
8 Application Commands API 100-149 Command Explanation : Specified RAD value. : Area where calculated result is stored. Source desgnated by can be radian or angle by flag M1018. When M1018=Off, it is set to radian mode. RAD=angle π/180. When M1018=On, it is set to angle mode. Angle range: 0 angle<360. The TAN value of an angle data specified by is calculated and the calculated result is stored in the register specified by. Following shows the relation between radian and result: R S: Radian R: Result -2 3-2 - 2-2 0-1 1 3 2 2 S 1 When M1018=Off, it is radian mode. When =On, specify RAD value (D1, D0). Calculate TAN value of angle and store the result in (D11, D10). The value in (D1, D0) and the result stored in (D11, D10) are all in binary floating point format. M1002 RST M1018 DTAN D0 D10 D1 D0 RAD value (degree x / 180) binary floating point 2 D11 D10 TAN value binary floating point When M1018=On, it is angle mode. When =On, it is angle of specific (D1, D0). Angle range: 0 angle<360. After converting to TAN value, save in (D11, D10) with binary floating point. M1002 SET M1018 DTAN D0 D10 D 1 D 0 angle value D 1 D 10 TAN value (binary floating point) Footnote As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric Values for detail. 8-38 DVP-PLC Application Manual
8 Application Commands API 100-149 API 133 D ASIN P Arc Sine Operation of Binary Floating Point Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DASIN, DASINP are available. 16-bit command - - - - 32-bit command (9 STEPS) DASIN Continuous DASINP Pulse Flag: None Command Explanation : Specified source (binary floating point) : Area where calculated result is stored. ASIN value=sin 1 Following shows the relation between radian and result: R S: Radian R: Result 2-1,0 0 1,0 S - 2 When =On, specify binary floating point (D1, D0). Calculate ASIN value and save the result in (D11, D10). The result stored in (D11, D10) is all in binary floating point format. DASIN D0 D10 D1 D0 binary floating point Footnote D11 D10 ASIN value binary floating point As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric Values for detail. DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-39
8 Application Commands API 100-149 API 134 D ACOS P Arc Cosine Operation of Binary Floating Point Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DACOS, DACOSP are available. 16-bit command - - - - 32-bit command (9 STEPS) DACOS Continuous DACOSP Pulse Flag: None Command Explanation : Specified source (binary floating point) : Area where calculated result is stored ACOS value=cos 1 Following shows the relation between radian and result: R S: Radian R: Result 2-1,0 0 1,0 S When =On, specify binary floating point (D1, D0). Calculate ACOS value and save the result in (D11, D10). The result stored in (D11, D10) is all in binary floating point format. DACOS D0 D10 D1 D0 binary floating point Footnote D11 D10 ACOS value binary floating point As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric Values for detail. 8-40 DVP-PLC Application Manual
8 Application Commands API 100-149 API 135 D ATAN P Arc Tangent Operation of Binary Floating Point Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DATAN, DATANP are available. 16-bit command - - - - 32-bit command (9 STEPS) DATAN Continuous DATANP Flag: None Pulse Command Explanation : Specified source (binary floating point) : Area where calculated result is stored. ATAN value=tan 1 Following shows the relation between radian and result: R S: Radian R: Result 2 0 S - 2 When =On, specify binary floating point (D1, D0). Calculate ATAN value and save the result in (D11, D10). The result stored in (D11, D10) is all in binary floating point format. DATAN D0 D10 D1 D0 binary floating point Footnote D11 D10 ATAN value binary floating point As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric Values for detail. DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-41
8 Application Commands API 100-149 API 136 D SINH P Hyperbolic Sine Operation of Binary Floating Point Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DSINH, DSINHP are available. 16-bit command - - - - 32-bit command (9 STEPS) DSINH Continuous DSINHP Pulse Flag: None Command Explanation : Specified source (binary floating point) : Area where calculated result is stored SINH value=(e s -e -s )/2 When =On, specify binary floating point (D1, D0). Calculate SINH value and save the result in (D11, D10). The result stored in (D11, D10) is all in binary floating point format. DSINH D0 D10 D1 D0 binary floating point Footnote D11 D10 SINH value binary floating point As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric Values for detail. API 137 D COSH P Hyperbolic Cosine Operation of Binary Floating Point Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DCOSH, DCOSHP are available. 16-bit command - - - - 32-bit command (9 STEPS) DCOSH Continuous DCOSHP Pulse Flag: None Command Explanation : Specified source (binary floating point) : Area where calculated result is stored COSH value=(e s +e -s )/2 When =On, specify binary floating point (D1, D0). Calculate COSH value and save the result in (D11, D10). The result stored in (D11, D10) is all in binary floating point format. 8-42 DVP-PLC Application Manual
8 Application Commands API 100-149 DCOSH D0 D10 D1 D0 binary floating point Footnote D11 D10 COSH value binary floating point As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric Values for detail. API 138 D TANH P Hyperbolic Tangent Operation of Binary Floating Point Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range. This command must use the double word (32-bit) format, only 32-bit command DTANH, DTANHP are available. 16-bit command - - - - 32-bit command (9 STEPS) DTANH Continuous DTANHP Pulse Flag: None Command Explanation : Specified source (binary floating point) : Area where calculated result is stored TANH value=(e s -e -s )/(e s +e -s ) When =On, specify binary floating point (D1, D0). Calculate ASIN value and save the result in (D11, D10). The result stored in (D11, D10) is all in binary floating point format. DTANH D0 D10 D1 D0 binary floating point Footnote D11 D10 TANH value binary floating point As for the operation function of floating point, please refer CH 5.3 Handling of Numeric Values for detail. DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-43
8 Application Commands API 100-149 API 144 D GPWM P General Pulse Width Modulation Output Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D Note: Please refer to command explanation for usage range of operand S1, S2 and D. Operand S2 occupies 3 devices. Operand S1 should be less or equal to operand S2. Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command - - - - 32-bit command (13 STEPS) DPOW Continuous DPOWP Pulse Flag: no. Command Explanation : Pulse output width. : Pulse output cycle. : pulse output device. is specified as pulse output width as t:0~32,767ms. is specified as pulse output cycle as T:1~32,767ms,. +1 and +2 is for system, please don t use them. pulse output devices: Y, M and S. When GPWM command has been executed, the pulse output width and pulse output cycle is output through pulse output device. When 0, there is no pulse output from the pulse output device. When, the pulse output device will be always On. and can be modified when executing PWM command. When =On, Y10 will output following pulse. When =Off, Y10 output will also be Off. t T GPWM K1000 K2000 Y10 t=1000ms Output Y10 Footnote T=2000ms This command counts by scan cycle so the maximum offset will be a PLC scan cycle. The value of, and ( - ) should be larger than PLC scan cycle. Otherwise, there will be error occurs for GPWM outputs. Please notice that if using this command in subroutine or interruption, GPWM output may not be accurate. 8-44 DVP-PLC Application Manual
8 Application Commands API 100-149 API 145 FTC Fuzzy Temperature Control Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 S 3 D Note: Refer to command explanation for operand S 1, S 2 and D usage range. Operand S 3 occupies continuous 6 devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range. Refer to footnote for PID usage times in program. 16-bit command (9 STEPS) Continuous FTC - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: None Command Explanation : Target value (SV) : Present measured value (PV) : Parameter : Output value (MV) Operand S 1 usage range is 1~3000 to show 0.1 C ~300 C. The unit is 0.1 C. If ( +1) (refer to footnote) sets to K0 to show 0.1 C~300 C. Operand S 2 usage range is 1~3000 to show 0.1 C ~300 C. The unit is 0.1 C. If ( +1) (refer to footnote) sets to K0 to show 0.1 C~300 C. Therefore, when user gets the result that analog converts to digital from temperature sensor, it needs to convert to the value during 1~3000 by using the four fundamental operations of arithmetic. is sampling time setting. If setting is less than K1, command won t act. If setting exceeds K200, it will be regarded as K200. The setting of ( +1) only can be K0 (means C) and K1 (means F). When setting is not these two settings (K0 and K1), this setting will be set to K0. Operand D usage range is 0~100 to show 0%~100%. User should use with other commands by heater type when using this command. For example, it can use with GPWM command to control pulse output as shown in footnote (example 1). Finishing parameter setting before executing FTC command. When =On, command is executed and save result in D150. When =Off, command is not executed and previous data is unchanged. FTC D0 D1 D100 D150 DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-45
8 Application Commands API 100-149 Footnote The setting of is in the following: Device Function Usage range Explanation : ~ Sampling time (T S ) (unit: 10ms) 1~200 (unit: 100ms) +1: Temperature unit K0= C,K1= F +2: +5: Control Diagram: For system uses, please don t use. FTC When T S is less than a scan time, PID command will execute for a scan time. When T S =0, it won t act. Therefore, the minimum setting of T S should be larger than program scan time. When setting exceeds 200, it will be regarded as 200. When setting is not these two settings (K0 and K1), this setting will be set to K0. + e Fuzzy Controller MV PV Temperature Sensor Attention and suggestion: It is recommended to set sampling time to twice and above of sampling time of temperature sensor to get better temperature control. 1: control diagram FTC SV D0 + e Fuzzy MV PWM Controller D10 Y10 PV D1 Pt Module Temperature Sensor Following time chart is using GPWM command to output Y10. (t is pulse output width and T is pulse output cycle time) 8-46 DVP-PLC Application Manual
8 Application Commands API 100-149 T11 T10 The setting of FTC command is sampling time D2=K10 (unit: 10ms) and temperature unit is D3=K0( ). Other example for using with temperature control are shown in following. M3 FTC D0 <> D10 D11 MOV D10 D11 SET M4 <= D11 K0 RST Y10 CJ P0 > D11 K99 SET Y10 M4 > T10 K99 CJ SET P0 Y10 M3 T11 T10 Y10 RST TMR TMR RST SET M4 T10 T11 Y10 Y10 RST T10 DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-47
8 Application Commands API 100-149 API Applicable models ES EP EH 147 D SWAP Swap High/Low Byte P Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S Note: If operand D uses with device F, it is only available in 16-bit command. Refer to each model specification for usage range. The continuous command (SWAP, DSWAP) are only provided in V4.9(included) or later version of ES series models and EP/EH series models. 16-bit command (5 STEPS) SWAP Continuous SWAPP Pulse 32-bit command (9 STEPS) DSWAP Continuous DSWAPP Flag: None Pulse Command Explanation : Device for swapping high/low byte. When being 16-bit command, swapping the content of high/low byte. When being 32-bit command, swapping the content of high/low byte.of two registers separately. This command is usually pulse (SWAPP, DSWAPP). 1 When =ON, swapping the content of high/low byte of D0. SWAPP D0 D0 High Byte Low Byte 2 When =ON, swapping upper 8-bit and lower 8-bit of D11 and swapping upper 8-bit and lower 8-bit of D10. DSWAP D10 D11 D10 High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte 8-48 DVP-PLC Application Manual
8 Application Commands API 100-149 API 148 D MEMR P Data Backup MEMORY Read Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F m D n Note: The setting range of m operand: EP series model: m=0~1,599; EH series models: m=0~9,999. The setting range of D operand: EP series model: D2000~D4999; EH series model: D2000~D9999 The setting range of n operand: 16-bit command: EP series model: n=k1~ K1,600; EH series models: n=k1 K8,000. 32-bit command: EP series model: n=k1~ K800; EH series models: n=k1 K4,000. Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (7 STEPS) MEMR Continuous MEMRP Pulse 32-bit command (13 STEPS) DMEMR Continuous DMEMRP Pulse Flag: M1101 (Please refer the following footnote for detail) Command Explanation 1 : Address (Constant) for reading data of file register. : Address (Constant) for storing read data. : Quantity of one time reading data. EP/EH series models use this command to read the data of file register and store the read data in the data register. EP series models provide 1,600 numbers of 16-bit file registers and EH series models provide 10,000 numbers of 16-bit file registers. Operand and for EP series models don t support register E and F. If operands, and is out of range, operand error will be occurred. M1067, M1068=On and error code 0E1A will be recorded in D1067. 16-bit command MEMR reads 100 items data from the 10 th address of file register and store the read data in the data register started from D2000. When =On, the command is executed. When goes to Off, the command is not executed and the content of previous read data has no change. MEMR K10 D2000 K100 2 32-bit command DMEMR reads 100 items data from the 20 th address of file register and store the read data in the data register started from D3000. When =On, the command is executed. When goes to Off, the command is not executed and the content of previous read data has no change. DMEMR K20 D3000 K100 DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-49
8 Application Commands API 100-149 API 149 D MEMW P Data Backup MEMORY Write In Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S m n Note: The setting range of S operand: EP series model: S=D2000~D4999; EH series model: S=D2000~D9999. The setting range of m operand: EP series model: m=k0~k1,599; EH series models: m=k0~k9,999. The setting range of n operand: 16-bit command: EP series model: n= K1~ K1,600; EH series models: n=k1 K8,000. 32-bit command: EP series model: n=k1~ K800; EH series models: n=k1 K4,000. Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (7 STEPS) MEMW Continuous MEMWP Pulse 32-bit command (13 STEPS) DMEMW Continuous DMEMW P Pulse Flag: M1101 (Please refer the following footnote for detail) Command Explanation : Address (Constant) for data writing in, D2000~D9999 : Address (Constant) for file register writing in, K0~K9,999 : Quantity of one time reading data, K1~K8,000 EP/EH series models use this command to read the data of file register and store the read data in the data register. EP series models provide 1,600 numbers of 16-bit file registers and EH series models provide 10,000 numbers of 16-bit file registers. Operand and for EP series models don t support register E and F. If operands, and is out of range, operand error will be occurred. M1067, M1068=On and error code 0E1A will be recorded in D1067. When =On, the double word command DMEMW is executed. Write 100 items 32-bit data started from D2001, D2000 in the file register address 0 to 199. When =On, the command is executed. When goes to Off, the command is not executed and the content of previous read data has no change. DMEMW D2000 K0 K100 File Register EH series models: when EH series PLC startup or goes from STOP to RUN, EH series PLC will determine M1101 (if startup the function of file register), D1101 (file register starts to give number, K0~K9,999), D1102 (numbers of file registers of being read, K1~K8,000), D1103 (destination device which stores the read data of file register, specified data register D start to give number, K2,000~K9,999) and decide if automatically transfer the content of file register to the specified data register. EH series models: When the value of D1101 is less than 0, or the value of D1103 is less than 2,000 or more than 9,999, reading data from file register to data register is disabled. 8-50 DVP-PLC Application Manual
8 Application Commands API 100-149 EP series models: when EP series PLC startup or goes from STOP to RUN, EP series PLC will determine M1101 (if startup the function of file register), D1101 (file register starts to give number, K0~K1,600), D1102 (numbers of file registers of being read, K1~K8,000), D1103 (destination device which stores the read data of file register, specified data register D start to give number, K2,000~K4,999) and decide if automatically transfer the content of file register to the specified data register. EP series models: When the value of D1101 is less than 0 or more than 1,600, or the value of D1103 is less than 2,000 or more than 4,999, reading data from file register to data register is disabled. When file register read data to data register D, if the address of file register or data register exceeds the limit range, PLC will stop reading. As for the data read and write in of file register, in PLC program only can use API command 147 MEMR to read and use API command 148 MEMW to write in. For detailed information about file registers, please refer to CH2 section 2.8.3. There are 32,768 file registers. The file registers don t have real number, therefore the read/write in function of file register should be performed by the API command 147 MEMR and 148 MEMW, or using a peripheral equipment HPP and WPLSoft software. The destination device is not always continuous. One part is on the inner SRAM and the other part is on the SRAM CARD. If user did not insert the SRAM CARD and the read address exceeds 2,000 addresses, then the read value will be all 0(zero). Related special relays and registers of file register: Flag Function Explanation M1101 If startup the function of file register, Latched, Default is Off Special Register Function Explanation D1101 File register starts to give number K0~K9,999, Latched, Default is 0 D1102 Numbers of file registers of being read K1~K8,000, Latched, Default is 0 D1103 Destination device which stores the read data of file register, specified data register D start to give number K2,000~K9,999, Latched, Default is 2,000 DVP-PLC Application Manual 8-51
9 Application Commands API 150-199 API 150 MODRW MODBUS Data Read/ Write In Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 S 3 S n Note: The setting range of S 1 operand : K0~K255 The limit of S 2 operand is specified as K3(H3), K6(H6), K16(H10) The setting range of n operand: n=k1~k8 This command (MODRW) is only provided in V4.9(included) or later version of ES series models and EP/EH series models. 16-bit command (11 STEPS) MODRW Continuous - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1120~M1131, M1140~M1143 (Please refer the following footnote) Command Explanation : Connection device address : Function code : Address of being read or write : Register of being read/write : Length of read/write data : Connection device address (UNIT ADDRESS). The setting range K0 to K255. : FUNCTION CODE. For example: the command of AC drive or DVP-PLC to read many items is H03. Write command of AC drive or DVP-PLC is H06 and the command of write many items is H10. Only above three function codes are provided and the other function codes are disabled. Please refer the following program examples. 1 : Device address that being read/write data (DEVICE ADDRESS). This is an inner device address of connection device. If the address is illegal to the specified device, there will be fault code store in D1130 and at the same time, M1141 will be ON. For example, 4000H is illegal to VFD-S, M1141 will be ON and D1130 = 2. Please refer to VFD-S user manual for the details of fault codes. : Source or destination of being read/write (SOURCE or DESTINATION). User can set register to write data length in advance or store data after reading. : Read/Write data length (DATA LENGTH). The specified range K1~K8 (WORD). Function code K3(H3) : read many items data 1. PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive. (ASCII Mode when M1143=OFF) 2. PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive. (RTU Mode when M1143=ON) Received data is stored in 16 continuous registers that start from D0 with ASCII format when in ASCII mode. PLC will convert the content to Hexadecimal and store in registers D1296~D1311 automatically. M1131=ON when it starts converting to hexadecimal and M1131 will be OFF after completing converting. DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-1
9 Application Commands API 150-199 1 User can use MOV, DMOV or BMOV commands to move D1296~D1311 that store hexadecimal data to general register to use. For ES series, other command is invalid to this area. Received data is stored in 8 continuous registers that start from D0 and specified by users in hexadecimal format in RTU mode. At the same time, D1296~D1311 is invalid. In ASCII mode or RTU mode, PLC will store the transmission data in D1256~D1295. Users can move these register data to general register by using MOV, DMOV or BMOV commands. Other commands are invalid to this area. Data received from AC drive is stored in registers specified by users. After complete receiving data, PLC will automatically check if the received data is correct. If there is any fault, M1140 will be set to ON. If inner data address of AC drive is illegal to specified device, it will have fault code. Fault code will be stored in D1130 and M1141 will be on. For example, 8000H is illegal to VFD-S and M1141=ON and D1130=2. Please refer to VFD-S user manual to fault code. After M1140=ON or M1141=ON, it will transmit a correct data to AC drive. If received data is correct, M1140 and M1141 will be reset. M1002 MOV H87 D1120 setting communication protocol 9600, 8, E, 1 SET M1120 communication protocol X10 M1127 MOV M1143 MODRW SET K100 M1122 D1129 RTU mode setting K1 connection device address K1 handling received data K3 function code K3 setting communication time out 100ms read many items data H2100 data address H2100 Setting sending request D0 K8 data stored read/write data register length (word) ASCII mode : received data is stored in 16 consecutive registers that start from D0 with ASCII format when in ASCII mode. PLC will convert the content to hexadecimal and store in registers D1296~D1311 automatically RTU mode : received data is stored in 8 consecutive registers that start from D0 and specified by users in hexadecimal type in RTU mode RST M1127 receiving data completed and reset flag 9-2 DVP-PLC Application Manual
9 Application Commands API 150-199 ASCII Mode: PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive. PLC VFD-S, PLC transmits: 01 06 0100 1770 71 VFD-S PLC, PLC receives: 01 06 0100 1770 71 PLC transmits data register (transmit message) Register DATA Explanation D1256 Low 0 30 H ADR 1 ADR (1,0) is AC drive D1256 High 1 31 H ADR 0 address D1257 Low 0 30 H CMD 1 D1257 High 6 36 H CMD 0 CMD (1,0) is command code D1258 Low 0 30 H D1258 High 1 31 H D1259 Low 0 30 H Data Address D1259 High 0 30 H D1260 Low 1 31 H D1260 High 7 37 H The content of register D50 Data contents D1261 Low 7 37 H (H1770=K6000) D1261 High 0 30 H D1262 Low 7 37 H LRC CHK 1 D1262 High 1 31 H LRC CHK 0 PLC receives data register (response message) LRC CHK (0,1) is error check Register DATA Explanation D1070 Low 0 30 H ADR 1 D1070 High 1 31 H ADR 0 D1071 Low 0 30 H CMD 1 D1071 High 6 36 H CMD 0 D1072 Low 0 30 H D1072 High 1 31 H D1073 Low 0 30 H Data Address D1073 High 0 30 H D1074 Low 1 31 H D1074 High 7 37 H D1075 Low 7 37 H Data content D1075 High 0 30 H D1076 Low 7 37 H LRC CHK 1 D1076 High 1 31 H LRC CHK 0 RTU Mode: PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive PLC VFD-S, PLC transmits: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07 VFD-S PLC, PLC receives: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07 PLC transmits data register (transmit message) Register DATA Explanation D1256 Low 01 H Address D1257 Low 06 H Function D1258 Low D1259 Low 20 H 00 H Data Address DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-3
9 Application Commands API 150-199 Register DATA Explanation D1260 Low 00 H D1261 Low 12 H Data content D1262 Low 02 H CRC CHK Low D1263 Low 07 H CRC CHK High The content of register D50 (H12) PLC receives data register (response message) Register DATA Explanation D1070 Low 01 H Address D1071 Low 06 H Function D1072 Low 20 H D1073 Low 00 H Data Address D1074 Low 00 H D1075 Low 12 H Data content D1076 Low 02 H CRC CHK Low D1077 Low 07 H CRC CHK High 2 Function code K6(H6) : write one WORD data into register 1. PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive. (ASCII Mode when M1143=OFF) 2. PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive. (RTU Mode when M1143=ON) When in ASCII mode, users store the data that will be wrote to AC drive in ASCII format in specified register D0. Data received from AC drive will be stored in registers D1070~D1076. When in RTU mode, users store the data that will be wrote to AC drive in hexadecimal format in specified register D0. Data received from AC drive will be stored in registers D1070~D1077. When in ASCII mode or RTU mode, PLC will store the transmission data in registers D1256~D1295. Users can move these data to general registers by using MOV, DMOV or BMOV commands. Other commands are invalid to this area. After complete receiving data, PLC will automatically check if the received data is correct. If there is any fault, M1140 will be set to ON. If inner data address of AC drive is illegal to specified device, it will have fault code. Fault code will be stored in D1130 and M1141 will be on. For example, 8000H is illegal to VFD-S and M1141=ON and D1130=2. Please refer to VFD-S user manual to fault code. After M1140=ON or M1141=ON, it will transmit a correct data to AC drive. If received data is correct, M1140 and M1141 will be reset. 9-4 DVP-PLC Application Manual
9 Application Commands API 150-199 M1002 MOV H87 D1120 setting communication protocol 9600, 8, E, 1 SET M1120 communication protocol X10 M1127 MOV M1143 MODRW SET K100 M1122 D1129 K1 connection device address K1 handling received data setting communication time out 100ms K6 function code K6 write one data in setting transmit flag H2000 data address H2000 D50 K1 data stored read/write data register length (word) ASCII mode : received data in ASCII format stored in special registers D1070~1078. RTU mode : received data in hexadecimal format stored in special registers D1070~1078. RST M1127 receiving data completed and reset flag ASCII Mode: PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive. PLC VFD-S, PLC transmits: 01 06 0100 1770 71 VFD-S PLC, PLC receives: 01 06 0100 1770 71 PLC transmits data register (transmit message) Register DATA Explanation D1256 Low 0 30 H ADR 1 ADR (1,0) is AC drive D1256 High 1 31 H ADR 0 address D1257 Low 0 30 H CMD 1 CMD (1,0) is command D1257 High 6 36 H CMD 0 code D1258 Low 0 30 H D1258 High 1 31 H D1259 Low 0 30 H Data Address D1259 High 0 30 H D1260 Low 1 31 H D1260 High 7 37 H The content of register D50 Data contents D1261 Low 7 37 H (H1770=K6000) D1261 High 0 30 H D1262 Low 7 37 H LRC CHK 1 D1262 High 1 31 H LRC CHK 0 PLC receives data register (response message) LRC CHK (0,1) is error check DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-5
9 Application Commands API 150-199 Register DATA Explanation D1070 Low 0 30 H ADR 1 D1070 High 1 31 H ADR 0 D1071 Low 0 30 H CMD 1 D1071 High 6 36 H CMD 0 D1072 Low 0 30 H D1072 High 1 31 H D1073 Low 0 30 H Data Address D1073 High 0 30 H D1074 Low 1 31 H D1074 High 7 37 H D1075 Low 7 37 H Data content D1075 High 0 30 H D1076 Low 7 37 H LRC CHK 1 D1076 High 1 31 H LRC CHK 0 RTU Mode: PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive PLC VFD-S, PLC transmits: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07 VFD-S PLC, PLC receives: 01 06 2000 0012 02 07 PLC transmits data register (transmit message) Register DATA Explanation D1256 Low 01 H Address D1257 Low 06 H Function D1258 Low 20 H D1259 Low 00 H Data Address D1260 Low 00 H The content of Data content D1261 Low 12 H register D50 (H12) D1262 Low 02 H CRC CHK Low D1263 Low 07 H CRC CHK High PLC receives data register (response message) Register DATA Explanation D1070 Low 01 H Address D1071 Low 06 H Function D1072 Low 20 H D1073 Low 00 H Data Address D1074 Low 00 H D1075 Low 12 H Data content D1076 Low 02 H CRC CHK Low D1077 Low 07 H CRC CHK High 9-6 DVP-PLC Application Manual
9 Application Commands API 150-199 3 Function code K16(H10) : write many items WORD data into register 1. PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive. (ASCII Mode when M1143=OFF) 2. PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive. (RTU Mode when M1143=ON) When in ASCII mode, users store the data that will be wrote to AC drive in ASCII format in 8 continuous specified register started from D0. Received data from AC drive will be stored in registers D1070~D1078. When in RTU mode, users store the data that will be wrote to AC drive in hexadecimal format in 8 continuous specified register started from D0. Received data from AC drive will be stored in registers D1070~D1078. When in ASCII mode or RTU mode, PLC will store the transmission data in registers D1256~D1295. Users can move these data to general registers by using MOV, DMOV or BMOV commands. Other commands are invalid to this area. After complete receiving data, PLC will automatically check if the received data is correct. If there is any fault, M1140 will be set to ON. If inner data address of AC drive is illegal to specified device, it will have fault code. Fault code will be stored in D1130 and M1141 will be on. For example, 8000H is illegal to VFD-S and M1141=ON and D1130=2. Please refer to VFD-S user manual to fault code. After M1140=ON or M1141=ON, it will transmit a correct data to AC drive. If received data is correct, M1140 and M1141 will be reset. M1002 MOV H87 D1120 setting communication protocol 9600, 8, E, 1 SET M1120 communication protocol X10 M1127 MOV M1143 MODRW SET K100 M1122 D1129 K1 handling received data setting communication time out 100ms K16 H2000 connection function data address device code K16 H2000 address K1 write one data in setting transmit flag D50 K8 data stored read/write data register length (word) ASCII mode : received data in ASCII format stored in special registers D1070~1078. RTU mode : received data in hexadecimal format stored in special registers D1070~1078. RST M1127 receiving data completed and reset flag DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-7
9 Application Commands API 150-199 ASCII Mode: PLC connects to VFD-S AC drive. PLC VFD-S, PLC transmits: 01 10 2000 0002 04 0012 1770 30 VFD-S PLC, PLC receives: 01 10 2000 0002 CD PLC transmits data register (transmits messages) Register DATA Explanation D1256 Low 0 30 H ADR 1 ADR (1,0) is AC drive D1256 High 1 31 H ADR 0 address D1257 Low 1 31 H CMD 1 CMD (1,0) is command D1257 High 0 30 H CMD 0 code D1258 Low 2 32 H D1258 High 0 30 H D1259 Low 0 30 H Data Address D1259 High 0 30 H D1260 Low 0 30 H D1260 High 0 30 H D1261 Low 0 30 H Number of Register D1261 High 2 32 H D1262 Low 0 30 H D1262 High 4 34 H Byte Count D1263 Low 0 30 H D1263 High 0 30 H The content of register Data contents 1 D1264 Low 1 31 H D50 (H12) D1264 High 2 32 H D1265 Low 1 31 H D1265 High 7 37 H D1266 Low 7 37 H D1266 High 0 30 H Data contents 2 D1267 Low 3 33 H LRC CHK 1 D1267 High 0 30 H LRC CHK 0 The content of register D51 (H1770=K6000) LRC CHK (0,1) is error check PLC receives data register (response messages) Register DATA Explanation D1070 Low 0 30 H ADR 1 D1070 High 1 31 H ADR 0 D1071 Low 1 31 H CMD 1 D1071 High 0 30 H CMD 0 D1072 Low 2 32 H D1072 High 0 30 H D1073 Low 0 30 H Data Address D1073 High 0 30 H D1074 Low 0 30 H D1074 High 0 30 H D1075 Low 0 30 H Number of Register D1075 High 2 32 H D1076 Low C 43 H LRC CHK 1 D1076 High D 44 H LRC CHK 0 RTU Mode: PLC connects to VFD-S AC drives PLC VFD-S, PLC transmits: 01 10 2000 0002 04 0012 1770 C4 7F VFD-S PLC, PLC receives: 01 10 2000 0002 4A 08 9-8 DVP-PLC Application Manual
9 Application Commands API 150-199 PLC transmits data register (transmits messages) Register DATA Explanation D1256 Low 01 H Address D1257 Low 10 H Function D1258 Low 20 H D1259 Low 00 H Data Address D1260 Low 00 H D1261 Low 02 H Number of Register D1262 Low 04 H Byte Count D1263 Low 00 H The content of register D50 Data content 1 D1264 Low 12 H (H12) D1265 Low 17 H The content of register D51 Data content 2 D1266 Low 70 H (H1770=K6000) D1262 Low C4 H CRC CHK Low D1263 Low 7F H CRC CHK High PLC receives data register (response messages) Register DATA Explanation D1070 Low 01 H Address D1071 Low 10 H Function D1072 Low 20 H D1073 Low 00 H Data Address D1074 Low 00 H D1075 Low 02 H Number of Register D1076 Low 4A H CRC CHK Low D1077 Low 08 H CRC CHK High DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-9
9 Application Commands API 150-199 Footnote The startup condition (the contact) before MODRD, RDST, MODRW these three commands, cannot use rising-edge contact and falling-edge. Otherwise, the data stored in received register will be incorrect. Related flags and special registers of RS-485 communication MODRW command: Please refer to the footnote of API 80 RS command for more detail information. Flag/Special Register M1120 M1121 M1122 M1123 M1124 M1125 M1126 M1127 M1128 M1129 M1130 M1131 M1140 M1141 M1142 M1143 D1070~D1085 D1120 D1121 D1122 D1123 D1124 D1125 D1126 D1129 D1130 D1256~D1295 D1296~D1311 Function Description Communication setting latched. The change of D1120 will be invalid after setting. When it is Off, RS-485 of PLC is sending communication data. Delivery request Receive completed Receive waiting message Receive status disable STX/ETX system definition selection MODRD / RDST / MODRW commands data receive completed Transmitting/receiving indication Receive time out Users/system definition STX/ETX MODRD / MODWR / MODRW data convert to HEX, M1131=ON MODRD / MODWR / MODRW data receive error MODRD / MODWR / MODRW command parameter error VFD-A convenience command data receive error ASCII/RTU mode selection (use with commands MODRD/MODWR/MODRW) (Off is ASCII mode, ON is RTU mode) It is PLC built-in RS-485 communication convenience command. This command will send messages during executing and if the receiver receives, it will return messages and save it in D1070~D1085. Users can view return data by this register content. RS-485 communication protocol PLC communication address.(save PLC communication address, has latched function) Remainder characters of delivery data Remainder characters of received data Start text definition(stx) Definition of the first end character(etx1) Definition of the second end character(etx2) Communication time out abnormal. Time unit:(ms) Return fault code record of MODBUS This is PLC built-in RS-485 communication convenience command MODRW. The message that this command sends during executing will be saved in D1256~D1295. User can check according to this register content. PLC will automatically convert ASCII data saved in the register specified by users to hexadecimal format. 9-10 DVP-PLC Application Manual
9 Application Commands API 150-199 API 151 PWD Input Pulse Width Detection Applicable models ES EP EH - - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D Note: The limit of S operand is specified as X10~X17 The setting range of D operand: D=D0~D999, two continuous devices are used and only can be used one time in the program. 16-bit command (5 STEPS) PWD Continuous - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: None Command Explanation : Source device : Destenstation device which stores detection result This command is used to detect the On pulse width of X10~X17 inputs and time unit is 100us. occupy two continuous devices. The longest detectable time is 214,748.3647 seconds, about 3,579.139 minutes, about 59.652 hours. If the On pulse width is less than 100us, the value of specified is equal to 0(zero). When =On, record the On pulse width of input X10 and store in D1, D0. PWD X10 D0 API 152 RTMU Start to Measure the Execution Time of I Interrupt Applicable models ES EP EH - - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D Note: The limit of S operand is specified as K0~K9 The limit of D operand is specified as K1~K1,000 16-bit command (5 STEPS) PWD Continuous - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: None Command Explanation : Source device : Destination device which stores measure time (time unit is 1us) The limit range of is K0~K9, specified special D register and can measure ten interrupt subroutine at most, the number of specified special D register is D1156~1165 in order. For example, when the value of specified special D register is D1161. is K5, it means the number of DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-11
9 Application Commands API 150-199 After executing RTMU command, if the range of, inputted by user is legal, this command will get the timer started to measure the time of I interrupt and reset the content of special D register specified by to 0(zero) simultaneously. When reaching RTMD command, the timer will be closed and measuring the time of I interrupt will end. At the same time, specify the measuring time to the special D register specified by RTMD command. This RTMU command is used with the next introduced RTMD command and these two commands are all be used to measure the time of I interrupt service program for the user to deal with high speed response and restrict to providing the time of ISR (Interrupt Service Routine) at the beginning of the program development. API 153 RTMD End to Measure the Execution Time of I Interrupt Applicable models ES EP EH - - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S Note: The limit of S operand is specified as K0~K9 16-bit command (3 STEPS) PWD Continuous - - 32-bit command - - - - Flag: None Command Explanation : Source device The limit range of is K0~K9, specified special D register and can measure ten interrupt subroutine at most, the number of specified special D register is D1156~1165 in order. For example, when the value of is K5, it means the number of specified special D register is D1161 When is Off On, enter into I001 interrupt subtoutine, the RTMU command will start a 8-bit timer (unit time is 10us). When reaching RTMD command K0, close the timer and store the measurin time in special D register (there are totally ten registers D1156~D1165 and it is specified as K0~K9). FEND M1000 I 001 RTMU K0 D0 M1000 RTMD K0 IRET 9-12 DVP-PLC Application Manual
9 Application Commands API 150-199 Footnote After developing PLC program completed, we recommanded that user should remove this command. Additional Explanation: 1. Due to the time interrupt executed by RTMU command is a less priority (less important than other interrupts), the timer may not be triggered and cannot count the time when executing high-speed pulse input counting or specifying high-speed pulse input during the period of RTMU command. 2. If user execute RTMU command but not execute RTMD command before the end of program interrupt, then the interrupt will not be ended. 3. Please specially notice that RTMU command is executed by starting one inner timer interrupt of PLC, therefore, the timer may be disordered if execute multiple RTMU or RTMD commands simultaneously. D1156~D1165: Special D registers specified by RTMU, RTMD command (numbers is from K0 to K9). API 154 RAND P Random Number Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D 16-bit command (7 STEPS) RAND Continuous RANDP 32-bit command - - Note: S 1 operand S 2 operand The usage range of operands S 1, S 2 is: K0 S 1, S 2 K32,767 Flag: No Refer to each model specification for usage range. - - Pulse executioin Command Explanation : lower bound for producing random number. : upper bound for producing random number. : result for producing random number. When user inputs S1 > S2, PLC will occur operand error and won t execute it, and then M1067, M1068=On, and records error code 0E1A(HEX) in D1067. When X10=On, the random number that produced during lower bound D0 and upper bound D10 will save in D20. X10 RAND D0 D10 D20 DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-13
9 Application Commands API 150-199 API 155 D ABSR Absolute Current Value Read Applicable models ES EP EH - - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D 1 D 2 Note: Operand S occupies 3 continuous devices Operand D 1 occupies 3 continuous devices Operand D 2 occupies 2 continuous devices Refer to each model specification for usage range. There is no 16-bit command for API 55, only 32-bit command, DABSR is available and it can only be used for ONCE in program. 16-bit command - - - - 32-bit command (13 STEPS) DABSR Continuous - - Flag: For the description of M1010, M1029, M1030, M1334, M1335, M1336, M1337, M1346, please refer to the footnote. Command Explanation This command provides continuous absolute position data read function of mitsubishi servo drive MR-J2 (with absolute position check function). : Input signal from Servo : Control signal for controling Servo : Absolute position data (32 bit) read from Servo is the input signal from Servo and it will use 3 continuous devices, +1, +2. Device and +1 are connected to the ABS (bit0, bit1) of Servo for data transmitting. Device +2 is connected to Servo for transmitting data ready flag. Please see the wiring drawing below for details. is the control signal for controling Servo and it will use 3 continuous devices, +1, +2. Device is connected to Servo On (SON) of Servo, device +1 is connected to ABS data transmitting mode of Servo and +2 is connected to ABS data request signal. Please see the wiring drawing below for details. PLC DVP32EH00T SERVO AMP MR-J2-A +24V S/S X1 X2 24G ABS(bit 0) ABS(bit 1) transmission data is ready CN1B VDD 3 D01 4 ZSP 19 TLC 6 SG 10 Y4 Y5 Y6 C4 SERVO ON ABS transmission mode ABS requirement SON ABSM ABSR 5 8 9 9-14 DVP-PLC Application Manual
9 Application Commands API 150-199 is the absolute position data (32 bit) read from Servo and it will use 2 continuous devices, +1. is low word and +1 is high word. The absolute position data should be stored in the current value registers (D1337, D1336) corresponding to CH0 pulse or the current value registers (D1339, D1338) corresponding to CH1 pulse, so it is recommanded to specify these two registers. If specify other devices, finally, the user still have to transmit the data into the current value registers (D1337, D1336) corresponding to CH0 pulse or the current value registers (D1339, D1338) corresponding to CH1 pulse. When DABSR command drvie contact turns ON and read starts, the command completed flag M1029, M1030 will be energized. The flags must be reset by user. When driving the DABSR command, please specify normally open contact. If the drive contact of DABSR command turns Off when DABSR command read starts, the of absolute current value read will be interrupted and result in incorrect data. Please be careful and notice that. If the drive contact of DABSR command turns Off after the read is completed, the Servo On (SON) signal connected to will also turn Off and the operation will be disabled. When X7= On, the absolute position data (32 bit) read from Servo should be stored in the current value register (D1337, D1336) corresponding to CH0 pulse. At the same time, drive a timer T10 to count 5 second. If over 5 second and the absolute position data (32 bit) read not complete, it will drvie M10=On and this means the absolute position data (32 bit) read is abnormal. When connecting to system, please set the power of DVP-PLC and SERVO AMP to be On at the same time or set the SERVO AMP to be ON earlier than the power of DVP-PLC. X7 M11 ABS read completed T0 Read overtime M1029 completed flag DABS Y4 D1336 TMR T0 K50 M10 SET ABS absolute position data read is abnormal M11 ABS absolute position data read completed DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-15
9 Application Commands API 150-199 Wiring PLC Controller DVP-20EH SERVO AMP MR-H-A SERVO AMP MR-J2-A + 24V X1 X2 COM CN1 ABS(bit 0) ABS(bit 1) transmitting data ready flag PF ZSP TLC SG 24 23 25 16 CN1B D01 4 X1 X2 COM ZSP TLC SG 19 6 10 Y4 Y5 Y6 COM4 SERVO ON ABS data transmitting mode ABS data request SON D13 D14 12 44 45 Y4 Y5 Y6 SON ABSM ABSR 5 8 9 Footnote Time chart explanation of DABSR command absolute position data read: When DABSR command starts to execute, it will drive the signal of Servo On (SON) and ABS data transmitting mode to output. By the transmitting data ready flag and ABS request signal can confirm the transmission and receipt of both sides and process the data transmission of current value position data (32 bit) plus check data (6 bit). Data is transmitted by ABS (bit0, bit1) two bits. SERVO ON SON ABS data transmitting mode ABSM Transmitting data ready ABS data request ABS(bit 1) TLC ABSR ZSP AMP output Controller output AMP output ABS(bit 0) D01 AMP output Current value position data 32-bit +(plus) check data 6-bit 9-16 DVP-PLC Application Manual
9 Application Commands API 150-199 This command is applicable to the Servo motor equipped with absolute positioning function is connected, such as Mitsubishi MR-J2-A Servo drive. The Servo motor with absolute positioning function should be rotated more than one revolution and given the reset signal before manufacturing equipments. Please use one of the following methods to proceed the first time zero point return: 1. Complete zero point return by using reset signal function to execute API 156 ZRN command. 2. After using JOG or manual operation to adjust the zero point position of the equipment, input reset signal SERVO AMP. As for the reset signal input, please refer to the external switches diagram below to see if using DVP-PLC controller to output. For the detail of the wiring between DVP-PLC and Mitsubishi MR-J2-A, please refer to the API 159 DRVA. Use Mitsubishi MR-J2- as example A reset CR 8 SG 10 Flags description: M1010: In EH series MPU, when M1010= On, CH0 (Y0, Y1) and CH1 (Y2, Y3) will output pulse while END command is executed. When output starts, M1010 will automatically turn Off. M1029: In EH series MPU, M1029=On after the first group pulse (Y0, Y1) pulse output complete or other relative command complete. M1030: In EH series MPU, M1030= On after the second group pulse (Y2, Y3) pulse output complete. M1334: In EH series MPU, CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse stop output when M1334= On. M1335: In EH series MPU, CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse stop output when M1335= On. M1336: In EH series MPU, CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse output indication flag M1337: In EH series MPU, CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse output indication flag M1346: In EH series MPU, ZRN command CLEAR output signal enable flag Special registers description: D1337, D1336: 1. D1337(HIGH WORD), D1336(LOW WORD) represents the current value registers of positioning control commands (API 156 ZRN, API 157 PLSV, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) output to the first output group Y0, Y1, the current value increases or decreases in accordance with the direction of rotation. 2. D1337(HIGH WORD), D1336(LOW WORD) represents the total number of output pulse of pulse output commands (API 57 PLSY, API 59 PLSR) output to the first output group Y0, Y1. D1338, D1339: 1. D1339(HIGH WORD), D1338(LOW WORD) represents the current value registers of positioning control commands (API 156 ZRN, API 157 PLSV, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) output to the second output group Y2, Y3, the current value increases or decreases in accordance with the direction of rotation. 2. D1339(HIGH WORD), D1338(LOW WORD) represents the total number of output pulse of pulse output commands (API 57 PLSY, API 59 PLSR) output to the first output group Y2, Y3. DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-17
9 Application Commands API 150-199 D1340: Operates as the frequency setting of the first step acceleration and last step deceleration when positioning control commands (API 57 PLSY, API 59 PLSR) are executed. Setting range: This speed can not less than 10Hz. If the speed is less than 10Hz or larger than max. output frequency, it will output by 10Hz. Factory setting is 200Hz. Note: When controlling stepping motor, please consider the resonance of stepping motor and limit of initial frequency while setting speed. D1341, D1342: D1342(HIGH WORD), D1341(LOW WORD) represents as the maximum speed setting when positioning control commands ((API 156 ZRN, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) are executed. Setting range: it is 200KHz. D1343: Operates as the Acceleration/Deceleration time setting in which maximum speed (D1342, D1341) is achieved from the first step acceleration and last step deceleration when positioning control commands (API 156 ZRN, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) are executed. Setting range: This acceleration / deceleration time can t be less than 50ms. If it less than 50ms or larger than 5000ms, it will output by 50ms.Facotry setting is 100ms. Note: When controlling stepping motor, please consider the resonance of stepping motor and limit of initial frequency while setting speed. API 156 D ZRN Zero Point Return Applicable models ES EP EH - - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 S 3 D Note: Please refer to the command explanation for the information of the usage range of Operand S 1, S 2,, D. 16-bit command(9 STEPS) ZRN Continuous - - 32-bit command (17 STEPS) DZRN Continuous - - Flag: For the description of M1010, M1029, M1030, M1334, M1335, M1336, M1337, M1346, please refer to the footnote of API 155 ABSR command. Command Explanation : Zero point return speed : Creep speed : Near point signal (DOG) : Pulse output device (Please use transistor output as output module) is specified as the zero point return speed as, 16-bit 10 to 32,767Hz or 32-bit 10 to 200,000Hz. is specified as the creep speed, the lower speed after near point signal (DOG) turns On and its available range is 10 to 32,767Hz. is specified as the near point signal (DOG) input (A contact input). If any Y, M, S device other than an input relay (X) is specified for the near point signal, it will be affected by the scanning cycle of the PLC and the dispersion of zero point may be large. 9-18 DVP-PLC Application Manual
9 Application Commands API 150-199 Pulse output device only can be specified as Y0, Y2. When executing API 158 DRVI and API 159 DRVA command, the PLC store the FWD/REV pulse which increase or decrease during operation in current vlaue registers (Y0: D1337,D1336, Y2: D1339, D1338) so that it can always know the machine position. However, the data may lost when the power of PLC is Off. Therefore, the machine should execute zero point turn during initial operation to input the zero point. When M10= On, a frequency of 20KHz outpus from Y0 and zero point return will be energized. When it reaches the near point signal (DOG), X5= On and it will change to creep speed. Then, a frequency of 1KHz outpus from Y0 and the command will be energized. Pulses output will stop until X5=Off. M10 ZRN K20000 K1000 X5 Y0 Footnote Time chart explanation of reset signal output: 1. When reset flag M1346= On, the reset signal is sent to the servo drive when zero point trun is completed. 2. Output device of reset signal: CH0(Y0, Y1) reset output device (Y4) CH1(Y2, Y3) reset output device (Y5) Initial position program interrupt Creep speed Zero return speed ON scan in circle Output near point signal (DOG) Reset signal Y4 or Y5 reset signal OFF DOG ON about 20ms + 1 scan time inside 1ms ON M1336, M1337 Pulse output monitor OFF Explanation of zero point return operation: 1. When ZRN command is executed, accelerate to Zero point return speed and start to move. 2. When the Near point signal (DOG) goes from Off to On, it will decelerate to Creep speed. 3. When the Near point signal (DOG) goes from On to Off and the same time of pulse output stop, the content value of current value register (D1337, D1336) of CH0 pulse or current value register (D1339, D1338) of CH1 pulse will be 0(zero). Also, if the reset signal flag M1346= On, the reset signal Y4 or Y5 will output simultaneously. DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-19
9 Application Commands API 150-199 4. When the operation of pulse output is completed and flag M1029, M1030 is activated, indication flag M1336 sent by CH0 pulse or indication flag M1337 sent by CH1 pulse will be Off. 5. Hence, the command can not search the position of Near point signal (DOG) and the operation of ZRN command only can be processed in unidirection. In the operation of ZRN command, the content value of current value register (D1337, D1336) of CH0 pulse or current value register (D1339, D1338) of CH1 pulse will decrease. Near point LSR signal ON switch near LSF (Backward limit) (DOG) zero point (Forward limit) DOG Motor Back end Front end Backward Forward decelerate to Creep speed Zero return speed initial position DOG back end detect ( zero point position) DOG front end detect 6. This command is applicable to the Servo motor equipped with absolute positioning function is connected, such as Mitsubishi MR-H-A Servo drive, MR-J2-A Servo drvie. It can record current position even the power is Off. Besides, because the current position of the servo drive can be read by API 155 ABSR command of DVP-EH series PLC, the ZRN command should only be executed for one time. After the power is Off, it is unnecessary to execute the ZRN command again. 7. When CH0 and CH1 pulse execute the ZRN command, the current value of pulse output frequency will display in (D1394, D1395) and (D1396, D1397). After the operation of ZRN command is completed, the last output frequency value will be stored in (D1394, D1395) and (D1396, D1397). 8. When the drive contact of ZRN command is On, CH0 and CH1 pulse will read the content value set by D1343t as aeceleration time. After accelerating to zero point return speed, wait for the entry of the near point signal (DOG) and output the creep speed of low speed by decelerating. Immediately stop output pulse when the near point signal (DOG) turns Off.. 9-20 DVP-PLC Application Manual
9 Application Commands API 150-199 API 157 D PLSV Variable Speed Pulse Output Applicable models ES EP EH - - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 D 1 D 2 Note: Please refer to the command explanation for the information of the usage range of Operand S 1, S 2, D. 16-bit command (7 STEPS) PLSV Continuous - - 32-bit command (13 STEPS) DPLSV Continuous Flag: For the description of M1010, M1029, M1030, M1334, M1335, M1336, M1337, please refer to the footnote of API 155 ABSR command. Command Explanation : Pulse output frequency : Pulse output device (Please use transistor as output module) : Rotation direction signal is specified as pulse output frequemcy, 16-bit 1 to 32,767Hz and -1 to -32,768 Hz or 32-bit 1 to 200,000Hz, -1 to -200,000 Hz. The (+) and (-) symbol indicates the positive and negative direction. The pulse output frequency can be changed even when pulses are being output. Pulse output device only can be specified as Y0, Y2. is specified as rotation direction signal and it operates following the polarity of Off.. When is positive (+), is On. When is negative (-), is PLSV command do not has acceleration/deceleration setting function. Therefore, acceleration/deceleration are not performed at start and stop. If cushion start and stop is desired, please increase or decrease the output pulse frequency by using API 67 RAMPcommand. If the drive contact turns Off while PLSV command execute to output pulse, the machine will stop without deceleration. When the drive contact of PLSV command truns Off, it is impossible to drive PLSV command again even if the pulse send indication flag M1336 of CH0 pulse or pulse send indication flag M1337 of CH1 pulse is set. When M10= On, a frequency of 20KHz outputs from Y0. Y5= On represents the positive direction. M10 PLSV K20000 Y0 Y5 DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-21
9 Application Commands API 150-199 API 158 D DRVI Drive to Increment Applicable models ES EP EH - - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D 1 D 2 Note: Please refer to the command explanation for the information of the usage range of Operand S 1, S 2, D 1, D 2. 16-bit command(9 STEPS) Continuous DRVI - - 32-bit command (17 STEPS) Continuous DDRVI - - Flag: For the description of M1010, M1029, M1030, M1334, M1335, M1336, M1337, M1346, please refer to the footnote. Command Explanation : Numbers of pulses (Target device) : Pulse output frequency : Pulse output designation device (Please use transistor as output module) : Rotation direction signal is specified as the numbers of pulses (relative positioning). The available numbers of are: 16-bit command: -32,768 to +32,767 32-bit command: -999,999 to +999,999. The positive (+) and negative (-) symbol indicates the forward and reverser direction. is specified as the pulse output frequency. The available numbers of are: 16-bit command: 10 to 32,767Hz 32-bit command: 10 to 200,000Hz is specified as pulse output designation device. In EH series models, it only can be specified as Y0, Y2. is specified as rotation direction signal and it operates following the polarity of. When is positive (+), is On. When is negative (-), is Off. The numbers of pulses will be stored in current value register (D1337 high byte, D1336 low byte) of CH0 pulse or current value register (D1339 high byte, D1338 low byte) of CH1 pulse. When rotation direction is negative, the content value of current value register will decrease. The contents of each operand can not be changed while the DRVI command is executed. The contents will be changed when the next is driven. If the drive contact turns off when the DRVI command is executed, the machine will decelerates and stops and the completed flag M1029, M1030 does not turn On. 9-22 DVP-PLC Application Manual
9 Application Commands API 150-199 When the drive contact of DRVI command turns Off, it is impossible to drive DRVI command again even if the pulse send indication flag M1336 of CH0 pulse or pulse send indication flag M1337 of CH1 pulse is set. When M10= On, twenty thousands (20000) of 2KHz frequency pulses outputs from Y0 (relative positioning). Y5= On represents the positive direction. M10 DRVI K20000 K2000 Y0 Y5 Footnote Operation explanation of relative positioning control: Using a positive or a negative symbol to specify travel distance from the current position is also a kind of drive method of relative positioning control. +3,000 0 Current position -3,000 Settings of relative positioning and operation speed: Actual acceleration time Maximum speed (D1342,D1341) Initial value(default) : 200,000Hz Actual deceleration time Output pulse frequency First step acceleration (D1340) Accel/Decel time Accel/Decel time Last step deceleration (D1340) Current position Initial value: 100ms (D1343) Initial value: 100ms (D1343) Output pulse numbers The minimum value of output pulse frequency which can be actually used is deternined by the following equation: 1. Minimum value of output pulse frequency = MaxSpeed [D1342,D1341]Hz ( 2 (Acceleration\Deceleration [ D1343]ms 1000 )) 2. Even if the specified pulse output frequency is lower than the value of the calculation value of the equation above, the calculation value of the equation above will still be actually used while outputting the pulses. 3. The actual output pulse frequency of the first step acceleration and last step deceleration also use the calculation value of the equation above as the minimum value. DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-23
9 Application Commands API 150-199 See below for an example: 1. Minimum value of output pulse frequency = 50000Hz ( 2 (100ms 1000 )) = 500Hz. 2. Although the specified output pulse frequency is equal to 400 Hz (lower than the calculation value, 500 Hz), the frequency of 500 Hz will be still be used when output the pulses. 3. If specifying the output pulse frequency = 50,000 Hz, minimum value of output pulse frequency for the first step acceleration and last step deceleration will still be the calculation value, 500 Hz. 500Hz 50000Hz 500Hz Flags description: M1010: In EH series MPU, when M1010= On, Y0, Y1 and Y2, Y3 will output pulse while END command is executed. When output starts, M1010 will automatically turn Off. M1029: In EH series MPU, M1029= On after Y0, Y1 pulse output complete. In EP/ES series MPU, M1029= On after Y0 pulse output complete. M1030: In EH series MPU, M1030= On after Y2, Y3 pulse output complete. In EP/ES series MPU, M1030= On after Y1 pulse output complete. M1334: In EH series MPU, CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse stop output when M1334= On. M1335: In EH series MPU, CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse stop output when M1335= On. M1336: In EH series MPU, CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse output indication flag M1337: In EH series MPU, CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse output indication flag M1346: In EH series MPU, ZRN command output signal enable flag 9-24 DVP-PLC Application Manual
9 Application Commands API 150-199 Special registers description: D1337, D1336: 1. D1337(HIGH WORD), D1336(LOW WORD) represents the current value registers of positioning control commands (API 157 PLSV, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) output to the first output group Y0, Y1, the current value increases or decreases in accordance with the direction of rotation. 2. D1337(HIGH WORD), D1336(LOW WORD) represents the total number of output pulse of pulse output commands (API 57 PLSY, API 59 PLSR) output to the first output group Y0, Y1. D1338, D1339: 1. D1339(HIGH WORD), D1338(LOW WORD) represents the current value registers of positioning control commands (API 157 PLSV, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) output to the second output group Y2, Y3, the current value increases or decreases in accordance with the direction of rotation. 2. D1339(HIGH WORD), D1338(LOW WORD) represents the total number of output pulse of pulse output commands (API 57 PLSY, API 59 PLSR) output to the first output group Y2, Y3. D1340: Operates as the frequency setting of the first step acceleration and last step deceleration when positioning control commands (API 156 ZRN, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) are executed. Setting range: 1/10 or less of maximum speed (D1342, D1341) If the current value exceeds the range, it is automatically set to 1/10 of the maximum speed during operation. 3. Note: When controlling stepping motor, please consider the resonance of stepping motor and limit of initial frequency while setting speed. D1341, D1342: D1342(HIGH WORD), D1341(LOW WORD) represents as the maximum speed setting when positioning control commands (API 156 ZRN, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) are executed. Setting range: 10 to 200,000Hz, the factory setting (default) is 200,000Hz Note: The output pulse frequency specified by operand S 2 of API 158 DRVI command should be under this maximum speed. D1343: Operates as the Acceleration/Deceleration time setting in which maximum speed (D1342, D1341) is achieved from the first step acceleration and last step deceleration (D1340) when positioning control commands (API 156 ZRN, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA) are executed. Setting range: 50 to 5,000 ms, the factory setting (default) is 100ms DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-25
9 Application Commands API 150-199 API Applicable models 159 D DRVA Data Backup MEMORY Write In ES EP EH - - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D 1 D 2 Note: Please refer to the command explanation for the information of the usage range of Operand S 1, S 2, D 1, D 2. 16-bit command (9 STEPS) DRVA Continuous - - 32-bit command (17 STEPS) DDRVA Continuous - - Flag: For the description of M1010, M1029, M1030, M1334, M1335, M1336, M1337, M1346, please refer to the footnote of API 158 DRVI command. Command Explanation : Numbers of pulses (Target device) : Pulse output frequency : Pulse output designation device (Please use transistor as output module) : Rotation direction signal is specified as the numbers of pulses (absolute positioning). The available numbers of are: 16-bit command: -32,768 to +32,767 32-bit command: -2,147,483,648 ~ +2,147,483,647. The positive (+) and negative (-) symbol indicates the forward and reverser direction. is specified as the pulse output frequency. The available numbers of are: 16-bit command: 10 to 32,767Hz. 32-bit command: 10 to 200,000Hz is specified as pulse output designation device. In EH series models, it only can be specified as Y0, Y2. is specified as rotation direction signal and it operates following the polarity of. When is positive (+), is On. When is negative (-), is Off The numbers of pulses will be stored in current value register (D1337 high byte, D1336 low byte) of CH0 pulse or current value register (D1339 high byte, D1338 low byte) of CH1 pulse. When rotation direction is negative, the content value of current value register will decrease. The contents of each operand can not be changed while the DRVA command is executed. The contents will be changed when the next is driven. If the drive contact turns off when the DRVA command is executed, the machine will decelerates and stops and the completed flag M1029, M1030 does not turn On. D1343 is used to set acceleration / deceleration time. When the drive contact of DRVA command turns Off, it is impossible to drive DRVA command again even if the pulse send indication flag M1336 of CH0 pulse or pulse send indication flag M1337 of CH1 pulse is set. 9-26 DVP-PLC Application Manual
9 Application Commands API 150-199 Footnote When M10= On, twenty thousands (20000) of 2KHz frequency pulses outputs from Y0 (absolute positioning), Y5= On represents the positive direction. M10 DRVA K20000 K2000 Y0 Y5 Operation explanation of absolute positioning control: Specifying travel distance from a zero point is also a kind of drive method of absolute positioning control. +3,000 0 F0 first step acceleration last step deceleration (D1340) min. speed: 10Hz Target position Zero point Settings of absolute positioning and operation speed: Tg acceleration sampling time 0 Initial value: 200,000Hz F max. speed (D1342,D1341) Fa accelerated gradient output pulse frequency F0 first step (acceleration) (D1340) min. speedg 10Hz Current position T Accel/Decel time Initial value: 50ms (D1343) Accel/Decel time Initial value: 50ms (D1343) F0 last step (deceleration) (D1340) min. speedg 10Hz output pulse number The relation between actual frequency and acceleration / deceleration time is in the following: Tg: sampling time of acceleration / deceleration T: acceleration / deceleration time Fa: acceleration / deceleration gradient F: Max. frequency F0: first step acceleration, last step deceleration P: total pulse number 1. Tg = T / ( 60 * 1000 ) 2. Fa = (F F0) / 60 3. P0 (output pulse number of first step (acceleration)/last step (deceleration)) = 1 4. Each segment frequency: i. F(n) = F0 + Fa * n ( n = 1~60) 5. Output pulse number of each segment: P ( n) = Tg * F( n) Restriction: 1. When each segment of output pulse number P(n)<1, PLC won t output pulse and jump to next segment. 2. Speed of first step (acceleration) and last step (deceleration) F0 can t less than 10Hz. If it is less than 10Hz or larger than max. output frequency, it will output 10Hz. DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-27
9 Application Commands API 150-199 3. If total pulse number P 3, acceleration/deceleration function will be invalid. Wiring of DVP-EH series and Delta ASDA servo drive: EH MPU Delta Servo Drive L N +24V 220VAC 220VAC single-phase 3-phase power R S T ASDA series U V W CN1 servo motor S/S 24G X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 DO_COM CN1 start VDD 17 zero point reset COM+ 11 JOG(+) DI 1 9 JOG(-) DI 5 33 stop DI 6 32 error reset DI 7 31 forward limit DI 8 30 reverse limit DI 1 : servo start COM- 50 DI 5 : servo reset SRDY DI 6 : forward limit ZSPD DI 7 : reverse limit TPOS DI 8 : emergency stop ALARM CN1 Z phase signal (zero point signal) DO_COM /OZ COM- 24 45 24V Error Counter Electric Gear 7 DO1+ 6 DO1-5 DO2+ 4 DO2-3 DO3+ 2 DO3-1 DO4+ 26 DO4- CN2 SRDY ZSPD TPOS ALARM DO_COM Encoder Y2 C2 pulse clear DI 2 COM- 10 45 200KPPS Y0 C0 Y1 C1 pulse output forward/reverse direction /PLS 43 COM- 47 /SIGN 36 COM- 49 DVP32EH00T Note: Please connect forward/reverse limit switch to SERVO AMP. Wiring example of connection between DVP-EH series PLC and a Mitsubishi MR-J2- A Servo drive: 9-28 DVP-PLC Application Manual
9 Application Commands API 150-199 EH MPU Mitsubishi servo drive L N +24V S/S 220VAC 220VAC single power 3-phase power CN1B R S T MR-J2 series U V W 14 RD CN1A servo motor Rc3 24G X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 Rcal1 Rcal2 Rcal3 start zero point reset JOG(+) JOG(-) stop error reset SON RES LSP LSN TL EMG SG 5 14 16 17 9 15 10 forward limit reverse limit SONGservo start RESGservo reset servo LSPGforward limit malfunctioin LSNG reverse limit SV-END TLGemergency stop SV-READY Z phase signal CN1A (zero point signal) OP 14 24V Error Counter 18 18 5 13 INP CN1B ALM VDD COM CN2 Rc2 Rc1 Encoder LG 1 Electric Gear Y2 C2 pulse clear CR SG 8 20 200KPPS Y0 C0 Y1 C1 pulse output forward/reverse direction PP 3 SG 10 NP 2 SG 10 DVP32EH00T 1. Connect to PLC when detecting absolute position. 2. Connect the forward/reverse limit switch to the SERVO AMP. Cautions when designing position control program: There are no using time limit for position control command API 156 ZRN, API 157 PLSV, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA. User can use these commands many times in a program but be sure to follow the following cautions below: 1. Do not drive the position control commands which use the same output CH0(Y0, Y1) or CH1(Y2, Y3) simultaneously. Otherwise, they will be treated as double coils and can not function correctly. 2. It is recommended to use step ladder commands (STL) to design positioning control program (please see the programming example shown below). Notes when using position control commands API 156 ZRN, API 157 PLSV, API 158 DRVI, API 159 DRVA with pulse output commandsapi 57 PLSY, API 58 PWM, API 59 PLSR: DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-29
9 Application Commands API 150-199 The current value register (D1337 high byte, D1336 low byte) of CH0 pulse or current value register (D1339 high byte, D1338 low byte) of CH1 will both be used in position control commands and pulse output commands and this will result in complicated operation. To avoid incorrect operation when pulse output commands are required while position control commands are used, it is recommended to use position control commands in place of pulse output commands. Explanation of pulse output terminals Y0, Y1of CH0 pulse and Y2, Y3 of CH1 pulse: 1. Voltage range: DC5V to DC24V 2. Current range: 10 ma to 100 ma 3. Output pulse frequency: Y0, Y2 is 200KHz, Y1, Y3 is 10KHz. Pulse output signal settings of positioning operation: There are three kinds of pulse output signal of positioning operation for DVP-EH series PLC: 1. 1-phase 1 output + direction (it is recommended to use this) U/D U/D FLAG 2. 1-phase 2 outputs (frequency limit is 10KHz) U D 3. 2-phase 2 outputs (frequency limit is 10KHz) A B Please follow the PLC output settings above to set the pulse input type of parameters on SERVO AMP or stepping motor. Flags description: M1010: In EH series MPU, when M1010= On, CH0 (Y0, Y1) and CH1 (Y2, Y3) will output pulse while END command is executed. When output starts, M1010 will automatically turn Off. M1029: In EH series MPU, M1029= On after first group pulse CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse output complete or other relative commands complete. M1030: In EH series MPU, M1030= On after second group pulse CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse output complete. M1334: In EH series MPU, CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse stop output when M1334= On. M1335: In EH series MPU, CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse stop output when M1335= On. M1336: In EH series MPU, CH0 (Y0, Y1) pulse output indication flag M1337: In EH series MPU, CH1 (Y2, Y3) pulse output indication flag M1346: In EH series MPU, ZRN command output signal enable flag 9-30 DVP-PLC Application Manual
9 Application Commands API 150-199 Special registers description of EH series MPU: D1220: The phase setting of the first output group Y0, Y1: determine by the last two bits of D1220, other bits are invalid. 1. K0: Y0 output 2. K1: Y0, Y1 AB phase output, A leads B 3. K2: Y0, Y1 AB phase output, B leads A 4. K3: Y1 output D1221: The phase setting of the second output group Y2, Y3: determine by the last two bits of D1221, other bits are invalid. 1. K0: Y2 output 2. K1: Y2, Y3 AB phase output, A leads B 3. K2: Y2, Y3 AB phase output, B leads A 4. K3: Y3 output When several high speed pulse output commands (PLSY, PWM, PLSR) and position control commands (ZRN, PLSV, DRVI, DRVA) all use Y0 to output pulse in one program and simultaneously been executed in the same scanning cycle, PLC will perform the command which has fewest step numbers. ming example for forward/reverse operation: For wiring, please refer to the wiring example of connection between DVP-EH series PLC and a Mitsubishi MR-J2- A Servo drive. There is one operation positionng is performed by using the absolute position method shown below: 500000 Output pulse frequency 100 200,000Hz 500Hz Zero point 500Hz Acceleration/ Deceleration time 200ms In this example, the minimum output pulse frequency calculated by equation= MaxSpeed [D1342,D1341]Hz ( 2 (Acceleration\Deceleration [ D1343]ms 1000 )) as the actual minimum output pulse frequency= 200,000Hz ( 2 (100ms 1000 )) = 1,000Hz. DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-31
9 Application Commands API 150-199 Stop ming example when using step ladder command (STL): M1000 S0 S10 S11 S12 S13 Zero point return M1002 JOG(+) JOG(-) Positioning in normal rotation Positioning in reverse rotation 1 S1334 Y0 output stop M1334 M1346 M5 DMOV K10000 D1341 Output to X-axis (Y0) is stopped Return to the zero point with reset signal is valid Operation is stopped Set the maximum speed 200,000Hz D1342,D13 1 MOV K200 D1343 Set the acceleration/ deceleration time 200ms D1343 1. If the maximum speed (D1342,D1341), the acceleration/deceleration (D1343) can set in their factory setting value (default), then the programming is not required. The factory setting value (default) of the maximum speed (D1342,D1341) is 200,000Hz. The factory setting value (default) of the acceleration/deceleration (D1343) is 100 ms. 9-32 DVP-PLC Application Manual
9 Application Commands API 150-199 X1 Zero point return M5 Operation being stopped RST RST M10 M12 Reset the zero point return completed flag Reset the normal rotation positioning completed flag RST M13 Reset the reverse rotation positioning completed flag X2 JOG(+) 2 M5 Operation being stopped SET RST RST S0 M12 M13 Drive the zero point return status (S0) Reset the normal rotation positioning completed flag Reset the reverse rotation positioning completed flag SET S10 Drive the JOG(+) status (S11) X3 JOG(-) 2 M5 Operation being stopped RST RST M12 M13 Reset the normal rotation positioning completed flag Reset the reverse rotation positioning completed flag SET S11 Drive the JOG(-) status (S11) X4 Positioning in normal rotation M5 Operation being stopped M10 Zero point return completed flag RST RST M12 M13 Reset the normal rotation positioning completed flag Reset the reverse rotation positioning completed flag SET S12 Drive the normal rotation positioning status(s12) X5 Positioning in reverse rotation M5 Operation being stopped M10 Zero point return completed flag RST RST M12 M13 Reset the normal rotation positioning completed flag Reset the reverse rotation positioning completed flag SET S13 Drive the reverse rotation positioning status(s13) 2. The maximum size of a JOG command is ±999,999 pulses, as this is equal to the maximum number of output pulses for API 158 DRVI command. If a greater distance is required, please execute the JOG command again. DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-33
9 Application Commands API 150-199 S0 Zero point return M50 M1029 Execution completed M1336 M50 Y0 being output M1000 DZRN K50000 K5000 X6 Y0 SET RST M50 Zero point return speed 3 M10 S0 Creep speed Near point Pulse output signal (DOG) device Reset the zero point return completed flag Zero point return is completed (auto-reset) Zero point return command operate in the (-) direction S10 JOG(+) S11 JOG(-) X2 JOG(+) M1336 M51 Y0 being output M1000 X3 JOG(-) M51 M1336 M52 Y0 being output M1000 M52 RUN monitor DDRVI K999999 K30000 Y0 Y4 RST M51 S10 DDRVI K-999999 K30000 Y0 Y4 RST M52 Output pulse numbers (maximum value in (+) direction) 3 Output pulse numbers (maximum value in (-) direction) 3 S11 Output pulse frequency Output pulse device JOG(+) operation is completed (auto-reset) Output pulse frequency Output pulse device JOG(-) operation is completed (auto-reset) Using relative positioning command execute the JOG operation in the (+) direction Rotation (Y4=On) direction signal output device Using relative positioning command execute the JOG operation in the (-) direction Rotation (Y4=Off) direction signal output device 3. In order to prevent position control commands being driven at the same time, the command drive timing is delayed by one scanning cycle. 9-34 DVP-PLC Application Manual
9 Application Commands API 150-199 S12 Positioning in normal rotation M53 M1029 Execution completed M1336 M53 Y0 being output DDRVA K500000 K100000 Y0 Y4 SET RST M12 M12 Normal rotation positioning completed flag Normal rotation positioning is completed (auto-reset) Using absolute positioning command move to the absolute position? 00000 (Y4=On) M1000 M53 S13 Positioning in reverse rotation M54 M1029 Execution completed M1336 M54 Y0 being output DDRVA K100 K100000 Y0 Y4 SET RST M13 M13 Reverse rotation positioning completed flag Reverse rotation positioning is completed (auto-reset) Using absolute positioning command move to the absolute position? 00 (Y4=Off) M1000 M54 RET END API 160 TCMP P Time Compare Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 S 3 S D Note: The range of operand S 1, S 2, S 3 : S 1 =0~23, S 2 =S 3 =S0~59 Operand S occupies 3 continuous devices. Operand D occupies 3 continuous devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (11 STEPS) TCMP Continuous TCMPP Pulse 32-bit command - - - - Flag: None DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-35
9 Application Commands API 150-199 Command Explanation : setting the hour of comparison time, setting range is K0~K23 : setting the minute of comparison time, setting range is K0~K59 : setting the second of comparison time, setting range is K0~K59 : Current time of real time clock : Comparison result,, is compared to the current value of the head address and save the comparsion result in. is the hour of current time and the content is K0~K23. +1 is the minute of current time and the content is K0~K59. +2 is the second of current time and the content is K0~K59. The current time of real time clock specified by is read by using TRD command previously and then compared by using TCMP command. If the content of exceeds the range, it will result in operation error. At this time, the command won t be executed and M1067=On, M1068=On, records error code 0E1A (HEX) in D1067. When X10= On, the command is executed and the current time of real time clock in (D20~D22) is compared to the set value 12:20:45 and the result is shown at M10~M12. When X10 goes from On Off, the command is not executed but the On/Off state before M10~M12 is kept. Connect M10~M12 in series or in parallel and then the result of,, are given. X10 TCMP K12 K20 K45 D20 M10 M10 M11 M12 ON when 12:20:45 ON when 12:20:45 ON when 12:20:45 > = < API 161 TZCP P Time Zone Compare Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 S D Note: Operand S 1, S 2, S occupies 3 continuous devices. S 1 should be less than S 2, i.e. S 1 S 2 Operand D occupies 3 continuous devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (9 STEPS) TZCP Continuous TZCPP Pulse 32-bit command - - - - Flag: None 9-36 DVP-PLC Application Manual
9 Application Commands API 150-199 Command Explanation : Lower limit time data : Upper limit time data : Current time of real time clock : Comparison result is compared to the time period of ~ and the comparsion result is stored in., +1, +2: respectively represent Hours, Minutes, Seconds of the lower limit time data., +1, +2: respectively represent Hours, Minutes, Seconds of the Upper limit time data, +1, +2: respectively represent Hours, Minutes, Seconds of the current time of perpetual calender. The current time of real time clock specified by is read by using TRD command previously and then compared by using TZCP command. If the content of S,, exceeds the range, it will result in operation error. At this time, the command won t be executed and M1067=On, M1068=On, records error code 0E1A (HEX) in D1067. If <, is On. If >, +2 is On. Besides these two situations, +1 is On. (Lower bound should be less than upper bound.) When X10= On, the command is executed and one of M10~M12 will be On. When X10=Off, the command is not executed but the state of M10~M12 before X10=Off is kept. X10 TZCP D0 D10 D20 M10 M10 M11 M12 ON when ON when ON when API 162 TADD P Time Addition Applicable models ES EP EH - S 1 S 2 D Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F Note: Operand S 1, S 2, D occupies 3 continuous devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (7 STEPS) TADD Continuous TADDP Pulse 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1020 (Zero flag) M1022 (Carry flag) DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-37
9 Application Commands API 150-199 Command Explanation : Time augend : Time addend : Addition result + =. The time data in the register specified by is added to the time data in the register specified by and the addition result is stored in the register specified by. If the time data in, exceeds the range, it will result in operation error. At this time, the command won t be executed and M1067=On, M1068=On, records error code 0E1A (HEX) in D1067. If the addition result is in a value greater than 24 hours, the Carry flag M1022=On. The value of the result shows in is the time remaining above 24 hours. If the addition result is equal to 0 (zero, 0 hour, 0 minute, 0 second), the Zero flag M1020= On. When X10= On, the command is executed. Add the time data specified by D0~D2 and D10~D12 and store the result in the register specified by D20~D22. X10 TADD D0 D10 D20 8 10 20 6 40 6 14 50 26 08:10:20 06:40:06 14:50:26 If the addition result is in a value greater than 24 hours, the Carry flag M1022=On. X10 TADD D0 D10 D20 18 40 30 11 30 8 6 10 38 18:40:30 11:30:08 06:10:38 API 163 TSUB P Time Subtraction Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D Note: Operand S 1, S 2, D occupies 3 continuous devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range. ES series models do not support this command (TSUB, TSUBP). 16-bit command (7 STEPS) TSUB Continuous TSUBP Pulse 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1020 (Zero flag) M1021 (Borrow flag) 9-38 DVP-PLC Application Manual
9 Application Commands API 150-199 Command Explanation : Time Minuend : Time Subtrahend : Subtraction result =. The time data in the register specified by is subtracted from the time data in the register specified by and the result is stored in the register specified by. If the time data in, exceeds the range, it will result in operation error. At this time, the command won t be executed and M1067=On, M1068=On, records error code 0E1A (HEX) in D1067. If the subtraction result is a negative value (less than 0), the Zero flag M1020= On. The value of the result shows in is the time remaining below 0 (zero) hour. If the subtraction result is equal to 0 (zero, 0 hour, 0 minute, 0 second), the Zero flag M1020= On. Except using API 166 TRD command, MOV command also can be used to move the special register D1315 (Hours), D1314 (Minutes), D1313 (Seconds) to the three registers specified to read the current time of real time clock. When X10= On, the command is executed. The time data specified by D10~D12 is subtracted from the time data specified by D0~D2 and the result is stored in the register specified by D20~D22. X10 TSUB D0 D10 D20 20 20 5 14 30 8 5 49 57 20:20:05 14:30:08 05:49:57 If the subtraction result is a negative value (less than 0), the borrow flag M1021= On. X10 TSUB D0 D10 D20 5 20 30 19 10 11 9 15 15 05:20:30 19:11:15 10:09:15 DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-39
9 Application Commands API 150-199 API 166 TRD P Time Data Read Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F D Note: Operand D occupies 7 continuous devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (5 STEPS) TRD Continuous TRDP Pulse 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1016, M1017, M1076 (Please refer the footnote for detail.) Command Explanation : The device stored the reading current time of perpetual calender A perpetual calender clock is built in the DVP-EH/EP series PLC and this clock provide year (A.D.), week, month, date, hours, minutes and seconds total 7 data devices stored in D1319~D1313. The function of TRD command is for program designer to read the current time of perpetual calender directly and store the reading data in the 7 data registers specified by. D1319 is read as a two digit number and this setting can be change to a four digit number, please refer the footnote of API 167 TWR command for the detail. When =On, read the current time of perpetual calender to the specified register D0~D6. The content of D1318: 1 is indicated Monday, 2 is indicated Tuesday,, 7 is indicated Sunday. TRD D0 Special D device Meaning Content General D device Meaning D1319 Year (A.D.) 00~99 D0 Year (A.D.) D1318 Day (Mon.~Sun.) 1~7 D1 Day (Mon.~Sun.) D1317 Month 1~12 D2 Month D1316 Date 1~31 D3 Date D1315 Hours 0~23 D4 Hours D1314 Minutes 0~59 D5 Minutes D1313 Seconds 0~59 D6 Seconds 9-40 DVP-PLC Application Manual
9 Application Commands API 150-199 Footnote Error Flag of the real time clock built in DVP-EH/EP series PLC: Device Name Function M1016 year display of perpetual calender It displays 2 right-most digit number of year of D1319 when it is Off. It displays (2000+ 2 right-most digit number of year of M1017 M1076 ±30 seconds correction perpetual calender fault D1319) when it is On. It will correct when it is from Off On. (if it is 0-29 seconds, it will reset to 0. If it is 30-59 seconds, add 1 to minute and set 0 to second) It will be On when setting is out of range or run out of battery. (it only check when power is on) Device Name Range D1313 Second 0-59 D1314 Minue 0-59 D1315 Hour 0-23 D1316 Day 1-31 D1317 Month 1-12 D1318 Week 1-7 D1319 Year 0-99 (two right-most digit number of year) The method to correct perpetual calender: There are two methods to correct built-in API perpetual calender: 1. specified command to correct please refer to command TWR (API 167) for reference. 2. setting by peripheral using WPLSoft (software to edit ladder diagram) to set Display four digit number of year: 1. It usually displays 2 digit number of year (for example: only display 03 for year 2003). If you want to display 4 digit number, please key in following program at the start of program. M1002 SET M1016 display 4 digit number for year 2. It will display 4 bits (two right-most digit number + 2000) to replace original 2 digit number. 3. If you want to write new time setting in 4 digit number display mode, only 2 digit number you can write in and its range is 00-99 which corresponds to year 2000-2099. For example, 00=year 2000, 50=year 2050 and 99=year 2099. DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-41
9 Application Commands API 150-199 API 167 TWR P Time Data Write In Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S Note: Operand D occupies 7 continuous devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (5 STEPS) TWR Continuous TWRP Pulse 32-bit command - - - - Flag: M1016, M1017, M1076 Please refer the footnote of API 166 TRD command. Command Explanation : The device stored the new setting time of perpetual calender A perpetual calender clock is built in the DVP-EH/EP series PLC. This command can be used to write the correct current time in the built-in perpetual calender clock when adjusting the built in perpetual calender. When executing this command, new setting time will be written in the internal perpetual calender clock immediately. Therefore, please notice that the written-in new setting time if match the current time then when executing this command. 1 If the time data in exceeds the range, it will result in operation error. At this time, the command won t be executed and M1067=On, M1068=On, records error code 0E1A (HEX) in D1067. When = On, write the correct current time in the built-in perpetual calender clock. TWRP D20 New setting time General D device Meaning Content Special D device Meaning D20 Year (A.D.) 00~99 D1319 Year (A.D.) D21 Day (Mon.~Sun.) 1~7 D1318 Day (Mon.~Sun.) D22 Month 1~12 D1317 Month D23 Date 1~31 D1316 Date D24 Hours 0~23 D1315 Hours D25 Minutes 0~59 D1314 Minutes D26 Seconds 0~59 D1313 Seconds Real Time Clock 9-42 DVP-PLC Application Manual
9 Application Commands API 150-199 2 Set the current time of perpetual calender and adjust the time to 2002/03/23, Tuesday, 15:27:30 (please refer the following program example). The content of D0~D6 is the new setting time of perpetual calender. When X10= On, then can change the current time of perpetual calender clock to setting time. When X11=On every time, the perpetual calender clock will perform the ±30 seconds correction. Correction means that if the second hand of perpetual calender colock is located between 1~29, the second time will be automatically calculated as 0 (zreo) second and the minute time won t change. However, if the second hand of perpetual calender colock is located between 30~59, the second time will also be automatically calculated as 0 (zreo) second but the minute time will increase 1 minute. X10 MOV K02 D0 Year (2002) MOV K2 D1 MOV K3 D2 MOV K26 D3 MOV K15 D4 MOV K27 D5 MOV K30 D6 Day (Tuesday) Month(March) Date Hours Minutes Seconds X11 TWR D0 M1017 Write the setting time in the perpetual calender 30 seconds correction Footnote Using WPLSoftsoftware also can set the time of perpetual calender. The year (A.D.) display four digit number: 1. The year usually only dispaly two digit number (for example, year 1998 only display 98). But this can be changed to a four digit number by setting the following program during the first program scan. M1002 MOV K2000 D1018 The year dispaly four digit number 2. The year display will switch from two digit number to four digit number after the first scan program when PLC is running. K2,000 in the command is a fix value. 3. If the new setting time is desired to be written in under the four digit number mode, also only two digit number can be written in. The range for the year of two digit number is 0~99. Hence, the corresponding range for the year of four digit number is 1980~2079. DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-43
9 Application Commands API 150-199 For example: 80(a two digit number) is equal to 1980(a four digit number) 99(a two digit number) is equal to 1999(a four digit number) 00(a two digit number) is equal to 2000 (a four digit number) 79(a two digit number) is equal to 2079 (a four digit number) API Applicable models 169 D HOUR Hour Meter ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D Note: Operand S only can use 16-bit command when using F device. Operand D 1 occupies 2 continuous devices. Refer to each model specification for usage range. Command HOUR can be used for four times in program. 16-bit command (7 STEPS) HOUR Continuous - 32-bit command DHOUR Continuous Flag: None - - - Command Explanation : setting time for turning on and unit is hour. Its setting range is K1~K32,767. : current time suring counting and unit is hour. Its setting range is K1~K32,767. : output device. +1 saves current time that less than one hour and unit is second. Its setting range is K0~K3,599. If using input contact to be timer, output device will be On when attaining setting time (unit is hour). It can provide user a timer for managing machine operation or maintain. After output device is On, timer will keep on counting. When 16-bit timer counts up to max. value (32,767 hours and 3,599 seconds) of 1 2 16-bit, it will stop. If you want to recount, and +1 need to clear to 0. - +3 need to clear to 0. When 32-bit timer counts up to max. value (2,147,483,647 hours and 3,599 seconds) of 16-bit, it will stop. If you want to recount, - +3 need to clear to 0. For 16-bit command: When =On, Y10 will turns On and start to count time. When the time reaches 100 hours, Y0 will turns On and D0 will record the current time (unit is hour, but if D0 is less than one hour, unit will be second and its range is 0~3599). Y10 Y10 HOUR K100 D0 Y0 For 32-bit command: When =On, Y10 will turns On and start to count time. When the time reaches 40000 hours, Y0 will turns On. D0 and D1 will record the current time (unit is hour). If current time is less than one hour, D2 will record the current time (unit: second). 9-44 DVP-PLC Application Manual
9 Application Commands API 150-199 Y10 Y10 DHOUR K40000 D0 Y0 API 170 D GRY P BIN GRAY CODE Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D Note: Operands S and D only can use 16-bit command when using F device. Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (5 STEPS) GRY Continuous Pulse GRYP 32-bit command (9 STEPS) DGRY Continuous DGRYP Pulse Flag: None Command Explanation : Source device : Device which store Gray code The BIN value in the specified device by is converted to the GRAY CODE equivalent and the converted result is stored in the area specified by. The range of that can be converted to the GRAY CODE is shown as follows: 16-bit command :0~32,767 32-bit command :0~2,147,483,647 If the BIN value is outside the range shown above, it is determined as Operation Error. At this time, the command won t be executed and M1067=On, M1068=On, records error code 0E1A (HEX) in D1067. When =On, constant K 6513 is converted to the GRAY CODE and stored in the K4Y20. GRY K6513 K4Y20 K6513=H1971 b15 b0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 Y37 Y20 GRAY6513 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 K4Y20 DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-45
9 Application Commands API 150-199 API 171 D GBIN P GRAY CODE BIN Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D Note: Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (5 STEPS) GBIN Continuous Pulse GBINP 32-bit command (9 STEPS) DGBIN Continuous DGBINP Pulse Flag: None Command Explanation : Source device which store GRAY CODE : Device which store converted BIN value The GRAY CODE value in the specified device by is converted to the BIN value equivalent and the converted result is stored in the area specified by. This command can be used to read the value from an absolute position type encoder (it is generally a gray code encoder) which is connected to PLC inputs. Convert the value to the BIN value and store it in the specified register. scan time plus input response time is equal to the output delay time specified by. If the source is set to inputs ~X17, it can speed up the input response time by using REFF command (API151) or D1020 (adjust input response time). The range of that can be converted to the GRAY CODE is shown as follows: 16-bit command :0~32,767 32-bit command :0~2,147,483,647 If the GRAY CODE value is outside the range shown above, it is determined as Operation Error. When X20=On, the GRAY CODE value in the absolute position type encoder connected to ~X17 inputs is converted to BIN value and stored in D10. X20 GBIN K4 D10 GRAY6513 X17 K4 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 b15 b0 H1971=K6513 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 9-46 DVP-PLC Application Manual
9 Application Commands API 150-199 API 180 MAND P Matrix AND Applicable models ES EP EH - - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D n Note: specific range of operand n is 1~256. For EP series, when operands S 1, S 2 and D designate KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS, n can only be 4. Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (9 STEPS) MAND Continuous MANDP Pulse 32-bit command (17 STEPS) - - - - Flag: None Command Explanation : matrix source device 1. : matrix source device 2. : Area where calculated result is stored : matrix length Do matix AND operation to matix source device 1 and 2 by length of and save the result in. The operation rule of matix AND is: bit is 1 when 2 bits are all 1 otherwise it is 0. When =On, do MAND and matrix AND operation to 3 rows (D0-D2) of 16-bit register and 3 rows (D10-D12) of 16-bit register. Then save the result in 3 rows (D20-D22) of 16-bit register. MAND D0 D10 D20 K3 Before Execution b15 b0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 MAND 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 Footnote After Execution 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Explanation for matrix command: 1. A matix is made up of 1 and above continuous 16-bit registers. The register number that made up matrix is called matrix length n. There are 16 X n bits (dots) for a matix and a bit (dot) once for a oprand unit. 2. 16 X n bits (serial number b 0 b 16n-1 ) will be regarded as a set of a serial single point for matrix command. Thus, operate with a specific point in the set not value. 3. The matrix command is convenient and important application command for dealing with single point to multi-points or multi-point to multi-point, such as move, copy, compare, search, etc. DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-47
9 Application Commands API 150-199 4. It usually needs a 16-bit register to designate one point of 16 X n points during marix operation. This regsiter calls Pr (pointer). The setting range is 0 16 n-1 and correspond to b 0 b 16n-1 in matrix individually. 5. There are actions: shift left, shift right or rotate during operation. Large number is defined to left and small number is defined to right as shown in the following. Left b15 D0 width is 16-bit 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 Right b0 D1 D2 b31 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 b47 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 b16 b32 Dn-1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 b16n-1 6. Fixed width of matrix is 16-bit. 7. Pr: matrix pointer. If Pr is 15, it means designated point is b15. 8. Matrix length is n and n is 1-256. : The matrix that is made up of D0 and n=3, D0=HAAAA, D1=H5555, D2=HAAFF C 15 C 14 C 13 C 12 C 11 C 10 C 9 C 8 C 7 C 6 C 5 C 4 C 3 C 2 C 1 C 0 R 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 D0 R 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 D1 R 2 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 D2 : The matrix that is made up of K2 and n=3, K2=H37, K2X10=H68, K2X20=H45 C 15 C 14 C 13 C 12 C 11 C 10 C 9 C 8 C 7 C 6 C 5 C 4 C 3 C 2 C 1 C 0 R 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 X 0 ~X 7 R 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 X 10 ~X 17 R 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 X 20 ~X 27 It needs to fill 0 to R0(C 15 -C 8 ), R1(C 15 -C 8 ), R2(C 15 -C 8 ) once the value is empty. 9-48 DVP-PLC Application Manual
9 Application Commands API 150-199 API 181 MOR P Matrix OR Applicable models ES EP EH - - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D n Note: usage range of operand n is 1~256. For EP series, when operands S 1, S 2 and D designate KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS, n can only be 4. Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (9 STEPS) MOR Continuous MORP Pulse 32-bit command (17 STEPS) - - - - Flag: None Command Explanation : matrix source device 1. : matrix source device 2. : Area where calculated result is stored : matrix length Do matix OR operation to matix source device 1 and 2 by length of and save the result in. The operation rule of matrix OR is: bit is 1 when one of 2 bits is 1 and only 2 bits are 0 bit will be 0. When =On, do MOR and matrix OR operation to 3 rows (D0-D2) of 16-bit register and 3 rows (D10-D12) of 16-bit register. Then save the result in 3 rows (D20-D22) of 16-bit register. MOR D0 D10 D20 K3 Before Execution b15 b0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MOR 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 After Execution 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-49
9 Application Commands API 150-199 API 182 MXOR P Matrix XOR Applicable models ES EP EH - - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D n Note: usage range of operand n is 1~256. For EP series, when operands S 1, S 2 and D designate KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS, n can only be 4. Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (9 STEPS) MXOR Continuous MXORP Pulse 32-bit command (17 STEPS) - - - - Flag: None Command Explanation : matrix source device 1. : matrix source device 2. : Area where calculated result is stored : matrix length Do matix XOR operation to matix source device 1 and 2 by length of and save the result in. The operation rule of matrix XOR is: bit is 1 when 2 bits are different otherwise it is 0. When =On, do MXOR and matrix XOR operation to 3 rows (D0-D2) of 16-bit register and 3 rows (D10-D12) of 16-bit register. Then save the result in 3 rows (D20-D22) of 16-bit register. MXOR D0 D10 D20 K3 Before Execution b15 b0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 MXOR 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 After Execution 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 9-50 DVP-PLC Application Manual
9 Application Commands API 150-199 API 183 MXNR P Matrix XNR Applicable models ES EP EH - - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D n Note: usage range of operand n is 1~256. For EP series, when operands S 1, S 2 and D designate KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS, n can only be 4. Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (9 STEPS) MXNR Continuous MXNRP Pulse 32-bit command (17 STEPS) - - - - Flag: None Command Explanation : matrix source device 1. : matrix source device 2. : Area where calculated result is stored : matrix length Do matix XNR operation to matix source device 1 and 2 by length of and save the result in. The operation rule of matrix XNR is: bit is 1 when 2 bits are the same otherwise it is 0. When =On, do MXNR and matrix XNR operation to 3 rows (D0-D2) of 16-bit register and 3 rows (D10-D12) of 16-bit register. Then save the result in 3 rows (D20-D22) of 16-bit register. MXNR D0 D10 D20 K3 Before Execution b15 b0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 MXNR 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 After Execution 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-51
9 Application Commands API 150-199 API 184 MINV P Matrix Inverse Applicable models ES EP EH - - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F 16-bit command (7 STEPS) S Continuous MINV MINVP D n Note: usage range of operand n is 1~256. For EP series, when operands S 1, S 2 and D designate KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS, n can only be 4. Refer to each model specification for usage range. Pulse 32-bit command (13 STEPS) - - - - Flag: None Command Explanation : Matrix source device : result : matrix length Do matix inverse operation to matix source device 1 by length of and save the result in. When =On, do MINV operation to 3 rows (D0-D2) of 16-bit register and 3 rows (D10-D12) of 16-bit register. Then save the result in 3 rows (D20-D22) of 16-bit register. MINV D0 D20 K3 Before Execution b15 b0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 MINV After Execution 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 API 185 MCMP P Matrix Compare Applicable models ES EP EH - - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 D n Note: usage range of operand n is 1~256. For EP series, when operands S 1, S 2 and D designate KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS, n can only be 4. Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (9 STEPS) MCMP Continuous MCMPP Pulse 32-bit command (17 STEPS) - - - - Flag: Please refer to explanation for M1088-M1092. 9-52 DVP-PLC Application Manual
9 Application Commands API 150-199 Command Explanation : matrix source device 1. : matrix source device 2. : Area where calculated result is stored : pointer Pr, save target address. For each comparison, it will compare each bit of with from address Pr. To find the address of different value and save the address in to complete this comparison. You can find the result of comparison from comparison flag M1088. If the same, M1088=1 and M1088=0 for difference. Once comparsion attains, it will stop comparing immediately and set bit search flag M1091=1. When comparison attains the last bit, matrix search end flag M1089 will be On and comparison attained number is saved in. For next scan period, it will start comparing from the first bit and set matrix search start flag M1090=1. When value exceeds the usage range, point error flag M1092 =1. It usually needs a 16-bit register to designate one of 16n points in matrix to operate. This register is called pointer, Pr. This is designated by user and the range is 0-16n-1 that correspond to bit b 0 b 16n-1 individually. You should avoid to change Pr in operation to affect correct comparison search. If Pr value exceeds this range, matrix pointer error flag M1092 will be 1 and this command won t be executed. Matrix search end flag M1089 and set bit search flag M1091 will be 1 at the same time. When is from Off On, matrix search start falg M1090=0 thus it will start comparing to find the different bit from the bit that present value +1. (M1088=0 means difference) When present value of pointer D20=2, it can get following four results (,,, ) when is executed from Off On for four times. D20=5, matrix bit search flag M1091=1, matrix search end flag M1089=0. D20=45, matrix bit search flag M1091=1, matrix search end flag M1089=0. D20=47, matrix bit search flag M1091=0, matrix search end flag M1089=1. D20=1, matrix bit search flag M1091=1, matrix search end flag M1089=0. MCMPP D0 D10 K3 D20 b0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 b47 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 b47 MCMP b0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 D20 pointer DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-53
9 Application Commands API 150-199 Footnote Explanation for flag signal M1088: matrix comparison flag, if the result of comparison is the same, M1088=1, otherwise M1088=0. M1089: matrix search end flag, when comparing to the last bit, M1089=1. M1090: matrix search start flag, start comparing from the first bit, M1090=1. M1091: matrix bit search flag, it will stop comparing once comparison attained, M1091=1. M1092: matrix pointer error flag, pointer Pr exceeds that range, M1092=1. API 186 MBRD P Matrix Bit Read Applicable models ES EP EH - - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D n Note: usage range of operand n is 1~256. For EP series, when operands S 1, S 2 and D designate KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS, n can only be 4. Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (5 STEPS) MBRD Continuous MBRDP Pulse 32-bit command (9 STEPS) - - - - Flag: Please refer to explanation for M1089-M1095 Command Explanation : matrix source device. : matrix length : pointer Pr, save target address. When executing command, it will start to see if M1094 (matrix pointer clear flag) is On. If it is On, pointer will be cleared to 0 and read from the 0 bit and read On/Off state of each bit to M1095 (matrix rotate/shift/output/carry). It will see if M1093 9-54 (matrix pointer increase flag) is On after reading a bit. And increase 1 to if it is On. When reading to the last bit, M1089 (matrix search end flag) =On, pointer records the number of read bit and then end executing this command. Pr (pointer) is designated by user and the range is 0-16n-1 that correspond to bit b0 b16n-1 individually. If Pr value exceeds this range, matrix pointer error flag M1092 will be 1 and this command won t be executed. When is from Off On, pointer clear flag M1094=On, matrix pointer increase flag M1093=1, and increase 1 to pointer Pr after reading a bit. When present value of pointer D20=45, it can get following three results (,, ) when is executed from Off On for three times. D20=46, matrix rotate/shift/output carry flag M1095=0, matrix search end flag M1089=0. D20=47, matrix rotate/shift/output carry flag M1095=1, matrix search end flag M1089=0. D20=47, matrix rotate/shift/output carry flag M1095=1, matrix search end flag DVP-PLC Application Manual
9 Application Commands API 150-199 M1089=1. MBRD D0 D10 K3 D20 Footnote b0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 b47 pointer 45 D20 Explanation for flag signal M1089: matrix search end flag, when comparing to the last bit, M1089=1. M1092: matrix pointer error flag, pointer Pr exceeds that range, M1092=1. M1093: matrix pointer increase flag, add 1 to present pointer. M1094: matrix pointer clear flag, clear present pointer to 0. M1095: matrix rotate/shift/output carry flag. API 187 MBWR P Matrix Bit Write Applicable models ES EP EH - - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D n Note: usage range of operand n is 1~256. For EP series, when operands S 1, S 2 and D designate KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS, n can only be 4. Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (5 STEPS) MBWR Continuous MBWRP Pulse 32-bit command (9 STEPS) - - - - Flag: Please refer to explanation for M1089-M1096 Command Explanation : matrix source device. : matrix length : pointer Pr, save target address. When executing command, it will start to see if M1094 (matrix pointer clear flag) is On. If it is On, pointer will be cleared to 0 and write M1096 (matrix shift/input complement flag) in the 0 bit of. It will see if M1093 (matrix pointer increase flag) is On after writing a bit. And increase 1 to if it is On. When writing to the last bit, M1089 (matrix search end flag) =On, pointer records the number of read bit and then end executing this command. If exceeds range, M1092=1. Pr (pointer) is designated by user and the range is 0-16n-1 that correspond to bit b0 b16n-1 individually. If Pr value exceeds this range, matrix pointer error flag M1092 will be 1 and this command won t be executed. DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-55
9 Application Commands API 150-199 When is from Off On, pointer clear flag M1094=On, matrix pointer increase flag M1093=1, and increase 1 to pointer Pr after writing a bit. When present pointer is D20=45, M1094 (matrix shift/input complement flag) =1. When is executed once from Off On, it can get following result: MBWRP D0 K3 D20 Before Execution After Execution b0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 b47 M1096 1 (Matrix shift/input complement flag) 45 D20 pointer 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 b47 45 D20 pointer Footnote Explanation for flag signal M1089: matrix search end flag, when comparing to the last bit, M1089=1. M1092: matrix pointer error flag, pointer Pr exceeds that range, M1092=1. M1093: matrix pointer increase flag, add 1 to present pointer. M1094: matrix pointer clear flag, clear present pointer to 0. M1096: matrix shift/input complement flag API Applicable models MBS Matrix Bit Shift ES EP EH 188 P - - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D n Note: usage range of operand n is 1~256. For EP series, when operands S 1, S 2 and D designate KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS, n can only be 4. Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (5 STEPS) MBS Continuous MBSP Pulse 32-bit command (9 STEPS) - - - - Flag: Please refer to explanation for M1095-M1097 Command Explanation : matrix source device. : matrix length : result. 9-56 DVP-PLC Application Manual
9 Application Commands API 150-199 This command is used to shift to left or right by matrix length. M1097=0 moves to left and M1097=1 moves to right. It needs to use the state of M1096 (complement flag) to fill the empty bit (shift to left is b0 and shift to right is b16n-1) due to shiftment for each bit. If there is one more bit due to shiftment (shift to left is b16n-1 and shift to right is b0), it needs to send the state to M1095 (carry flag) and save the result in 1. The most use of this command is pulse command (MBSP). When =On, M1097=Off means shift matrix to left. Setting complement flag M1096=0, shift 16-bit registers D0-D2 to left and save the result in 16-bit register D20-D22 and carry flag M1095 will be 1. RST M1097 MBSP D0 D20 K3 Before Execution b15 b0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 M1096 M1095 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 MBS M1097=0 After shifting to left M1095 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 When X1=On, M1097=On to shift matrix to right. Setting complement flag M1096=1, shift 16-bit registers D0-D2 to right and save the result to 16-bit registers D20-D22 and carry flag M1095 will be 0. X1 M1097 MBSP D0 D20 K3 Before Execution b15 b0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 M1096 M1095 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 MBS M1097=0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 M1095 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-57
9 Application Commands API 150-199 Footnote Explanation for flag signal M1095: matrix rotate/shift/output carry flag M1096: matrix shift/input complement flag M1097: matrix rotate/shift direction flag API Applicable models MBR Matrix Bit Rotate ES EP EH 189 P - - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D n Note: usage range of operand n is 1~256. For EP series, when operands S 1, S 2 and D designate KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS, n can only be 4. Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (5 STEPS) MBR Continuous MBRP Pulse 32-bit command (9 STEPS) - - - - Flag: Please refer to explanation for M1095, M1097 Command Explanation : matrix source device. : matrix length : result. This command is used to rotate to right or left by matrix length. M1097=0 moves to left and M1097=1 moves to right. The empty bit (rotate to left is b0 and shift to right is b16n-1) due to rotation will be filled by the bit (rotate to left is b16n-1 and 1 shift to right is b0) that rotated out and save the result in. The bit that is rotated out is not only used to fill the empty bit but also send its state to carry flag M1095. The most use of this command is pulse command (MBRP). When =On, M1097=Off means rotate matrix to left. To rotate 16-bit registers D0-D2 to left and save the result in 16-bit register D20-D22. The carry flag M1095 will be 1. RST M1097 MBRP D0 D20 K3 Before Execution M1097=0 After rotating to left M1095 M1095 1 b15 b0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 MBR 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 9-58 DVP-PLC Application Manual
9 Application Commands API 150-199 2 When X1=On, M1097=On to rotate matrix to right. To rotate 16-bit registers D0-D2 to right and save the result to 16-bit registers D20-D22. The carry flag M1095 will be 0. X1 M1097 MBRP D0 D20 K3 Before Execution b15 b0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 MBR M1095 M1097=0 After rotating to right 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 M1095 Footnote Explanation for flag signal M1095: matrix rotate/shift/output carry flag M1097: matrix rotate/shift direction flag API 190 MBC P Matrix Bit State Count Applicable models ES EP EH - - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S D n Note: usage range of operand n is K1~K256. For EP series, when operands S 1, S 2 and D designate KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS, n can only be 4. Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (7 STEPS) Continuous MBC MBCP Pulse 32-bit command (13 STEPS) - - - - Flag: Please refer to explanation for M1098, M1099 Command Explanation : Matrix source device : result : matrix length To count number of bit 1 or bit 0 by matrix length and number in. When M1098=1, count the number of bit 1. And count the number of bit 0 when M1098=0. If counting result is 0, M1099=1. When X10=On, it counts bit 1 number of D0-D2 and save the total number in D10. When M1098=0, it counts bit 0 number of D0-D2 and save the total number in D10. X10 MBC D0 K3 D10 DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-59
9 Application Commands API 150-199 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 12 M1098=0 Footnote 36 M1098=1 Explanation for matrix command: M1098: matrix count bit 1 or bit 0 flag M1099: it is On when counted result is 0. API 196 HST P High Speed Counter Applicable models ES EP EH - - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S Note: usage range of operand S is K0 (H0), K1(H1). 16-bit command (9 STEPS) HST Continuous HSTP Pulse 32-bit command (17 STEPS) - - - - Flag: M1015 high speed connected timer action Command Explanation : the ondition to stop high speed timer start When =1, start high speed timer and set M1015=On, high speed timer starts and records present value in D1015. The min. unit of D1015 is 100us. The range for D1015 to count is K0-K32767. When counting up to K32767, the next count will be 0. When =0, stop high speed timer and set M1015=Off, D1015 will stop counting immediately. When is not 1 or 0, command HSTMR won t act. When X10=On, M1015=On. It will start high speed timer and record present value in D1015. When X10=Off, M1015=Off. It will stop high speed timer. X10 HST K1 X10 HST K0 9-60 DVP-PLC Application Manual
9 Application Commands API 150-199 Footnote Explanation for flag signal M1015: high speed timer start flag D1015: high speed timer This command doesn t support for EH models. Following is the explanation for using special M and special D directly. 1. It is only valid when PLC RUN. 2. When M1015=On, only start high speed timer D1015 as PLC executes END command of that scan period. The min. unit of D1015 is 100us. 3. The range of D1015 is K0-K32767. When counting up to K32767, the next count will be 0. 4. When M1015=Off, D1015 will stop counting in command END or HST. This command doesn t support for EP models. Following is the explanation for using special M and special D directly. 1. It is only valid when PLC RUN. 2. When D1015=On, start high speed timer D1015 immediately. The min. unit of D1015 is 100us. 3. The range of D1015 is K0-K32767. When counting up to K32767, the next count will be 0. 4. When M1015=Off, D1015 will stop counting immediately. DVP-PLC Application Manual 9-61
10 Application Commands API 215-246 API 215~ 217 D LD# The Contact Type Logic Operation LD# Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 Note: #: &,, ^ Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (5 STEPS) LD# Continuous - 32-bit command (9 STEPS) DLD# Continuous - Flag: None - - Command Explanation : Data source device 1 : Data source device 2 Compare the contents of and. To take LD& as an example, if the comparison result is not 0, the contact is in continuity, and if it is 0, the contact is in discontinuity. Command LD# could connect directly with the BUS. API No. 16 -bit command 32 -bit command Continuity condition Discontinuity condition 215 LD& DLD& & 0 & =0 216 LD DLD 0 =0 217 LD^ DLD^ ^ 0 ^ =0 & : Logic AND operation : Logic OR operation ^ : Logic XOR operation If the 32-bit length counter (C200~) is put into this command for comparison, be sure to use the 32-bit command (DLD#). If the 16-bit command (LD#) is utilized, CPU will determine it as Error, and the red ERROR indicator on the MPU panel will be blinking. When the result that using the LD& (Logic AND operation) command to compare the content of C0 and C10 is not equal to 0, Y10=ON. When the result that using the LD (Logic OR operation) command to compare the content of D200 and D300 is not equal to 0 and X1=ON, Y10=ON and retain. When the result that using the LD^ (Logic XOR operation) command to compare the content of C201 and C200 is not equal to 0 or M3=ON, M50=ON. LD & C0 C10 Y10 X1 LD I D200 D300 SET Y011 M3 DLD^ C201 C200 M50 DVP-PLC Application Manual 10-1
10 Application Commands API 215-246 API 218~ 220 D AND# The Series Connection Contact Type Logic Operation AND# Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 Note: #: &,, ^ Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (5 STEPS) AND# Continuous - - 32-bit command (9 STEPS) DAND# Continuous - - Flag: None Command Explanation : Data source device 1. : Data source device 2. Compare the contents of and of. To take AND& as an example, if the comparison result is not 0, the contact is in continuity, and if it is 0, the contact is in discontinuity. The AND# command is used to connect to contact in series. API No. 16 -bit command 32 -bit command Continuity condition Discontinuity condition 218 AND& DAND& & 0 & =0 219 AND DAND 0 =0 220 AND^ DAND^ ^ 0 ^ =0 & : Logic AND operation : Logic OR operation ^ : Logic XOR operation If the 32-bit length counter (C200~) is put into this command for comparison, be sure to use the 32-bit command (DAND#). Or if the 16-bit command (AND#) is utilized, CPU will determine it as Error, and the red ERROR indicator on the MPU panel will be blinking. When =ON, using the AND& (Logic AND operation) command to compare the content of C0 and C10. If the result is not equal to 0, Y10=ON. When X1=OFF, using the AND (Logic OR operation) command to compare the content of D10 and D0. If the result is not equal to 0, Y11=ON and retain. When X2=ON, using the AND^ (Logic XOR operation) command to compare the content of 32-bit registers D200(D201) and D100(D101). If the result is not equal to 0 or M3=ON,M50=ON. 10-2 DVP-PLC Application Manual
10 Application Commands API 215-246 X1 X2 M3 AND & C0 C10 Y10 AND I D10 D0 SET DAND^ D200 D100 M50 Y11 API 221~ 223 D OR# The Parallel Connection Contact Type Logic Operation OR# Applicable models ES EP EH - Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 Note: #: &,, ^ Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (5 STEPS) OR# Continuous - 32-bit command (9 STEPS) DOR# Continuous - Flag: None - - Command Explanation : Data source device 1 : Data source device 2 Compare the contents of and of. Take OR& as an example, if the comparison result is not 0, the contact is in continuity, and if it is 0, he contact is in discontinuity. Command OR# is used to connect to contact in parallel. 16 -bit 32 -bit Continuity Discontinuity API No. command command condition condition 221 OR& DOR& & 0 & =0 222 OR DOR 0 =0 223 OR^ DOR^ ^ 0 ^ =0 & : Logic AND operation : Logic OR operation ^ : Logic XOR operation If the 32-bit length counter (C200~) is put into this command for comparison, be sure to use the 32-bit command (DOR#). Or if the 16-bit command (OR#) is utilized, CPU will determine it as Error, and the red ERROR indicator on the MPU panel will be blinking. DVP-PLC Application Manual 10-3
10 Application Commands API 215-246 When X1=ON, using the OR& (Logic AND operation) command to compare the content of C0 and C10. If the result is not equal to 0, Y0=ON. If both X2 and M30 are ON, or when using the OR (Logic OR operation) command to compare the content of D10 and D20 and the result is not equal to 0, or when using the OR^ (Logic XOR operation) command to compare the content of D100 and D200 and the result is not equal to 0, M60=ON. X1 Y0 OR & C0 C10 X2 M30 M60 DOR I D10 D20 DOR ^ D100 D200 API 224~ 230 D LD* The Contact Type Comparison LD* Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 Note: *: =, >, <, <>,, Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (5 STEPS) LD* Continuous - 32-bit command (9 STEPS) DLD* Continuous - Flag: None - - Command Explanation : Data source device 1 : Data source device 2 Compare the contents of and of. To take API 224 LD= as an example, if the comparison result is =, the contact is in continuity, and if it is, the contact is in discontinuity. Command LD*can connect to BUS directly. API No. 16 -bit command 32 -bit command Continuity condition Discontinuity condition 224 LD= DLD= = 225 LD> DLD> > 226 LD< DLD< < 228 LD<> DLD<> = 229 LD<= DLD<= > 230 LD>= DLD>= < When the left most bit, MSB (the 16-bit command: b15, the 32-bit command: b31), from and comparison. is 1, this comparison value will be viewed as a negative value for 10-4 DVP-PLC Application Manual
10 Application Commands API 215-246 If the 32-bit length counter (C200~) is put into this command for comparison, be sure to use the 32-bit command (DLD*). If the 16-bit command (LD*) is utilized, CPU will determine it as Error, and the red ERROR indicator on the MPU panel will be blinking. If the content of counter C10 is equal to K200, Y10=ON. When the content of D200 is smaller or equal to K 30, and that X1=ON, Y11=ON and retain. If the content of C200 is smaller than K678,493 or when M3=ON, M50=ON. LD= K200 C10 Y10 LD> D200 K-30 X1 SET Y11 DLD> K678493 C200 M50 M3 API 232~ 238 D AND* The Series Connection Contact Type Comparison AND* Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 Note: *: =, >, <, <>,, Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (5 STEPS) AND* Continuous - 32-bit command (9 STEPS) DAND* Continuous - Flag: None - - Command Explanation : Data source device 1 : Data source device 2 Compare the contents of and of. To take API 232 AND= as an example, if the comparison result is =, the contact is in continuity, and if it is, the contact is in discontinuity. Command AND*is the comparison command that connect to contact in series. API No. 16 -bit command 32 -bit command Continuity condition Discontinuity condition 232 AND= DAND= = 233 AND> DAND> > 234 AND< DAND< < 236 AND<> DAND<> = 237 AND<= DAND<= > 238 AND>= DAND>= < DVP-PLC Application Manual 10-5
10 Application Commands API 215-246 When the left most bit, MSB (the 16-bit command: b15, the 32-bit command: b31), from and is 1, this comparison value will be viewed as a negative value for comparison. If the 32-bit length counter (C200~C254) is put into this command for comparison, be sure to use the 32-bit command (DAND*). Or if the 16-bit command (AND*) is utilized, CPU will determine it as Error, and the red ERROR indicator on the MPU panel will be blinking. If =ON and that the current value of counter C10 equals K200, Y10=ON. If X1=OFF and that the content of register D0 not equal to K 10, Y11=ON and retain. If X2=ON and that the contents of the 32-bit registers D11 and D0 are smaller than K678,493, M50=ON. AND= K200 C10 Y10 X1 AND<> K-10 D0 SET Y11 X2 M3 DAND> K678493 D10 M50 API 240~ 246 D OR* The Parallel Connection Contact Type Comparison OR* Applicable models ES EP EH Bit devices Word devices X Y M S K H KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D E F S 1 S 2 Note: *: =, >, <, <>,, Refer to each model specification for usage range. 16-bit command (5 STEPS) OR* Continuous - 32-bit command (9 STEPS) DOR* Continuous - Flag: None - - Command Explanation : Data source device 1. : Data source device 2. Compare the contents of and of. Take API 240 (OR=) as an example, if the comparison result is =, the contact is in continuity, and if it is, the contact is in discontinuity. Command OR*is the comparison command that connect to contact in parallel. 10-6 DVP-PLC Application Manual
10 Application Commands API 215-246 API No. 16 -bit command 32 -bit command Continuity condition Discontinuity condition 240 OR= DOR= = 241 OR> DOR> > 242 OR< DOR< < 244 OR<> DOR<> = 245 OR<= DOR<= S1 S1 > 246 OR>= DOR>= S1 S1 < When the left most bit, MSB (the 16-bit command: b15, the 32-bit command: b31), from and is 1, this comparison value will be viewed as a negative value for comparison. If the 32-bit length counter (C200~C254) is put into this command for comparison, be sure to use the 32-bit command (DOR*). Or if the 16-bit command (OR*) is utilized, CPU will determine it as Error, and the red ERROR indicator on the MPU panel will be blinking. If X1=ON, or that the current value of counter C10 is equal to K200, Y0=ON. If both X2 and M30 are ON, or if the contents of the 32-bit registers D101 and D100 are greater or equal to K100,000, M60=ON. X1 Y0 OR= K200 C10 X2 M30 M60 DOR> D100 K100000 = DVP-PLC Application Manual 10-7